and this is faire and flat land on the top with great goodly fields is by the Indians called Ballagate that is to say aboue the hill for Balla is aboue and Gate is a hill whereby the Portingals doe commonly cal the whole countrie Ballagate although the principall part and the land it selfe is called Decam and also Canara wherof the inhabitants are called Decanijns and Canaras as the Kings also in times past vsed to beare titles and call themselues Kings of Decam But returning to the diuision of the rest of the countries he deuided likewise the land of Ballagate or Decam into Prouinces giuing one part to Imademaluco by the Portingales called Madremaluco and an other part to Cotalmoluco and an other to Melique Verido All the said Captaines were strangers as Turkes Ruines and Corasones except Nisamalucode who was Sonne to a Gentleman of the Kings house and because the King had laine with the mother of Nisamaluco therefore hee boasted himselfe to be of the linage of the king of Decam all the other Captaines were slaues and seruants which the King had brought and placed in those roomes as putting great trust in them thinking that they would acknowledge it and bee thankfull vnto him for the same But it fell out otherwise as wee see it commonly doth and that good is requited with euill for these Captaines in time getting credite authoritie and power were in great estimation and as it were absolute Kings and Gouernours of their Prouinces for that the king neuer troubled himselfe therwith but layde all the charge vppon them whereby they beganne to bee puffed vp with pride and determined to vsurpe the Prouinces vnder him for them and their successors And because it grieued them to be in subiection to an other and at his commaundement they all met together and among them agréed to take their Lord and King prisoner and so euery one of them to be sole commanders of the coūtries they had in charge which they easily brought to effect for that they had all the meanes they would wish or desire as did honour them with the name of Xa which is to say a King whereby they had the names of Adelxa Nisamoxa and Contumixa and all the Kings continued so with the name of Xa which in Persia is a King and Ismael is a proper name whereby Xa Ismael and Xa Thamas are as much to say as King Ismael and King Thamas and of the Turkes and Rumes are called Suffy or Soffy which signifieth a great Captaine The Kings of Decam also haue a custome when they will honor a man or recompence their seruice done and rayse him to dignitie and honour They giue him the title of Nayque which signifieth a Captaine as Salua Nayque and Acem Nayque And whē they will giue a man an honourable title or salutation they call him Rau as Chitarau which is to say strong King and such like titles which among them is a great honour Also Adelham or Hidelcam is called Sabayo which signifieth Seigneur or Lord for the Iland of Goa had a Captaine or Gouernour that was Lord of the towne when the Portingales wanne it first called Sabayo as the Portingales Chronicles of their Indian conquests doe make mention whose house or Palace to this day in the Cittie of Goa is the inquisition house and a place which standeth betwéene the great Church and the same house is as yet called the Pallace of Sabayo The 28. Chapter Of the towne and Ilande of Goa chiefe Cittie of India THe Citie of Goa is the Metropolitan or chiefe Cittie of all the Orientall Indies where the Portingales haue their traffique where also the Viceroye the Arch bishop the Kings Councel and Chauncerie haue their residence and from thence are all places in the Orientall Indies gouerned and ruled There is likewise the staple for all Indian commodities whether all sorts of Marchants doe resort comming thether both to buy and sell as out of Arabia Armenia Persia Cambaia Bengala Pegu Sian Malacca Iaua Molucca China c. The Cittie and Iland of Goa lyeth vnder 15. degrees on the North side and is distant from the Equinoctiall by the way that the Portingales shippes do come thether from Mossambique 400. miles It is an Iland wholly compassed about with a riuer and is aboue thrée miles great it lyeth within the coast of the firme lande so that the Iland with the Sea coast of the firme land doe both reach as farre each as other into the Sea It is only seperated from the firme land by an arme of the Sea or of the ryuer that runneth in by the North side of the towne and so round about the Iland to the South side where it entereth againe into the Sea and is in forme almost like a halfe Moone The ryuer runneth euen vnto the Towne and is indifferent broade there are betwéene the firme land and the Iland certaine small Ilandes that are all inhabited by the naturall borne countrimen and on the other side of the town the ryuer is there so small that in Summer time by wading to the knées in water a man may passe it ouer on foote On the which side the Iland hath a wall with certaine Bulwarkes which y e Portingales of late yeares haue caused to be made to defend them from the firme land in time of warre as it often happeneth for it hath diuers times béene besieged by Dialcan or Hidalcam at the mouth and the entrie of the ryuer On the North side lyeth the land of Bardes which is high land vnder which land the Portingales doe Anker safely out of all danger and there they haue a place to lade and vnlade their wares This land of Bardes is also vnder the Portingall subiection and is full of Villages inhabited with people that are of the firme land lying aboue it called Canarijns who for the most part are Christians but obserue their owne manner of apparell which is to goe all naked their priuie members onely couered This land is full of Indian Palme trées whereon the Indian Nuts called Cocos doe grow as also all the other Ilands lying in the ryuer This land of Bardes is seperated from the firme land by a small riuer which is so little that it cannot almost be discerned from the firme land On the South side of the Iland of Goa wher the riuer runneth againe into the Sea there commeth euen out with the coast a land called Salsette which is also vnder the subiection of the Portingales and is inhabited and planted both with people and fruite like the land of Bardes and is likewise parted with a little ryuer from the firme land Betwéene this land of Salsette the Iland of Goa lie also some small Ilands all full of Indian Palme trées and by the mouth or issue of the ryuer lyeth an Iland which is called Goa Velha that is old Goa from whence there commeth no speciall thing neither is it much inhabited Those lands of Bardes
twelue Italian miles and from thence the coast runneth south wherewith you fall vppon the poynt de la Cora in the middle between the Island of Wolues and this point there is a great intercourse or creeke of water hauing very good harber for shippes to anker in it lyeth vnder six degrees on the south side of the line from thence you perceiue 2. Islands both called Islas de Lobos that is Islandes of Sea Wolues because of the great quantity that are thereabouts the first of these Islands lyeth north and south with the first poynt and is distant from the firme land three Spanish miles or 12. Italian miles the other Island lyeth 9. miles further forward and is not ful vnder seuen degrees southwest from the coast till you come to the hauen called Câ—sma and from this first Island you saile northeast southwest to Malabrigo which is the slender or bad defence where there is a hauen wherin their shippes may not enter but with faire weather and such specially as haue great occasion thereby to further their voyage Seuen miles and a halfe further you come to Tarrâ—eâ—sse that is the cliffe of Truxilio which is a verie bad hauen and hath no other harber or defence then onely good ankers and a mile and a halfe within the land lyeth the towne of Truxilio which is also one of the Spanish townes situate in the plaine countrie of Peru it is builded vppon the corner of a Riuer in the vallie of Chimo The countrey thereabouts is verie fruitfull abounding in wheat Mâ—lâ— cattell and water and the towne built in good proportion hauing about three hundred Spanish houses with broade streetes and a great market place rounde about the towne are many fayre gardens and euerie house is serued with water by channels comming out of the Riuer and runneth into all their gardens which are continually greene and full of blossomes wherfore it is saide this towne lyeth in a verie good place compassed about with faire and pleasant meddowes corne fieldes and Pastour groundes where the inhabitants feede their Cattell and likewise plant and sowe theyr Corne. There the Spaniards haue plaÌ„ted many kinds of spanish fruites as porâ—gaâ—nats oranges lemones citrons figs much of the countrie fruit in great aboundance and verie good besides this they haue many foules hens and capons whereby they are prouided of all things of flesh in great aboundance and fish out of the sea which is hard by them also in the riuer The Indians inhabiting about the towne are in subiection to the Spaniards and furnish the towne with all things that are necessarie at this Towne there are whole shippes laden with cotten linnen made by the Indians to sell in other places This towne was made and erected by Marquis Francisco Pizarto the first gouernour of Peru in the yeare 1533 From Truâ— by land vnto saint Michaeâ— another spanish towne and the first place where they inhabited in those countryes are about fiue and fortie spanish miles or an hundred and eightie Italian miles litle more or lesse for that comming from Saint Michaeâ—s to the vallie Motupâ— are fifteene miles and a halfe all sandie and bad way specially where men much cheefely trauell and being past those fifteene miles you enter into certaine vallies and though therabouts falleth certaine small riuers out of the hilles yet they reach not to the vallies but runne into the sands whereby they doo no good and to trauaile this way you must depart out of Saint Micaels in the enening and so go all night and earlie in the morning you come to certain places where you find water to drinke for by night the heate of the sunne doth not hurt some carrie bottles with water or wine and when you come vnto the vally Motupe you enter into the kings hieway very broad euen which I haue occasion to speake of the kings of Peru I will declare more at large This vallie is broade and fruitfull but the riuer that falleth from the mountaine stoppeth before it commeth vnto the sea but because the earth is verie moorish there groweth many trees the people draw their waterout of certaine pits which they dig within the earth their traffike is cotten wool and cloth made thereof three miles from Motupe lyeth the faire fresh vallie of Xaâ—anca which is also three miles great through the which there â—unneth a goodly riuer from whence they fetch water to moysten their grounds this vallie in time past was very populous and likewise the other in this vallie were many houses of great Lords that therein kept their stewards to commaund ouer the rest who were greatly honoured and feared by the common people from this vallie you goe to another called â—uqueme which likewise is great and full of bushes the ruines of the great houses that stood therin yet to bée séene do euidently shew that many people haue inhabited in that vallie a dayes iourney further there is yet another faire vallie called â—â—nto and between these two vallies there is nothing but sandy wayes and drie stony hils where you findâ— neither liuing creatures trees nor leaues but onely certaine birdes that flie ouer it and such as will passe that way must haue good guides lest they loose themselues in the sandie downes and by reason of the great heate of the sun and want of water should faint for thirst From Cinto you come to an other vallie called Coliche through the which there runneth a great riuer called by that name this vally likewise in times past was full of people but nowe for the most part by meanes of the warres they are almost consumed from whence you goe to Zana much like the â—ormer and somewhat further to Palcamayo of all the rest thereabouts the most fruitful and populous the people of this vallie before they were ouercome and subdued by the â—ings of Peru were verie mightie and much esteemed of by their neighbours they had great churches wherein they sacrificed but now al destroyed and ouerthrowne there were likewise many Indians graues Through this vallie there runneth a great riuer that watereth al their groundes and through it also passeth the kings high way and therein were many houses belonging to the king In this vallie they make much cotten work haue al kind of cattel as kine hogs goates and such like beasts and is verie temperate From this vallie you go to another called Cancama not inferiour for fruitfulnesse and pleasure to the other They haue likewise many sugar canes and very good fruit wherein there is a cloyster of Dominican Friers made by Dom di S. Themafe and three miles from thence in the vallie of Câ—â—â—o lieth Tâ—uxâ—lâ— as I said before which valâ—â—e keepeth the name of a Lorde called Câ—â—o who was a valiant Souldiour and liued long time 〈◊〉 warres The kings of Peru greatly esteemed that vallie wherein they builded many houses and gardens of pleasure and through it also passeth the kings high way
with the wales but returning again vnto the coast the hauen of â—xillo lyeth vnder seauen degrees â— and from thence you saile to the hauen of Goanape which lyeth full fiue miles from the towne of â—xâ—lo vnder eight degrees and â— and somewhat further southward lyeth the hauen 〈◊〉 or holie where the shippes put in by it there is a great riuer and a very good water all this coast is without hilles and as I saide before sandy and chalkie vallies This hauen of Porto Santa lyeth vnder nine degrees and further southward about foure miles distant lieth another hauen called Ferrol a very good and sure hauen but hath neyther fresh water nor wood to burne and about foure miles and a halfe further there lyeth a hauen called Casina where there is a Riuer of fresh water and much woodde to burne where the shippes doe ordinarilye refresh themselues it lyeth vnder tenne degrees From Casma the coast runneth south to the cliffes called Los Farollones di Guaura A little further lieth Guarmey wherein runneth a riuer and from thence you sayle the same course to the Barranca or Downes which is fifteene miles towardes the south and foure miles and one halfe further lieth the hauen of Guaura where the shippes may take in as much salt as they will for there is so much that all Spaine and Italie might be furnished with salt from thence and yet they woulde haue sufficient for the country three miles further lie the Cliffes or Farrollones From this poynt which â—utteth out of the land with the same northeast and southweast course you saile sixe miles further to the furthest cliffe that lyeth into the sea These Cliffes lie vnder eight degrées and one halfe from thence the coast turneth againe southeast till you come to the Island of Lyma in the middle way and somewhat more towards Lyma lieth a rocke which is called Salmarina and is vnder seuen or seuen degrées and a halfe This land maketh a barre of defence before Callao which is the hauen of the Towne of Kings or of Lyma and by this defence from the Island the hauen is very safe for the shippes to harbour in Callao lieth vnder twelue degrees and a halfe The way by land from Truxillo to Lima. THe towne of Truxillo lyeth distant from Lima sixtie spanish miles which is 48. duch miles or 240. Italian miles all the which way is sandie vnlesse it be when you passe certaine vallies Now when you set out of Truxillo you come first to the valie of Guâ—nape which is full fiue Spanish miles from thence that is 21. Italian miles which in times past was wel known because of the good drinke called Cica that was made ther no lesse then in Italy Mente Frascon and in Spaine S. Martin are esteemed for the good wines that are there to be solde and this vallie is inhabited and watered as the rest are it hath a verie good hauen where the shippes take in all theyr prouision from thence you come to a little valley where no riuer runneth through but it hath a small water where those of Peru and other trauailers vse to drinke and going further you come to the vallie of Santa which in time past was verie populous and had in it many braue souldiours and captaines for commanders which held stoutly against the Kings of Peru so that they were forced to ouercome them more by pollicie then force they were likewise much esteemed of by their kings that caused many houses pallaces to be built therin as being one of the greatest and biggest vallies in those countries and through it there runneth a verie strong and great riuer which is verie full and high when it is winter in the hilles wherein also were manie Spaniards drownde Nowe they haue a drift to set ouer their passengers therein in time past there dwelt many thousand people nowe there are not aboue 400. left They go apparrelled both men and women with certain maÌ„tles and shirts with bands or rolles about their heades all kindes of fruites both of that countrey and such as are brought out of Spaine do grow therein in great aboundance There likewise they take much fish the shippes that saile along the coast do there take in fresh water and other prouisions two daies iourney from thence lieth another vallie called Guambacâ—o for fruitfulnes other things like vnto the rest about a daies iourney and a halfe further lyeth the valley of Guarmey wherin are many beasts cowes hogs and horses from thence you go to Parmongo no lesse pleasant then the former in it are yet seene certaine faire castles built after theyr manner wherein vpon the walles are painted the Images of certaine beastes and birdes and it is to be wondered at howe they make the water runne out of the riuer so farre into the land whereby it moystneth all the countrey a mile and a halfe from the vallie lieth the riuer Guaman which in our speech signifieth the riuer of the fields and is by them called Barranca which vallie is like all the rest and when it raineth much in the hilles this riuer is verie dangerous A dayes iourney from thence lyeth the vallie of Guaura from the which you go to Lima the vallie wherin it lyeth is the greatest and broadest of all that are betweene it and Tumbez and as it is greatest so was it verie populous wherof at this time there are few left for when the towne began to be inhabited the inhabitants of the towne tooke the countrey and land from those that dwelt in the vallie who after that were likewise destroyed and cleane rooted out This towne next vnto Cusco is the greatest in all the countrey of Peru and the principall for that at this present the Viceroyes of Peru the Archbishop the Councell and the Chancerie wherein all processes are sued and the lawes of the whole countrie administred are resident therein whereby there is great traffike and concourse vnto Lyma because many people come thither out of the townes lying about it In this towne are faire houses some built with Towers and costly galleries the Market place is great and the streetes broade and entring into the market place from whence also you may goe into euerie place of the towne and to the fieldes and into most of the houses there runneth certain channels that conuay water a great commoditie and pleasure vnto the townesmen wherewith they may water all their gardens and orchards which are there verie faire and pleasant vpon the riuer likewise are many water milles made after the manner of our countrey wherewith they grinde theyr corne to conclude therein dwelleth manie rich inhabitants some worth 150000. duckets and from this towne oftentimes there saileth shippes that are worth in value at the least 800000. duckets and some a Million on the east side a little aboue the town lyeth a high hill whereon there standeth a Cruâ—â—fix on another side of the towne the townsmen haue certaine places
in all India and the principall enemies that the Portingalles haue and which trouble them continually But the better to know the situation of the countrey you must vnderstande that all the coast seuered from India is the low land lying 8. or 10. miles vpon the coast which is that whereof we speake and is called Cuncam and then there is a high or hilly Countrey which reacheth almost vnto the skies and stretcheth from the one ende vnto the other beginning at Daman or Cambaia to the Cape de Comoriin and the vttermost corner of India and all that followeth again on the other coast called Ghoramandel This high land on the top is very flatte and good to build vpon called Ballagatte and Decan and is inhabited and diuided among diuers Kings and gouernors The inhabitants and natural borne countrimen are commonly called Decaniins and Canaras as in the description of Goa and the territories thereof shal be particularly shewed with the shapes fashions and counterfeites of their bodies Churches houses trées Plantes and fruites c. The 11. Chapter Of the coast of India that is from Goa to the cape de Comoriin and the furthest corner of the lande which is called the coast of Malabar THe coast of Malabar beginneth from Cape de Ramos which lyeth frō Goa Southwardes ten myles and endeth at the Cape de Comoriin in time past called Corii which is 100. and 7. or 8. miles whereon lie the places hereafter following which are inhabited by the Portingals and kept with fortresses first from the said Cape de Ramos to the fortresse of Onor are tenne miles lying full vnder 14. degrées and is inhabited by the Portingalles There is great quantity of Pepper for that they are able euery yeare to lade a shippe with 7. or 8. thousand Quintalles of Pepper Portingal waight it is the best and fullest berries in all Malabar or India This land belongeth to a Quéene named Batycola which is a towne not farre from thence inwardes wherin she kéepeth her Court it is she that selleth the Pepper and deliuereth it vnto the Marchantes Factors that lie in Onor but they must alwaies deliuer their money sixe monthes before they receyue their Pepper otherwise they get it not then she deliuereth the Pepper which by one of the Factors is receyued and laid vp within the fortresse till the shippes of Portingall come thether to take in their lading of Pepper There is likewise much Ryce This fortresse is not much frequented but onely in the time of lading of their Pepper which within fewe yeares hath béene vsed to be laden there for before they vsed not to lade any in that place From Onor to the towne of Barselor are 15. miles and lyeth vnder 13. degrées it is also inhabited by Portingalles as Onor is there is great store of Ryce Pepper from Barselo◠to Mangalor are 9. miles and lyeth vnder twelue degrées and a halfe which also is a fortresse inhabited as the others are by Portingals and hath great store of Pepper and Ryce From Mangalor to Cananor are 15. myles which lyeth right vnder 11. degrées and a halfe This is the best fortresse that the Portingalles haue in all Malabar and there is much Pepper The Malabars without the fortresse haue a village with many houses therein built after their manner wherein there is a market holden euery day in the which all kindes of victuailes are to be had which is wonderfull altogether like the Hollanders markets There you find Hennes Egges Butter Hony Indian Oyle and Indian figges that are brought from Cananor which are very great and without exception the best in all India of the which sorts of victuailes with other such like they haue great quantities also very faire and long mastes for shippes such as better cannot be found in all Norway and that in so great numbers that they furnish all the countries rounde about them It is a very gréene and pleasant lande to beholde full of faire high trées and fruitfull of all thinges so is the whole coast from Malabar all along the shore Among these Malabars the white Mores do inhabite that beléeue in Mahomet and their greatest traffique is vnto the redde sea although they may not doe it neyther any other Indian without the Portingalles pasport otherwise the Portingals army which yearly saileth along the coasts to kéepe them cleare from sea rouers for the safetie of their marchants finding them or any other Indian or nation whatsoeuer at sea without a pasport woulde take them for a prize as oftentimes it happeneth that they bring shippes from Cambaia Malabar or from the I le of Sumatra and other places that traffique to the redde sea These Mores of Cananor kéepe friendshippe with the Portingalles because of the fortresse which holdeth them in subiection yet couertly are their deadly enemies and secretly contribute and pay great summes of money to the other Malabars to the ende that they shoulde mischiefe and trouble the Portingalles by all the meanes they can deuise whose forme and images do follow after those of Goa and Malabar From Cananor to Calecut are 8. miles which lyeth full vnder 11. degrées This towne of Calecut hath in times past béene the most famous Towne in all Malabar or India and it was the chiefe towne of Malabar where the Samoriin which is the Emperour holdeth his Court but because the Portingalles at their first comming and discouering of India were oftentimes deceyued by him they resorted to the King of Cochin who as then was subiect to the Samoriin being of small power But when the Portingals began to prosper in their enterprise and to get possession in the countrey and so became maisters of the sea Calecut beganne to decay and to lose both name and traffique and nowe at this time it is one of the townes of least account in all Malabar and Cochin to the contrarie their King being very rich and richer then the Samoriin so that now he careth noe for him by means of the fauour and help he findeth at the hands of the Portingalles From Calecut to Cranganor are tenne myles and lyeth vnder tenne degrées and a halfe there the Portingalles haue a Fortresse From Cranganor to Cochin are tenne miles and lyeth not full vnder tenne degrées The towne of Cochin is inhabited by Portingals and naturall borne Indians as Malabars and other Indians that are christened it is almost as great as Goa very populous and well built with faire houses Churches and cloysters and a fayre and most pleasant Riuer with a good channell and a hauen a little beyonde the towne towards the land runneth a small riuer or water where sometimes men may passe ouer dry footed on the further side whereof lyeth a place called Cochin Dacyma and it is aboue Cochin which is in the iurisdiction of the Malabars who as yet continue in their owne religion there the King kéepeth his Court It is very full and well built with houses after the Indian manner and
flesh and bloud are mixed together they make many round Balles of the same flesh bloud so mixed each Ball of an ounce waight by the Portingals called Papo which they carrie into all places There are also in that land many Cattes of Algallia or Ciâ—et Cattes and some Amber They haue also horses but smaller then the horses in Europe Géese Hennes Duckes and such like are there in great aboundaunce ryuer and sea Fish are likewise plentifull and all kind of necessaries whatsoeuer The countrie hath many mines of Golde and Siluer but the King letteth it not commonly be carried out of the countrie but kéepeth it in his house for treasure therefore they seeke and procure all things to bee brought into the land notwithstanding they haue great riches in their houses of Gold Siluer and other common Iewels they esteeme more of Siluer then of Golde because the Golde is of many values and prices and the Siluer is alwaies of one price It hath also many Pearles and Alioffar which come out of the Iland and Prouince of Aynao also much Quick-siluer Copper Iron Steele Blick Tin Leade Brimstone and other such like mettales and Amber besides all these riches and innumerable rents that the King of China hath it is said that he hath in euery chiefe shire or Prouince towne a great and vnknowne treasurie It is a common custome in that countrie to weare as we doe here course and common cloth and linnen as also Silke Satin and Brocado which is cloth of Golde and Siluer with faire workes and borders downe to their shooes which they commonly vse because of the great quantitie of Silke that is within the countrie for it is affirmed for a truth that only from the town of Canton there is yearely carried into India aboue thrée thousand Quintals of Silke which are sold by waight besides the Silkes that are yearely carried to the Ilands of Iapaâ— Lucon or Phillippinas and to the land of Siâ—n and other countries bordering about the same and yet there stayeth so much within the countrie that therewith might bee laden whole Fléetes of shippes and would not be missed there is also much Flax and Cotton and so good cheape that it is almost incredible the earthen Pots Cuppes and vessels that are made there are not to bee numbred which are yearely carried into India Portingall Noua Spaignia other waies but the finest sorte may not be carried out of the land vpon paine of death but serue onely for the Lords and Gouernours of the countrie which are so fine that Christall is not comparable vnto it These Pots and Cups are made inwards in the lande of a certaine earth that is verie hard which is beaten smal and then layed to stéepe in Cesterns of stone full of water made for the purpose and when it is well stéeped and often stirred as we do milke to make Butter of the finest thereof which driueth or swimmeth on the top they make the finest worke and vse the courser accordingly whereof some they paint and then they are dried and baked in Ouens The maner to make Earthen Pots and Cups called Porcelleyn-Cuppes by Scaliger is set downe in his Booke of Subtilties in this manner In the 92. Exercise The Cups and earthen Pots that are called Porceleynes whereof also the Earth hath her name are first beaten to small Poulder which they steepe in water and then forme their Pots Cuppes and vessels out of the same which done they burne them vnder the earth and hauing layen in the earth 100 yeares being then full baked and made they are digged foorth and soulde some say that not the Cuppes c. but the stuffe is buried although Iohn Huyghens opinion seemeth to be true and according to their maner saying that they are made of Earth as other Pots and Cannes are made in our countrie The land also aboundeth in Honie Suger and Waxe of all sorts of Spices rootes and plantes as also fruites and much more then in Spaine and other kindes of fruites also which are not knowne heere there are Oranges that are swéeter then Suger there is a kind of fruit called Lechyas which are like Plums but of another taste and are very good much estéemed whereof I haue eaten to conclude it hath of all things that man can wish or desire The rents and reuenewes of the King of China are so great that it is incredible for he hath onely in custome out of a riuer in the Prouince of Canton for Salt that is made there yearly a million and a halfe of Golde whereby men may estéeme the rest accordingly All the Townes in that Countrie are walled about with stone walles and haue Ditches of water round about them for their securitie they vse no fortresse nor Castles but onely vppon euery Gate of the Towne they haue strong Towers wherein they place their Ordinance for defence of y e towne They vse all kinde of armes as Caliuers Bowes Pikes of diuers sortes Rapiers like Falceons Cortlasses and Targets The souldiers when they goe to warre weare Coates downe to their knées lyned with Cotton so that the thrust of a Pike or a Rapier will not readily enter such as are souldiers are paide by the King which are knowen by wearing a red or a yellow Hat whereof there are so many that the number is not knowne they haue Captaines of 10. of 100 of 1000. 10000. 20000. c. Which Captaines may bee knowne by certaine tokens one from the other whereby they know how many men he hath vnder him Euery month they Muster and are paide with Siluer money for they haue no other Coyne and they are péeces of cut Siluer in which sort they pay receiue all their money for the which purpose they doe alwayes carrie about them a paire of Ballaunce with an instrument to cut the Siluer A souldier hath euery moneth the value of a Ryall and a halfe of Spanish money in siluer which is more in that countrie as the value and price of all things goeth there then foure Ducates or twelue Guilders with vs. For Religion and ceremonies they are Heathens without any sparke or point of Mahomets law or of any other sects In many places they pray to the Diuell onely because hee shoulde not hurt them When any man lieth on his death bed they set the picture of the Diuell before him with the Sunne in his left hand and a poinyard in the right hand which Diuell is painted with a very fierce looke and therfore they desire the patient or sicke man to looke well vpon him that hee may bee his friend in the world to come and that yeare hee may not hurt him They pray to the Sunne and the Moone which they thinke are man and wife and when any Eclipse happeneth they make great sacrifices fearing that God will take their liues from them and cleane ouerthrow them whereby they are in great feare They doe all belieue the immortalitie of the soule
verie cunning and naturally subtill There are in the same steéet on the other side that haue all kindes of linnen and shirts with other clothes ready made for all sortes of persons as well slaues as Portingales and of all other linnen worke that may bee desired There are Heathens that sell all kindes of womens clothes and such like wares with a thousand sorts of clothes and cottons which are like Canuas for sayles and sackes There is also another street where the Benianes of Cambaia dwell that haue all kinds of wares out of Cambaia and all sortes of precious stones and are verie subtill and cunning to bore and make holes in all kinds of stones pearles and corrals on the other side of the same street dwell other heathens which sell all sortes of bedstéedes stooles and such like stuffe very cunningly couered ouer with Lacke most pleasant to behold and they can turne the Lacke into any colour that you wil desire There is also a stréet full of gold and Siluer Smithes that are Heathens which make all kinde of workes also diuers other handicrafts men as Coppersmithes Carpenters and such like occupations which are all heathens and euery one a stréet by themselues There are likewise other Marchantes that deale all by great with Corne Rice and other Indian wares and Marchandises as wood and such like Some of them farme the kinges rents and reuenewes so that they are skilfull euery way to make their profites There are also many Heathen Brokers very cunning and subtill in buying and selling and with their tongues to pleade on both sides The Heathens haue likewise their shops with all kinde of spices which they sell by retaile both by waight and measure as Grocers and Potticaries doe with vs and this is onely vsed among them They haue likewise of al sorts of wares whatsoeuer but yet with lesse curiositie then with vs for it is mingled with dust and garbish These are commonlie the Brainenes which serue likewise for Priestes and Idolatrous Ministers haue their shops throughout the Cittie In euerie place and corner and vnder pentises whereby euery man may haue to serue him at his néed There are likewise many barbers which in euery end of the streetes doe call to those that haue cause to vse them They kéepe no shoppes but for a small peece of money come In the Month of September when winter endeth the bankes of sand doe fléete and vade away out of the Riuer so that not onely smal shippes may come in and go out but also the great Portingall ships of 1600. tunnes may fréely enter without a Pilot for it is déepe enough and without daunger In winter it is a heauie and melancholike being there for there is no other exercise to be vsed but onely to sitte in their shirtes with a paire of linâ—en bréeches and goe passe the time away with their neighbours in playing and such exercises for that throughout the whole town there is no other doing The women and Mesticos take great pleasure in the winter time when it rayneth with their husbandes and slaues to go into the fieldes or some garden whether they carry good store of victuailes there in their gardens haue many Cesternes or pondes of water wherein they take their delightes to swimme and to bath themselues In this time most of their Indian fruit is in season The summer beginneth in September and continueth till the last of Aprill and is alwaies clear sky fair weather without once or very little raining Then all the ships are rigged and made ready to saile for all places as also the Kinges armie to kéepe the coast and to conuoy Marchantes and then the East winds beginne to blow from off the lande into the seas whereby they are called Terreinhos that is to say the land windes They blow very pleasantly coolly although at the first by chaunging of the weather they are very dangerous cause many great diseases which do commonly fall in India by y e chaunging of the time These winds blow alwaies in summer beginning at midnight and continue till noone but they neuer blowe aboue tenne miles into the sea from off the coast and presently after one of the clocke vntill midnight the west winde bloweth which commeth out of the sea into the lande and is called Vâ—rason These winds are so sure and certaine at their times as though men helde them in their handes whereby they make the land very temperate otherwise the heate would bee vnmeasurable It is likewise a strange thing that when it is winter vpon the coast of India that is from Diâ— to the Cape de Comorin on the other side of the Cape de Comorin on the coast called Choramandel it is cleane contrarie so that there it is summer and yet they lye all vnder one height or degrées and there is but 70. miles by land betwéene both the coasts and in some places but 2â— miles and which is more as men trauel ouer land from Cochin to S. Thomas which lyeth on the same coast of Choramandel and comming by the hill of Ballagatte where men must passe ouer to goe from the one coast vnto the other on the one side of the hil to the top thereof it is pleasant clear sunne shining weather and going downe on the other side there is rayne winde thunder and lightning as if the worlde should end and be consumed which is to be vnderstood that it chaungeth from the one side to the other as the time falleth out so that on the one side of the hilles it is Winter and on the other side Summer and it is not onely so in that place and countrey but also at Ormus on the coast of Arabia Felix by the Cape of Rosalgatte where the shippes lie it is very still cleare and pleasant water and faire summer time and turning about the Cape on the other side it is raine and wind with great stormes and tempests which with the times of the yeare doe likewise change on the other side and so it is in many places of the Orientall countries The sicknesses and diseases in Goa and throughout India which are common come most with the changing of the times and the weather as it is said before there raigneth a sicknesse called Mordexim which stealeth vppon men and handleth them in such sorte that it weakeneth a man and maketh him cast out all that he hath in his bodie and many times his life withall This sicknesse is very common killeth many a man whereof they hardly or neuer escape The bloody Flixe is there likewise very common and daungerous as the plague with vs. They haue many continuall feuers which are burning agues and consume mens bodies with extreame heate whereby within foure or fiue dayes they are eyther whole or dead This sicknes is common and very daungerous hath no remedie for the Portingalles but letting of blood but the Indians and heathens do cure themselues with hearbes Sanders
vsed in India for many medicines caryed into al places Galanga is a roote with many â—nots being red both inwardly outwardly the knottes running about it smelling well and sharpe of taste for sauor and fashion like the Cyperus roote wherefore by some men it is esteemed for Cyperus of Babylon It heateth and dryeth in the third degree therefore it comforteth the stomake and driueth away the payne thereof proceeding of cold and windynesse It healeth a stincking breath it helpeth the beating of the hart being drunk with the iuyce of the leafe of Weghe it healeth the Colicke proceeding from wind it is good also against the windines of the Mother it increaseih lust heateth the kidneyes and euerie morning eating a little therof it healeth the head-ache which hath long indured Of these and such like herbes there are manie in India and in the Orientall parts the names and properties whereof are to mee vnknowne because they are not so common nor knowne among the meaner sort of people but onlie by Physitians Apothecaries and Herbalistes therefore I haue onlie spoken of such as are commonlie knowne and daylie vsed And this shall suffice for Spices Drugges and medicinable herbes The 84. Chapter Of all sorts of Pearles both great and small and of precious stones as Diamantes Rubies Topaces Saffires and other such like stones called Oriental stones and of the Bezers stone which is good against poyson and such like diseases and in what manner and place they are found PEarles by the Portingales are called Perolas that is such as are great and the small Alioffar in Latin Margaritas in Arabia Lulu in Persia and India Motu and in Malabar Mutiu The principall and the best that are found in all the Orientall countries and the right Orientall pearles are some betwéene Ormus and Bastora in the straights or Sinus Persicus in the places called Bareyn Catissi Iulfar Camaron other places in the said Sinus Persicus from whence they are brought into Ormus The King of Portingale also hath his Factor in Bareyn that stayeth there onlie for the fishing of pearles There is great trafficke vsed with them as well in Ormus as in Goa There are also other fishings for pearle as betwéene the Iland of Seylon and the Cape de Comriin where great numbers are yearelie found for that the King of Portingale hath a captaine there with certaine soldiers that looketh vnto it they haue yearlie at the lest aboue 3 or 4 thousaÌ„d duckers y t liue onlie by fishing for pearles and so maintaine themselues whereof euerie yeare many are drowned or deuoured by y e fishes called Tubarones or Hayen whereof I haue alreadie made meÌ„tion these pearls are not so good nor so much esteemed as the pearles of Ormus and are of a lower price which they know likewise how to discerne at the first sight There are also pearles found by the Iland of Borneo and the Iland of Aynon on the coast of Cauchinchina but those of Ormus surpasse them all They are fished for by dukers that diue into the water at the least 10 12 and 20 fadome déepe They grow in Oysters but the great pearls are found in the Oysters that swimme aloft and the smallest called Alioffar are commonly in the bottome of the sea The duckers are naked hauing a basket bound at their backes which being at the bottome to make the more hast they rake full of Oysters and durt together and then ryse vp againe and throwe them into boates that lie readie for the purpose with men in them which presentlie take the Oysters and lay them on land to drie where with the heate of the Sunne they open of themselues and so they find the pearles of Alioffar in the fish and when they haue made an end of fishing for that day all the Fishers with the Captaine Soldiers laborers and Watchmen for the King goe together and taking all the pearles that are caught that day they diuide them into certaine heapes that is one part for the King an other part for the Captaine and Soldiers the third part for the Iesuites because they haue their Cloyster in that place and brought the Countrie first vnto the Christian Faith and the last part for the Fishers which is done with great Iustice and equalitie This fishing is done in Summer tyme and there passeth not any yeare but that diuers Fishers are drowned by the Cape de Comoriin which is called the Kings fishing and manie deuoured by Fishes so that when the fishing is done there is a great and pitifull noyse and cry of women and Children heard vpon the land for the losse of their husbands and friends yet the next yeare they must to the same worke againe for that they haue no other meanes to liue as â—lso for that they are partlie compâ—lled thereunto by the Portingales but most part are content to doe it because of the gaine they get thereby after all the danger is past They finde sometimes many and sometimes but a few Pearles in one oyster sometimes two hundred graines and more The oysters that haue the best Pearles in them are thinne and white which the Indians call Cheripo wherof they make spoones and cups to drink in The Pearles are sold by siues which are made of mettell driuen into thin plate for that purpose whereof the holes are round There are many sorts of these siues the first hath small holes and the Pearles that passe through them are at one price the next siue hath greater holes and the Pearles that fall through it are at higher price and so foorth at the least seauen or eight siues The small stuffe that serue for no Pearles they call Alioffar and are sold by the ounce and vsed by Potticaries and Phisitions and to that end many of them are caried into Portingall Venice and are very good cheape To giue the Pearles a faire colour in India they vse rice beaten a little with salt wherewith they rub them and then they become as faire and cleare as christall and so continue There is yet an other sort of oysters by the Indians called Chaâ—lia by the Portingales Madre Perolâ— or in other of Pearle are of the shell fishes that wee call inkehornes which they know how to prepare and make cleane They bring many of them into Portingale to sâ—rue for to drinke in and to keepe for an ornament for pleasure specially those that come out of China and Bengalen some guilt and painted with colours very faire some wrought with branches and other figures as we dayly see them brought thether In India they make diuers thinges of them as deskes tables cubbards tables to play on boâ—es staues for women to beare in their hands and a thousand such fine deuises which are all inlaid and couered with this Chanco or Mother of Pearle very faire to beholde very workmanlike made and are in India so commoÌ„ that there is almost no place in those countries but they haue of them
It is likewise much caried abroad both into Portingale and els where but they are most vsed in India for there the women speciallie those of Bengala vse to weare manillias or bracelets of them about their armes that is to say those of most account and they must not take a maidens maidenhead from her that is of any estate or degree but she must haue some of these mother of Pearle bracelets about her armes which at this day is yet much vsed and obsâ—â—ued whereby it is verie much wornâ— Torteanxes there are likewise in great numbers throughout all India of their shelles they make many curious deuises as Combes Cuppes and Boles to drinke in with tablemen and diuers such like thinges knowing howe to giue it a faire and shining colour most pleasant to behold and is more estéemed of in India theÌ„ the mother of pearle by reason of the beautifull colour they set vppon it The 85. Chapter Of Diamonds DIamonds by the Arabians and Mores called Almas and by the Indians where they grow Iraa and by the Malagans where they are likewise fouÌ„d Itam They grow in the Countrie of Decam behinde Ballagate by the Towne of Bisnagar wherein are two or three hilles from whence they are digged whereof the King of Bâ—snagar doth reape great profitte for hee causeth theÌ„ to be straightly watched and hath farmed them out with this condition that all Diamonds that are aboue twenty fiue Mangeleyns in waight are for the king himselfe euery Mangelyn is foure graines in waight and if anie man bee found that hideth anie such hee looseth both life and goods There is yet another hill in the Countrie of Decam which is called Vellia that is the old Rocke from thence come the best Diamonds and are sold for the greatest price which the Diamand grinders Iewellers and Indians can very well discerne from the rest These Diamonds are much brought to sell in a Faire that is holden in a Towne called Lâ—spor lying in the same countrie of Decam betweene Goa and Cambaia whether the Banianes and Gusurates of Cambaia doe goe and buy them vp bringing them to Goa and other places They are very skilfull in these matters so that no Ieweller can goe beyond them but oftentimes they deceiue the best Iewellers in all Christendome In this Roca Vellia there are Diamondes founde that are called Nayfes ready cut which are naturall and are more estéemed then the rest specially by the Indians themselues In the straight called Tania pura a countrie on the one side of Malacca there is likewise an old rocke which also is called Roca-Vellia where many Diamondes are found that are excellent they are small but verie good and heauie which is good for the seller but not for the buyer Diamonds are digged like gold out of Mynes and where they digge one yeare the length of a man into the ground within three or foure yeares after there are Diamondes founde againe in the same place which grow there Sometimes they find Diamonds of one hundred and two hundred Mangelyns and more but verie few There is another stone called a Topace for colour which is almost like the Diamond but darker of lesse estimation There are many of them founde that are of great valew for that kinde of stone and are likewise digged out of the earth like Diamonds in many places of India There are also white Saffires and Rubies which can hardly bee knowne from Diamonds vnles it be by very good and expert Iewellers and Diamond grinders There is likewise founde in India a kinde of thing much like to Rock-christall but indéede it is none for there is no Christall to be found in India nor in any of the oriental countries It is called berylo and is little different from Christall It is much found in Cambaia Pegu and Seylon and they make many things thereof as beades seales and diuers other thinges which they sell vnto the Christians and vse among themselues The 86. Chapter Of Rubies Espinelles Granades Emeralds and other precious stones RVbies are of manie sorts but the best are those that are called carbunckles which are Rubies that waigh aboue 25. quilates wherof there are verie few and seldome to be found The best Rubies that are of the best colour and water are in India called Tockes which are like Carbunckles there are others called Ballax which are of a lower price then the first and they are red There are others called Espinellas that are of colour like fire and are lesse esteemed then the other two sortes because they haue not the right water of Rubies There are Rubies also of manie other sorts wherof some are white like Diamonds as I said before other of a Carnation colour or much like white Cherries when they are ripe There are Rubies found halfe white halfe red some halfe Rubies halfe Safires and a thousand such other sortes The cause thereof is because that in the rockes and hils where they grow their first colour is white and by the force of the Sunne are in time brought to their perfection and ripenesse and béeing perfect they are of colour red like the Carbunckle and Tockes aforesaid but wanting somewhat of their perfection and being digged out before that time they are of diuers colours as I said before and how much paler they are and lesse red then the Tockes so much are they lesse in valew for as they are in beautie and perfection so are they estéemed euery one in their kinde Those that are halfe Rubies and halfe Safires which the Indians call Nilcandi that is to say halfe Safier and halfe Rubie proceed of this that the Rubies and Safiers grow alwaies in one rocke whereby they are oftentimes founde halfe one halfe other The Rubies by the Arabians and Persians are called Iacut by the Indians Manica The Safiers are of two sortes one of a darke blew the other of a right blew the Iacinth Granades and Robasses are likewise certaine kinds of Rubies but little esteemed the Indians call them the yellow and carnation Rubies and so foorth according to their colour These Iacinthes Granadoes and Robasses are in so great numbers in Cananor Calecut and Cambaia that they are to sell in euerie Market and corner of the streets by whole corgias each corgia hauing twentie péeces at the least in it they sell the corgia for one stiuer or two at the most as many as you will desire but you must vnderstand they are of the smallest sort The Safier is not of so great estimation as the Rubie and yet is one of the most precious stones that are next the Diamond and the Rubie the Rubies Safiers and other stones aforesaid doe grow and are found in rockes and hilles like Diamonds they come out of Calecut Cananor and from manie places in the land of Bisnaga but most out of the Island of Seylon which are the best but those of the Countrie of Pegu are esteemed the finest whereof there is great store The
hearbe is like Samper but yellow of colour hath berries like Goose berries but nothing in them The Portingalles call it Sargasso because it is like the herbes that groweth in their welles in Portingall called Sargasso wherevpon that sea is called Sargasso It is not knowne from whence it commeth for there is no land nor Island that is knowne to bee neare that sea but the coast of Africa which is at the least more then 400. miles from thence It is thought it commeth from from the ground and yet there is no ground in that place to bee founde and in sayling to India the shippes come not into that sea for then they kéepe closer to the shore so that it is not once séene and it is not found in any place but there beginning at 20. degrées continuing to 34. degrées so thicke and so full as if they were whole Islandes most strange to beholde In that countrey it is as cold in winter as it is here with vs when it fréezeth not which the Portingalles estéeme a great cold and cloath themselues against it as we doe in a mightie great frost The last of Iune wee were vnder 23. degrees being right vnder the Sunne for y t the Sun was then in the same height and we also vnder y e Tropike of Cancer which is the furthest part that the Sunne goeth Northwarde and then it turneth againe vnto the Equinoctial line and from thence into the South Wee passed y e line of Tropicus Capricorni twice once on the South side by the ende of the Island of S. Laurence and then againe vnder 23. degrées after we had passed the Cape de bona Speranza The 2. of Iuly wee were vnder the height of the Islands of Canarie which lie vnder 28. and 29. degrées and are distant from the coast of Barbarie and Africa from 30. to 80. miles which Islandes lay on our right hande and because in those Islandes there are many things that are worthie the noting therefore I thought it conuenient to make a briefe description of them The 96. Chapter A briefe description of the Islands of Canaria THe Islandes of Canaria are seuen which in times past were called the Fortunadas and at this day by the Spaniards are called the Canaries by reason of the great numbers of dogges which they founde in them when they were first discouered The names of the Islands are great Canarie Teneriffe La Palma La Gomera El'Hierro Lansarotte and Fuerte Ventura In the Island of Teneriffe there is a hil called Pico de Terraira which is thought to bee the highest hill that euer was found for it may easily bee séene at the least threescore miles into the sea before they come at it It cannot be climed but in the monthes of Iuly and August for all the other monthes it lyeth full of snowe although below in the Island and in other Islands thereabouts they sée no snow It is thrée dayes iourney to clime vp into it and on the toppe therof it is flat and when it is clear and faire weather a man may from thence sée all the Islandes round about it although some of them are at the least 50. miles distant and as much in compasse The two monthes in which they vse to clime vp vpon the hill they bring downe certaine peeces of brimstone from whence it is much caried into Spaine and at my being in the Island of Tercera a shipper one of my acquaintance that came from Teneriffe gaue me a péece thereof for a remembrance of him In one of those Islandes called Hierro or of Iron there is a wonderfull and strange thing to be séene and I verely thinke it is one of y e strangest things in the world This Island is on of the greatest of all the seuen but it is an vnfruitful and barren land and so drie that in all the Island there is not one droppe of fresh water to bee found but onely in some places vppon the sea side which is farre from hand so that it profiteth the inhabitants but very little But God of his mercie hath prouided for the want of water both for men and beastes in this maner for there is a great trée which no man knoweth for the like is not found in any other place the leaues whereof are small and long and alwaies gréene without chaunging colour this trée is couered and compassed about with a small cloud which alwaies continueth in one forme and neuer altereth nor diminisheth and this cloud casteth dew vpon the leaues of the trée which hang down and drop continually without ceasing a most cleare thinne and fine water which falleth into certaine Cesternes that by the inhabitants of the Island are made round about vnder the trée therein to kéepe and preserue the water The Island of Ascention so called because it was discouered vppon the day of Christs ascention into heauen is not inhabited because of the vnfruitfulnes therof because it wanteth fresh water which is also the cause that it is not visited by the ships for that they hope for no refreshing in the same The hilles of this Iland are redde like Bolus About this Iland are many birds because of the great numbers of fishes that are about it specially small flying fishes which in Portingall are called Pisce Bolodor Reade more hereof in the booke in Folio 175. And this water is in so great abundance that it serueth all the Island for their necessarie vses not onely for the people but also for their cattle throughout all the Isle and no man can remember when that wonder first began On the right side of this Island about an hundred miles distant there is yet an other wonder to be noted which is that oftentimes there is an Islande séene thereaboutes called San Borondon where diuers men haue been on lande being onely such as fell vppon it on the sodaine and not looking for it who affirme it to bee a very fayre pleasant and gréene Countrey full of trées and all kinds of victuaile and that it is inhabited by people that are Christians but no man knowes of what nation they are neyther what language they speake The Spaniards of the Islandes of Canaria haue many times sayled towardes it to view it but they could neuer find it whereupon there goeth diuers opinions of it for some think it to be inchanted and that it may not bee seene but vppon certaine dayes some thinke it to bee very small and alwaies couered with cloudes and that therefore it can not bee séene nor founde out and also the great stormes and strength of the water driueth the shippes from it but to conclude it is holden for a truth that the Ilande lyeth thereaboutes as all those that come from thence doe certainly affirme The Ilandes of Canaria are very fruitfull and plentifull of all thinges both victuailes and other necessaries They haue of all kinds of corne specially excellent good Wine which from thence is caried into
Sea-gods and Mermaids haue beene found The entrance of the riuer of Coanza is about halfe a mile broad may be sailed vp with a scute at the lest xx miles against the streame but it hath no speciall hauen Thereabout beginneth the kingdome of Angola which in time past was vnder the obedience of the kinges of Congo but not long since by meanes of a certaine gouernor it was taken from it and made a gouernement of it selfe which holdeth himselfe as a friend and not as a vassaile to the king of Congo yet many times hee sendeth him certaine presents in maner of a tribute FroÌ„ Coanza passing forward you come to a hook of land called Capo Ledo which hauing compassed about you finde other Riuers the first is Songa which may bee sailed vp xxv Italian or fiue Duch miles the next Bengleli where now one of the king of Angolas subiects is gouernor then you come to a very good hauen fit and capable for all shippes called the Creeke of Kine of some the banke of Kine because thereabout great numbers of kine doe vse to pasture being a plaine country fruitful of grasse and al kinds of vutualles there many times is openly to be solde certayne kinds of mettall specially siluer as Lopez and Pigafetta his interpreters do witnes from whence most part of this description is drawne and taken forth and so far was the coast of the mighty kingdome of Congo vsually accounted to bee where the Portingales in the first discouery of the country did ordinarily traffike and beginneth vnder 4 degrées and ½ on the south side of the Equinoctiall line reaching til you come vnder 13. degrees which are 630. Italian miles that is 126. Duch miles accounting fiue Italian miles to euerie Duch mile and although this countrie as also al other hath other sides that lie both East West North and South yet this discriptioÌ„ of the West side as far as it reacheth on the sea coasts shal suffice for the necessary knowlege of those y e saile along the Affrican or Indian seas But to make it some what better knowne I will in parte describe the fruitfulnes thereof which to vnderstand you must know that the whole kingdome of Congo is diuided into sire principall prouinces which are called Bamba Sogno Sundi Pango Batta and Pemba Bamba is the greatest and the richest it reacheth along the Sea coast from the riuer of Ambrizi to the riuer of Coanza hauing in it many Lordes whose names are needelesse to rehearse for they are all called Mani that is Lord as Mani Bamba lord of Bamba Mani Loanda lord of Loanda Mani Coanza lord of Coanza This prouince of Bamba is the key shield and defence of the whole kingdom of Congo from whence the king hath all his power means to resist the enemy for they withstand al rebellions of the places borduring about them they haue diuers expert souldiers that are alwayes in armes helping and assisting the king in all his wars and in the same prouince if need require he may haue 400000. fighting meÌ„ and according to the manner of the countrey at his commaundement The principall towne of this prouince lieth in an euen field betweene the riuers of Loze and Ambrizi and is called Panza which is a common name to all theyr towns where the gouernor lieth it is distant from the sea about 100. Italian miles which are 20. Dutch miles in this prouince beginneth the hill wherein are mines of siluer and of al other mettalls reaching toward the kingdome of Angola being very rich and there on the strande they finde the Schulphkens which they vse for money where likwise is the greatest trade for sale of slaues in al that country being brought from Angola which the Portingales euery yeare do buy of them by thousands carrying them to sell againe into diuers far different countries The people of the country are very expert in armes They beare long and broad rapiers or two handed swordos like the Slauonians or Switzers which are brought vnto them by the Portingales som of them are so strong that with one blow they will strike a slaue cleane thorow the middle of the body into peeces and further there hath bin so of theÌ„ found that haue borne the fourth part of a butte of wine weying about 325. li. vpon theyr shoulders besides those weapons they haue bowes wherein they bee very expert with long shieldes made of barks solded togither whereof I can shew you In this prouince of Bamba there be diuers strange beasts as elephants wherof there be many by reason of the great aboundaunce of wooddes meddowes and streames and be very great for that they grow halfe the time of theyr liues which is 150. yeares Those that haue bin found in Portingale and here with vs are 〈◊〉 because they are yong not come to theâ—â— full growths and to prooue them to 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 great it may be tried by the greatnes and weight of some of the teeth that be brought from thence for that there hath been 〈◊〉 found to be two hundred pounds 〈…〉 euery pound foure and twenty 〈◊〉 In Congo speech an elephants tooth is called Mene Manzo and the yong elephantes are by them called Moana Manzo theyr eares are as big as the greatest target that the Turkes do beare which are sixe spans long in forme like a Gys and somewhat sharpe towardes the shoulder and with the beating of theyr eares and tayles they driue away the flies and likewise with the wrinckling and shrinking together of theyr skinnes they kill them The hayres on theyr tailes are very thicke blacke and shining the olde hauing them much fayrer than the yoong and be more woorth theyr hayres are â—sâ—d by these country people for necke laces speciallie by the men and gentlewomen in the countrey of Angola and the places borduring on the same which are much esteemed and accounted of bicause they come from these kindes of beasts as also for the fay renesse and strength of the hayre for that some of them are so strong that a man can not breake them with his handes Some of the countrey people venture theyr liues to get them which is in this maner when the elephant passeth through so narrowe away that he cannot turne himselfe they leape out or follow him and with sharpe kniues cut off his haires which they sell and are wreathed and folded in the manner and forme of Ringes and Laces and so worne about thâ—yr neckes armes and fingers thereof by whole tayles with thâ— thâ—â—es they weare in those countries and many rings of the same hayre made by the â—es you may see at D Paludaâ—â— house the ancient fathers had not the great knowlege of elephants bicause they 〈◊〉 y t they cannot bow their legs that 〈◊〉 step standing vpright against trees by which means they write them to be taâ— but the experience of our country meÌ„ as also of the Portingales haue fouÌ„d it to
along the coast by the riuer of Cuama you come to a small kingdome liing vppon the sea side called Angoscia taking the name from certaine Islandes that beare the same name lying right against it inhabited by Mahometanes and Heathens which in small shippes doe traffike and deale in such wares as those of Sofala vse And sayling further you discouer the kingdome of Mosambique lying vnder fouretéene degrees and a halfe whereof I haue sufficient spoken heretofore as also of the Island lying behinde it called Quiloa and the great Island of S. Laurence making the chanell which in the entrance towards the west is three hundred and forty Italian miles broad and in the middle towardes Mosambique where it is narrowest a hundred and seauentie miles kéeping that breadth all along the coasts towards India containing many Islandes The shippes that saile from Spaine into India and from India into Spaine do commonly keepe their course through this channell vnlesse they be otherwise compelled by the winde and surely this Island deserueth to haue better people than it hath inhabiting therein because of the situation hauing many good and safe hauens togither with fayre riuers sweet fresh waters which cause the land to bring forth diuers kinds of fruits and spices as beans pease rice and corn oranges lemons and citrons and all sortes of flesh tame and wilde hennes swine and harts of very good and sweete flesh by reason of the fertilitie and excellent good fish The inhabitants are heathens and some of Mahomets sect of a fayre colour much giuen to war and to their weapons specially bowes and woodden holberts This Island is diuided into foure gouernments ech fighting against other Therein are many mines of gold siluer copper yron and other metals but the wilde people vse not to traffike out of their owne countrey but onely sayle in small scutes cut out of trées from one place of the Island to the other for the most parte not suffering any traffike in their Island with strangers yet the Portingales at this time traffike in some of their hauens but go not on land and from thence bring ambergreece ware siluer copper rice and diuers other wares In this chanel betwéen the firme land of Affrica and this Island there lieth many both great and small Islands al inhabited by Mahometanes among the which the chiefe is S. Christofer then the Holyghost another called Magliaglie as also Comoro Anzoame Maiotto and such like Returning againe vnto the coast and hauing passed Quiloa you sée the kingdome of Mombaza lying vnder thrée degrées and a halfe on the south side taking the name from a certaine Island so called wherein lieth a faire towne with many goodly buildings beautiffied with diuers Images and figures the king being a Mahometane who withstanding the Portingales spéede like those of Quiloa taking it by force where they found much golde siluer pearles cotten linnen silkes and cloth of golde with other sortes of merchandises This Island bordureth on Quiloa and Melinde inhabited by heathens and Mahometanes and subiect to the king of Monemugi Sayling further you come to the kingdome of Melinde which is likewise verie small stretching along the sea coast till you come to the riuer Chimamchi lying vnder two degrees and a halfe and vpwardes by the riuer it runneth to a lake called Calice about a hundred Italian miles or twentie Dutch miles In this countrey about the sea side there is a very great towne most inhabited by white people al heathens and Mahometanes their houses are built almost like the houses in Portingale theyr sheepe are almost as bigge againe as those in Portingale with tailes which are accounted for a quarter of mutton weighing at the lest fiue and twenty or thirtie pound The women are white and dresse themselues after the manner of Arabia very prowdly and in great pompe al in silkes wearing about their neckes armes and legges iewels rings and bracelets of gold going with their faces couered like the Egyptian women not being seene or known but when it pleaseth them in this towne there is a good hauen for ships to lie in and for the most parte the people are friendly vpright in worde and déede holding good friendshippe with strangers specially with the Portingales giuing them much credit and neuer hurting them Betweene the ii heads of Mombaza and Melinde there lieth three Islands the first called Momsie the second Zanzibar and the third Pâ—mba all inhabited by Mahometanes white of colour very rich and abundant in wealth but not vsed to the warres only to til th earth In those Islands is much sugar which is by them brought in boates vnto the firme land with other fruites of those Islandes within the firme land Beyond those three kingdomes of Quiloa Melinde and Mumbaza lieth the great and large kingdome of Monemugi which on the south lieth vppon the kingdome of Molambique by the riuer of Coâ—uo and on the west vpon the riuer Nylus between the two lakes on the north vppon the Land of Pâ—esâ—eâ— lolin it liueth peaceably with the 3. kingdomes aforesaid traffiking with them for cotten linnen which is brought thither out of Cambaia w t such like wares brought out of India which they barter for gold siluer copper and iuory but on the other side towards Monomotapa it hath continuall warres and that so cruel and bloody that it can hardly be knowne who hath the victory because in that place there méeteth two mighty people and those that are most expert in armes throughout all Affrica for those of Monomotapa the women called Amazon whereof I spake before and for Monemugi the people by those of Mencongi called Giachi but in their owne spéech Agagi which in time past vsed much to inuade the kingdome of Congo nothing incomparable for strength and agillitie to the Amazons This people haue a custome with hote yrons to burne their faces especially their vpper lippes and so make strikes and lines in them also they turne their eye lids vpwards and round about They are blacke with shining skinnes The white of their eies being of so swart a colour that by their faces they seeme to be stange and cruel moÌ„sters they are il fauored great bodies liuing in the fields like beasts eate mans flesh In war they are most couragious setting most fiercely vpon their enemie their arms are darts wherin they are most cunning Comming again vnto the Coast hauing past the kingdome of Melinde to the Cape de Guarda fuy there are many other places inhabited by white Mahometanes where there are some good hauens whither diuers strange shippes and Marchants with their wares doe ordinarily resort wherof the chéefe is Pate the second Braua the third Magadoxo the fourth Amffion and behinde that reacheth the broade and wide head or Cape of Guarda Fuy which because of the greatnes issueth farre into the sea is knowne by many ships comming out of India Arabia Ormus other places And about this Cape the
two streames like Englâ—nâ— and 〈…〉 so that it seemeth almost to be two Islands it hath many goodly hauens the naâ—◠〈◊〉 giuen it of our Lady of Guadalupe it is â—ul of villages each of twentie or thirtie houses all wood and rounde made of certaine great okes which they thrust into the earth and those serue for the doores of their houses then they place smaller which hold the rest from falling Their branches on the toppe being bound together like tents which they couer with Palme tree leaues to keep them from the raine within they fasten ropes made of cotten wool or of Bâ—esen wherupon they lay cotten mattresses and hanging beddes therein to sleepe This Island hath seuen faire riuers the inhabitants were called Caâ—ucâ—erum it hath verie great Parrots much differing from others being red both before and behind with long feathers the wings speckled with red some yellow some blew al mixed together whereof there are as great abundance as of Spree 〈…〉 er in our countryes there groweth in this Island a certaine gumme called A 〈…〉 m not much vnlike Amber the smoke or aire of this gumme being let vp into the head driueth out the colde the tree bringeth foorth a fruit like dates but of a spanne and a halfe long which beeing opened hath a certaine white and sweete meale This fruit they keepe for winter as we do chesnuts the trees are like figge trees they haue likewise in this Island al kind of orchard fruit and some are of opinion that al kindes of sweete fruites were first brought out of this Islande into the other Islandes round about it for they are hunters of men which hauing taken they eate them and for the same cause they trauaile abroade many hundreth miles both farre and neare and in their trauell whatsoeuer they finde they bring it home and plant it They are not friendly but fierce and cruell They indure no strangers among them both the men and the women are verie subtile and expert in shooting with their bowes and their arrowes being poysoned when the men are gone abroad the women keepe their places and countreyes most stoutly defending them from al inuasion to conclude al parts of that Islande both hils and dales are verie fruitfull and in the hollow trees and clifts of hilles and rocks they find home Desiada or Desiderataâ— ABout eighteene miles from Guadalupa towards the East lieth Desiada another Island being twentie miles great Desiada or Desiderata that is desire so called by reason of the fairenesse of the Island ten miles from Guadalupa towards the south lyeth Galanta being in compasse aboue thirtie miles it is an euen and faire country wherof the Island hath taken the name for Galanta in Spanish betokeneth faire Therein are diuers sweete smelling trees both in barks rootes leaues There are likewise many great Horsleaches Nine miles from Guadalupa towards the East there lieth six smal Ilands called Todos los Sanctos or al Saints and Barbara spokeÌ„ of before Those Islandes are verie full of cliffes stonie and vnfruitful which the Pilots are to looke vnto to auoyde the danger that may ensue A little further lyeth Dominica taking the name from the day because it was discouered vpon a sunday and also an Islande of Caniballes so ful and thicke of Trees that there is scant an elle of free land Thereabouts also is another Island called Madannina or the womens Islande where it is thought that women onely inhabited in maner of Amazons whither the Canibales often times resorted to lie with them and if they had daughters they kept them but boyes they sent vnto their fathers it lyeth fortie miles from Mons Serratu After that lyeth yet thrée Islands besides other little Islands and diuers cliffes called S. Vincent Granada and S. Lucia Comming further towards the coast of Florida where we left right against it there lyeth certaine smal cliffes called Martires and the little Ilands called Tortugas because they are like a Torteauxes From this poynt of Florida to Ancon Baxo are 100. miles and lyeth fiftie miles distant East and West from Rio Secco which is the breadth of Florida from Ancon Baxo 100. miles to Rio di Nieues from thence to the riuer Flores 20. miles and somewhat more from the riuer of Flores to the bay called Bahya del Spirito Sancto which is likewise called La Culata being in the entrance thereof thirtie miles broade from this Bahya which lyeth vnder 29. degrées are 70. miles to the riuer called Rio del Pescadores from Rio del Pescadores which lyeth vnder 28. degrees and halfe there is 100. miles to the Riuer called Rio de las Palmas from whence Tropicus Cancri beginnneth from Rio de las Palmas to the Riuer Panuco are 30. miles and from thence to Villa Rica or Vera Crus are seuentie miles in which space lyeth Almeria from Vera Crus that lyeth vnder 19. degrees to the riuer of Aluarado by the Island called Papa Doapan are thirtie miles from the riuer Aluarado to the riuer Coâ—zâ—coalco are fiftie miles from thence to the riuer Gritalâ—a are fortie miles The said two riuers lying about eighteene degrées from the riuer Gritalua to Cabo Redondo are eightie miles as the coast stretcheth along wherein are contained Champoton and Lazaro from Cabo Redondo to Cabo di Catoche or Iucatan are 90. miles and lyeth about 21. degrées so that there are in al nine hundred miles in the length of the coast of Florida to Iucatan which is another Cape or hooke which stretcheth from off the land northward and the further it reacheth into the sea the more it crooketh or windeth about and is sixtie miles from Cuba The Island whereof we haue alreadie spoken which doth almost inclose the sea that runneth betwéene Florida and Iucatan which sea by some men is called Golfo de Mexico of others Golfo de Florida and of some others Cortes the sea that runneth into this gulfe entreth betwéene Iucatan and Cuba with a mightie streame and runneth out againe betweene Florida and Cuba and hath no other course A breefe description of Noua Hispania or new Spaine THe second part of America is called Noua Spaigna or new Spaine it beginneth towards the North about the Riuer of Panuco vppon the borders of Florida on the South side it reacheth to the prouince Darienâ— where it is diuided from Peru on the East it hath the maine Sea and on the west the South sea called Mare Australe this whole Prouince was in times past by the Inhabitants called Cichemecan Cathuacan or Coâ—acan which peple came out of the land of Culhua which lieth aboue Xalisco made their habitation about the Moores of Tenuchtitlan where at this present lyeth the towne of Mexico which people hauing neither countrey nor dwelling place chose that for the best and most profitable therein building diuers houses and habitations and in that manner placed both their new and old villages vnder the commaundement of Culhuacan giuing the same name
lie to catch fish about twoo miles further there is another Island hard by the firme lande where on the loofe side the ships may harber it is called Chulâ— from whence there are wares sent to Arequipa and is from Quilca nine miles it lyeth vnder seuenteene degrees and a halfe The way by lande from Lyma or Cidado de los Reâ—es to Arequipa DEparting from Lyma and following the coast about three spanish miles or twelue Italian miles you come to the vally of Pachacama in our card Pachamma a most pleasant place and wel known among the Peruuians because of the most statelie Temple that sometimes stood therein for riches exceeding al others in that countrey being placed vpon a litle hil made of square stones and earth in the which temple were many painted doores wals with formes of wilde beasts in the middle therof where the idoll stood were the priests that shewed themselues to be verie holie and when they offered sacrifice for all the people they turned their faces towardes the gates of the temple and their backs to the Image casting downe their eyes and ful of fearefull demonstrations made great stamping as some of the old Indians say like the maner of the sacrificators of the Idoll Apollo when the people staied to heare the prophesies Those old Indians likewise say that they vsed to offer many beastes and some men vnto this Idol at their cheefe feastes this Idol gaue them answere to their demaunds and what he sayd they beleeued in this temple there was great treasor of golde and siluer hidden and the priestes were greatly esteemed the Lords of the countrey being much subiect to their commaundements rounde about this temple were certaine houses made for Pilgrims and no man was esteemed worthie to be buried about that Church but onely their kings noblemen and the priests that came thither on pilgrimage bringing certaine offerings with them when they helde their greatest feast in al the yeare there assembled many people that according to their manner plaied on instruments when the kings of Casco subdued the vallie they hauing a custome throughout al their countries to erect temples in the honour of the sunne and beholding the greatnesse and auncientnes of that temple with the perswasion that the common people had of the holinesse of that place as also the great deuotion vsed therein they thought it not conuenient to destroy that church but appoynted another to be made by it in honour of the sunne which shuld be esteemed the greater which according to the kings commandement being finished be indowed it with great gifts sending thither certaine women wherwith the diuell of Pachacanâ—a was verie well pleased as it appeareth by the answere hée gaue vnto them being serued as well in the one temple as in the other and keeping the poore soules vnder his power and now although this temple is defaced yet hee ceaseth not secretly to speake with some of the Indians telling them that the same God which is preached by the Spaniards and hee are all one thereby to keepe them in obedience vnto him and not to become christians In steede of those Idols there are crosses erected as they think to please the diuel the name of the diuell was Creator of the world for Camac is creator and Pacha world but God permitting Francis Pizaâ—ius to take King Atabaliban prisoner he sent his brother Fernando Pizarrus to destroy the temple and to take away the treasure although the priestes before his comming had hidden part thereof which could neuer be founde yet a great part was carried away This vallie is verie fruitful rich and ful of trees abounding with kine and other cattel as also good horses From the vally Pachacama you come to Cilca where there is a notable thing to be noted for the strangenesse thereof for it neuer raineth there neither is there any riuer whereby they may conuay the water therwith to water their groundes yet the most part of this vallie is ful of Maiz and other rootes that are good to eate with fruitfull trees the meanes they haue to helpe themselues therein is thus that they make certaine deepe pits within the earth wherein they sow their Maiz and other rootes and other fruits and by reason of the cleare and pleasant aire as also the smal dew and moisture that falleth God sendeth them great aboundance of Maiz and other things but no other corne neither would that likewise grow therein if they did not throw one or two heades of the fish called Sardinia into the ground with euerie eare of corne which fish they take with nets in the sea and by that meanes it groweth in great aboundance whereby the people maintain themselues The water that they vse to drinke they take it out of great deepe pittes and for the better prouision of their corne they do euerie yeare fish for so many Sardines as they shal neede both to eate and sowe theyr corne There was likewise in that country many houses for prouision and munition belonging to the King of Peru therein to lodge and rest themselues when they trauaile through their countryes Two miles and a quarter from Ciâ—ca is the prouince of Mala where there runneth a faire riuer the coast whereof is ful of trees and not full foure miles further lyeth Goarco well knowne in that countrey being great and broade and ful of fruitful trees speciallie of Guuyas a certaine Indian fruit verie pleasant of smel and taste and also Guauas and Maiz in most great aboundance with al other things as wel Indian as Spanish fruites Besides this there are great numbers of Pigeons Turtle Doues and other kindes of foules in the woods and wilde countrey which make a good shadow in the vallie vnder the which there runneth certaine streames of fresh water The inhabitants of this country say that in times past that place was verie populous and that they ruled and hadde commandement ouer some of the hils and ouer plaine countries and when the Ingen or Kings of Peru or Cusco came to subdue them they held wars against him for foure yeares together minding not to loose the liberty which their predecessors before them had so long maintained During the which wars many strange things happened which are herein needlesse to rehearse because my meaning is not to make a History but onely to describe the coast and although the Kings of Peru in summer time because of the great heate withdrew themselues into Cusco yet they had their Captaines and Souldiours that helde continuall warres and because they might the better bring their affaires vnto effect the Ingen in this vally caused a newe Casco to be built whether he and his nobilitie repaired giuing the streetes and other places the names of the olde Cusco when he had subdued that people the saide residence of the King and the towne did both decay yet in steede thereof there remaineth a goodly Castle which he left in signe of victory situate
many riuers by bridges whereabouts are greate houses and strange things to be seene and to conclude at this present the Spaniards by them maintaine their cattaile The description of Quito AMong the towns that lie in the hills of Peru and at this time inhabited by the Spaniards Quito is one of the chiefest it lyeth in the valley Annaquito about fiue miles beyonde the south side of the Equinoctial line in time past it was a very faire rich and pleasant towne specially in the yeares of our Lorde 1544. and 1545. then it florished because the gold mines which euerie man regardeth were first found out but by the warres that Pizarro made it is almost destroyed the earth thereabouts seemeth to be vnfruitful yet it is found contrary for in it are many catell as also al other prouision of corne fruit and foule the situation of the countrie is very holesome and pleasant not much vnlike Spaine both for hearbes and seasons of the yeere for that summer beginneth there in the moneths of March and Aprill and continueth til halfe Nouember although there is much cold yet they haue no lesse seede then in Spaine there is likewise much spanish fruite those people are coÌ„monly friendlyer and ciuiler then those of Pasto and of a meane stature and go apparrelled at this time like other Peruuians About Quito there vsed to be great numbers of sheepe y t were not much vnlike camelles but not so great only in forme fit both to carry men and other burdens but not aboue three or foure miles a day and being wearie they lie downe so that they can hardly be forced to rise again there are likewise many hogs and hennes that are bred of our countrie hens great abundance of connies very plesant of taste and no lesse quantity of goates partridges pidgions turtle doues and such like foule among other things which are by the Peruuians laid vp for prouisioÌ„ besides maiz one is Papas which is rounde like a turnup which being sodden or rosted are altogether like chesnuttes another is a kinde of fruit called Quinua y e truncke of the tree or sprig being as high as a man with leaues like beetes whereon grow certaine seeds some red some white wherof they make their drinke and eate it likewise as wee do rice the people are very skilful in tilling the land but not after our manner for there the women do it the men spinne weaue make clothes and looke to their armes From Quito you come to another town caled FraÌ„cisco del quito it lieth on y e north side in the lowest prouince of Peru this town is much colder then warme and hath but few fields about it lieing in a smal valley like a pit al compassed with hills from S. Francisco you go to y e pallaces of Tomebamba being about 30 miles distant and from thence to Panzaleo the inhabitants of this countrie differ something from their neighbours as touching the binding of their heades where by the Indians of all places are knowne they had likewise another speech differing from their neighbours yet al of theÌ„ learned the Cuscan speech which if the fathers did not teach their childreÌ„ they were punished the men weare long haire tied vp with a hairelace they go in shirts without hands or sleeues and close all about them onely where they must put forth their heads and armes ouer the which they weare long wollen mantles and some of cotten the Lords wear such as be verie fine and painted of diuerse coulours their shooes were made of leaues the women goe in long gownes couering all their bodies tyed about them with a wollen bande going many times about their bodies and therewith make themselues a long body ouer the which they weare a fine wollen gowne pinned about their neckes with certaine golden and siluer pinnes which they call Topos hauing great flat heads and very sharp pointes about their heads they tie a faire fillet or headband by them called Ninâ—iâ— to conclude the manner of their apparrel and also that of Cusco is the fairest and best in al America They are verie careful to combe their haire which they weare long they are white of face of good complection and manners wherein they differ much from the women of the plaine country two miles from Pancalco lyeth Mulahallo in times past also verie populous but at this present most consumed on the right side of this villag lyeth a hill of brimstone which wheÌ„ it bursteth out it casts forth many great stones with feareful sights a little further lyeth I'acunga in time past not lesse then Quito as well for houses as other things as by the ruines may yet bee seene From Tacunga you come to Muliambato and from thence to the riuer Ambato and two miles further to Mocia and froÌ„ thence to Rio Bamba lying in the Prouince of Puruaes where there are goodly fields and good hearbes and flowers altogether like Spaine from Rio Bamba you come to Caiambi and then to Tumbâ—z or Teocallas and Ticiquiambi and from thence to Thomebamba in the Prouince of Canares there were likewise great houses of ammunition as also throughout the whole countrey at euery eight ten or twelue miles wherein was al things that belonged to the wars and thereabouts likewise were certaine of the Kings garrisons and captaines hauing commandement of the countries thereby to hold the countrey in peace and to punish such as rebelled though they were their owne sons Thomebamba lay in a plaine countrey where twoo riuers met together and ranne into the sea being nine miles compasse in a colde place where notwithstanding were many wilde beastes as Goates Conies c. there likewise was a Temple of the Sunne made of browne greene and blacke stones like Iasper stones The gates of the Kings Pallace were brauely guilded wherein were set certaine Emeraulds platted in golde From Thomebamba you goe to Bracamoros in our Carde Boamoâ—aces founde out and discouered by Iohn Porzel and Captaine Vergara who therein hadde made two or three fortes thereby to ouerrunne and subdue the places lying about it The Prouince of Bracamoros is about sixtie miles from Quito trauailing along the hill about fiue and fortie miles further lyeth the Prouince of Chichapoyas or Cachapoâ—as wherein the Spaniardes haue a towne called Frontiera on Leuanto where the countrey is verie fruitfull of all kinde of Spices and of rich Golde mynes Leuanto by reason of the scituation of the place is verie strong and well kept as being almost compassed about with a deepe vallie wherein for the most part there runneth a certaine riuer whereby the towne of Frontier builded vppon Leuanto is not easie to bee woonne if the bridges be once broken downe This prouince was built with houses and peopled with inhabitants of the Spanish nation by Alonzo de Aluarado in the yeare of our Lord 1536. Therin are faire and white women fairer then in any other parte of Peru also very gracious and
Northeast and Northeast and by East From the point of Lialoo two miles forward lyeth a flat Island about halfe a mile distant from the land and another halfe mile further forward lyeth two Islands by each other somewhat closer to the land and hard by them is a Riuer at the mouth thereof hauing a sandie strand with low land into this Riuer runneth the Somas or Chinish Shippes that goe to the Towne of Enon which lyeth within the same where you haue much Marchandises of China on the coast seuen or eight miles further There lyeth the point of Chencheu which is a high and bare land of white and reddish colour reaching somewhat inward to sea on the Northeast side it hath a small Bay and aboue it a verie high steepe land in this Créeke lyeth a great Island betwéene the which and the point of land you may put in from this Island a harquebush shot in length northeastward lyeth a stonie place of ground halfe a fadome déepe vnder the Water and Northwestward from the said Island betwéene it and the land lyeth another stone and on the land side by this Island you haue a good harber to anker in I haue laine in this Hauen somewhat neerer to the Island then to the land with two Iuncos which are great Chinish Shippes each of them being of fiue hundred or sixe hundred Bhares Indian waight which is aboue a hundred and eightie tunnes and ranne in along by the point Beyond this point of land at y e vpper part lyeth a great Towne and North Northeast from this Island there lyeth two long clouen Islands of redde colour but they haue no faire ground nor anie harber two miles before you come to this point of Chencheu inward to land towards Chencheu there is a hill like to Monte Fermoso or the faire hill this Hill lyeth distant from Chencheu thirtéene miles in this countrey sixe or seuen miles from the land you haue certaine boyes lying with coloured feathers and flagges which serue for the countrey fishermen where they cast their Nets and the Somâ—s of that Countrey which are the Chinish Caruels haue â—un ouer it with one saile onely without any other furniture From the point of Chencheu seuen miles further on the Southwest end of the Island by the Portingales called Ilha dos cauallos that is the Island of Horses and by the Chinares called Tachoo hauing the name of a great Towne so called not farre from thence about two miles along the riuer within the land this Island lieth in the coast coÌ„passed about with an arme of the Sea like the Island of Goa in India which arme of the Sea issueth out againe about fiue miles further in the same coast which issue or mouth is called Puysu The first mouth from the Southwest may be about halfe a mile broad and from the point of the Island inward about halfe a mile there is good anker ground against the windes of the Monson of China at ten and eleuen fadome faire ground you must shunne the Southwest land which is low and sandy strands and is all ouer blackish and shallow ground for I haue run inward round about this Island it hath many shallowes and there is a channell the déepest part whereof is but two fadome if you desire to put in there it were good to haue one of the Country-men for a Pilote I entered the mouth thereof from the Northeast which is the narrowest and shallowest place and hath a hidden stony cliffe lying vnder the water close by the side of the Island about the shot of a great peece inward towards the point From this stony cliffe to the point many Shippes may anker and both these Hauens are without droughts or shallowes and the coast betwéene them both from the one mouth vnto the other hath some redde downes and bare land but is all along faire ground A mile from this mouth Northeastward to Seaward lyeth a small Island and from the moneth of Aprill to September there are many beastes pastured in this Island as horses and such like wherevpon the Portingales called it the Island of Horses as aforesaid from the mouth of Puysu of the saied Island of Horses eight miles forward by the coast there is a great thicke point of land with manie bushes vpon it Close by this point lyeth a great round Island whereof the chanell betwéene them is small yet very cleare where if néede bee you may passe through from the point aforesaied to the Southwest it is a high land with bushes and from thence to the Sea it hath a great gréene field or plaine and along by this gréene field it is very good ankering against the winds of the monson of China another ground vpon the aforesayed point of land there is a great Towne called Pinhay From this point of Pinhay fiue miles along the coast lyeth the Hauen of Foquyen which hath a great Rode and is all thicke land with bushes and inward on the Southwest part it hath a great round Island with blacke shining bushes and beyond this Iland inward lieth the mouth of the riuer on the which lieth a verie great towne compassed with mightie walles and towers and hath a Bridge running out from the land whereunto the shippes that stay there are commonly tyed the entrie is faire and cleare From this Hauen of Foqueyen fiue miles lyeth a Créeke by the Portingales called Enseada dos camoroyns that is the Créeke of Gannaet and by the Chinars called Cayto in this way lyeth certaine small and high Islandes without any trées or bushes about three great miles from the land inward to the Sea and betwéene it and them it is all ouer full of Riffes and stonie Cliffes and in some places it sémeth to haue Channels or throughfares for I went through it with a Pilot of the countrey you must shunne this Island and from the end of this Island two miles forward there is a point of great thicke land wholly without any bushes or trées and at the end of each mile West Northwestward there lyeth two Islands and on the Southwest side of this point there is a good harbour for the windes of the monson of China hauing faire sandie ground but it hath the winde verie scant to runne about without the Ilandes for the which cause wée ranne betweene them but it is not good for our shippes On the other side Northeastward from this point aforesaid close by the lande lyeth a small high Island stretching Northwest and Southeast the Channell betweene this Island and the Firme land being the shot of a great péece in breadth at thrée fadome deepe most part stonie ground in such manner that as soone as you let fall anker the ropes and Cables are presently cut in péeces by the sharpe stones This channell can not bée séene farre off and this Island hath on the land side a small créeke or Bay and if you come thither by hard fortune as I did you shall put in there
close by the Island and so néere it that you shall touch the strand with the kéele of your shippe to anker in the depthes of the hard ground for if you anker in the Sea your Cables will presently be cut in péeces as mine were This point lyeth hidden vnder a point from thence Northeast and Northeast and by East the land hath another point lying about a mile and a halfe distant from the other aforesaide making betwéene them both a certaine Gitte From this Island and point about halfe a mile East Northeast lieth a Riffe whereon you see the water breake reaching Northwest and Southeast and about halfe a myle long from this Riffe to the Northeast point of the aforesaid Créeke it is about a mile all the rest of the Créeke is faire and cléere This is the Créeke called Enseada dos Camarouis the Rode thereof is vnder the harbour of the Northeast point aforesaid for it is good for the time of the windes of the Monson of China for such shippes as come from Liampon Iapon to put in there you must goe néere the land before you come at the point and runne along by it till you haue gotten about the point and are ankered within it there it is verie good muddie ground by this Northeast point so that the Riffe will be Southwestward from you therefore you shall put neare the point of the lande not to fall vpon the Riffe from this Créeke forward to the point of Sumbor lying vnder 28 degrées and ¼ you runne along the coast Northeast and Northeast and by North without the aforesaid Island and the point of the saide Créeke and from the créeke twelue and thirtéene miles the land hath a point and from thence it runneth inwards North Northwest and somewhat further Northeast and Northeast and by North out againe Two myles from thence lyeth thrée Ilands by each other two great and high and one small béeing all faire ground round about but wholly without any Rode or succour to defend the shippes in foule weather These Islands are called Canton Sion all this coast of Enseada dos camarouis to these Islands and Hooke aforesaide is altogither lowe land with houels and valleyes with euen bushes and along by it it is both faire and calme Sea and pleasant ground In this Countrey in the middle way from Enseada dos Camarouis to the Ilands of Canton Sion about thrée myles to Sea-warde there lyeth two Islandes by each other and the Island lying nearest the land hath a great high hill in the middle which runneth stéepe downe to the endes of the Island they haue neither Trées nor Bushes within them being faire and cleare round about them From the Islandes of Canton Sion forward the Lande and Coast reacheth inwards ten miles from thence that is to say two miles from the land lyeth 2. high and great Islands nigh adioyning each to other without Trees or bushes reaching as the coast doth whereof the first lying on the Southwest side is very long and that on the North side is in manner of a triangle and the Channell separating them is little more in breadth than a man can cast a stone but déepe and faire for I haue passed through it and harde by the Northeast point of the first long Island which commeth out by the other there is a sandie Bay close by the which there is a verie good Rode for this Sandie baye hath defence for all windes and because it is like a Hauen it is by the Chinars called Pudeon that is a Sacke From this Sandie Bay about the shot of a great Peece Northwest lyeth a well of verie great depth therefore you must be carefull in entring the Créeke where you haue verie good ground at fiue and sixe fadome déepe In this Créeke or sandie Bay there is very good fresh water as also right ouer against it on the other side of the Island there is a great place of fresh water The channell betwéene these Islandes and the Firme land is all faire and deepe as also to Seaward from thence on the Northwest part of the land of this Hauen aforesaid there is another Hauen called Fuychon which is a riuer but with a small entry béeing in breadth about halfe the length of the shotte of a great peece with cleare and déep ground from the mouth inwardes there is good water running a great way into the land and all faire If you desire to goe in there and to anker you must gouerne your course by the Lead and the depthes This Baye hath many townes and villages lying along by the riuer From the aforesaid first Island fiue or sixe myles Southward to Seaward lieth two small Islandes halfe a myle distant each from other they are both without trées or any bushes the Island on the Land side is flat and that to Sea-ward is very high and hath a Créeke but verie small and onely with a Northwest wind it is harbourlesse the entrie is verie straight being round within with good and pleasant ground This Island in forme is like a Horse shooe for from the inner side of the Creeke towards the outside to Seaward it may be the length of a bow shot in the breadth of the Island both these Islands are small From this Hauen of Pudeon fiue miles along the coast there lyeth two Ilands whereof the first is long reaching like the coast the other reacheth from off the land towards the Sea for betwéen it and the land you can not passe The point of this Island reacheth beyond the Northeast point of the aforesaid long Iland that lyeth to Sea-ward betwéene them both is a small Channell but faire and déepe all along and round about this Iland as well inward as outward From this Island to the land it is good muddie ground at foure fadome and is a good Hauen for the Monson of China but wholly open for a Southwest wind with the which wind I there lost two Iuncos which are Chinish shippes This Hauen is called Guotimony Before you come within two myles of this Hauen vpon the coast there lyeth two Créekes close togither which runne about a myle into the land and are aboue the shot of a great Péece in breadth but are not fit for our ships The ground therabout is faire and inward it hath a village From this Hauen of Guotimony seuen or eight myles Eastward lieth a verie great and high Island on the South side hauing thrée or foure smal Ilands close to it it lieth about seuen or eight miles from the land and a good way from the other Ilands on the Northwest side it hath two Créekes hard by each other whereof that in the Northeast is the safest with good and faire ground reaching about halfe a mile inwards within it hauing good fresh water with a Sandie Bay where they draw vp their ships to mend and dresse them when néed requireth it is all faire round about onely you must not run betwéene
a great number of whale fishes and other fish by the Spaniards Atun whereof many are found in the coast of Gibraltar in Spaigne as also Albacoras and Bonitos which are all Fishes which commonly kéepe in Channels straights and running waters there to disperse their séed when they bréed which maketh me more assuredly beléeue that thereabouts is a Channell or Straight to passe through Being by the same course vpon y e coast of new Spaigne vnder seuen and thirty degrées and ½ wee passed by a very high and faire land with many Trées wholy without Snow and foure miles from the land you find thereabouts many drifts of roots leaues of Trées Réedes and other leaues like Figge leaues the like whereof wee found in great abundance in the countrey of Iapon which they eat and some of those that wée found I caused to be sodden with flesh and being sodden they eat like Colewortes there likewise wee found great store of Sea wolues which wee call Sea dogges whereby it is to bée presumed and certainly to bee beléeued that there are manye Riuers Bayes and Hauens along by those coasts to the Hauen of Acapulco From thence wee ranne South-east Southeast and by South and South-east and by East as we found the wind to the point called El Cabo de Saint Lucas which is the beginning of the land of Califfornia on the Northwest side lying vnder two and twenty degrées being fiue hundred myles distant from the Cape De mendosino In this way of the aforesaied fiue hundred myles along by the coast are manye Islands and although they bee but small yet without doubt there are in them some good Hauens as also in the Firme Land where you haue these Hauens following nowe lately found out as that of the Island of Saint Augustine lying vnder thirtye degrées and ¾ and the Island called Ilha de Sedros scarce vnder eight and twentie degrées and ¼ and the Island lying beneath the Saint Martyn vnder thrée and twentie degrées and ½ all this coast and Country as I thinke is inhabited and sheweth to bee a verye good Countrey for there by night wee sawe fire and by day smoake which is a most sure token that they are inhabited From the Point or hooke of Saint Lucas to the South-east side of Calliffornia wee helde our course East Southeast for the space of eightye myles to the point called El cabo de las corrientes that is the point of the streames lying vnder ninteene degrées â…” and running this course Northward about a mile from vs we sawe thrée Islands called las tres Marias that is the thrée Maries running the same course About foure miles from the other Islandes there are other Islands reaching about 2. or thrée miles All this way from the mouth or Créeke of California aforesaid for the space of the said 80. miles there are great streames that runne Westward From the point or Cape de las Corrientes wée ranne Southeast and sometimes Southeast and by East for the space of an hundred and thirtie miles to the hauen of Acapulco In this way of an hundred and thirty miles being 20. miles on the way we had the Hauen of the Naâ—iuidade that is the birth of the Virgine Mary and other eight miles further the Hauen of Saint Iago or Saint Iames and sixe miles further the sea Strand called la Playa de Culyma that is the Strand of Culyma All this coast from California to the Hauen of Acapulco is inhabited by people that haue peace and traffique with the Spaniards and are of condition and qualities like the people of the other places of new Spaine The Conclusion of the Author of this last Voyage ALl this Description and Nauigation haue I my selfe séene prooued and well noted in my Voiage made and ended in the yéere of our Lord 1584. from great China out of the Hauen and riuer of Canton as I will more at large set it downe vnto your honour with the Paralell and Meridian thereof as God shall permit me time and leysour whome I beséech to send you long and happy daies and the same haue I truly translated out of Spanish into low Dutch verbatim out of the Originall coppie that was sent vnto the Viceroy of the Portingall Indies The 55. Chapter The Description of a Voyage made by a Pilot called Nuno da Silua for the Viceroy of new Spaine the 20. of May in the yeere of our Lorde 1579. to the towne of Mexico from whence it was sent to the Viceroy of the Portingall Indies wherein is set downe the course and actions passed in the Voyage of Sir Francis Drake that tooke the aforesaid Nuno da Silua by the Islands of Cabo Verde and carried him along with him thorough the Straightes of Magellanes to the Hauen of Guatulco in newe Spaine where he let him goe againe NVno da Silua borne in Porto a Citizen and inhabitant of Guaia saith that hée departed out of his house in the beginning of Nouember in the yéere of our Lorde 1577. taking his course to Cabo Verde or the gréene point where hée ankered with his shippe close by the Hauen of the Island of Saint Iames one of the Islands of Cabo Verde aforesaid béeing the nintéenth of Ianuarie in the yéere of our Lorde 1578. and lying there there came sixe shippes which seemed to be English men whereof the Admirall boorded his shippe and by force with his men hée tooke him out of his shippe bringing him in the boat aboord the Admirals shippe leauing some of his best men aboord his shippe and although the fortresse of the Island shot foure or fiue times at them yet they hurt not the English men who hauing done seâ— saile from thence to the Island of Braua that is the wild Island taking with them the shippe of the saide Nuno da Silua béeing there they filled certaine vessels with fresh water from thence holding their course inwarde to Sea hauing first with a boat set the men of Nuno da Siluas shippe on lande onley kéeping Nuno da Silua in his shippe as also his shippe with the wines that were therein and Nuno da Silua saith the cause why they kept him on boorde was because they knewe him to be a Pilot for the coast of Brasilia that hée might bring them to such places in those countries as had fresh water Béeing put off from the Island of Braua they helde their course to the lande of Brasilia which they descried vpon the first of Aprill vnder the height of 30. degrées and without landing or taking in fresh water they held on their course to the riuer Rio de la Plata that is the riuer of Siluer lying vnder fiue and thirtie degrées little more or lesse where they went on lande and prouided themselues of fresh water From thence they helde on their course till they came vnder nine and thirtie degrées where they ankered and béeing there they left two of their sixe shippes
HONI SOIT QVI MAL Y PENSE SEMPER EADEM IOHN HVIGHEN VAN LINSCHOTEN his Discours of Voyages into y e Easte West Indies Diuided into Foure Bookes Printed at London by IOHN WOLFE Printer to y e Honorable Cittie of LONDON Willms Rogers ciuis Londinensis Inventor et sculptor IW To the Right VVorshipfull IVLIVS CAESAR Doctor of the Lawes Iudge of the High Court of Admiralty Master of Requests to the Queenes Maiesty and Master of Saint Katherines RIGHT VVORSHIPFVLL The manyfolde Curtesies which it hath pleased you from time to time to multiply vpon mee haue made me so greatly beholden vnto you that they can neuer dye but remaine fresh in my remembrance during my Life So that I must enforce my selfe with all my best Endeuours openly to acknowledge the same and by all the meanes that possibly I can to bee thankefull for them otherwise I might iustly be noted with the blacke spotte of Ingratitude the most odious vice that can raigne amongst men which vice to auoyde I haue studied earnestly to finde out some way wherby I might make knowne vnto your Worship that duetifull reuerence and affection which I owe vnto you in that respect But hauing hitherto had no fit oportunitie or good occasion to declare the same I haue beene constrayned to remaine in this debt vntill now at last it hath pleased God to offer me a meane which I hope will not be displeasing vnto you About a Tweluemonth agoe a learned Gentleman brought vnto mee the Voyages and Nauigation of John Huyghen van Linschoten into the Indies written in the Dutche Tongue which he wished might be translated into our Language because hee thought it would be not onely delightfull but also very commodious for our English Nation Vpon this commendation and opinion I procured the Translation thereof accordingly and so thought good to publish the same in Print to the ende it might bee made common and knowen to euery body And calling to minde the vsuall custome of Writers and Printers in these daies who do commonly shelter and shrowde their works vnder the credit of some such as are able to Patronize the same your Worship represented it selfe before mee and did as it were of right challenge the Patronage hereof as being a Matter that appertaineth to your Iurisdiction For this Dutchman arriuing here in England after his long trauell and Nauigation and bringing rare Intelligences with him from Forreyne parts good reason it is that hee should bee examined by such as are in place and Authority appointed for such purposes And to whome can hee be directed better then to your selfe whome it hath pleased her most excellent Maiestie to authorize for Iudge in Sea matters and Admirall causes And therefore I haue brought him vnto you with earnest request that you will be pleased to examine him accordingly and if you shall finde him any way beneficiall to our Countrey and Countrey men vouchsafe him your good countenance and giue him such intertainment as he shall deserue Thus am I bold with your worship to acknowledge my dutie after this homely manner hauing none other meane to shew my selfe thankefull but by presenting you with this slender fruite of my abilitie facultie which I beseech you to accept in good part and I shall not cease to pray to God that hee will blesse you with long life and prosperous health to the great comfort of many her Maiesties Subiects and Suppliants that are daylie to bee relieued by your good meanes Your Worships euer most bounden IOHN VVOLFE TO THE READER LVcian in one of his Dialogues intituled 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 or Surueyers writeth of Charon the old Ferrie-Man of Hell that vpon a great desire which he had conceiued to view this world and the Actions of men therein hee begged leaue of Pluto that hee might haue a playing day and bee absent from his boat to the end he might satisfie his thirsty humor that troubled him so eagerly Meeting with Mercurie his fellow Boatswayne for he also conducteth Soules in Charons Barge they two concluded together like the two Sonnes of Alcëus to clap the Mountaine Pelius vpon Mount Ossa and when they found that they were not high inough to take the surueigh they added Mount O Eta vnto them and Parnâ—us ouer them all Vpon the toppe wherof hauing setled themselues they did at leysure and pleasure take a view not onely of the Seas and Mountaines and Cities of the world but also of the Inhabitants therof together with their Speeches Actions and Manners The same Author in another Dialogue called Icaro-Menippus discourseth of the Cinike Menippus who being troubled with the same humor tooke vnto him the right wing of an Eagle and the left wing of a Vulture and hauing fastened them to his body with strong and sturdie thongs mounted vp first to the Acropolis or Capitol of Athens and then from Hymettus by the Gerania to Acro-Corinthus and so to Pholoë and Erymanthus Taygetus and at last to Olympus where he grew somewhat more bragg and audacious then before he was and soared higher vpwards till he had reached the Moone and then the Sunne and from thence the Habitation of Iupiter and the rest of the Gods a sufficient flight as he saith for a well trussed Eagle to performe in a day There he rested himselfe and discouered all the world and euery particularity thereof to the end he might the more freely like a Scoggan taunt scoffe at the Actions of men in their seuerall kinds But to leaue these Poeticall Fictions and vaine Fables which doo but declare the Nature of Man to bee desirous of Nouelties and curious to know those things whereof he is ignorant let vs come to those that being neither coniured out of hell nor rapt into the heauens but of their owne honourable disposition and instinct of Nature haue not onely compassed Sea and Land in their own persons to learne and beholde Nations Realmes Peoples Countries vnknowne for the augmentation of their owne priuate skill and cunning but also haue committed their knowledge and labours to writing for the propagation of the seruice and glorie of God in Pagan and Heathen places and the great pleasure profit commodity of their Countrymen Of this kinde and sort of famous men there hath beene great store in al ages but specially at the first Homer Anaximander Hecataeus Democritus Eudoxus Timaeus Eratosthenes Polybius Possidonius Dionysius Strabo Solinus Pomponius Mela Maximus Tyrius Ptolomée an infinite number of other ancient Authors that haue imployed their wits industries in this behalf to the singular benefit of our later times wherein there haue beene most excellent and exquisite followers of them as Munsters Mercators Theuets Belonies Ortelies Villamonts many moe that by the light and good meanes of those their Predecessors haue run beyonde them many degrees and discouered such New worlds as were neuer knowne to our Fathers Forefathers and therefore doo deserue the
greater commendation No doubt it is very troublesome and laborious to iourney by land for the attaining to this knowledge but to trauell by Sea is not onely most dangerous but also in a maner almost a desperate estate considering especially the great perils wherevnto it is hourely subiect as namely Rockes Flats Sandes Gulphes Stormes Tempests besides the continuall Watching and care in obseruing the Poles Arctike and Antarctike the Aequinoctiall Line the Altitude and Degrees of the Meridian the Circle of the Zodiake the Horizon the Tropikes the Longitude and Latitude of Heauen and earth the Paralleles the Hemisphere the Zenith the Centre and a Rablement of such curiosities that are able to breake the braines of the soundest man aliue To these if you will add the intollerable paines and infinite diseases that doo spend their bodies you must needs say that they are the most miserable Creatures of the worlde So that you cannot choose but bee of the opinion of Anacharsis that Noble Philosopher who beeing demaunded whether Number was the greater that of the dead or that of the Liuing did redemaund againe In which Number do you recken those that trauell on the Sea Signifiyng thereby that such as trauell vpon the Sea are in so great danger of death that they doo continually dye liuing and liue dying And therefore well sayd Bias one of the seuen Sages that Saylers vppon the Sea were alwayes within two ynches of their death true it is which the Latyn Lyrike Poet writeth That Man had a Hart of Oke and was fenced with a triple Corslet of Brasse that first aduentured to commit a slender Boat to the raging Sea A Type and Patterne of all which miseries together with the cunning and skilfull Art of Nauigation is comprised in this Volume which wee haue in hand being a most perfect description of the East and West Indies or as they are commonly called the Portugall and Spanish Indies A Worke assuredly very profitable and commodious for all such as are desirous curious louers of Nouelties Of these Indies though not in distinguished tearmes of East and West sundry Historiographers and Authors of the old World haue made an honourable Mention left an exceeding commendation thereof for the wonderfull and rare matters that were discouered by the seuerall Trauels Nauigation of diuers famous Captains as namely Alexander the great Seleucus Antiochus Patrocles and Onesicritus who had been all in the saide Indies insomuch as one of them held them to be the Third part of all the Land that is inhabited in regard of the great Prouinces puissant Cities and vnmeasurable Ilands that are found therein all very fruitfull and yeelding such treasure and rich Merchandize as none other place of the whole world can afford And althogh the curiosity and labour of these auncients was very great yet greater hath beene the trauell and industry of those which of late time and in our age hath beene imployed therein For the auncient Trauellers had in deede a certain kind of knowledge of this Countrey and People but it was very vncertaine and vnperfect Whereas we in our times are thoroughly learned and instructed by our owne experience in the Prouinces Cities Riuers Hauens and Trafficks of them all So that nowe it is become knowne to the whole world First the Portingalls being great Merchants by reason of their skil in Nauigation which in our dayes is growne to a more full perfection then euer it hath beene in times past they I say first discouered the Wast and Desert Part of the Indies caused their King to be entertayned honoured among the People encreased and enhaunsed their credit and Name exceedingly and the sundry commodities of their seuerall fruits and spices haue dispersed communicated not onely to their owne Countrymen but also to all Nations vnder the Sunne But here the Matter stayed not For then came the English a People that in the Art of Nauigation giueth place to none other and they were incited to take this Indian Voyage in hande and to make it generally knowne vnto their Island therevpon Syr Francis Drake Master Thomas Candish did not only sayle into the sayde Indies but also trauelled round about the world with a most happy and famous successe Whose examples diuers honourable Gentlemen and valiant Captaines of England haue followed to their vnspeakeable praise and commendation the exceeding glory of their Country as namely the Right Honourable Earle of Cumberland the Lord Thomas Howard Syr Francis Drake Syr Martin Frobisher Syr Richard Greenefield Syr Iohn Hawkins and Syr Walter Raleigh with diuers others named and mentioned in this Booke And last of all the People of the Lowe-Countreys beeing instructed by the diligent search and trauell of the English Nation fell to the like trafficke into â—he Indies and haue performed many Honourable and profitable Voyages Among whom the Author of this Bâ—oke Iohn-Hugh Linschote of Harlem was one that continued in India for the most part of nine yeares and had good oportunity of sure and certaine intelligences by reason of his seruice vnder Vincentius da Fonseca a Fryer Dominican by K. Philip created Archbishop of all India This Man Hugh Linschote behaued himselfe so honestly and warily during the time of his abode there that he was not onely in high fauour of his Lord and Maister but he was also singularly and generally beloued of all the Inhabitants of the places where hee was most resiant He did most diligently and considerately obserue and collect together all occurrents and accidents that happened in his memory knowledge and the same hath committed to writing in the Dutch Tongue with all faithfulnes to his owne euerlasting praise and to the benefit of his Countrey together with the seuerall Mappes and descriptions of the Countreys Cities and Townes all the commodities therevnto belonging Which Booke being commended by Maister Richard Hackluyt a man that laboureth greatly to aduance our English Name and Nation the Printer thought good to cause the same to bee translated into the English Tongue The Volume conteyneth in it foure seuerall Treatises The First is The Voyage or Iourney by Sea of the sayde Hugh Linschote the Author into the East or Portingall Indies together with all the Sea-Coasts Hauens Riuers and Creâ—kes of the same their Customes and Religion their Policie and Gouernement their Marchandises Drugges Spyces Hearbs Plants the vertues whereof are explaned by the Annotations of Doctor Paludanus the learned Phisitian of Enâ—khuysen And last of all a Memoriall of such Accidents as fell out during the Authors aboade in India The Second Treatise is The Description of Guinea Manicongo Angola Monomotapa c. with a discouery of the great Island of Madagascar and all the Shallowes Cliffes and Islands of the Indian Seas The most part whereof was collected before by one Pigafetta from the mouth of Edward Lopez and published in English the last yeare The Third Treatise is The Nauigation
of the Portingales into the East Indies from thence to Malacca China Iapon Iaua and Sunda And from China to the Westerne or Spanish Indies and all the Coast of Brasilia c. The Fourth and last Treatise is A most true exact Summarie of all the Rents Demaynes Tolles Taxes Imposts Tributes Tenths Third-pennies and generally all the Reuenues of the King of Spayne arising out of all his Kingdomes Lands Prouinces and Lordships as well of Portugall as of Spayne collected out of the Originall Registers of his seuerall Chambers of Accompts together with a briefe description of the gouernment and Pedegree of the Kinges of Portugall I doo not doubt but yet I doo most hartely pray and wish that this poore Translation may worke in our English Nation a further desire and increase of Honour ouer all Countreys of the World and as it hath hitherto mightily aduanced the Credite of the Realme by defending the same with our Wodden Walles as Themistocles called the Ships of Athens· So it would employ the same in forraine partes aswell for the dispersing and planting true Religion and Ciuill Conuersation therein As also for the further benefite and commodity of this Land by exportation of such thinges wherein we doe abound and importation of those Necessities whereof we stand in Neede as Hercules did when hee fetched away the Golden Apples out of the Garden of the Hesperides Iason when with his lustie troupe of couragious Argonautes hee atchieued the Golden Fleece in Colchos Farewell THE FIRST BOOKE CHAPTER I. The Voyage and trauailes of Iohn Hugen van Linschoten into the East or Portingales Indies Setting downe a briefe discourse of the said Landes and sea coastes with the principall Hauens Riuers Creekes and other places of the same as yet not knowne nor discouered by the Portingales Describing withall not onely the manner of apparrell of the Portingales inhabiting therin but also of the naturall borne Indians their Temples Idols houses trees Fruites Hearbes Spices and such like Together with the customes of those countries as well for their manner of Idolatrous religion and worshipping of Images as also for their policie and gouernment of their houses their trade and traffique in Marchandise how and from whence their wares are sold brought thether With a collection of the most memorable and worthiest thinges happened in the time of his beeing in the same countries very profitable and pleasant to all such as are welwillers or desirous to heare and read of strange thinges BEeing young and liuing idlelye in my natiue Countrie sometimes applying my selfe to the reading of Histories and straunge aduentures wherein I tooke no small delight I found my minde so much addicted to sée trauaile into strange Countries thereby to séeke some aduenture that in the end to satisfie my selfe I determined was fully resolued for a time to leaue my Natiue Countrie and my friendes although it gréeued me yet the hope I had to accomplish my desire together with the resolution taken in the end ouercame my affection and put me in good comfort to take the matter vpon me trusting in God that he would further my intent Which done being resolued thereupon I tooke leaue of my Parents who as then dwelt at Enckhuysen and beeing ready to imbarke my selfe I went to a Fléet of ships that as then lay before the Tassell staying the winde to sayle for Spaine and Portingale where I imbarked my selfe in a ship that was bound for S. Lucas de Barameda beeing determined to trauaile vnto Siuill where as then I had two bretheren that had continued there certaine yeares before so to helpe my selfe the better by their meanes to know the manner and custome of those Countries as also to learne the Spanish tongue And the 6. of December in the yere of our Lord 1576 we put out of y e Tassel being in all about 80. ships set our course for Spain and the ninth of the same month wee passed betwéene Douer and Callis within thrée dayes after wee had the sight of the Cape of Finisterra and the fiftéene of the same moneth we saw the land of Sintra otherwise called the Cape Roexent from whence the riuer Tegio or Tagus runneth into the maine Sea vppon the which riuer lieth the famous citie of Lisbone where some of our Fleet put in and left vs. The 17. day wee saw the Cape S. Vincent vppon Christmas day after we entred into the riuer of S. Lucas de Barameda where I stayed two or thrée dayes and then trauailed to Siuill the first day of Ianuarie following I entred into the citie where I found one of my brethren but the other was newly ridden to the Court lying as then in Madrill And although I had a speciall desire presently to trauaile further yet for want of the Spanish tongue without the which men can hardlie passe the countrie I was constrained to stay there to learne some part of their language meane time it chanced that Don Henry the last King of Portingale died by which meanes a great contention and debate hapned as then in Portingale by reason that the said King by his Will and Testament made Phillip King of Spaine his Sisters Sonne lawfull Heire vnto the Crowne of Portingal Notwithstanding y e Portingals alwaies deadly enemies to the Spaniards were wholly against it and elected for their king Don Antonio Prior de Ocrato brothers Son to the King that died before Don Henry which the King of Spaine hearing presently prepared himselfe in person to goe into Portingale to receaue the Crowne sending before him the Duke of Alua with a troupe of men to cease their strife and pacifie the matter so that in the end partly by force and partly by mony hee brought the Countrie vnder his subiection Whereupon diuers men went out of Siuill and other places into Portingale as it is commonlie séene that men are often addicted to changes and new alterations among the which my Brother by other mens counsels was one First trauelling to the borders of Spaine being a cittie called Badaios standing in the frontiers of Portingale where they hoped to finde some better meanes and they were no sooner ariued there but they heard news that all was quiet in Portingale and that Don Antonio was driuen out of the countrie and Phillip by consent of the Land receyued for King Wherevpon my Brother presently changed his minde of trauelling for Portingale and entred into seruice with an Ambassador that on the Kings behalfe was to goe into Italie with whome he rode and ariuing in Salamanca hee fell sicke of a disease called Tauardilha which at that time raigned throughout the whole Countrie of Spaine whereof many thousands died and among the rest my Brother was one This sicknesse being very contagious raigned not onely in Spaine but also in Italie Germany and almost throughout all Christendome whereof I my selfe was sicke being as then in Italie and by them it
was called Coccolucio because such as were troubled therewith were no otherwise troubled then in the throat like vnto Hennes which haue the pip after the which followed many pestilent feuers with diuers strange fits which continued not aboue foure dayes Not long before the plague was so great in Portingale that in two yeres space there died in Lisbone to the number of 80. thousand people after the which plague the saide disease ensued which wrought great destruction throughout the whole Countrie of Spaine The fift day of August in the same yeare hauing some vnderstanding in the Spanish tongue I placed my selfe with a Dutch gentleman who determined to trauaile into Portingal to sée the countrie and with him stayed to take a more conuenient time for my pretended voyage Vppon the first of September following we departed from Siuill passing through diuers Townes and Villages within eight dayes after we ariued at Badaios where I found my other Brother following the Court. At the same time died Anne de Austria Quéene of Spaine Sister to the Emperour Rodulphus and Daughter to the Emperour Maximilian the Kings fourth and last wife for whom great sorrow was made through all Spaine her body was conuaied from Badaios to the Cloyster of Saint Laurence in Escuriall where with great solemnitie it was buried We hauing stayed certaine dayes in Badaios departed from thence and passed through a Towne called Eluas about two or thrée miles off being the first towne in the kingdome of Portingale for that betwéene it and Badaios the borders of Spaine and Portingale are limited from thence we trauailed into diuers other places of Portingale and at the last ariued at Lisbone about the twenty of September following where at that time wee found the Duke of Alua beeing Gouernour there for the King of Spaine the whole Cittie making great preparation for the Coronation of the King according to the custome of their countrie Wee beeing in Lisbone through the change of aire and corruption of the countrie I fell sicke and during my sicknes was seauen times let blood yet by Gods help I escaped and being recouered not hauing much preferment vnder the gentleman I left his seruice and placed my selfe with a Marchant vntill I might attaine to better meanes About the same time the plague not long before newly begunne began againe to cease for the which cause the King till then had deferred his enterance into Lisbone which wholly ceased vppon the first day of May Anno 1581 hee entred with great triumph and magnificence into the cittie of Lisbone where aboue all others the Dutchmen had the best and greatest commendation for beautiful shews which was a Gate a Bridge that stood vppon the riuer side where the King must first passe as hee went out of his Gallie to enter into the cittie being beutified and adorned with many costly and excellent thinges most pleasant to behold euery stréet and place within the cittie being hanged with rich clothes of Tapistrie and Arras where they made great triumphes as the manner is at all Princes Coronations The same yere the twelfth of December the Duke of Alua died in Lisbone in the kings pallace being high steward of Spaine who during his sicknes for the space of fourtéene dayes receaued no sustenance but only womens milke his body beeing seared and spicen was conuaied into his countrie of Alua The same month the King beeing yet at Lisbone died Don Diego Prince of Spaine and Portingale the kings eldest son his body béeing inbalmed was conuaied to Madril after whose death the king had but one Sonne named Don Phillip and two Daughters liuing About the same time there ariued at Lisbone the kings sister widdow to the deceased Emperour Maximilian and with her one of her daughters who beeing lame was after placed in a Monasterie of Nuns they with great triumph were likewise receaued into the cittie After the death of Don Diego the kings eldest sonne all the Lordes and States of Spaine and Portingale as well spirituall as temporal assembled at Lisbone and there in the kings presence according to the ancient custome and manner of the countrie tooke their oathes of faith and allegiance vnto Don Phillip the young Prince of Spaine and next heire and lawfull successor of the lung his Father in his dominions of Spaine Portingale and other landes and countries The next yeare Anno 1582. a great nauie of ships was prepared in Lisbone whose generall was the Marquesse de sancta Cruce accompanied with the principall gentlemen and captaines both of Spaine and Portingal who at their own costs and charges therein to shew the great affection and desire they had to serue their Prince sayled with the said Nauie to the Flemmish Ilandes to fight with Don Antonio that lay about those Iles with a Fléet of frenchmen whose Generall was one Phillip Strozzi These two Fléets méeting together fought most cruelly to the great losse of both parts yet in the ende Don Antonio with his French men was ouerthrowne and many of them taken prisoners among the which were diuers gentlemen of great account in France who by the Marquis commandement were all beheaded in the Island of Saint Michaels The rest being brought into Spaine were put into the Gallies Don Antonio himselfe escaped in a small ship and the General Strozzi also who béeing hurt in y e battail died of the same wound By this victory the Spaniards were so proud that in Lisbone great triumph was holden for the same and the Marquis de Sancta Crus receiued therin with great ioy which done and all thinges being pacified in Portingale the King left his Sisters sonne Don Albertus Cardinall of Austria Gouernour of Lisbone and the whole Countrie and with the saide Cardinals mother returned and kept Court at Madrill in Spaine The 2. Chapter The beginning of my voyage into the East or Portingale Indies STaying at Lisbone the trade of Marchandize there not beeing great by reason of the newe fresh disagréeing of the Spaniards and Portingales occasion being offered to accomplish my desire there was at the same time in Lisbone a Monke of S. Dominicks order named Don frey Vincente de Fonseca of a noble house who by reason of his great learning had of long time béene Chaplen vnto Sebastian King of Portingale who beeing with him in the battaile of Barbari◠where King Sebastian was slain was taken prisoner and from thence ransomed whose learning and good behauiour beeing knowne to the King of Spaine hee made great account of him placing him in his own Chappel and desiring to prefer him the Archbishopricke of all the Indies beeing voide with confirmation of the Pope he inuested him therewith although he refused to accept it fearing the long and tedious trauaile hee had to make thether but in the end through the Kings perswasion hee tooke it vpon him with promise within foure or fiue yeares at the furthest to recall him home againe and to giue him
a better place in Portingale with the which promise he tooke the voyage vpon him I thinking vpon my affaires vsed all meanes I could to get into his seruice and with him to trauaile the voiage which I so much desired which fell out as I would wish for that my Brother that followed the Court had desired his Master beeing one of his Maiesties secretaries to make him purser in one of the ships that the same yere should saile vnto the East Indies which pleased me well in so much that his said Master was a great friend and acquaintance of the Archbishops by which meanes with small intreatie I was entertained in the Bishops seruice and amongst the rest my name was written downe wee being in all forty persons because my Brother had his choise which ship he would be in he chose the ship wherein the Archbishop sayled the better to help each other and in this manner we prepared our selues to make our voyage being in all fiue ships of the burthen of fourtéene or sixtéene hundreth Tunnes each ship their names were the Admirall S. Phillip the Vize Admirall S. Iacob These were two new ships one bearing the name of the King the other of his sonne the other thrée S Laurence S. Francisco and our shippe S. Saluator Vpon the eight of Aprill beeing good Friday in the yeare of our Lorde 1583. which commonly is the time when their ships set sayle within foure or fiue dayes vnder or ouer wee altogether issued out of the Riuer of Lisbone and put to sea setting our course for the Ilands of Madera and so putting our trust in God without whose fauour helpe we can doe nothing and all our actions are but vaine we sayled forwards Chapter 3. The manner and order vsed in the ships in their Indian Voyages THe shippes are commonlye charged with foure or fiue hundred men at the least sometimes more sometimes lesse as there are souldiers and saylers to bée found When they go out they are but lightly laden onely with certaine pipes of wine oyle and some small quantitie of Marchandize other thing haue they not in but balast victuals for the company for that the most and greatest ware that is commonly sent into India are rials of eight because the principall Factors for pepper doe euery yere send a great quantitie of mony therewith to buy pepper as also diuers particular Marchants as being the least ware that men can carry into India for that in these rials of eight they gaine at the least forty per cento when the ships are out of the riuer and enter into the sea all their men are mustered as well saylers as souldiers and such as are founde absent and left on land being registred in the bookes are marked by the purser that at their returne they may talke with their suerties for that euery man putteth in suerties and the goods of such as are absent béeing found in the ship are presently brought foorth and prised and an Inuentorie thereof béeing made it is left to bee disposed at the captaines pleasure The like is done with their goods that die in the ship but little of it commeth to the owners hands being imbeseled and priuily made away The Master and Pilot haue for their whole voyage forth and home againe each man 120. Millreyes euery Millreyes being worth in Dutch money seauen guilders and because the reckoning of Portingale monie is onely in one sort of money called Reyes which is the smalest money to bee founde in that countrie and although it bee neuer so great a summe you doe receaue yet it is alwaies reckoned by Reyes whereof 160. is as much as a Keysers gilderne or foure rials of siluer so that two reyes are foure pence and one reye two pence of Holland money I haue thought good to set it downe the better to shew and make you vnderstand the accounts they vse by reyes in the countrie of Portingale But returning to our matter I say the Master and the Pilot doe receaue before hand each man twenty foure millreyes besides that they haue chambers both vnder in the ship and cabbins aboue the hatches as also primage certaine tunnes fraught The like haue all the other officers in the ship according to their degrées and although they receaue money in hand yet it costeth them more in giftes before they get their places which are giuen by fauour and good will of the Proueador which is the chiefe officer of the Admiraltie and yet there is no certaine ordinance for their payes for that it is dayly altered but let vs reckon the pay which is commonly giuen according to the ordinance and maner of our ship for that yeare The chiefe Boteswain hath for his whole pay 50. Millreyes and receaueth ten in ready money The Guardian that is the quarter master hath 1400. reyes the month and for fraught 2800. and receaueth seuen Millreyes in ready money The Seto Piloto which is the Masters mate hath 1200. reyes which is thrée duckets the month and as much fraught as the quarter Master two Carpenters two Callafaren which helpe them haue each man foure duckets a month and 3900. Millreyes fraught The Steward that giueth out their meate and drinke and the Merinho which is he that imprisoneth men aborde and hath charge of all the munition and powder with the deliuering forth of the same haue each man a Millreyes the month and 2340. reyes fraught besides their chambers and fréedome of custome as also all other officers saylers pikemen shot c. haue euery man after the rate and euery one that serueth in the ship The Cooper hath thrée duckets a month and 3900 reyes fraught Two Strinceros those are they which hoise vp the maine yeard by a wheele and let it downe againe with a whéele as néedis haue each man one Millreyes the month and 2800. reyes fraught Thirty thrée saylers haue each man one Millreyes the month and 2800. reyes fraught 37. rowers haue each man 660. reyes the moneth and 1860. reyes fraught foure pagiens which are boyes haue with their fraught 443. reyes the month one Master gunner and eight vnder him haue each man a different pay some more some lesse The surgion likewise hath no certaine pay The factor and the purser haue no pay but only their chambers that is below vnder hatches a chamber of twentie pipes for each man ten pipes and aboue hatches each man his cabbin to sléepe in whereof they make great profit These are all the officers and other persons which sayle in the ship which haue for their portion euery day in victuals each man a like as well the greatest as the least a pound and thrée quarters of Bisket halfe a Can of Wine a Can of water an Arroba which is 32. pound of salt flesh the moneth some dryed fish onyons and garlicke are eaten in the beginning of the voyage as being of small valew other prouisions as Suger Honny Reasons Prunes
Ryse such like are kept for those which are sicke yet they get but little thereof for that the officers kéepe it for themselues and spend it at their pleasures not letting much goe out of their fingers as for the dressing of their meate wood pots and pans euery man must make his owne prouision besides all this there is a Clarke and steward for the Kings souldiers that haue their parts by themselues as the saylers haue This is the order and manner of theyr voyage when they sayle vnto the Indies but when they returne againe they haue no more but each man a portion of Bisket and water vntill they come to the Cape de Bona Esperance and from thence home they must make their own prouisions The souldiers that are passengers haue nothing els but frée passage that is roome for a chest vnder hatches and a place for their bed in the or loope and may not come away without the Viceroyes passeport and yet they must haue béene fiue yeres souldiers in the Indies before they can haue licence but the slaues must pay fraught for their bodies custome to the King as in our voyage home againe we will at large declare The 15. of Aprill we espied the Iland of Madera and Porto Sancto where the ships vse to seperate themselues each ship kéeping on his course that they may get before each other into India for their most commodities and to dispatch the sooner whereby in the night and by tides they leaue each others company each following his owne way The 24. of Aprill we fell vpon the coaste of Guinea which beginneth at nine degrées and stretcheth vntill wee come vnder the Equinoctiall where wee haue much thunder lightning and many showers of raine with stormes of wind which passe swiftly ouer yet fall with such force that at euery shower we are forced to strike sayle let the maine yeard fall to the middle of the mast many times cleane down sometimes ten or twelue times eueryday there wee finde a most extreame heate so that all the water in the ship stinketh whereby men are forced to stop their noses when they drinke but when wee are past the Equinoctiall it is good againe the nearer wee are vnto the land the more it stormeth raineth thundreth and calmeth so that most commonly the shippes are at the least two monthes before they can passe the line Then they finde a winde which they name the generall winde and it is a South east winde but it is a side wind and we must alway lie side waies in the wind almost vntill wee come to the cape de Bona Speranza and because that vpon the coast of Brasillia about 18. degrées on the south side lieth great slakes or shallowes which the Portingales call Abraâ—hos that reach 70. miles into the sea on the right side to passe them the ships hold vp most vnto the coast of Guinea and so passe the said Flattes otherwise if they fall too low and keepe inwardes they are constrained to turne againe vnto Portingale and many times in danger to be lost as it hapned to our Admirall Saint Phillip which in the yeare 1582. fell by night vpon the Flats and was in great danger to be lost yet recouered againe sayled backe to Portingale and now this yeare to shunne the Flats shee kept so neare the coast of Guinea that by meanes of the great calmes and raynes shee was forced to driue vp and downe two months together before shee could passe the line came two months after the other ships into India Therefore men must take heed and kéepe themselues from comming too neare the coast to shun the calmes and stormes and also not to hold too farre of thereby to passe the Flats shallowes wherein consisteth the whole Indian Voyage The 15. of May being about fiftie miles beyond the Equinoctiall line Northwardes we espied a French ship which put vs all in great feare by reason that most of our men were sicke as it commonly hapneth in those countries through the excéeding heate further they are for the most part such as neuer haue beene at Sea before that time so that they are not able to do much yet we discharged certaine great shot at him wherewith he left vs after he had played with vs for a smal time and presently lost the sight of him wherewith our men were in better comfort The same day about euening wee discried a great shipâ— which wee iudged to bee of our Fleet as after wee perceiued for it made towards vs to speake with vs and it was the Saint Francisco wherewith wee were glad The â—6 of May wee passed the Equinoctiall line which runneth through the middle of the Iland of Saint Thomas by the coast of Guinea and then wee began to sée the south star and to loose the north star and founde the sunne at twelue of the clocke at noone to be in the north and after that wee had a south east wind called a general wind which in those partes bloweth all the yeare through The 29. of May being Whitsonday the ships of an ancient custome doe vse to chuse an Emperour among themselues and to change all the officers in the ship and to hold a great feast which continueth thrée or foure dayes together which wee obseruing chose an Emperour and being at our banket by meanes of certaine words that passed out of some of their mouthes there fell great strife and contention among vs which procéeded so farre that the tables were throwne downe and lay on the ground and at the least a hundred rapiers drawne without respecting the Captaine or any other for he lay vnder foote and they trod vpon him and had killed each other and thereby had cast the ship away if the Archbishop had not come out of his chaÌ„ber among them willing them to cease wherwith they stayed their hands who presently commaunded euery man on paine of death that all their Rapiers Poynyardes and other weapons should bee brought into his chamber which was done whereby all thinges were pacified the first and principall beginners being punished layd in irons by which meanes they were quiet The 12. of Iune we passed beyond the afore said Flats and shallowes of Brasillia whereof all our men were excéeding glad for thereby we were assured that we should not for that time put backe to Portingale againe as many doe and then the generall wind serued vs vntill wee came to the riuer of Rio de Plata where wee got before the wind to the cape de Bona Speranza The 20. of the same month the S. Fransiscus that so long had kept vs coÌ„pany was againe out of sight and the eleauenth of Iuly after our Master iudged vs to bee about 5â— miles from the cape de Bona Speranza wherefore he was desired by the Archbishop to kéepe in with the land that wee might sée the Cape It was then mistie weather so that as we
some after towards Portingall with whom my brother went because of his office in the shippe and I stayed with my maister in India certaine yeares to sée and learne the maners and customes of the said lands people fruites wares and merchandises with other thinges which when time serueth I wil in truth set downe as I my selfe for the most parte haue séene it with mine eyes and of credible persons both Indians and other inhabiters in those Countries learned and required to know as also the report and fame thereof is nowe sufficiently spread abroade throughout the world by diuers of our neighbour countries and landes which traffique and deale with them namely our countrey the East Countries England Fraunce c. which likewise are founde and knowne by the Portingalles themselues which dayly trafficke thither But before I beginne to describe Goa and the Indies concerning their manners traffiques fruites wares and other thinges the better to vnderstande the situation of the Countrey and of the coasts lying on the East side to the last and highest part of the borders of China which the Portingales haue trauelled and discouered together with their Ilandes I will first set downe a briefe note of the Orientall coastes beginning at the redde or the Arabian sea from the towne of Aden to Chinae and then the description of the coastes before named Chapter 5. The description of the coast of Arabia Felix or the red Sea to the Iland and fortresse of Ormus ADen is the strongest and fairest towne of Arabia Felix situate in a valley compassed about vpon the one side with strong mines on the other side with high mountaines there are in it fiue Castles laden with Ordinance and a continuall Garrison kept therein because of the great number of shippes that sayle before it the Towne hath about 6000. houses in it where the Indians Persians Aethiopians and Turkes doe trafique and because the Sunne is so extreame hotte in the daye time they make most of their bargaines by night About a stones cast from the towne there is a hill with a great Castle standing thereon wherein the Gouernor dwelleth In times past this towne stoode vpon the firme land but nowe by the labour industrie of man they haue made it an Iland Aden lieth on the North side at the entrie of the red Sea on the coast of Arabia Felix or fruitfull Arabia and reacheth 60. miles more inwards then the corner or Cape de Guardafum the farthest part or corner of Abex or Melinde as I said before but the coast of Arabia which taketh the beginning from Aden is much more inwarde Aden lieth vnder 13. degrées on the North side and from thence the coast lyeth Northeast and by East till you come to Cape de Rosalgate which lyeth vnder 22. degrées and is the further corner of the lande of Arabia Felix lying on the Indian Sea which is distant from Aden 240. miles the towne of Aden standeth by the hill called Darsira which men affirme to bee onely Cliffes of hard stones and red Marble where it neuer rayneth The people of this coast of Arabia are tawnie of colour almost like those of the coast of Abex or Melinde frō that Countrie they bring great numbers of good horses into India and also Frankensence Mirhe Balsam Balsam woode and fruite and some Manna with other swéete wares and Spices they hold the law of Mahomet after the Persians manner From the Cape of Rosalgate inwardes following the coast North-west to the Cape de Moncado in times past named Albora are 70. miles This point lyeth right against the Iland Ormus vnder 26. degrées There beginneth the entrance of the straights of Persia called Sinus Persicus and the Iland Ormus lyeth betwéene them both hauing on the one side Arabia and on the other side Northward the Countrie of Persia and is in breadth 20. miles From the Cape de Moncadon coasting the Arabian shore inwardes to the Iland of Barem are 80. miles and lyeth vnder 26. degrées a halfe There the Captaine of Ormus being a Portingal hath a factor for the King and there they fish for the best Pearles in all the East Indies and are the right orientall Pearle Coasting along this shore from Barem inwardes to the farthest and outermost corner of Persia or Sinus Persicus lyeth the towne of Balsora which are 60. miles this Towne lyeth vnder 30. degrées and a little about it the two ryuers Tigris and Euphrates do méete and ioyne in one and runne by Bassora into the aforesaide Sinus Persicus Thereabout do◠yet appeare the decayed buildings and auncient Ruines of old Babylon and as many learned men are of opinion thereabout stoode the earthly Paradice From the towne of Balsora the coast runneth againe Northward towards Ormus which is vnder the Dominion of the Persian this Sinus Persicus is about 40. miles broad not much more nor much lesse and hath diuers Ilands and in the mouth therof lyeth the rich Iland Ormus where the Portingales haue a Forte and dwell altogether in the I le among the naturall borne countrimen and haue a Captaine and other officers euery thrée yeares as they of Mossambique Chapter 6. Of the Iland and Towne of Ormus ORmus lyeth vpon the Iland Geru in times past called Ogyris and it is an Iland and a kingdom which the Portingales haue brought vnder their subiection whereas yet their King hath his residence that is to saye without the towne where the Portingales inhabite These people obserue Mahomets law and are white like the Persians And there they haue a common custome that he which is King doth presently cause al his brethren and his kinsmen of the Male kinde to haue their eyes put forth which done they are all richly kept and maintained during their liues for that there is a law in Ormus that no blinde man may bee their King nor Gouernour ouer them Therefore the King causeth them all to haue their eyes put out so to be more secure in their gouernmentes as also to auoide all strife and contention that might arise and to hold and maintaine their countrey in peace The Island is about thrée miles great very full of cliffes and rockes and altogether vnfruitfull It hath neyther gréene leafe nor hearbe in it nor any swéete water but onely rockes of salte stones whereof the walles of their houses are made it hath nothing of it selfe but only what it fetcheth from the firme lande on both sides as well out of Persia as from Arabia and from the Towne of Bassora but because of the situation and pleasantnes of the Iland there is al things therein to bee had in great abundance and greate traffique for that in it is the staple for all India Persia Arabia and Turkie and of all the places and Countries about the same commonly it is full of Persians Armenians Turkes and all nations as also Venetians which lie there to buy Spices and precious stones that in great abundance are brought
thether out of all parts of India and from thence are sent ouer land to Venice and also carried throughout all Turkie Armenia Arabia Persia and euery way There are likewise brought thether all manner of marchandises from those Countries that is from Persia out of the Countrie named Coracone and Dâ—aâ— and other places great store of rich Tapestrie Couerlets which are called Alcatiffâ—s out of Turkie all manner of Chamlets out of Arabia diuers sortes of Drugges for Poâ—icaries as Sanguis draconis Manna Mirre Frankinsence such like diuers goodly horses that are excellent for bréeding all manner of most excellent Orientall Pearles out of Mascatte a Hauen lying betwéene the Cape of Roselgate and Moncadon vppon the coast of Arabia diuers sorts of Dates and Marmelades which from Ormus is carried into India and all places are serued therewith likewise the money called Larynen which hath as it were two legges stretching out like a péece of siluer wide that is beaten flat printed about with certain small Characters which is coyned in Persia at a place called Lary being fine Siluer is brought thether in great quantities wherby there is as great dealing with them as with other marchandises because of the greate gaine that is gotten by them and in India they goe very high Now to know the cause of so great traffique and concourse of people in this Ilande of Ormus you must vnderstand that euery yeare twice there commeth a great companie of people ouer land which are called Caffiles or Carâ—anes which come from Aleppo out of the Countrie of Surie thrée daies iornie from Tripoli which lyeth vppon the coast of the Mediterranean Sea this companie of people or Caffila obserue this order that is euery yeare twice in the months of Aprill and September There is a Captaine and certain hundreths of â—annisaries which conuaye the said Caffila vntill they come to the Towne of Bassora from whence they trauaile by water vnto Ormus The marchants know the times when the Caruana or Caffila will come so that against that time they make and prepare their marchandises in a readinesse and then are brought thether diuers Cammels Dromedaries Moyles and horses euerye man his troope which are there likewise to bee solde so that there are assembled at the least fiue or sixe thousand persons all together and ryde all in order like a battell that marcheth in the fielde two and two vpon a Cammell or else ware hanging on both sides of the Cammel as you shal sée in the Picture that followeth With a good garde of â—anisaries because they are often times set vpon by the Arabians which are great théeues and come to robbe them for they must trauaile in the woods at the least fortie daies together wher in euery thrée or foure dayes they finde wels or pits from wheÌ„ce they prouide themselues of water which they carrie with them in beastes skins tanned whereof they make Flaskes and Botles The people nowe of late yeares haue left off their robbing and stealing in the hiph waies but long before the birth of Christ they vsed it as the Prophet Ieremie doth witnes saying in his third Chapter and second verse Lift vp your eyes and behold what fornicatioÌ„ you commit in euery place you sit in the streetes and stay for your companions like the Arabian in the woodes c. I remember that wee fell among many thousande of these people which in great pouertie dwell within the woodes and sandie downes that are altogether barren where they liue in the heate of the Sunnes lying with their Cammels getting their lyuing only by robbing and stealing their meate and best breade are Cakes which they bake vnder Cammels dung dried in the Sunne which the Sand maketh hotte and Cammels Milke and flesh with such like vnprofitable meate to conclude they liue like miserable men as in truth they are Likewise ther are certaine victualers that follow this companie which carrie all kinde of things with theÌ„ as Honie Dates Shéepe Goates Hens Egges c. and all other sorts of victuals and prouision so that for money they may haue what they will euery night they lie still and haue their Tents wherein they sléepe kéeping good watch in this manner they trauaile to the Towne of Bassora and passe through Babylon now called Bagedet and through other places Being at Bassora they stay their certaine daies wher againe they assemble themselues to returne home and trauaile in the like sorte backe againe vnto Aleppo whereby all manner of marchandises out of all places are brought thether in great aboundance by great numbers of traueling Marchants of al nations whatsoeuer except Spaniards Portingals and the King of Spaines subiects which are narrowly looked vnto although diuers times many of them passe among the rest vnder the names of French men English men or Venetians which nations haue their factors and seruants continually resident in Aleppo as also in Tripoli where their dayly traffique is from Venice Marsellis and London and in Tripoli they vnlade their wares and there the shippes take in their lading and from thence they send their marchandises by land to and from Aleppo where they vse great traffique and haue many priuiledges and freedomes graunted them by the great Turke And for that wee are nowe speaking of Turks I must not forget to shew you how and in what sort the great Turke hath euery day newes and letters from all his kingdomes Countries that are so great wild wast and spread so farre abroad one from the other You must vnderstand that throughout the whole Countrie of Turkie they vse Doues or Pigeons which are brought vp accustomed thereunto hauing rings aboute their legges These Doues or Pigions are borne from Bassora and Babylon vnto Aleppo and Constantinople and so from thence backe againe and when there is any great occasion of importance to bee aduertised or sent they make the letter fast vnto the ring that is about the Pigions féete and so let them flie whereby the letter with the Doue is brought vnto the place whither it should goe and they flie sometimes a thousand miles which men would thinke impossible but yet it is most true and affirmed by such as come from thence I haue séene of the Doues in India that a Venetian my good friend shewed me which for the strangenesse thereof had brought of them with him into India But let vs now returne vnto our matter of the I le of Ormus which lyeth vnder 27. degrées and in Sommer time is so vnreasonable and intollerable hotte that they are forced to lie and sléepe in wooden Cesterns made for the purpose full of water and all naked both men and women lying cleane vnder water sauing only their heads al their houses are flat aboue and in the toppes therof they make holes to let the ayre come in like those of Cayro and they vse certaine instruments like Waggins with bellowes to beare the people in and together winde to coole
them withall which they call Catâ—auentos Cayrus hath very high houses with broad peint-houses to yeelde shadowe therby to auoide the heate of the Sunne in the middle of these houses are greate Pipes of ten cubites longe at the least which stand Northward to conuaye and spread the colde ayre into their houses specially to coole the lowest romes In winter time it is as colde with them as it is in Portingale the water that they drinke is brought from the firme land which they kéepe in great pots as the Tinaios in Spaine and in Cesternes whereof they haue verie great ones within the fortresse which water for a yeare or a yeare and a halfe against they shall neede like those of Mossambique They fetch water by the Iland of Barein in the Sea from vnder the salt water with instruments foure or fiue fadome déepe which is verie good and excellent sweete water as good as any fountaine water There is in Ormus a sickenesse or common Plague of Wormes which growe in their legges it is thought that they procéede of the water that they drink These wormes are like vnto Lute strings and about two or thrée fadomes longe which they must plucke out and winde them aboute a Straw or a Pin euerie day some part therof as longe as they féele them creepe and when they hold still letting it rest in that sort till the next daye they binde it fast and annoynt the hole and the swelling from whence it commeth foorth with fresh Butter and so in ten or twelue dayes they winde them out without any let in the meane time they must sit still with their legges for if it should breake they should not without great paine get it out of their legge as I haue séen some men doe Of these wormes Alsaharanius in his practise in the 11. Chapter writeth thus In some places there grow certaine Wormes betweene the skinne and the flesh which sicknesse is named the Oxen paine because the Oxen are manye times grieued therewith which stretch themselues in great length creepe vnder the skin so long till that they pearce it the healing thereof consisteth in purging the body of corrup fleame c. Reade further In my master the Archbishops house we had one of his seruants borne in Ormus newly come from thence which drewe thrée or The 8. Chapter Of the towne fortresse and Island of Diu in times past called Alambater THe Towne and Ilande of Diu lyeth distant from the ryuer Indo 70. miles vnder 21. degrées close to the firme land in times past it belonged to y e King of Cambaia in whose land and coast it lyeth where the Portingals by negligence of the Kinge haue built a fortresse in processe of time haue brought the Towne and the whole Iland vnder their subiection and haue made it very strong in a manner inuincible which fortresse hath béene twice besieged by souldiers of Cambaia and their assistants first in Anno 1539. and secondly in Anno 1546. and hath alwaies béene valiantly defended by the Portingals as their Chronicles rehearse This Towne hath a very great Hauen and great traffique although it hath verye little or nothing at all of it selfe more then the situation of the place for that it lyeth betwéen Sinde and Cambaia which Countries are abundant in all kind of things wherby Diu is alwaies ful of strange nations as Turks Persians Arabians Armenians and other countrie people and it is the best the most profitable reuenue the King hath throughout all India for that the Banianen Gusaratten Rumos and Persians which traffique in Cambaia from thence to Mecca or the red Sea doe commonly discharge their wares and take in their lading in Diu by reason of the situation thereof for that it lyeth in the entrance of Cambaia and from Diu it is shipped and sent to Cambaia and so brought backe againe to Diu. The Towne of Diu is inhabited by Portingals together with the natural borne Countrimen like Ormus and al the townes places holden by the Portingals in India yet they kéepe their fortresse strong vnto themselues This Iland aboundeth and is very fruitfull of all kind of victuals as Oxen Kine Hogges Shéepe Hennes Butter Milke Onions Garlicke Pease Beanes and such like whereof there is great plentie and that very good and such as better cannot be made in all these Low-countries but that the Fuell is not so well drest they haue likewise Chéeses but they are very drie and sault much Fish which they sault and it is almost like vnto salt Ling or Codde and of other sortes they make hanged flesh which is very good and will continue for a whole Viage of all these victuals and necessarie prouisions they haue so great quantity that they supply the want of all the places round about them especially Goa and Cochin for they haue neither Butter Onyons Garlicke Pease Oyle nor graine as Beanes Wheat or any séede they must all bee brought from other places thether as in the orderly description of the coast as it lyeth I will shew you what wares goods marchandises victuals fruites and other things each lande Prouince or Countrie yéeldeth and affordeth From Diu sayling along by the coast about fiftéene or sixtéene miles beginneth the mouth of the water that runneth to Cambaia which is at the entrie and all along the said water about 18. miles broade and 40. miles long and runneth in North-east and by North and at the farther ende of the water is the Towne of Cambaia whereof the whole Countrie beareth the name and lyeth vnder twentie thrée degrées there the King or Solden holdeth his Court. The 9. Chapter Of the kingdome and land of Cambaia THe land of Cambaia is the fruitfullest Countrie in all India and from thence prouision of necessaries is made for all places round about it whereby there is a greate traffique in the Towne as well of the inhabitants as other Indians and neighbors as also of Portingals Persians Arabians Armenians c. The King obserueth the law of Mahomet but most parte of the people that are dwellers and naturall borne Countrimen called Gusarates and Baneanem obserue Pythagoras law are the subtilest and pollitiquest Marchauntes of all India whose counterfets and shapes are placed in this booke by those of India with a description of their liuing ceremonies customes as in time and place shall be shewed This lande of Cambaia aboundeth in all kinde of victuals as Corne Rice and such like grain also of Butter and Oyle wherewith they furnish all the Countries round about them There is made great store of Cotton Linnen of diuers sorts which are called Cannequins Boffetas Iorims Chauâ—ares and Cotonias which are like Canuas thereof do make sayles and such like things and many other sortes that are very good and cheape They make some therof so fine that you can not perceyue the thréedes so that for finenesse it surpasseth any Holland cloth they make
hath likewise a market euery day where all kind of thinges are to be bought as in Cananor but in greater quantities The land of Cochin is an Island and it is in many places compassed about and through the Isle with small Riuers Right ouer against Cochin Northwarde lyeth an other Island called Vaypiin which is likewise compassed about with water like the fortresse of Cranganor all these landes and Countries are low and flat land like the Countrie of Holland but haue no ditches nor downes but onely the flat shore vpon the Sea side and within the shore the Strand of the ryuer nor without any high ground or shelters and so it still continueth The Countrie is verye great and pleasant to behold full of woodes and trees it hath also woods of Cinamon trées which are called Canella de Maâ—es that is wilde CinamoÌ„ which is not so good as the Cinamon of Seyloâ— for when the Cinamon of Seyloâ— is worth 1â—0 Pardaâ—eÌ„ or Dollers that Cinamon is worth but 5 or 3â— Pardaâ—wen and is likewise forbidden â—o bee carried into Portingale notwithstanding There is euery yeare great quantitie thereof shipped but it is entred in the Custome bookes for Cinamon of Seylon whereby they pay the King his full Custome for the best Cochin hath also much Pepper and can euery yeare lade two ships full other shippes lade along the coast at the fortresse aforesaid vse to come vnto Cochin after they haue discharged all their Portingal wares and Marchandises at Goa and thether also come the Factors and Marchants and lade their wares as in my Voyage homewards I will declare Without Cochin among the Malabares there dwelleth also diuers Moores that belieue in Mahomet and many Iewes that are very rich and there liue fréely without being hindred or impeached for their religion as also the Mahometans with their churches which they cal Mesquiten the Bramanes likewise which are the Spiritualitie of the Malabares Indians haue their Idols and houses of Diuels which they call Pagodes These thrée nations doe seuerally holde maintaine their lawes and ceremonies by them selues and liue friendly and quietly together kéeping good pollicie and iustice each nation béeing of the Kinges counsell with his Naires which are his gentilmen and nobilitie so that when any occasion of importaunce is offered then al those thrée nations assemble themselues together wherein the King putteth his trust of the which King and his Naires Malabare and Baâ—amenes c. with their maners customes aparrell Idols pagodes and ceremonies in an other place I will shewe you more at large together with their pictures couÌ„terfetes and for this time I cease to speake thereof wil procéede in the description of the coasts which I haue already beguÌ„ From Cochin to Coulon are 12. myles and lyeth vnder 9 degrées it is also a fortresse of the Portingals where likewise euery yere they lade a ship with pepper from Couâ—on to the cape de Comori are 20. myles this corner lieth full vnder 7. degrées a half which is the end of the coast of Malabar of India The 12. Chapter The description of the kings the diuision of the land and coast of Malabar and their originall TO vnderstand the gouernment and diuisions of the laÌ„d of Malabar you must know that in tymes past but long sithence the whole land of Mâ—labar was ruled by one King being then but one kingdome where now are manie and as the Malabares saye the last king that ruled the whole couÌ„try alone was named Sarama Perimal in whose time the Arabian Mahometanes much frequented the couÌ„trie of Malabar because of the great trafique of Spices which as then were sent from thence to the red sea and so conueyed into all places of the world Those Arabians by their subtilties delt in such manner with the King that they perswaded him and many of his couÌ„try to beleue in the lawe of Mahomet as they did almost throughout whole India and other orientall couÌ„tries and Ilands which is one of the principalest occasions why they can hardly be brought to beleue in Christ but rather seeke by all meanes to ouerthrowe the Christians and to fight against the Portingales in those countries as in the Portingal Chronicles and Histories of the first discouery and conquest of the Indies is at large described But returning to our matter this King Sarama was so déepely rooted in his new sect of Mahometes law that he determined in him selfe to leaue his kingdome and goe on pilgrimage to Mecca to see Mahomets graue and there to ende his lyfe in so holy an exercise thinking thereby to be saued which in the end he brought to effect And because he had neither childreÌ„ nor heyres to possesse his kingdome he deuided the same among his chiefest best seruaÌ„ts frieÌ„ds giuing to one Cochin to an other Cananor to the third Chale to the fourth Coulon c. and so he delt with all the other places of his dominions making euery one of those places a kingdome The town of Calicut he gaue to one of his best beloued seruaÌ„ts together with the title of Samoriin which is as much to say as Emperour and chief of al the rest and commanded that they should all acknowledge him as their Soueraigne and they his vassalles and at his commandement whereby euen vntill this time the King of Calicut holdeth the name of Samoriin with the commandement and authoritie ouer the other kings throughout the whole countrie of Malabar by such means as you haue heard before which done the king weÌ„t on pilgrimage to Mecca wher he ended his dayes and the Samoriin with the other kings continued each man in his newe kingdome whose successors vntill this day doe continue and gouerne the said kingdomes onely the Samoriin is somewhat imbased and the king of Cochin exalted since the Portingals ariued in the Indies as it is said before These Malabares are excellent good soldiours and goe naked both men and women onely their priuy members couered and are the principallest enemies that the Portingals haue and which doe them most hurt and although commonlie they haue peace with the Samoriin and hold so many forts vpon the land as you haue heard before yet the Malabares haue their hauens as Chale Calicut Cunhale Panane and others from whence with boates they mak roads into the sea and doe great mischief making many a poore merchant The Samoriin likewise when the toy taketh him in the head breaketh the peace that by the counsell of the Mahometanes who in all things are enemies to the Christians séeke to do them mischief and because of the Malabares inuasions the Portingall fléet is forced euery yeare to put forth of Goa in the summer-time to kéepe the coast and to preserue the merchants that trauaill those couÌ„tries from y e Malabars for that the most traffique in India is in Foists like galleyes wherein they traffique from the one place to the other which is
their daylie liuing occupations as it shal be shewed at large and yet there are continuall pyracies committed on the sea what order soeuer they take wherby poore marchaÌ„ts are taken prisoners robbed of all they haue The land throughout is very fruitfull gréene and pleasant to beholde but hath a very noysome and pestiferous ayre for such as are not borne in the countrie and yet pepper doth onely growe on this coast although some groweth by Mallacca in certaÌ„e parts of the land but not so much for from hence is it laden and conueyed throughout the whole world The 13. Chapter Of the Ilands called Maldyua otherwise Maldyua RIght ouer against the cape of Comoriin 60. miles into the sea westward the Ilands called Maldyua doe begin and from this cape on the North syde they lie vnder 7. degrées so reach south south east till they come vnder 3. degrées on the south side which is 140. myles Some say there are 11000. Ilands but it is not certainely knowne yet it is most true they are so many that they can not be numbred The Inhabitants are like the Malabares some of these Ilands are inhabited and some not inhabited for they are very lowe ground like the countrie of Cochin Cranganor c. and some of them are so lowe that they are commonlie couered with the sea the Malabares say that those Ilandes in time past did ioyne fast vnto the firme land of Malabar were part of the same land and that the Sea in processe of tyme hath eaten them away so separated them from the firme land There is no merchandize to be had in them but only coquen which are Indian nuttes and cayro which are the shelles of the same nuts that is the Indian hemp wherof they mak ropes cables and other such like commodities those are there to be found in so great aboundance that with them they serue the whole country of India and al the oriental coast of the wood of the same trées they make themselues boats after their manner with all things to them belonging of the leaues they make sayles sowed together with strings made of the nutshelles without any iron nayles and so being laden with the nuttes and other parts of the said trées they come and trafficke with those of the firme land their victuals in the ship being the fruite of the same trée so that to conclude the boate with all her furnitures their marchandises and their victuals is all of this palme trée and that maintaineth all the inhabitants of the Ilands of Maldyua and therewith they trafficke throughout India there are some of these nuttes in the said Iland that are more estéemed then all the nuttes in India for that they are good against all poyson which are verie faire and great and blackish I saw some that were preseÌ„ted vnto the vice roy of India as great as a vessell of 2. tuÌ„nes Indian measure and cost aboue 300. Pardawen which were to send vnto the King of Spaine Of this trée and her fruites together with the vsage thereof I will discourse more at large in the declaring of the Indian trées fruites meane time I will returne to the description of the coasts with their situations From the cape of Comoriin the coast beginneth North east to turne inwards again till you come to the Cape of Negapatan which lyes vnder 11. degrées and is 60. myles distant from the cape of Comoriin From the cape of Comoriin South east by South about 40 miles into the sea lieth the furthest corner of the great Iland of Seylon and so reacheth North and by east vntill you come right ouer against the cape of Negapatan being distant from the firme land the same cape 10. miles and betwéene the firme land and that Iland there lyeth some drie groundes or lytle Ilands whereby it is manie times dangerous for the Shippes that sayle vnto Bengala and the coast of Choâ—amandel which commonly passe through that way The Iland of Seylon is in length 60. miles and in breadth 40. miles from the first and vttermost corner North by east about 18. miles vnder 7. degrées and an halfe lyeth a fort belonging to the Portingals called Columbo which by méere force great charges is holden and maintained for that they haue no other place or péece of ground no not one foot but that in all the Iland it is but a small fort yet very strong and well guarded The soldiers that are therein are commonly such as are banished for some offence by them coÌ„mitted or such as haue deserued death and some dishonest women for some euill fact are put in there to beare them company They fetch al their necessaries out of India and are often times assailed by their enemies the Inhabitants of the Iland and often times besieged but alwaies valiantly defend themselues The 14. Chapter Of the Iland of Seylon THe Iland of Seylon is said to be one of the best Ilands that in our time hath béene discouered and the fruitfullest vnder the heauens well built with houses and inhabited with people called Cingalas and are almost of shape and manners like to those of Malabar with long wyde eares but not so blacke of colour they goe naked onely their members couered they were wont to haue but one King but hauing murdered their king they deuided their countrie into manie kingdomes and not long since a simple barber murthered their chief king with great tyrannie brought the kingdome vnder his subiection driuing the other kings out of the countrie whereof one that was a Christian fled into India and dwelleth at Goa where he is kept maintained at the kings charge This barber as it is said hath made himselfe king and the whole Iland vnder his subiection his name was Raju he liueth verie warily and is verie subtill a good soldier but trusting no man the Chingalans are not his good friends yet they liue in obedieÌ„ce vnder him more through force and feare then for loue or good wil for that he causeth them with great tyrannie to be executed so that no man dareth stirre against him he is likewise a deadly enemie to the Portingall and about a yeare before I came from India he had besieged the fort of Columbo with a great nuÌ„ber of Elephants and men but by meanes of y e Portingals that came thither out of India he was constrayned to breake vp his siege before the fortresse The Iland is full of hils and there is one hill so high that it is reported to be the highest hill in all India and is called Picode Adam The Indians hold for certane that Paradice was in that place and that Adam was created therein saying that yet vntill this daye there are some of his footsteps fouÌ„d vpon that hill which are within the stones as if they were ingrauen and neuer goe out The Iland is full of all sorts of Indian fruites and of al kind of wild beasts as
harts hindes wild bores hayres coneys and such like in great abundance of all sorts of foules as peacoks hennes doues and such like and for oringes lemons and citrons it hath not onely the best in al India but better then any are found either in Spaine or Portingal to conclude it hath many and almost all things that are found in India through all the seuerall prouinces and places thereof it hath also manie Indian palme trees or nut trees which are called cocken and certane credible persons doe affirme which told it mée that in the same Iland are nutmegges Cloues and Pepper trées although there is no certaintie thereof for that as yet they haue not béene brought or vttered to sell among the Christians but the best Cinamon in all the east countries is there to be had where it groweth in whole woodes and from thence is dispersed into all places of the world The Captaine that kéepeth the fort is forced by stealth in the night time to issue forth fetch this Cinamon into his fort whereof he maketh his principal profite for much more profite hath he not This Iland hath likewise al kindes of precious stones except Diamonds but Saphires Rubies Topasâ—es Spâ—nelen â—ranaden Robâ—ssen c. the best in all the East it hath likewise a fishing for Pearles but yet they are not so good as those that are at Bareiin by Ormus it hath likewise mynes of Gold siluer and other metals The Kings of the Iland will not digge it forth but kéepe it for a great state honor I thinke rather it is but Latteâ— because no man ventureth for it it hath also yron Flaxe Brimstone and such like ware also many Iuorie banes and diuers Elephantes which are accounted for the best in all India and it is by daylie experience found to be true that the Elephantes of all other places and couÌ„tries being brought before them they honour and reuerence those Elephantes the natural borne people or Chingalas are very cunning workmen in Gold Siluer Iuory Yron and all kindes of metal that it is wonderful they are much estéemed for the same through al India and beare the name and prayse aboue all the rest of the Indians they make the fairest barrels for péeces that may be fouÌ„d in any place which shine as bright as if they were Siluer My maister the Archbishop had a crucifixe of Iuorie of an elle long presented vnto him by one of the inhabitants of the I le made by him so cunningly â—rkmanly wrought that in the hayre beard and face it séemed to be aliue in al other parts so neatly wrought and proportioned in limmes that the like can not be done in all Europe Whereupon my maister caused it to be put into a case and sent vnto the king of Spaine as a thing to be woÌ„dered at and worthy of so great a Lord to be kept among his costliest Iewels In such things they are very expert and wonderful and maruelous nimble and expert in iugling as well men as women and trauell throughout the countrie of India to get money carying hobbyhorses with theÌ„ very strange to behold And this shall suffice at this present for the description of the I le of Seylon now I will procéede to shewe you of the coast of Choramandel where wée left before being at the cape of Negapatan The 15. Chapter Of the coast of Choramandel and the kingdome of Narsinga or Bisnagar THe coast of Choramandel beginneth from the cape of Negapatan and so stretcheth North by East vnto a place called Musulepatan which is 90. miles and lieth vnder 16. degrées and a half Betwéene these two places vpon the same coast lyeth a place called S. Thomas vnder 13. degrées an halfe and is 40. miles distant from Negapatan This place and Negapatan are inhabited by the Portingales and in al the other places along the coast they haue traffique and dealiâ— The aforesaid place called S. Thomas was in time past a towne of great traffique and as then called by the name of Meliapor and belonged to the kingdome of Narsinga whose king is now commonly called king of Bisnagar which is the name of his chief Citie where he kéepeth his court This Towne lieth within the land and is nowe the chiefâ— cittie of Narsinga and of the coast of Choramandel The naturall countrimen are for manners customes ceremonies like those of Ballagate decaminâ— Canaras for they are al one people but only separate by seueral places kingdoms and y e better to vnderstand wherefore this place was named S. Thomas the Indians say that in the time when the Apostles were sent spread abroad to preach the Gospell of our sauiour Christ throughout the whole world that S. Thomas the apostle came into that kingdome of Narsinga after he had bene in diuers places of India teaching preaching the word of God vnto those Indians and vnbeleuing people but litle profited therein for so say the Christians that are come of those same Countriemen which S. Thomas conuerted and baptised in the faith of Christ whom the Portingals found there at such time as they entered into the country and yet find many of them obseruing the ceremonies of the Gréek Church in the Chaldean tong that by no meanes will ioine with the Portingales in their ceremonies but not long sithence at the time of my béeing in India there was one of their Bishops that by land trauelled to Rome and there submitted himself to the Romish Church yet obseruing and holding their ancient ceremonies and customes which by the Pope was still permitted vnto them and when my Lord the Archbishop held a prouinciall counsell within the citie of Goa where his suffraganes were assembled that is to say y e bishops of Cochin Malacca and China to authorize the same the aforesayd Bishop was likewise called thether who as then was newlie come from Rome being made an Archbishop and was personally in the counsell but would not in any sort consent vnto the altering or changing of anie points of his Religion or ceremonies from the suffraganes from his Christians which were commonly called S. Thomas Christians But returning to our matter they say that when S. Thomas had long preached and taught in the kingdome of Narsinga From Musulepatan the coast runneth again Northeast and by East to the kingdom of Bengalen which is 120. miles and it is the lande and kingdome of Orixa which stretcheth along the same coast vnto the Riuer of Ganges the beginning of the kingdom of Bengalen This coast of Narsinga Bisnagar and Orixa are by the Portingalles commonly called as also the coast of Negapatan and Saint Thomas Choramandel vntil you come to Bengalen where the Portingalles haue great traffique for that it is a very rich and plentiful Country of all things as Ryce and all manner of fowles and beasts in great abundance It is also a holesome countrey and a good ayre for strange nations for that
the Portingals and other countreymen can better brooke it then other places in India From these coastes they vse great traffique vnto Bengala Pegu Sian Malacca and also to India there is excellent faire linnen of Cotton made in Negapatan Saint Thomas and Musulepatan of all colours and wouen with diuers sorts of loome workes and figures verie fine and cunningly wrought which is much worne in India and better estéemed then silke for that it is higher prised then silke because of the finenes cuÌ„ning workmaÌ„ship they are called Rechatas Cheylas wherof the Christians Portingals in India do commoÌ„ly make bréeches They likewise make clothes thereof for women to put about them from their nauelles downeward bound about their bodies which they weare within the house very finely made the best sort are named clothes of Sarasso some being mingled with thréedes of golde and siluer and such like stuffe of a thousand sortes very beautifull to behold wherewith they cloath themselues in very comely manner In this coast growe the great and thicke réeds which are vsed in India to make the Pallankins wherein they carry the women as in the Indian figures you shall sée which are so thicke that a man can hardly gripe them with both his handes very faire to looke vpon and very high being of diuers colours as blacke redde c. Whereof in an other place I will say more The 16. Chapter Of the Kingdome of Bengalen and the riuer Ganges AT the ende of the Kingdome of Orixa and the â—ast of â—horamandel beginneth the Riuer Ganges in the kingdom of Bengalen This is one of the most famous Riuers in all the world and it is not knowne from whence it springeth Some are of opinion that it commeth out of the earthly paradise because of an old speech of the Bengalers which is that in time past a certaine King of Bengalen was desirous to know froÌ„ whence the riuer Ganges hath her beginning to the which ende hee caused certaine people to bee brought vp and nourished with nothing but rawe fish and such like foode thereby to make them the apter to accomplish his desire which people hauing made boats fitte for the purpose he sent vp the riuer who were certain monthes vpon the water so long til they came where they felt a most pleasant and swéete sauour and founde a very cleare and most temperate skie with still and pleasant water that it séemed vnto them to bee an earthly paradise and being desirous to rowe further vpwardes they could not so that they were compelled séeing no remedie to returne againe the same way that they came and being returned certified the King what they had séene They that will not credit this are hard of beliefe for my parte I leaue it to the readers iudgement This Riuer hath Crocodiles in it like the riuer of Nilus in Aegipt the mouth or entry thereof lyeth vnder 22. degrées and the coast runneth East and by South to the Kingdome of Aracan which is about 80. miles it is an vneuen coast full of Islandes sholes hookes and créekes for the lande of Bengalen lyeth inwards of the gulf which is called Bengala for that froÌ„ Aracan the coast beginneth againe to runne South and East outwardes towardes Malacca and to the vttermost hooke which is called Singapura But returning to Bengala and the Riuer Ganges you must vnderstand that this riuer is holden and accounted of all the Indians to be a holy and a blessed water and they do certainely belieue that such as wash and bath themselues therein bee they neuer so great sinners all their sinnes are cleane forgiuen them and that from thenceforth they are so cleane and pure from sinne as if they were newe borne againe and also that hee which washeth not himself therein cannot be saued for the which cause there is a most great and incredible resorte vnto the same from all the partes of India the East countries in great troupes where they vse diuers strange ceremonies and superstitions most horrible to heare for they doe most stedfastly beléeue that they shall thereby merit eternall life From thâ— Riuer Eastward 50. miles lyeth the towne of Chatigan which is the chief towne of Bengala The naturall borne people of Bengala are in a manner like those of Seylon but somewhat whiter then y e Chingalas they are a most subtill and wicked people and are estéemed the worst slaues of all India for that they are all théeues and the women whores although this fault is common throughout all India no place excepted They haue a custome that they neuer dresse or séeth meat twice in one pot but haue euery time a new pot Whensoeuer they are found in adulterie they haue their noses cut off and from that time forwarde they must leaue ech others company which is most narrowly looked vnto by their law The countrey is most plentiful of necessary victuails specially Rice for that there is more of it in that countrey then in al the cast countries for they do yearly lade diuers shippes therewith which come thether from all places and there is neuer any want thereof and all other things in like sort and so good cheape that it were incredible to declare for that an Oâ—e or a Cowe is there to be bought for one Lariâ—n which is as much as halfe a Gilderne Shéepe Hens and other things after the like rate a Candit of Ryce which is as much little more or lesse as fourteene bushelles of Flemmish measure is sold there for halfe a Gilderne and for halfe a Doller Sugar and other ware accordingly whereby you may wel conceiue what plentie they haue The Portingalles deale traffique thether and some places are inhabited by them as the hauens which they call Porto grande and Porto pequeno that is the great hauen and the little hauen but there they haue no Fortes nor any gouernement nor policie as in India they haue but liue in a manner like wild men and vntamed horses for that euery man doth there what hee will and euery man is Lord and maister neyther estéeme they any thing of iustice whether there be any or none and in this manner doe certayne Portingalles dwell among them some here some there scattered abroade and are for the most part such as dare not stay in India for some wickednesse by them committed notwithstanding there is great trafficke vsed in those partes by diuers ships and marchants which all y e year diuers times both go come to and from all the Orientall parts Besides their Ryce much Cotton linnen is made there which is very fine and much estéemed in India and not only spread abroad and carryed into India and al the East parts but also into Portingal and other places this linnen is of diuers sorts and is called Sarampuras Cassas Comsas Beatillias Satopassas and a thousande such like names They haue likewise other linnen excellently wrought of a hearbe which
they spinne like yearne this yearne is to be sâ—ene at the house of Paludanus it is yealowish and is called the hearbe of Bengalen wherewith they do most cunningly stitch their couerlits pauilions pillowes carpets and mantles therein to christen children as women in childbed with vs vse to doe and make them with flowers and branches and personages that it is wonderfull to sée and so finely done with cunning workemanshippe that it cannot be mended throughout Europe likewise they make whole péeces or webbes of this hearbe sometimes mixed and wouen with silke although those of the hearbe it selfe are dearer and more estéemed and is much fayrer theÌ„ the silke These webs are named Sarrijn and it is much vsed and worne in India as well for mens bréeches as dublets and it may be washed like linnen and being washt it sheweth and continueth as faire as if it were new From Bengala commeth much Algallia or Ciuet but by the subtiltie and villany of the Bengalians it is falsifyed mixed with filth as salt oyle and such like stuffe whereby it is not much estéemed Also in Bengala are found great numbers of the beasts which in Latine are called Rhinocerotes and of the Portingalles Abadas whose horne téeth flesh blood clawes and whatsoeuer he hath both without and within his bodie is good against poyson and is much accounted of throughout all India as in an other place shall be shewed more at large There groweth likewise marble coloured Réedes whereof you may sée many sortes in the custodie of Paludanus which the Portingalles call Canas de Bengala that is Réedes of Bengala within they are full of pith and are about the thicknesse of Spanish réedes but somewhat thinner and when they are gréene they bowe and bend like Willow twigges they are outwardly of diuers colours and speckled as if they were painted They vse them in Portingall for olde women to beare in their handes when they goe abroad or vppon the stones There is another sorte of the same réeds which they call Rota these are thinne like twigges of Willow for baskets whereof Paludanus can shewe you great numbers with the which in India they make many faire baskets and a thousande other curious deuises Sugar Butter and such like ware they haue in great quantitie as I said before but this shall suffice for Bengala whereof we leaue to speake and returne to the description of the coast as it lyeth along the shore The 17. Chapter Of the coasts and lands of Aracan Pegu and Sian to the Cape of Singapura the towne and fortresse of Malacca BEyond the kingdome of Bengala beginneth the kingdomes of Aracan Pegu which coast stretcheth from Bengala south and by East to the town and hauen of Martauan in the land of Pegu and is 70. miles Martauan lyeth vnder 16. degrées from whence beginneth the kingdome or land of Sian these kingdomes of Aracan and Pegu are very rich fruitfull of all things besides Gold and precious stones as Rubies Espinels Saffires Iacinthes Emeraldes Granates and such like as it is well knowne by the great numbers that are dayly brought out of those countries into all places Likewise they make harde ware which is carried throughout the world There are greater number of Elephantes in those countries then in any other place of India or the Orientall countries the Portingalles that traffique there affirme that the king of Pegu hath a white Elephant which hee prayeth vnto and holdeth it to bée holy The Peguans haue a custome that when any stranger commeth into their land to deale and traffique with them of what nation soeuer he bee they aske him how long he meaneth to stay there and hauing tolde them they bring him many maides that of them he may take his choice and make contract and agrée with the parentes of the maid that liketh him best for the vse of her during his continuance there which done he bringeth her to his lodging and she scrueth him about all his affaires both by day by night like his slaue or his wife but hee must take heede that in the meane time hee keepeth not company with other women for thereby hee may incurre great daunger and stand in perill of his life When the time of his residence is ended he payeth the friendes or parents of the maid as much as he agreed for with theÌ„ which done he departeth quietly away and the maid returneth with credite home againe vnto her friendes and is as well estéemed of as euer she was before and if after that the same maide chance to marrie were it with the principallest of the Countrey and that the aforesaid stranger shold come to traffique in the same place againe hee may againe demand his woman and he shall haue her without resistance of her husband or any shame vnto him and she remaineth by the stranger as long as he abideth there and he trauelling from thence she goeth home againe vnto her husband which among them is holden for a most sure and inuiolable law Likewise when any gentleman or noble man will marrie with a maide hee goeth to séeke one of his friendes or a straunger and intreateth him to lie with his bride the first night of their mariage and to take her maydenhead from her which he esteemeth as a great pleasure honour done vnto him that another man wold take vpon him to ease him of so much payne This custome is not onely vsed among the Gentlemen and chiefe nobilitie of the lande but by the King himselfe Also diuers of the Peguans weare a bell vpon their yarde and some two as bigge as an Acorne which is made fast betweene the flesh and the skinne Of the like Belles Paludanus can shew you one which I brought out of India and gaue it him which bels haue a very sweet sounde This custome of wearing Belles was ordained by them because the Peguans in time past were great Sodomites and vsing this custome of belles it would be a meane to let them from the same The women go altogether naked onely with a cloth before their priuie members which as they go openeth vncouereth shewing all they haue which is by them ordayned to the ende that by such meanes it should tempt men to lust after women and to auoid that most abhominable accursed sinne of Sodomie There are likewise some among them that doe sowe vp the priuie member of their female children as soone as they are borne leauing them but a little hole to auoid their water and when she marrieth the husband cutteth it open and maketh it as great or as little as hee will which they with a certaine oyntment or salue can quickly heale I saw one of those women in Goa whom the Surgeon of my Mayster the Archbishops house did cut open men would iudge all these thinges to be fables yet they are most true for I doe not onely knowe it by the dayly trafficking of the Portingalles out of
continually in the ayre without lighting on the earth for they haue neither féet nor wings but onely head and body and the most part tayle as appeareth by the birdes that are brought from thence into India and some from thence hether but not many for they are costlie I brought two of them with me for Doctor Paludanus which were male and female which I gaue vnto him for his chamber These Ilands lie among diuers other Ilands and because there is no speciall notice of them by reason of the small conuersation with them I let them passe and turne again vnto the coast of Malacca which I left at the Cape of Singapura and so will shewe the Coast along The 22. Chapter From the Cape Singapura to the towne of Sian and the coast of Cambaia and Cauchinchina and the Iles of Borneo Lusons Manillios or Philippinas FRom the Cape of Singapura to the hooke named Sinosura eastward are 18 miles 6 or 7 miles from thence lyeth a cliffe in y e sea called Pedra bianque or white Rock where the shippes that come and goe to and from China doe oftentymes passe in great danger and some are left vpon it whereby the Pylots when they come thether are in great feare for that other way then this they haue not From this hook Sinosura East by South 40. miles beginneth the first corner of the Island Borneo vnder one degrée in y e North and stretcheth 120. myles North east till you be vnder 7. degrées the breadth as yet is not knowne nor discouered This Isle is full of trées from whence Camfora is taken and is the best in all the East countries From Sinosura the coast reacheth North 30. miles to the towne of Pan which lyeth vnder thrée degrées and a halfe ten miles further by the same câ—urse the coast runneth againe North Northwest for 50. miles where the towne of Patane lyeth vnder 7. degrees and a halfe These two towns Pan and Patane are kingdomes but contributarie to Sian From these places comes the wood called Pala Dagula and the costly swéet woode called Calamba which being good is waid against Siluer and Gold they also haue Camphora but not so good as that of the Island Borneo There is founde some gold and the stone called Bezars stone which is very costly and proued to be good against poyson There are likewise some Diamants and also Nutmegs and flowers and the wood Sapon whereof also much is brought from Sian it is like Brasill to die withall From Patane 120. myles North the coast runneth backe againe vnto Sian which lyeth vnder 14. degrées and a halfe from Sian from the turning in South west 15. myles The coast runneth again south east 70. miles to the towne of Cambaia this towne lyeth vnder 10. degrées From thence the coast runneth againe Northeast 60. miles and 60. miles Northwest froÌ„ whence it runneth West North west to the furthest parte inwarde of the créeke of Cuchinchina This coast of Cambaia is also called the coast of ChaÌ„paa this land hath much of y e swéet wood Calamba Through this kingdome runneth the riuer Mecom into the sea which the Indians name Captaine of all the Riuers for it hath so much water in the Summer that it couereth and watereth all the countrey as the riuer Nilus doth the countrey of Aegypt The people of Cambaia beléeue that all creatures both men and beastes of what sort soeuer they be do here receyue reward for their worke whether it be good or bad Vpwards in the land behind Cambaia and Sian are many seuerall nations as Laos which are a great and a mightie people others named Auas and Bramas which dwel by the hilles others that dwell vpon the hils called Gueos which liue like wild men and eat mans flesh and marke all their bodies with hote iron which they estéeme a fréedome These countreymen are such as are knowne besides diuers others that are vnknowne From the coast of Cambaia or Champaa East or to seaward about 100. myles little more or lesse lie y e Islands called the Lussons or Lussones which were first discouered by the Spaniardes out of newe Spaigne in an 1564. and were called also las Manillas or Philippinas because the principallest Hauen and Towne is called Manillia and of others Lusson whereof also they are named the Lâ—ssons and the Spaniardes gaue them the name of the King of Spaine calling them y e Philippinas This towne of Lusson or Manillia lyeth vnder 14 degrées by this towne and Iland of Lusson lie a great number of Ilands which are all called the Manillians Lussons or Philippinas and are all at the commandement of the Spaniardes whose Gouernour or Captaine lyeth in the towne of Manillia or Lusson who was sent thether out of Noua Spaigne in the behalfe of the king of Spaine and also a Bishop as head ouer all the rest All these Ilands haue in time past béene vnder the crown of China and vpon some occasion left it whereby there was no policie nor gouernment among the Inhabitants of the same for that he that was the richest and of most power amongst them was maister and liued together like beastes whereby the Spaniardes had 〈◊〉 small labor to subdue them whereof manie they baptised and made them Christians which euerie day increased it is a very fruitful land and hath much corne and al sorts of wilde beastes as harts hyndâ— such like also cattle as buffels oxen kyne hogges goates c. they haue manie muske cattes all kinde of fruites as in China abundance of hony and fish it is said also that there is all kindes of spices but as yet there is no certaintie thereof but onely that the Spaniardes giue it forth so but you must thinke they doe it because they wil extol and set forth their things aboue all others as their maÌ„ner is Those of China trafficke with these IlaÌ„ds and bring thether all sortes of commodities out of their country as al silkes cottons porselynes powder for shot sulphur brimstone yron stéele quicke siluer and other metals coper meal nuttes chasnuttes bisquit dates al sorts of lynnen cloth deskes and such like and of all curious things that may be found there cometh froÌ„ China thether euery year at least 20 shippes and from thence is their marchandise by the Spaniardes shipped and sent into newe Spaine to Mexico which countrie of Spaine The land by meanes of y e good ayre and temperatenes therof is fo fruitfull that al things are there to be had in great abundance as Corne Rice and other such like graine or séedes and is both sowen and mowed continually al the yeare long Within the land ther are some Elephants Lyons Tygers and such cruell beastes There are also many beasts of Moseliaet that is to say Muske Cattes which are of the bignesse and likenesse of a little Dogge which they kill and burie for certaine daies and being rotten and well brused with blowes whereby the
and that after their deathes they shall receiue either good or euill reward in the world to come according to their workes Wherefore they vse faire and costly Graues and beléeue that in the world to come men shall neuer more die but liue for euer there are also in this land many and diuers faire Vniuersities and Schooles for learning where they studie Philosophie and the lawes of the land for that not any man in China is estéemed or accounted of for his birth family or riches but onely for his learning and knowledge such are they that serue in euery Towne and haue the gouernment of the same being serued and honoured with great solemnities and worthinesse liuing in great pleasure and estéemed as gods They are called Loâ—ias and Mandorijns and are alwaies borne in the stréetes sitting in Chariots which are hanged about with Curtaines of Silke couered with Clothes of Golde and Siluer and are much giuen to banketing eating drinking making good cheare as also the whole land of China No man may rule gouerne or vse any Office of Iustice in the Towne or place where he was borne which they saye the King doth because their friendes or parents should not mooue or perswade them to doe any thing contrarie to Iustice or to the hinderance of the Kings seruice When any of the aforesaide gouernours or rulers die in China they kill diuers of their seruants and wiues and cause all kinde of victuals and necessaries with diuers Iewels to bee put into the Graue with them whereby they thinke themselues well prouided and to haue good companie with them to liue withall in the other world The Countrie is verie temperate good ayre for it beginneth vnder 19. degrées and is in some places higher then 50. degrées whereby it is to be presumed that it must of force be fruitfull a great helpe thereunto is the earnest and continuall labour the countrimen and inhabitants take to build houses in their land whereby there is not one foote of land lost or that lyeth wast for euen to the verie mountaines it is both plowed planted because there are so many people in the Countrie It is not in mans memorie that euer there was plague in that Countrie and they haue a law which is very straightly holden that no man may goe or depart out of the Countrie without licence nor yet that any stranger may come into the land without leaue vpon paine of death Likewise no man may trauaile through the Country to begge whereof they haue a great care and looke néerely vnto it The people are well formed and commonly fat and well liking of body broade and round faces smal eyes great eye-browes broad foreheads small and flat noses litle beards seauen or eight hayres aboue their lippes and vnder their chinnes and verie blacke haire which they estéeme verie much haue great care in y e keming thereof and in keeping it cleane as well men as women and weare it as long as it will growe and then binde it in a knot on the top of their heads and vpon it they put a péece of Silke netting Those that dwell on the Sea side with whome the Portingals traffique that is in Machau and Canton are a people of a brownish colour like the white Moores in Africa and Barbaria and part of the Spaniards but those that dwell within the land are for color like Netherlanders high Dutches There are many among them that are cleane blacke which haue great eyes and much beard but verie few of them as it may well bee thought and as the men of China themselues report Their ofspring was out of â—artaria or from other of their neighbours of straunge Countries at such time when they had licence to trauaile into those Countries and to haue conuersation with them by trade of marchandise which nowe they may not doe as it is saide before They vse to weare the nayles of their left hands very long and on the right hand short which they hold for an auncient ceremonie of their law and beliefe Their apparell as I said before is most of Silke of all colours that is such as are of welth indifferent rich others such as are poore do weare apparel of Cotton linnen of blacke and coloured Sayes and such like stuffe Cloth made of Wooll nor Veluet they can not make in all China although there wanteth no wooll and they haue many shéepe notwithstanding they know not how to vse it and wonder much at it when the Portingalles bring it thether The women goe verie richly apparelled with long and wide Gownes they weare many Iewels on their heades within their haire and also vppon their bodies they doe commonly hold their hands couered they are but little séene abroad but sit most part within the house and estéeme it for a great beautifying vnto them to haue small féete to the which end they vse to binde their féete so fast when they are young that they cannot grow to the full whereby they can hardly goe but in a manner halfe lame Which custome the men haue brought vp to let them from much going for that they are verie iealous and vnmeasurable leacherous and vnchast yet is it estéemed a beautifying and comlinesse for the women Those that are of any wealth or estate are born in chaires through the stréets hanged and couered with Silke Sattin and Damaske Curtins wouen with siluer and golde thréedes and haue small holes to looke through so that they may sée and not be séene The 24. Chapter Of the Prouinces Townes and other things worthie of memorie in the kingdome of China THe kingdome of China is deuided into 15 prouinces euery one being as great as it is reported founde written as the best kingdome in Europe and are gouerned by a Viceroye or Gouernour which by the Chinaes is called Cochin Two of the said Prouinces are ruled by the King himselfe and his Councell which are Tolanchia and Paguia wher the King is alwaies resident The other Prouinces are called Foquiem Olam Sinsay Xansay Oquiam Aucheo Hona Canton Quicheo Chequeam Saxi Aynaon Susâ—an Most of these Prouinces haue riuers and waters running through them haue conference and familiaritie by buying and selling with each other both by water and by land It is recorded by the Chinaes themselues in their Chronicles that in these fiftéene Prouinces ther are 591. chiefe Citties 1593. other Citties besides villages whereof some are so great as Citties whereby you may consider the greatnesse of the land Most of the Townes are built vppon riuers and running streames and closed about with broade ditches and thicke stone walles Without the Walles betwéene them and the Ditches is a walke where sixe men on Horse backe maye ryde in ranke and the like within which space is made to mende and repaire the Walles when néede requireth whereof they are very carefull and looke warily vnto them The high waies and foote pathes throughout the
Caetes so that â— Picos which is a Bhar are 200. Caetes as well great as small waight a Bhar of China is 300. Caetes which waigh as much as 200. Caetes at Malacca small waight for that three Caetes of China are in Malacca two Caetes small waight a Caete of China is 16. Taeys Chinish waight which are 14. Taeys in Malacca which is as much as 20. Ounces â— Portingall waight They vse likewise a waight which they cal a Hant euery Hant is twelue Caetes smal waight and euery Caete is 22. Taeyes and 16. Hantes and 8. Caetes are iust 200. Caetes which is a Bhar of small waight so likewise a Tael of Malacca is 16. Mases and 10. Mases and ¼ is an Ounce of Portingall waight and an Ounce and a halfe is iust 16. Mases and the eight part of a Mase by these Mases they sel the Bezars stones for euery Mase two or thrée Ducats according to their greatnesse and goodnesse In Malacca are two sortes of waights great and small which heereafter follow A Bhar great waight is 200. Cates and one Cates 26. Taeys and one Taey is one Ounce ½ hard waight of Portingall the small waight is a Bhar which is also 200. Caetes and one Caetes is 22. Taeys and a â—ael is a full Ounce and a halfe Portingal waight With their great waight they weigh Pâ—per Cloues Nutmegs Folio red white Sanders Indico Alum Sanguis draconis Palo Dauguila Siet and Sapon With the small waight they waigh Quicksiluer Vermilion Coper Blie Iuorie bones Silk Muske Amber Calamba or Lignum Aloes Tin Lead Lancua Oyle of Nutmegs and of flowers Verdette Rosamallia Besoun and Camphora c. The marchandises that the Portingals carrie to China whereof they make most profite is Ryals of eight which in China are worth aboue six testones not for that they had rather haue it then other Siluer but for that it is all Siluer for it is presently cut in péeces to pay it out after their manner as it is shewed before they carrie likewise some Wines both Portingal and Indian Wine and some Oyles of Oliues which are there desired Veluet Cloth of Scarlet whereof they haue none nor yet can make any although they haue both sheepe and wooll enough Looking glasses Iuorie bones and all kinde of Christall and Glasse are well solde there But this shall suffice for that which concerneth the land of China now I will procéede to the description of the Iland of Iapan which is the farthest Viage and last Orientall place by the Portingals discouered or at this day knowne The 26. Chapter Of the Iland of Iapan THe Iland or the land of Iapan is many Ilands one by the other and are seperated and deuided only by certaine small Créekes and riuers it is a great land although as yet the circuite thereof is not knowne because as yet it is not discouered nor by the Portingalles sought into it beginneth vnder 30. degrées and runneth till you come to 38 degrées it lyeth East from the firme land of China about 80. miles and from Maccau by the waye that the Portingalles trauaile Northeast warde is about 300. miles and the Hauen where commonly the Portingals vse to traffique is called Nangasache They haue likewise other places where they traffique and deale The countrie is cold procéeding of much rayne Snow and Ice that falleth therein it hath some Corne lande but their common Corne is Ryce In some places the land is verie hillie and vnfruitfull they eate no flesh but the flesh of wilde beasts and such as is hunted wherein they are verie expert although there are Oxen Cowes Sheepe and such like Cattell good store yet they vse them to other things about their labours and because it is tame flesh which they cannot brooke they refuse it as wee doe horse flesh they doe likewise refuse to eate Milke as wee doe bloud saying that Milke although it is white yet it is verie bloude They haue much Fish whereof they are verie desirous as also all kinds of fruites as in China Their houses are commonly couered with wood and with strawe they are 〈◊〉 and workmanlike builte specially the rich mens houses they haue their Chambers hanged and flowred with Mattes which is their best hangings The Iapens are not so curious nor so cleanly as the men of China but are contente with a meane yet for the most part they goe verie well apparelled in Silke almost like the Chinos The countrie hath some mines of siluer which from thence is by the Portingals yearely brought vnto China and there bartered for Silke and other Chinish wares which the Iapeans haue néede of The countriemen are verie skilfull to search for Siluer and to sell their wares They haue among them verie good handicrafts men and cunning workemen in all kind of handie workes they are sharpe witted and quickly learne any thing they sée as by experience it is found in those parts which the Portingales haue discouered The common people of the lande are much different froÌ„ other nations for that they haue among them as great curtesie and good policie as if they had liued continually in the Court they are verie expert in their weapons as néed requireth although they haue little cause to vse them for that if anye of them beginneth to brawle or to drawe his sworde hee is put to death they haue not any prisons for that who soeuer deserueth to be imprisoned is presently punished or banished the countrie When they meane to lay holde vpon a man they must doe it by stealth and by deceipt for otherwise he would resist and doe much mischiefe If it bee any Gentleman or man of great authoritie they beset his house about with men and whether hee chaunce to slay himselfe or not they enter the house by force and kill al they find therin Which to auoid he suffereth himself often times to be killed by his seruantes And it is often séene that they rip their own bellies open which often times is likewise done by their seruants for the loue of their Masters therein to shew their Masters the loue they beare vnto them so little estéeming their owne liues to pleasure and serue them The like doe young Boyes in presence of their parents onely for griefe or some small anger They are in all their actions very patient and humble for that in their youthes they learne to indure hunger colde and all manner of labour to goe bare headed with few cloathes as well in Winter as in Summer and not onely the common people but the principall Gentlemen and Nobles of the countrie They account it for great beautie to haue no haire which with great care they doe plucke out onely keepe a bunch of haire on the crowne of their heades which they tie together Touching their traffique manners speach and all their ceremonies concerning life and curtesie they are cleane contrarie vnto all other nations speciallie from those of China and till this day obserue
the same as an infallible law which groweth vpon this occasion A long time since there was in China a great mightie familie which together with all their friends and acquaintance secretly conspired and agréed to ryse vp against the King of China to driue him out of his kingdome and to kill him and hauing so done to place themselues therein but it could not so secretly be contriued and wrought but in the end it was knowne whereupon the king punished them most gréeuously and caused diuers of the principall conspirators to be put to death and all others he found to be consenting therunto should haue felt the like paine which gréeued the Counsell and other Noble men of the countrie for that diuers of their néerest kinsmen were of that conspiracie so that with humble and long petition to the King they besought him to let them liue and to punish them with some easier punishment then death but that which they sought desired at the king all things considered was little better then death which was that he would banish them and all their posteritie for euer out of the countrie into the Ilands of Iapen which as then were not inhabited and this as they desired was done whereby there is so great enuie and hatred betwéene them and the men of China that they hate each other to the death and doe all the mischief one vnto the other that they can imagine or deuise euen vntill this time The men of Iapen haue done much mischief vnto the men of China and many times fallen vpon their coasts and put all to fire and sword and now at this present haue not any conuersation with them but onely they trafficke with the Portingales and to shewe themselues whollie their deadlie enemies in all their actions they are cleane contrary vnto the men of China and to the same end haue changed all their customes ceremonies and manners of curtesie from the men of China To recite the particulars would be ouer long yet I will in briefe set down some fewe examples of the customes and manners therein One is where the China vseth the curtesie of salutation to a man with the head and hand wheÌ„ they méet together the Iapens to the contrarie put off their shoes whereby they shewe them reuerence and as the Chinaes stand vp when they minde to receyue any man and to doe him reuerence they to the contrarie set themselues down accounting it a verie vnséemely thing to receyue or bid a man welcome standing on their féet and as we put on our clokes when we meane to goe abroad into the towne or countrie they put them off when they goe forth putting on great wyde bréeches and coming home they put them off again and cast their clokes vpon their shoulders and as among other nations it is a good sight to see men with white and yealow hayre and white teeth with them it is estéemed the filthiest thing in the world and séeke by all meanes they may to make their hayre and téeth blacke for that the white causeth their grief and the blacke maketh them glad The like custome is among the women for as they goe abroad they haue their daughters maydes before them and their men seruants come behind which in Spaigne is cleane contrarie and when they are great with childe they tye their girdles so hard about them that men would thinke they shuld burst and when they are not with Childe they weare their girdles so slacke that you would thinke they would fall from their bodies saying that by experience they do finde if they should not doe so they should haue euill lucke with their fruict and presently as soone as they are deliuered of their children in stéed of cherishing both the mother and the child with some comfortable meat they presently wash the childe in cold water and for a time giue the mother very little to eate and that of no great substance Their manner of eating and drinking is Euerie man hath a table alone without table clothes or napkins and eateth with two peeces of wood like the men of China they drinke wine of Rice wherewith they drink themselues drunke and after their meat they vse a certaine drinke which is a pot with hote water which they drinke as hote as euer they may indure whether it be Winter or Summer The Turkes holde almost the same maÌ„ner of drinking of their Chaona which they make of certaine fruit which is like vnto the Bakelaer and by the Egyptians called Bon or Ban they take of this fruite one pound and a half and roast them a little in the fire and then sieth them in twentie poundes of water till the half be consumed away this drinke they take euerie morning fasting in their chambers â—ut of an eâ—rthen pot being verie hote as we doe here drinke aquacomposita in the morning and they say that it strengtheneth and maketh them warme breaketh wind and openeth any stopping The manner of dressing their meat is altogether contrarie vnto other nations the aforesaid warme water is made with the powder of a certaine hearbe called Chaa which is much estéemed and is well accounted of among them and al such as are of any countenance or habilitie haue the said water kept for them in a secret place and the gentlemen make it themselues and when they will entertaine any of their friends they giue him some of that warme water to drinke for the pots wherein they sieth it and wherein the hearbe is kept with the earthen cups which they drinke it in they esteeme as much of them as we doe of Diamants Rubies and other precious stones and they are not esteemed for their newnes but for their oldnes and for that they were made by a good workman and to know and kéepe such by themselues they take great and speciall care as also of such as are the valewers of them and are skilfull in them as with vs the goldsmith priseth and valueth siluer and gold and the Iewellers all kindes of precious stones so if their pots cuppes be of an old excelleÌ„t workmaÌ„s making they are worth 4 or 5 thousaÌ„d ducats or more the peece The King of Bungo did giue for such a pot hauing thrée feet 14 thousand ducats and a Iapan being a Christian in the town of Sacay gaue for such a pot 1400 ducats and yet it had 3 peeces vpon it They doe likewise estéeme much of any picture or table wherein is painted a blacke trée or a blacke bird and when they knowe it is made of wood and by an ancient cuÌ„ning maister they giue whatsoeuer you will aske for it It happeneth some times that such a picture is sold for 3 or 4 thousand ducats and more They also estéeme much of a good rapier made by an old and cunning maister such a one many times costeth 3 or 4 thousand Crowns the péece These things doe they kéeepe and estéeme for their Iewels as
we estéeme our Iewels precious stones And when we aske them why they estéeme them so much they aske vs againe why we estéeme so well of our precious stones iewels whereby there is not any profite to be had and serue to no other vse then only for a shewe that their things serue to some end Their Iustice and gouernment is as followeth Their kings are called Iacatay and are absolutely Lords of the land notwithstanding they kéepe for themselues as much as is necessary for them and their estate and the rest of their land they deuyde among others which are called Cunixus which are like our Earles and Dukes these are appointed by the King and he causeth them to gouerne rule the land as it pleaseth him they are bound to serue the King as well in peace as in warres at their owne cost charges according to their estate and the auncient lawes of Iapan These Cunixus haue others vnder them called Touis which are like our Lords and Lieutenants with whome likewise they deuide and part the land by the king giuen vnto them And these Toms doe yet deuide their parts among their friends such are their soldiers and take an oath to be redie at the commandement of their heads and chief gouernors as wel in peace as in warre at their own proper costes charges euery one must maintayne himself and be content with that part which is allotted vnto him wherewith euerie one of them according to his estate and qualitie may liue well and euerie one of them hath so much power and authoritie ouer those that are vnder him that he may punish banish and put them to death and doe with them if they offend as it best pleaseth him be it with right or with wrong without any appeale or answering before any man this power is not giuen onely to the Gouernors Captaines and Officers ouer their subiects Vassalles and Soldiers vnder their charges gouernments and offices as I said before but also to maisters of houses and fathers ouer their children seruants family so that they may kill beate â—acke hewe theÌ„ as they thinke good and at their pleasures without any resistance or correction for the same The rents and reuenues belonging to the King are very small and are nothing else but rice which is their liuing he hath euery yere onelie 500 thousaÌ„d packes or sackes of Rice and not any other customes rents and reuenues whereof he giueth to 10 or 12 Cunixuâ— each man 30 or 40 thousand sackes the rest is for his owne costes and charges to the maintenance of his estate and the Cunixus must distribute of their parts among the Toms and the Toms among the soldiers wherewith they maintaine themselues euery man in his estate Their spéech is different from the Chinish so that they vnderstand not each other but in writing they differ not for that they vse all the self same figures and characters they vse likewise manie kindes of vowels and in their writing manie courteous spéeches to euery man according to his estate calling with seuerall titles words whereby their spéech is hardly to be learned by a straunger Their religion is much like vnto those of China they haue their Idolles and their ministers which they call Bonses and hold them in great estimation but since the time of the Iesuites being among them there haue bene diuers baptised and become Christians which daylie doe increase among the which were 3 Kings that is the king of BuÌ„go which is one of the principallest kings of Iapan although there are many in the countrie wherewith the Portingales as yet haue had no conference the second the King of Arryma the third the King of Omura Those thrée Kings sent their sonnes and Nephewes with the Iesuites into India from thence to trauell into Portingale and so to Rome to submit themselues vnto the Pope and departing out of Iapan in anno 1582. they ariued in India in the citie of Goa An. 1583. the same yeare that I ariued in India so that we found them yet in Goa and the next yeare after they sayled vnto Portingal from thence to Madril where by the king nobles of Spaine they were with great triumph honour welcomed and receiued and presented with many gyftes From thence they trauelled to Rome vnto the Pope who likewise did them great honor and bestowed many presents vpon them as also all the Cardinals and Lords of Italie for that they trauelled throughout all Italie to Florence Venice Ferrara c. which being done they returned againe vnto Madril with letters from Pope Sixtus and some holie reliques of the crosse that Christ died vpon to present the same vnto the Christian Kings of Iapan as an holie present in the end they ariued in India againe during my being there which was in anno 1587 being with great ioy receiued and so set sayle vnto Iapan where they ariued again with great admiration of all the men of Iapan which the Iesuites did to the end as they said the better to moue the Iapans to be christened and to make them knowe the magnificence of the countrie of Europa because they would not beléeue it being shewed them but the principallest cause and intent of the Iesuites was thereby to reape great profit and to get much praise and commendation for that most of the gifts which the princes of Iapan had giuen them fell to their shares they likewise obtained of the Pope and the king of Spaine that no maÌ„ might dwell in Iapan either Portingale or Christian without their licence and consent so that in all Iapan there are no other orders of Munkes Fryers Priests nor any other religious persons remaining or resident there but Iesuites alone They haue onely among them certaine handie crafts men by them brought out of India with whome they haue to doe but for other men as marchants and others they may but goe and come and not stay there without the Iesuites licence They haue almost all the countrie vnder their subiection such I meane as are conuerted to the faith of Christ as well spirituall as temporall making the Iapans beléeue what they list wherby they are honored like gods for that the Iapans make so great account of them that they doe almost pray vnto them as if they were Saints They had obtained so much fauour of the Pope that hee granted them a Bishoppe of their order which is contrarie to their profession who came out of Portingale to be Bishop in Iapon but dyed in the way betwéene Portingale and India Since that they haue procured an other so that to conclude they haue all the praye vnder their clawes As likewise they doe enioy and possesse the principallest places of Religion in all India where they builde most princely houses which no man dareth withstand or refuse them neither any of the Religious orders haue the meanes or wealth to doe the like This
they know full well howe to bring to passe for that there is not any thing from whence they will not sucke or draw out some profit or aduantage or else they haue the slight and cunning how to get it as well from the King and from other Noblemen and estates as also from the common people it séemeth in a manner that they bewitch men with their subtill practises and deuises and are so wel practised and experimented in trade of marchandises that they surpasse all worldly men To conclude there is not any commoditie to be had or reaped thoroughout all India but they haue their part therein so that the other orders and Religious persons as also the common people doe much murmur thereat and séeme to dislike of their couetous humors A little beyond Iapon vnder 34. and 35. degrées not farre from the coast of China lyeth an other great Iland called Insula de Core whereof as yet there is no certaine knowledge neither of the greatnesse of the countrie people nor wares that are there to be found From Makau East Northeast distant aboue 90. miles lye certaine Ilandes called Lequeo Pequeno or little Lequeo and lye about 20. miles distant from the firme land of China and 90. miles farther in the same course lye other Ilands called Lequeo Maior or great Lequeo All these Ilandes are trauelled vnto and inhabited by those of China whereof we will now cease to speake till an other time hauing particularly made a briefe discourse in an other place of all their manners customes wares and marchandises according to the truest instructions I could find and so will returne againe to the description of Goa together with the places bordering about the same The 27. Chapter A short relation of the land lying behind Goa in the iurisdiction whereof lyeth the said towne of Goa and of the Originall of their Kings and Gouernours with their names by true information giuen by the inhabitants themselues together with their Histories BEfore I begin to write of the towne and Ilande of Goa with the coastes superstitions and other customes of the countrie lying behinde and rounde about Goa as well where the Portingales inhabit as where the natiue countrie men are resident I thought it conuenient to begin with the same somwhat further off then at the present time the better to vnderstand the originall of the people together with the principall causes of the diuisions of the same countries and nations as also their Kings names and surnames Then you must vnderstand that about 300. yeares past there was a mightie King of the countrie of Deli which lyeth within the land behind Goa on the Northside and bordereth vpon the land of Coracone belonging to the King of Persia wherein are made the rich Couerlets and hangings by the Portingales called Alcatyffas which land of Deli is verie colde and hath Snow and Ice in it like the Netherlands This king of Deli brought vnder his subiection all the countries bordering about him among the which were Decam Cuncam Ballagate and the lande of Goa At the same time the countrie of Cambaia which is distant from Goa about 100. miles Northward was ouerrunne and taken fâ—rcibly by the Moores Mahometans and brought the naturall countrimen called Reysbutos being heathens with great tyranie vnder their subiection The land of Ballagate and Decam was before inhabited by heathens that were verie mightie and of great power whose successors are now called Venesares and others that yet dwell within the countrie called Colles which Colles Venesares and Reysbutos of Cambaia doe yet liue by robbing and stealing and those of Cambaia pay tribute to the saide Reysbutos because they should not robbe and spoyle them but suffer them to liue in peace The Colles and Venesares also receiue tribute of the men of Decam and Ballagate for that the Kings could neuer as yet ouercome them although they make no shew thereof but still dissemble with them for that of what soeuer they robbe and steale they haue their parts After this King of Deli had brought all these kingdomes and countries vnder his subiection then came the Tartarians which the Indians call Mogoren and ouercame most part of the countrie of Deli. At the same time there dwelt in the kingdome of Bengalen a Noble Gentleman whose brother the King of Bengallen had wrongfully put to death whereby this Gentleman sought and deuised all the meanes hee could to bee reuenged and did not onely bring it to passe by bereauing the King of his life but also tooke the whole kingdome from him and brought it vnder his subiection and being in this sorte become absolute Lord and King of Bengalla was not therewith content but desiring to augment his kingdome and thereby to win great fame did inuade the countrie of Deli bordering vpon him with a great armie of men and by force draue the Tartarians or Mogoros out of the countrie and so conquered both that lande and all the countries bordering thereabouts as Decam Ballagate and Cuncam as farre as to the kingdome of Cambaia and for a time was the greatest Prince in all those quarters For the Indians affirme that hee had in Compasse vnder his subiection aboue 800. miles of land This King raigning for a time ouer al these lands and countries in the end desiring to liue quietly and to returne vnto his kingdom of Bengala thinking it too troublesome for him to rule so great a countrie did inuest one of his cosins with the countries of Decam Ballagate and Cuncam with the land of Goa and the countries bordering about the same which done he returned into his land of Bengala leauing his saide cosin King and commander of the aforesaid countries This man was alwaies a great friende and wel-willer to strange nations as Arabians Turkes Ruynes and Corasones parted his countries among Gouernours and Captaines to on whereof beeing called Idalham whome the Portingales call Hidalcam he gaue the Gouernment of Angedina which lyeth 12. miles from Goa Southwards stretching towards the North till you come to a place called Siffardan which are 60. miles wherein is contained the towne and Iland of Goa to an other Captaine called Nisa Maluco hee gaue the coast of Siffardan stretching Northwards to Negotana which are 20. miles and lyeth inwards to the land of Cambaia so that those two Captaines had their gouernments in the countrie of Cuncam which lyeth on the Sea coast and seperateth it selfe from the land of Decam by great and high hils called Guate These hils are verie high and haue many corners and hookes of land and doe stretch towardes Cambaia to the Cape de Comorin and from thence backe againe to the coast of Choramandel The hill of Guate is so high that men may easily sée it within Goa and all the coast along though commonly it is couered with clouds and it is the more to bee wondred at for this respect because all other hils are vneuen high and low
two men on foote the one with a great siluer or guilt vessell full of bread baked like cracklinges which in Portingall are called Rosquilhos and in the middle a great Ware candle well made and gilded thrust through with some peeces of money of golde and siluer for an offering to the Priest that baptiseth the childe and all ouer strowed and couered with Roses the other carryeth a great siluer or gilt saltseller in one of his handes and a lampe of the same stuffe in his other hande each with rich and costly Towels on their sholders after that followeth two Pallamkins on the one side y e Commere on the other side the Midwife with the child couered with a costly mantle made for the purpose and so the ceremonies of baptisme being ended in the Church it is againe in the like sort brought home and beeing there they haue the like manner of musicke and shalmes running and leaping with their horses before the window where the Commere sitteth with the same ceremonies as at the wedding This is the manner and custome of those that are married and keepe house But concerning the souldier that is vnmaried thus it is They goe in the summer time into the Armado lying on the water and being within the townes and on the land they are very stately apparrelled and goe verie grauely along the streets with their slaues or men hired for the purpose that beare a hatte ouer them for the sunne and raine for there are many IndiaÌ„s that are daily hired for the purpose and haue 12. Basarucos the day which is as much as two sâ—iuers or a stoter they serue such as haue no slaues and that will not keepe any to that end The souldiers dwell at least ten or twelue in a house where they haue among them a slaue or hiâ—ed Indian or two which serueth them and washeth their shirts and haue foure or fiue stooles with a table and euery man a Bedde Their meate is Rice sodden in water with some salt fish or some other thing of small value without breade and cleare fountaine water for their drinke wherewith they are well pleased They haue amongst them all one or two good sutes of apparell all of silke as the manner is there and when one goeth abroad the other stay at home for in the house they haue no néede of clothes but sit whosoeuer they bee in their shirts a paire of linnen bréeches and so as it were naked by reason of the great heate for if some of them haue occasion to goe out twenty times in one day they must so often lend him their apparel and hee must likewise put off his clothes as often as he commeth home againe Some souldiers haue a Gentleman or Captaine to their friendes which lendeth them monie to apparell themselues withall to the end when summer time commeth they may be ready to goe with them in Fléet to sea as also to haue their friendship by night and at other times to beare them company or to helpe them to bee reuenged of any iniury by them receiued as I said before for that he which in India hath most souldiers to his friends is most regarded and feared So that to bee short in this manner they doe maintaine themselues in common whereby they are able to come in presence of the best of the countrie Manie and most of them haue their chiefe maintenance from the Portingales and Mesticos wiues as also the Indian Christians wiues which doe alwaies bestow liberall rewardes and giftes vppon them to satisfie and fulfill their vnchaste and filthie desires which they know very well how to accomplish and secretly bring to passe There are some likewise that get their liuings by their friends trauelling for them from place to place with some wares and marchandises and they are called Chattims These doe giue ouer and leaue the office of a souldier in the Fléete and the Kinges seruice for as it is said there is no man compelled thereunto although their names be registred in the office yet doe they still keepe the name of souldier as long as they trauaile abroad and are not married The souldiers in these dayes giue themselues more to be Chattims and to deale in Marchandise then to serue the King in his Armado because the Captaines and Gentlemen begin to be â—lacke in doing good vnto them as in times past they vsed to doe Also they giue themselues to rest and pleasure wherefore if they can deuise any meanes for it they had rather trauaile deale in trade of Marchandise and to marie and be quiet in respect that the common souldiers in these dayes are but slackely paide for that when they haue at the least ten or twenty certificates to shew for their former seruices then haue they not the meanes to furnish themselues with prouision to make a voyage into Portingale or to take any presents with them there to bestow them for without such meanes they are neyther heard nor yet regarded and if it fall out that they doe procure the reuersion of any offices it is so long before the time commeth that they doe enioy them beeing many in reuersion that oftentimes they die before they can obtaine them Againe the long trauaile and great voyage maketh many to stay in India and to employ their time to other trades as they can best prouide themselues By these meanes the wars in India are not so hot nor so throughly looked into neyther any other countries sought into or founde out as at first they vsed to doe Now they doe onely striue to get praise and commendation and to leaue a good report behinde them and now likewise they are all giuen to scraping catching as well the Viceroy Gouernours and others as also the Church men and spiritualtie little passing or esteeming the common profit or the seruice of the King but only their particular profits making their account that the time of their abode is but thrée yeares wherefore they say they will not doe otherwise then those that were before them did but say that others which come after theÌ„ shall take care for all for that the King say they gaue them their offices thereby to pay them for their seruices in times past and not for the profit of the common wealth therefore there is no more countries in India won or new found out but rather heere and there some places lost for they haue enough to doe to hold that they haue alreadie and to defende it from inuasion as also that they doe scoure the Sea coastes and yet many Marchants haue great losses euery yeare by meanes of the sea rouers and together with the euill gouernment of the Portingales and it is to be feared it will bee worser euery day then other as it is euidently séene This shall suffice for the manners and customes of the Indian Portingales and their warlike gouernments which is commonly by sea for by land they cannot trauaile by
criminall causes no man may appeale but such as haue the degrée of a Gentleman such the Viceroy may not iudge but being prisoners send them into Portingall vnlesse it be by the Kings commaundement he is verie magnificent in his estate and goeth little out but sometimes on Sundaies or holy daies when hee goeth to Church and when hee goeth out of his house the Trumpets and Shalmes standing in the Gallerie of his house do sound he is accompanied by all the Gentlemen and townes men of Goa that haue or kéepe horses with a Gaâ—de of Halbardiers on foote both on each side and behinde him and being in the Church heâ— hath his seate in the Quier lyned with Veluet and nayled with gylt nayles and a cloth with two Veluet cushins vnder his féete and knées and before him a bench with a Veluet Cushen to leane his armes vpon his Gentlemen sit by him but without the Quier and by him standeth his Chaplen that prayeth for him The Archbishop when hee is at the Church sitteth on his left hand in the same manner vpon Carpets Cushens and bench of Veluet where they are serued in all ceremonial order as the Kings of Portingall in their Churches vse to be and when he commeth home againe the Trumpets and Shalmes doe sound as when he went out In the hall of his Palace stand the Gard and in the great hall where his Councell sit are painted all the Viceroyes that haue gouerned in India since the first discouery and conquest thereof and as they new come their pictures are likewise placed there Also in the entrie of the Palace are painted al the ships that since the first discouerie of India euer came out of Portingall into those countries euery yeare by it selfe and the names and surnames of their Captaines with a note ouer euerie shippe which was cast away or had any mischaunce all liuely set foorth for a perpetuall memorie and euerie yeare as any ship commeth thether they are set by the rest The Viceroyes in the last yeare of their gouernment do vse to visite the Forts lying round about the countrie fiftie sixtie or eightie miles long on the North and South side of Goa to see how they are gouerned they looke well vnto them but commonly an other supplyeth their place and if they doe it themselues it is more to fill their purses and to get presents then to further the common-wealth these Viceroyes haue great reuenewes they may spend giue and kéepe the Kings treasure which is verie much and doe with it what pleaseth them for it is in their choyse hauing full and absolute power from the King in such sort that they gather and horde vp a mightie quantitie of treasure for that besides their great alowance from the King they haue great presents giftes bestowed vpon them For it is the custome in those countries when any Viceroy commeth newly ouer that all the Kings bordering about Goa and that haue peace and friendship with the Portingales do then send their Ambassadours vnto him to confirme their leagues with great and rich presents therewith likewise to bid the Viceroy welcome which amounteth to a great masse of treasure these presents in this sort giuen the Iesuites by their practises had obtained of the King and for a time enioyed them at their pleasure looking verie narrowly vnto them that they might not bee deceiued vntill long time since a Viceroy named Don lois de Tâ—ide Earle of Atougia came thether and refused to let them haue them saying that the King being in Portingall knew not what was giuen him in India and that those presents were giuen vnto the Viceroy and not to the King and said the King had no power to giue them to the Iesuites so that hee kept them for himselfe which the Iesuites tooke in euill part and said the Viceroy was an hereticke Yet from his time euer since the Viceroyes haue vsed to keepe them for them selues When the Viceroyes haue continued out their time which is assone as an other Viceroy ariueth at Bardes or any other Hauen in the countrie they doe presently dispatch their Leiuetenants with full power and authoritie in the name of their maisters to receiue possession of the gouernment of India and prepare the Palace for him so that there stayeth not a stoole or bench within the house nor one pennie in the treasure but they leaue the house as bare and naked as possible may be so that the new Viceroy must make prouision for to furnish it and gather a new treasure In the same shippe wherein the new Viceroy commeth thether the old returneth home and because their time of gouernment is so short and that the place is giuen them in recompence of their seruice and thereafter not to serue any more there is not one of them that esteemeth the profit of the commonwealth or the furtherance of the Kings seruice but rather their own particular commodities as you may verie well thinke so that the common speach in India is that they neuer looke for any profite or furtheraunce of the common wealth by any Viceroy as long as the gouernment of thrée yeares is not altered For they say and it is found to be most true that the first yeare of the Viceroyes time hee hath enough to doe to repaire and furnish his house and to know the manners and customes of the countries without any further troubling of himselfe The seconde yeare to gather treasure and to looke vnto his particular profits for the which cause he came into India The third and last yeare to prepare himselfe and set al things in order that he bee not ouertaken or surprised by the new Viceroy when he commeth but that he may returne into Portingall with the goods which he had scraped together The same is to bee vnderstoode of all the Captaines in the Fortes and of all other officers in India Wherefore it is to bee considered how they vse themselues in their places and the Kings seruice whereof the inhabitants and married Portingales doe continually speake but they are farre from the Kings hearing who knoweth not but that his Officers doe him good seruice whereby there is small remedie or amendement to be hoped for The 33. Chapter Of the heathens Indians and other strangers dwelling in Goa IN the towne and Iland of Goa are resident many Heathens Moores which are Mahometans Iewes and all strange nations bordering thereabout euerie one of them vsing seuerall customes and superstitions in Religion The Moores hold Mahomets law and the Iewes Moyses law There are also many Persians Arabians and Abexijâ—s some of them Christians and some of them Moores There is in Goa many Armenians that are Christians and others that goe and come to traffique there as Persians Arabians Banianes of Cambaia Gusarates and Decaniâ—ns c. The Moores eate all things except Swines flesh and dying are buried like the Iewes but the Heathens as Decaniâ—â—s Gusarates and Canaras and other Indians
or run away whither they will which among them is a work of great charity saying it is don to their euen neighbors And if they take a flea or a Lowce they wil not kil it but take or put it into some hole or corner in the wall and so let it go you can do them no greater iniury then to kil it in their presence for they wil neuer leaue intreating and desiring withall curtesie not to kill it and that man shoulde not séeme to commit so great a sinne as to take away the life of that to whom God had giuen both soule and body yea and they will offer much money to a man to let it liue and goe away They eate no Radishes Onions Garlicke nor any kinde of hearbe that hath any colour of red in it nor Egges for they thinke there is blood in them They drinke not any wine nor vse any vineger but onely water They are so dangerous of eating and drinking with other men which are not their Countriemen that they would rather starue to death then once to doe it It happeneth oftentimes that they saile in the Portingales ships from Goa to Cochin to sell their wares and to traffique with the Portingales and then they make their prouisions for so long time as they thinke to stay vpon the way which they take aboard with them and thereupon they féede and if the time falleth out longer then they made account of their water and prouision beeing all spent as it hapned when I sailed from Goa to Cochin they had rather die for hunger and thirst then once to touch the Christians meate they wash themselues before they eate as the Bramenes doe as also euery tyme when they ease themselues or make water They are of a yellowe colour like the Bramenes and somewhat whiter and there are women among them which are much whiter and clearer of complection than the Portingale women They are formed and made both in face limmes and all other thinges like men of Europe colour only excepted Their apparrell is a thinne white gowne vppon their naked bodies from the head to the féet and made fast on the side vnder their armes their shooes of red leather sharp at the toes and turning vp like hookes their beardes shauen like the Turkes sauing only their moustachios they weare on their heades a white cloth thrée or foure times wrapped about like the Bramenes and vnder their haire a starre vpon their foreheads which they rub euery morning with a little white sanders tempered with water and 3. or 4. graines of rice among it which the Bramenes also doe as a superstitious ceremonie of their law Their bodies are commonly annoynted with sanders other swéet woods which they doe very much vse as also all the Indians Their women are apparelled like the Bâ—amenes wiues they eate like the Mahometans and all other Indians vpon the ground In their houses or assemblies they sit on the ground vppon mattes or carpets and alwaies leaue their shooes without the dore so that they are alwaies barefoote in their houses wherefore commonly the héeles of their shooes are neuer pulled vp to saue labour of vntying or vndoing them they haue a thousand other heathenish superstitions which are not worth the rehearsall whereof we haue told you the most principall and therby you may well enough vnderstand what the rest are The 38. Chapter Of the Canaras and Decanijns THe Canaras and Decaniins are of the countrie of Decam commonly called Ballagate lying behinde Goa many of them dwell in Goa where their wares and shops are of all sorts of Veluets Silkes Sattins and Damaskes which they buy by great of the Portingales also al kinds of cotton linnen porselyne and all kindes of wares and marchandises of Cambaia China Bengalla c. which they likewise buy of the Portingales and other nations and sell it againe by retaile for the which purpose they haue brokers of their owne Countrimen which looke for all kindes of wares and commodities These bring likewise all victuals and necessaries out of the firme land into the towne and Island of Goa They haue their Indian ships wherewith they traffique to Cambaia Sunda and the read sea Many of them are gold and siluer smithes worke in Copper wherein they are very cunning They haue also diuers other handicrafts as Barbers Phisitions Carpenters and such like as dwell in Goa so that they are almost as great a number as the Portingale Mesticos and Christians Their apparrell is like the Gusurates Benianes except their shooes which they weare like Antiques with cut toes and fastned aboue vpon their naked féete which they call Alparcas They weare their beards and their haire long as it groweth without cutting but only turne it vp and dresse it as the Benianes and Bramenes vse to doe and are like them for colour forme making They eate all thinges except Kine Hogges and Buffels flesh and fish They account the Oxe Cow or Buffel to be holie which they haue commonly in the house with them and they besméere stroke and handle them with all the friendship in the world and féed them with the same meat they vse to eate themselues and when the beastes ease themselues they hold their hands vnder their tails and so throw the dung away In the night time they sléepe with them in their houses to conclude vse them as if they were reasonable creatures whereby they thinke to doe God great seruice In their eating sitting in the house washing making cleane and other ceremonies and superstitions they are altogether like the Bramenes Gusurates and Banianes In their mariages they contract ech with other at 7. yeres at 11. or 12. yeares they are maried and dwell together When they are to be maried they begin fourtéene dayes before to make a great sound with trumpets drummes and fires which continueth day and night for all those fourtéene dayes with so great a noise of songs and Instruments that men can neyther heare nor sée On the wâ—dding day all the friends and kindred on both sides doe assemble together sit vpon the ground round about a fire and goe seauen times about it vttering certaine wordes whereby the wedding is done They giue their daughters no houshold stuffe but only some Iewels as bracelets eare-rings and such like of small valew wherewith their husbands must bee content for the Daughters are no heires but the Sonnes inherite all but they kéep and maintaine their daughters and sisters till they marie when they die they are likewise burnt and some of their wiues with them but not so many as of the Bramenes Euery one of them followeth his fathers occupation and marieth with the daughters of such like trades which they name kindreds They haue their fasting daies and ceremonies like the Bramenes for they are as the laytie and the Bramenes as the spiritualty the Ministers Priests Prophets of their Idols They hire and farme the customes and
which is very little their noses broad flat and thicke at the end great bigge lippes some haue holes both aboue vnder in their lippes and some times besides their mouthes through their cheekes wherein they thrust small bones which they esteeme a bewtifying there are some among them that haue their faces and all their bodies ouer rased and seared with irons and al figured like rased Sattin or Damaske wherein they take great pride thinking there are no fairer people then they in all the world so that when they see any white people that weare apparell on their bodies they laugh and mocke at them thinking vs to be monsters and vgly people and when they will make any deuelish forme and picture then they inuent one atfer the forme of a white man in his apparell so that to conclude they thinke and verily perswade themselues that they are the right colour of men and that we haue a false and counterfait colour There are among them that file their téeth as sharp as nedles which they likewise estéeme for a great ornament Many of them hold the law of Mahomet that is to say such as dwell on the coast of Abex or Melinde and round about those places as also in Mosambique by reason the red sea is so néere vnto them together with the Arabian Mahometans with whome they dayly traffique as they also did in al places IlaÌ„ds throughout the Orientall countries before the Portingales discouery and conquest of India whereby all the Orientall countrie where they trafficked was infected with their deuelish law and their poyson spread and throwne abroad in all places which is one of the principall occasions that the Gospell taketh no better effect in those countries their pestiserous law beeing as it were rooted and ingrafted in their mindes There are some of them that are become Christians since the Portingales came thether but there is no great paines taken about it in those couÌ„tries because there is no profite to be had as also that it is an infectious and vnholesome countrie and therefore the Iesuites are wary inough not to make any houses or habitations therein for they sée no great profite to be reaped there for them as they doe in India the Ilands of Iapan in other places where they find great quantities of riches with the sap whereof they increase much and fill their beehyues therewith to satisfy their thirsty insatiable desires most part of the Caffares liue like beastes or wild men yet they haue their houses in troups or heaps like couÌ„try vilages wher they asseÌ„ble dwel together and in euery Village they haue a Lord or King to whome they are subiect and obedient they are commonly in warres one with an other and one place or Village against an other and haue law and Iustice among them with some small Policie concerning their worldly affaires and gouernment but as concerning Religion and faith they know not what it meaneth but liue like beastes without any knowledge of God or any likelyhoode or shadow thereof they maintaine themselues by hunting which they doe in the woods where they take all that they finde they eate Elephants flesh and all other kind of wild beastes and of the Elephants téeth they make their weapons instéede of Iron and Stéele they doe commonly make warre one against the other and some of them eate mens flesh and some there are also that eate it not but such as deale with the Portingals When they take any man prisoner in the warres they sell him to the Portingales or exchaunge and barter him for Cotton linnen and other Indian wares They haue a custome among them that when they goe to warre against their enemies if they win the battaile or ouerthrow each other he that taketh or killeth most men is holden and accounted for the best and brauest man among them and much respected and to witnesse the same before their Kings of as many as they haue slaine or taken prisoners they cut off their priuâ—e members that if they bee let goe againe they may no more beget children which in processe of time might mischiefe them and then they drie them well because they should not rot which being so dried they come before their Kings with great reuerence in the presence of the principall men in the Village and there take these members so dried one by one in their mouthes and spit them on the ground at the Kings feete which the King with great thankes accepteth and the more to reward and to recompence their valour causeth them all to bee taken vp and giuen to them againe for a signe and token of honour whereby euer after from that time forwards they are accounted as Knights and they take all those members wherewith the King hath thus honoured them and tie them all vpon a string like a Bracelet or Chaine and when they marrie or go to any wedding or feasts the Bride or wiues of those knights doe weare that Chaine of mens members about their neckes which among them is as great an honour as it is with vs to weare the golden Fléece or the Garter of England and the Brides of such Knightes are therewith as proude as if they were the mightiest Queenes in all the world From Mosambique great numbers of these Caffares are caried into India and many times they sell a man or woman that is growne to their full strength for two or three Ducats When the Portingales ships put in there for fresh water and other necessaries then they are dearer by reason of the great numbers of buyers the cause why so many slaues and Captaines of all nations are brought to sell in India is because that euerie ten or twelue miles or rather in euery Village and towne there is a seuerall King and ruler of the people one of them not like an other neither in law spéech nor manners whereby most part of them are in warres one against the other and those that on both sides are taken prisoners they kéepe for slaues and so fell each other like beastes hee whose euill fortune is such that hee is one of the captiues must be patient wherein they shew not much dislike for when they are asked how they can content themselues with that yoke of bondage they answere that they can beare it well enough séeing their Planet will haue it so and for that their friends and neighbours shall reuenge their cause against those that haue done it Also in time of pouertie or dearth the fathers may sell their children as it happened in my time that there was such a dearth and scarsitie of victualls in the firme lande and countries bordering vppon Goa that the men of India came to Goa and other places where the Portingales are resident to sell their children in great numbers and for small prices to buy them victuals I haue séene Boyes of eight or ten yeares giuen in exchange for fiue or sixe measures of Rice and some
for thrée or foure Ducats the péece and some came with their wiues and children to offer themselues to bee slaues so that they might haue meate and drinke to nourish their bodies And because the Portingales haue traffique in all places as we haue béene in many it is the cause why so many are brought out of all countries to be solde for the Portingales doe make a liuing by buying and selling of them as they doe with other wares What concerneth the Caffares in Mosambique I haue in an other place declared in the description of Mosambique Hereafter followeth the pictures of the Arabians and Abexijns with their wiues as they goe in India also the pictures and manners of the Caffares both men and women as they goe in Mosambique all liuely portracted The 42. Chapter Of the Malabares and Nayros in India with their manners and customes THe Malabares are those that dwel on the Sea caost betwéene Goa the Cape de Comorijn Southward from Goa where the Pepper groweth They haue a spéech by themselues and their countrie is diuided into many kingdomes as in the description of the country we haue already declared these are the greatest and worst enemies that the Portingales haue and by Sea doe them great mischiefe they are strong and very couragious they goe all naked onely their priuie members couered the women likewise haue but a cloth from their Nauell downe to their knées all the rest is naked they are strong of limmes and verie arrogant and proude of colour altogether blacke yet verie smoth both of haire and skin which commonly they annoint with Oyle to make it shine they weare their haire as long as it will grow tyed on the top or crowne of their heads with a Lace both men and women the lappes of their eares are open and are so long that they hang downe to their shoulders and the longer wider they are the more they are estéemed among them and it is thought to bee a beautie in them Of face body and limmes they are altogether like men of Europ without any difference but onely in colour the men are commonly verie hayrie and rough vpon the breast and on their bodies and are the most leacherous and vnchast nation in all the Orient so that there are verie few women children among them of seuen or eight yeares olde that haue their maiden-heades They are verie readie to catch one from an other though it bee but for a small penie In their houses they are not verie curious their houses and houshold stuffe differeth not much from the Canarijns Corumbijns of Goa Their Idolatrie ceremonies and superstitions are like the other Heathens Of these Malabares there are two manner of people the one is Noblemen or Gentlemen called Nayros which are souldiers that doe onely weare and handle armes the other is the common people called Polias and they may weare no weapons nor beare any armes the Nayros must in all places where they goe or stand weare such armes as are appointed for them and alwaies bee readie at the Kings commaundement to doe him seruice some of them doe alwaies beare a naked Rapier or Courtelas in their right hands and a great Target in their left hand those Targets are verie great and made of light wood so that when they wil they can couer their whole bodies therewith they are so well vsed thereunto that they esteme it nothing to beare them and when they trauell on the way they may be heard a great way off for that they commonly make a great knocking with the Hilt of their Rapier against the Target because they would bee heard There are some that carrie a bow and a venimous arrow vppon their shoulder wherein they are verie expert others carrie long Pikes some Péeces with the Match readie lighted and wound about their armes and haue the best lockes that possible may bee found in all Europe which they know so well how to vse that the Portingales can haue no aduantage against them Wheresoeuer they goe they must alwaies haue their armes with them both night and day Not any of them are married nor may not marrie during their liues but they may freely lie with the Nayros daughters or with any other that liketh them what women soeuer they bee yea though they be married women When the Nayro hath a desire thereunto hee entreth into a house where he thinketh good and setteth his armes in the stréete without the doore and goeth in and dispatcheth his businesse with the good wife or the daughter the doore standing wide open not fearing that any man should come in to let him for whosoeuer passeth by and séeth the Nayros armes standing at the doore although it be the goodman himselfe hee goeth by and letteth him make an end and hauing done he taketh his armes and departeth thence and then the husband may come to the house without making any words or once moouing question about it In that manner they goe where they will and no man may denie them As these Nayros goe in the streetes they vse to crie Po Po which is to say take héede looke to your selues or I come stand out of the way for that the other sort of people called Polyas that are no Nayros may not once touch or trouble one of them and therefore they alwaies crie because they should make them roome and know that they come for if any of the Polyas should stand still and not giue them place whereby hee should chaunce to touch their bodies hee may fréely thrust him through and no man aske him why he did it And when they are once touched by any Polya◠or by any other nation except Nayros they must before they eate or conuerse with other Nayro◠wash and clense their bodies with great ceremonies and superstitions Likewise they must not bee touched by any Christian or any other man And when the Portingales came first into India and made league and composition with the King of Cochin the Nayros desired that men shold giue them place and turne out of the way when they mette in the stréetes as the Polyas and others vsed to doe which the Portingales would not consent vnto thinking it to be against their credits and honors for them to be compared to the Polyas and vnprofitable sort of people whereas they estéemed themselues better then the Nayros both in person and armes therefore they would haue the Nayros to giue them place whereby they could not agrée in the end it was concluded to pacifie the matter and to kéepe peace and quietnes among them that two men should be chosen one for the Nayros and the other for the Portingales that should fight body to body and he that should be ouerthrowne that nation should giue place vnto the other this was done in the presence of both nations and the Portingall ouercame the Nayro whome hee slew whereupon it was agréed that the Nayros should giue place vnto the Portingall and
stand a side vntill hee be past where soeuer they meete The Nayros weare the nayls of their hands very long wherby they shew that they are Gentlemen because the longnesse of the nayles doth let and hinder men from working or doing any labour They say likewise that they do it the better and faster to gripe a thing in their hands and to holde their Rapiers which some Portingales and Mesticos doe likewise vse and hold the same opinion with the Nayros whereof there are many in India which let their nayles grow for the same cause The principallest or chiefest of those Nayros which are leaders or Captaines of certaine numbers of Nayros weare a Gold or Siluer bracelet or ring about their armes aboue their elbowes as also their Gouernours Ambassadours and Kings whereby they are knowne from other men for otherwise they goe all naked Also their Kings rulers and other Captaines and leaders when they goe abroad are garded and accompanied by other Nayros They are verie good and stout souldiers and wil set vpon a man verie fiercely they are also verie full of reuenge so that whensoeuer they fight against their enemies either by water or by lande and that they chaunce to bee thrust into the body with a Pike they are not presently therewith content to lie downe but if they cannot spéedily plucke the Pike forth they will not spare to pull it forth with both their hands and draw it through their bodies therewith to set vpon them that gaue them the wound and to be reuenged on them Habitus et facies Mercatorum Goensium Indorum qui mutandis mercibus valde industrij Habyt en gedaente der â—ndiaensche Coopluyden welcke in hare handel seer cloeck zyn Banjanes e Cambaja populus â—sâ—andis gemmis scribendo supputandoque valdé â—ercitatus Banjanen vun Cambajen in t keâ— van gesteenten schryven en rekenen zeer geâ— Bramenes Idolorum in India Sacerdotes Bramenes der Indiuenscher affgoden Papen ofte Priesters Mâ—aniere van bruylost in t Lant van Ballagate achter Goa gelegen Bramenes cum mortuus est secundum eorum legem crematur uxor autem ejus proe amore sese vivam in ignem cum illo conjicit De Bramene do ot wesende wort nae haer wet verbrant en zyn vrouwe wt liefde haers mans verbrant haer levendich met hem Agricola Indus Canaryn dictus Een Indiaens sant ofte bouwman genaemt Canaryn Indorum liberi pro eorum consuetuâ—â—â—â— pudendis tantum rariori tela contectis Indiaensche kinderen al 's slants manier is 〈…〉 en die scha melheyt met een dun linnen doecksken be 〈…〉 hebbende Miles Indus quem lascarin nominant Een Indiaens soldaet lascarin geheeten Inda meretrix saltando et canendo victum queritans Een Indiaensche lichte vrouwe met dans sen en singen haer cost winnende Legati Regis Ballagatte in urbe Goa comitatus Die staet des Ambassateurs van den Coninck van Ballagatte binnen Goa Scaphae piscatoriae Goensium et Cochinensium alterae ex solido trunco exca vatae alterae e pluribus funibus coagmentatae priores Almadias alteras Tones et Paleguas vocant implent et hashâ—drijs aquae recentis quam ad naves deferentes di vendant quarum magnus illic numerus S 〈…〉 huÿten diemen te Goa en Cochÿn gebruÿckt om te visschen d'eene wt een hout wtgeholt lander wt veel struÿcken met coorden tsamen gebonden déerste worden Almadias â—'andere Tones en Paseguas genaemt die daer in groot getal zÿn welcken verladen â—et cruÿcken vol soet waters daer in gestort om aende schepen te vercoopen Naute Arabes quibus naves suas regendas Lusitani committunt in quibus cum uxoribus ut plurimum habitant Arâ—bischer scheepluÿden welcke die Portugeesen haer schepen vertrouwen te regeren in welcken sij oock met haer wyven meest woonen Habitus Abissinorum quibus loco S. Baptismatis frons nutiritur Habÿten der Abissÿnen wt paep tan slant welcke in plaets van doop gebruÿcken brantmercken in t aensicht Moerianen wt Mocambÿcke en die omliggende contreÿen diemen Caffres noemt sommighe zÿn Christenen sommighe Heydenen en tâ—neestendeel Machometisten The other common people of the Malabares called Polyas are such as are the couÌ„trie husband men and labourers men of occupations fishers and such like those are much contemned and dispised they liue very miserably and may weare no kind of weapon neyther yet touch or be coÌ„uersant with the Nayros for as the Nayros go on the stréetes and they heare him call they step aside bowing their armes and stooping with their heades down to the ground not daring so much as once looke vp before the Nayros be past in other thinges they obserue the customes of the other Indians for that euery man followeth the occupation of his Elders and may not change it for any thing The 43. Chapter Of the Moores and Iewes in India THere are great numbers of Moores and Iewes in al places of India as at Goa Cochin within the land some coming out of other places and the rest borne of Iewes and Moores in that country and so by birth right Indians who in times past by conuersation and company of those Iewes Moores haue bene brought to their sect and opinion In their houses and apparell they follow the manner of the land wherein they are resident amongst the Indians they haue their Churches Synagogues and Mesquitas wherein they vse all ceremonies according to their law but in the places where the Portingales inhabite and gouern it is not permitted vnto them to vse them openly neither to any Indian although they haue their families and dwelling houses and get their liuings and deal one with the other but secretly in their houses they may doe what they will so that no man take offence thereat without the townes and where the Portingales haue no commandement they may fréely vse and exercise their ceremonies and superstitions euery one as liketh him best without any man to let or deny them but if they be founde openlie doing it in the Portingales townes and iurisdictions or that they haue any point of Christian ceremonies mingled among theirs both men and womeÌ„ die for it vnlesse they turne vnto the christian faith as it oftentimes happeneth without the towne of Cochin where the King kéepeth his Court there the Iewes and Moores haue frée libertie to vse their sects and ceremonies openlie for there the Iewes haue made and built very fair stone houses and are rich marchants and of the king of Cochins néerest Counsellers there they haue their synagogue with their hebrue Bible and Moses Lawe which I haue had in my hand they are most white of colour like men of Europa haue many faire women There are manie of them that came out of the country of Palestina Ierusalem thether and speake ouer all the Exchange verie perfect and good Spanish they obserue the Saboth day and other iudiciall ceremonies and hope for the
Messias to come The Moores like wise haue their Mesquitos wherein they pray and aboue the Church they haue manie sellers and galleries where they learne their children their principles of Religion before they goe to Church they wash their féet for the which purpose they haue alwaies a cesterne with water standing without the Church leaue their Alparcos which are their shoes standing at the Church dore before they goe in and being in the Church they fall flat on the ground vpon their faces and so with their armes handes lifted vp make manie counterfait faces They are also circumcised like the Iewes eate no hogges flesh and when they are dead they are buried In their churches they haue not any Images but onelie some stones or round pillers standing vpright with certaine Chaldean letters out of their Alcaron grauen vpon them As I and a friend of myne chaÌ„ced to go out of the town we were desirous to sée their Mahometicall Church and their manner of seruice which was denyed vs by the kéeper of the dore that bad vs put off our shoes but because wee would not he said it was not lawfull for vs to enter in that sort into the Church but to let vs sée it he suffered vs to stand within the dore and opened some of the windowes that we might sée what was within it then the Portingale asked him for their God their Saintes which they vsed to pray vnto because he sawe the Church emptie as I sayd before then the Moore answered him that they vsed not to pray to stockes and stones but to the liuing God which is in Heauen and said that the proude Portingale Christians and the Heathens were all of one Religion for that they prayed to Images made of wood and stones and giue them the glorie which onely appertaineth to the liuing God with the which answere the Portingal was so angrie that he began to chide make a great noyse and to giue him manie hard words wherewith manie Iewes Moores assembled about them so that there had growne a great quarrell had it not bene for me that got him to hold his peace and so brought him away and let the matter rest in that sort These Moores traffique much with spices to the red sea and other places both by water and by land And although manie of them dwell among the Portingales and traffique much with them yet secretly they are their most deadly enemies and doe them much mischief and are the principal occasion that there are no more Christians conuerted to the faith of Christ séeking all the wayes and meanes they can to withdraw and disswade them from it whereby the Indians doe both vse and followe their customes and Religion By the Picture following you may sée the state and maiestie of the king of Cochin sitting vpon an Elephant when he rydeth abroad with his Nayros or Gentlemen and soldiers that guard and conduct him also the other Malabares both men and women called Polyas which the Mores and Mahometans that dwell in Cananor among the Malabares as I said before You shall also sée the Christians that are called S. Thomas Christians whereof many dwell among the Malabares with one great legge as they are borne as in the description of the coast I haue alreadie shewed likewise the picture of the men of Pegu and the Ilandes of Molucos The 44. Chapter Of the Pagodes and Indian Idoles forming keeping ceremonies and superstitions in generall brieflie described Cochini Rex elephante vectus cum procerum comitatu quos Nairos vocant Die Coninck van Cochin op een elephant geseeten verselschapt met sijn edelen diemen Nairos noemt Provinciae Pegu incola auri adamantum et rubinorum ferax undelacca sigillatoria advehitur Een wt Pegu waer veel gout diamanten en robynen gevonden en het zegellack gemaeckt â—ort Incola ex Insulis Moluco ubi Carijopâ—ijlla magnâ copiâ crescunt quorum vestes e stramine sunt factoe Een inwoonder wt die Eylanden van Moâ—uco daer die Garyophyl nagelen over vloedich groÿen welcks cleedeâ—en van stroy zyn Penequais familioe a Divo Thoma execratae intotam ut Indi referunt pro geniem Van penekays geslachten van S. Thomas al 's die â—dianen seggen gantselicken vervlocekt Inquilini e Cananor Mahometani infectiss Lusitanorum hostes Die Machometisten van Cananor en do ot vianden vande Portugeesen Incolae Malabarae maritimi inter Goam et Cochina apud quos piper nascitur Inwoonders van Malabar tusschen Goa en Cochyn aende Zeecant daer die peeper wast Horrendae Idolorum effigies quae in omnibus viarum angulis obuia Indi prostrati passim adorant et donarijs prosequutur a Bramenis sacerdotibus ob sapientioe opinionem apud illos magni habitis Pagodes dicta Scrickelicke beâ—denisse der Indiaensche affgoden gestest op alle hoccken van de weegen welcke sij haâ—r offer hande doen en seer de voetelicken aenbidden van haer papen Bramenes die om opinie van wysheyt daer seer geacht sijn Pagodes genaemt Mesquita seu templum Indorum Mahometistarum quae secta totum fere orientem pervasit Mesquita ofte tempel der Machometische Indianen welcke seckte bynaer geheel Orienten doordrongen heeft In the Iland of Seylon whereof I haue alreadie spoken there is a high Hill called Pico d'Adam or Adams Hill vpon the top whereof standeth a great house as big as a Cloyster wherein standeth a Pagode of great account In this place in time past there was a Toothe of an Ape shrined in Gold and precious stones and therein was kept this Toothe which for costlynes and worthynes was estéemed the holyest thing in all India and had the greatest resort vnto it from all the countries round about it so that it passed both S. Iames in Galisia and S. Michaeâ—s Mount in France by reason of the great indulgences pardons that were there daylie to be had for which cause it was sought vnto with great deuotion by all the Indians within 4 or 500 miles round about in great multitudes but it happened an 1554 wheÌ„ y e Portingales made a road out of India and entred the Iland of Seylon they went vp vpon the hill where they thought to finde great treasure because of the fame that was spread abroad of the great resort and offering in that place where they sought the Cloyster and turned vp euerie stone thereof and found nothing but a little Coffer made fast with many costly precious stones wherein laye the Apes tooth This bootie or relique they tooke with them vnto Goa which when the Kings of Pegu Sion Bengala Bisnagar and others heard of they were much grieued that their so costly Iewell was in that manner taken from them wherupon by common consent they sent their Ambassadors vnto the Viceroy of India desiring him of all friendship to send them their Apes tooth againe offering him for a ransome besides other presents which as then they sent vnto him
700. thousand Ducats in Golde which the Viceroy for couetousnesse of the money was minded to doe But the Archbishop of Goa called Don Gaspar my Lords predicessor disswaded him from it saying that they being Christians ought not to giue it them againe being a thing whereby Idolatrie might be furthered and the Deuill worshipped but rather were bound by their profession to roote out and abolish all Idolatrie and superstition as much as in them lay By which meanes the Viceroy was perswaded to change his mind and flatly denied the Ambassadours request hauing in their presence first burnt the Apes tooth the Ashes whereof hee caused to bee throwne into the Sea Whereupon the Ambassadors fearing some further mischief tooke their leaue and departed being much astonished that hee refused so great a summe of money for a thing which hee so little estéemed that hee burnt it and threw the Ashes into the Sea Not long after there was a Beniane as the Benianes are full of subtiltie that had gotten an other Apes tooth and made the Indians and Heathens belieue that hee had miraculously found the same Apes tooth that the Viceroye had and that it was reuealed vnto him by a Pagode in a visâ—on that assured him it was the same which hee said the Portingales thought they had burned but that he had béene there inuisible and taken it away laying an other in the place Which the Heathens presently belieued so that it came vnto the King of Bisnagars eares who thereupon desired the Beniane to send it him and with great ioy receiued it giuing the Beniane a great summe of Golde for it where it was againe holden and kept in the same honour and estimation as the other that was burnt had béene In the kingdome of Narsinga or the coast called Châ—ramandel there standeth a Pagode that is verie great excéeding rich and holden in great estimation hauing manye Pilgrimages and visitations made vnto it from all the countries bordering about it where euerie yeare they haue many faires feastes and processions and there they haue a Wagon or a Carte which is so great and heauie that thrée or foure Elephants can hardly draw it and this is brought foorth at faires feastes and processions At this Carte hang likewise many Cables or Ropes wherat also all the countrie people both men and women of pure deuotion doe pull and hale In the vpper part of this Carte standeth a Tabernacle or seate wherein sitteth the Idoll and vnder it sit the Kings wiues which after their manner play on all instruments making a most swéete melodie and in that sort is the Carte drawne foorth with great deuotions and processions there are some of them that of great zeale and pure deuotion doe cut péeces of flesh out of their bodies and throwe them downe before the Pagode others laye themselues vnder the whéeles of the Carte and let the Carte runne ouer them whereby they are all crushed to péeces and pressed to death and they that thus die are accounted for holy and deuout Martyrs and from that time forwardes are kept and preserued for great and holy Reliques besides a thousand â—ther such like beastly superstitions which they vse as one of my Chamber fellowes that had seene it shewed me and it is also wel knowne throughout all India Vpon a time I and certaine Portingales my friends hauing licence from the Viceroy were at a banket and méeting about fiue or sixe miles within the firme land and with vs wee had certaine Decanijns and naturall borne Indians that were acquainted with the countrie the chiefe cause of our going was to see their manner of burning the deade Bramene and his wife with him being aliue because we had béene aduertised that such a thing was to be done And there among other strange deuises that we saw wee came into some Villages and places inhabited by the Indians where in the way and at euerie hil stonie Rocke or hole almost within a Pater noster length wee found a Carued Pagode or rather Deuils and monsters in hellish shapes At the last wee came into a Village where stoode a great Church of stone wherein wee entered and found nothing in it but a great Table that hung in the middle of the Church with the Image of a Pagode painted therein so mishaped and deformed that more monsterous was neuer séene for it had many hornes and long téeth that hung out of his mouth down to the knées and beneath his Nauel and belly it had an other such like face with many hornes and tuskes Vppon the head thereof stoode a triple Crowned Myter not much vnlike the Popes triple crown so that in effect it séemed to be a monster such as are described in the Apocalips It hung before a Wall which made a partition from an other Chamber in manner of a Quier yet was it close made vp without windowes or any place for light in the middle whereof was a little narrow close doore and on both sides of the doore stoode a small Furnace made within the wall wherein were certaine holes or Lattisses thereby to let the smoke or sauor of the fire to enter into that place when any offering should bee made Whereof wee found some there as Rice Corne. Fruites Hennes and such like things which the Indians dayly offered but there came so filthie a smoke and stincke out of the place that whosoeuer went néere it was almost readie to choke the said place being all black smerie and foule there with Before this doore being shut in the middle of the Church there stoode a Calfe of stone whereon one of our companie leaped and laughing began to crie out which the Bramene that kept the Church perceiuing began to call and crie for helpe so that presently many of the neighbours ranne thether to sée what the cause might bee but before the thrung of people came we dealt so well with the Bramene acknowledging our fault saying it was vnaduisedly done that he was well content the people went home againe Then wee desired the Bramene to open vs the doore that stoode shut which after much intreatie he yeelded vnto offering first to throw certaine Ashes vpon our foreheads which we refused so y t before hee would open vs the doore wee were forced to promise him that we would not enter further in theÌ„ to the doore The doore of their Sancta Sanctorum or rather Diaboloâ—uÌ„ being opened it shewed within like a Lime kill being close vaulted round about ouer the heade without either hole or window to cast in light but onely at the doore neither was ther any light in al the Church but that which came in at the doore we entered by Within the said cell or vault there hung at the least 10â— burning Lamps in the middle whereof stoode a little Altar and couered ouer with cloth made of cotton wool ouer that with pure golde vnder the which as the Bramene told vs sat the Pagode being of
cleane golde of the bignes of a Puppet or a Baby solde in faires hard by the Church without the great doore stood within y e Earth a great foure cornered or square Cesterne he wed out of frée stone with staires on each side to goe downe into it full of gréene filthie and stinking water wherin they wash them selues when they meane to enter into the Church to pray From thence we went further and still as we went in euery place wee found Pagodes hewed out of hard stones standing in their holes of such liuely shapes and figures as wee tolde you before These stand in the waies vnder certaine couertures without the Churches and haue hard by each of them a small Cesterne of water cut out of the stone to wash their féete with halfe an Indian Nut that hath a handle and hangeth there to take vp water withall And this is ordained for the trauellers that passe by who commonly at euerie one of those Pagodes do fall downe and make their praiers and wash their féete in those Cesternes By the said Pagodes commonly doe stand two little Furnaces with a Calfe or Cow of stone before the which they set their offerings which are of such things as are to be eaten euerie man as his deuotion serueth which they think the Pagode eateth in the night but it is taken away by the Bramene We found in euerie place such offerings standing but we had little desire once to taste therof it looked so filthily and as we had sufficiently beholden their mishapen figures and monstrous Images we returned againe vnto the village wherein we saw the stone Church because the Bramene had aduertised vs that the same day about Euening the Pagode should be caried in procession to sport it selfe in the fieldes and to fetch a circuite which we desired to sée And about the time which he appointed they rung a little Bell which they had gotten of the Christians wherewith all the people began to assemble and tooke the Pagode out of his diabolicall Cell which with great reuerence they set in a Palamkin borne by the chiefe men of the towne all the rest with great deâ—otion following after with their vsual noyse and sounds of Trumpets and other instruments wherewith they went a reasonable way round about a field then brought him to the stone Cestern where washing him verie cleane although he were verie filthy stinking they caried him againe into his Cel leauing him shut herein withall his Lampes to make good cheare and hauing made a foule smoke and stincke about him and euery man left his offering behind him they went home to their houses leauing the Bramene alone who in stéed of the Pagode made good cheare at their costs with his wife and family This is the maner of their ceremonies and daily superstitions worshippings of false gods wherein the Deuill hath so blinded them that thereby they are without all doubt perswaded to obtaine eternall life and tell many miracles of their Idols whereby wee are mooued and put in mind to call to remembraunce how much herein we are bound to God and to giue him thankes that it hath pleased him to illuminate vs with the truth of his holy Gospel and that we are not borne or brought vp among those Heathens and diuelish Idolaters and to desire God that it would please him of his gracious goodnesse to open their eyes and to giue them the truth of his holy word among them as hee is our onely trust for they are in all things like vs made after Gods owne Image and that when his good pleasure is hee will loose them out of the bands of Sathan and giue both them and vs that which is most necessarie for our soules Amen The better to vnderstand the maner of their diuelish shapes and figures of Pagodes I haue hereunto annexed the picture thereof euen as they openly stand in the high wayes or hilles with a Cow or Calfe of stone by them also their Church called Meskita belonging to the Mahometans and Moores dweling in Malabar with the Cesterne of water wherein they wash themselues The 45. Chapter Of all the kinde of beastes Cattell and foules in India THere is ouer all India great store of Cattell as Oxen Kine Shéepe Hogges Goates Kids and such like and verie good cheape and in great aboundance although the flesh is not of so good a tast as that in Europe which procéedeth from the heate of the countrie therfore it is not much estéemed A man may buy the best Cow in Goa for fiue or sixe Pardawes Oxen are there little killed to eate but are most kept to til the land all other things as hogges shéepe and goates are sold after the rate Mutton is little estéemed of and not much vsed to be eaten for it is forbidden to such as are sicke the Hogs flesh is much better sounder which is rather permitted vnto sicke persons then Mutton Ther are shéepe in that countrie of fiue quarters in quantity for that the tayle is as great hath as much flesh vpon it as any of the quarters there are many Buffles but nothing good to be eaten vnles it be by poore people but their Milke is very good and is very well solde and ordinarily eaten for you shall sée the slaues Canarijns in great numbers all day going about the stréetes to sell the Milke of Buffles and Goates and excellent swéete Creame and fresh butter in small péeces They make likewise some small white Cheeses but they are very salte and drie wilde Bores some Hares Conies Harts and Hindes are there also to be found but not many Cockes Capons Pheasantes and Doues are there in great abundance and good cheape In the Island of Goa and there about are Sparrows and some other small birdes yet not many but on the coast of Cochin and Malabar there are very few Sparrows nor any such like small birdes There are in India many Battes and some of them so great that it is incredible to tell They doe great mischiefe to trées fruites and hearbes whereby the Canariins are constrained to set men to watch in their trées and yet they can hardly ridde them away The Indians eate them and say they are as good meat as a Partridge There is a most wonderfull number of black Crows which do much hurt and are so bold that oftentimes they come flying in at their windowes and take the meat out of the dish as it standeth vpon the table before them that are set downe to eate and as I my selfe sate writing aboue in a chamber of the house the windowes being open one of those Crowes flew in at the window and picked the cotton one of mine Inke horne and blotted all the paper that lay on my table do what I could to let him They sitte commonly vppon the Buffles backes and pecke off their haire so that you shal find very few Buffles that haue any haire vpon their backes and
therefore to auoide the Crowes they get themselues into marishes and watrie places where they stand in the water vppe to the neckes otherwise they could neuer be rid of them There are likewise great numbers of Rattes and some as bigge as young Pigges so that the Cattes dare not touch them Sometimes they digge downe the houses for that they vndermine the walles foundations through and through wherby many times the houses fall downe and are spoyled There is another sort of Rattes that are little and reddish of haire They are called sweet smelling Rattes for they haue a smell as if they were full of Muske Of Ants or Pismires there is so great aboundance throughout al India and so noysome that it is incredible to such as haue not seene it for that men may set nothing whatsoeuer it be that is to be eaten or fattie nor yet their clothes nor linnen but you shall presently find at the least a thousand vpon it and in the twinckling of an eye they wil presently consume a loafe of bread wherefore it is the manner throughout India to make all the Cubbords wherein they kéep their victualls and chests where their linnen and apparrell lyeth with foure féete or pillers and vnder euery foot or piller a stone or woodden Cestern full of water and place the Cubbord or chest in the middle of the roome not néete the wall whereby they cannot come at it otherwise it would be spoyled and if they do neuer so little forget to powre water into the Cesternes if it be but a Pater noster while presently ther will be so many Pismires crawling all ouer it that it is wonderfull so that it séemeth to bee a curse or plague of God sent vppon that countrey There are some likewise that vse such Cesternes of water vnder their bedstéed because they wold not be troubled with them as they lie in their beds and also vnder their tables Some men which kéep Canary birds or such small fowles that are brought thither from Portingall or out of Turkey and Persia for their pleasures are forced to set them on a sticke or pearch made for the purpose with a Cesterne of water vnder it otherwise it would presently be killed by the Pismires and though it hangeth in the top of the house yet they will come at it if it haue a string to hold it by The soldiers and poore people that haue not the meanes to buy Cubbordes with Cesternes put the bread and other victuaâ—les which they leaue which is not ouer much into a cloth tyed on knots and hang it on a nayle against a wall and make a circle about it of Charcoale so that the Pismires cannot get ouer nor come at it There is another sorte of Pismires which are almost a finger long and reddish of colour they runne into the fields do great hurt to the herbes fruites and plants Moathes wormes which créepe and eate through mens cloathes are there in great aboundance whereby men must vse no more cloathes nor linnen in those countries then that he necessarily and dayly weareth on his back otherwise they are presently moath-eaten and spoyled They can hardly kepe any paper or bokes from wormes which are like eare wormes but they do often spoyle consume many papers euidences of great importance There are also many Wall-lyce There is a kind of beast that flyeth twice as bigge as a Bee and is called Baratta These creatures also do much hurt and are commoÌ„ly in Sugar Hony Butter Oile and al fatte wares and swéet meats Many of them likewise come into their chestes among their clothes and linnen which they doe also spoyle and spot They are in great numbers and verie hurtfull There can bee nothing so close shut or made fast but they wil get in spoile it for where they lie or be they spot all things with their egges which stick as fast as sirop vpon a paper so that ther may bee estéemed they are to draw they binde the fat or packe fast with a rope that he may féele the waight thereof and then the keeper speaketh vnto him whereuppon hee taketh the corde with his snout and windeth it about his teeth and thrusteth the end into his mouthâ— so draweth it hanging after him whether they desire to haue it If it be to be put into a boate then they bring the boate close to the shore of the Key and the Elephant putteth it into the boate himselfe and with his snout gathereth stones together which he laieth vnder the fat pipe or packe with his teeth striketh thrusteth the packe or vessell to see if it lie fast or not It will draw any great shot or other Iron work or mettall being made fast vnto it be it neuer so heauie they draw fustes small Gallies and other great boats as Caruels and such like as easily out of the water vpon the land as if no man were in them so that they serue their turnes there euen as our slids or carts with horses doe here to carrie our wares and marchandises their meat is rice and water they sléepe like kine oxen horses and all foure footed beastes and bow their knées and all their members as other beasts doe In winter when it beginneth to raine then they are vnquiet and altogether mad so that their kéepers cannot rule them and then they are let some whether out of the towne to a great trée and there tyed vnto it by the legs with a great iron chaine where they cary him meate and so hee lieth in the open aire as long as he is mad which is from Aprill to September all the Winter time when it raineth and then he commeth to him selfe and beginneth to serue againe as tamely that a maÌ„ may lie vnder his bellie so you doe him no hurt but he that hurteth him hee must take héede for they neuer forget when any man doth them iniurie vntill they be reuenged Their téeth which is the Iuor bone is much vsed in India specially in Cambaia whereof they make many curious péeces of workemanship the women weare manillas or arme bracelets therof ten or twelue about each arme whereby it is there much worne and are in great numbers brought out of Aethiopia Mosambique and other places In the Island of Seylon and Pegu they fight most vpon Elephants and bind swords vpon their teeth they haue likewise woodden Castles vppon their backes wherein are fiue or sixe men that shoot out of them with bowes or peeces and also cast out wildfire They doo no other hurt but onely serue to put the enemie out of order and to scatter them out of their rankes but if any one of them once turneth his backe then they all begin to turne runne ouer their owne people and put them all out of order They are very fearefull of a rat or a mouse and also of the Pismyres because they feare they would créepe into their snouts They are likewise
such like chances happen dayly by those fishes in India as well in the sea as in the Riuers specially among the Fishers for Pearles whereof many loose their liues In the Riuer of Goa in Winter time when the mouth of the Riuer was shut vp as commonly at that time it is the fishermen tooke a fish of a most wonderfull and strange forme such as I thinke was neuer seene eyther in India or in any other place which for the strangenes therof was presented to my Lord the Archbishop the picture whereof by his commandement was painted and for a wonder sent to the King of Spaine It was in bignes as great as a middle sized Dogge with a snout like a hogge small eies no eares but two holes where his eares should bee it had foure féet like an Elephant the tayle beginning somewhat vppon the backe broad and then flatte and at the verie end round and somewhat sharpe It ranne a a long the hall vppon the flore and in euerie place of the house snorting like a hogge The whole body head taile legs being couered with sâ—ales of a thumb breadth harder than Iron or steele Wee hewed and layd vppon them with weapons as if men should beate vpon an Anuill and when wee stroke vppon him hee rouled himselfe in a heape head and féete altogether so that hee lay like a round ball wee not beeing able to iudge where hee closed himselfe together neyther could wee with anie instrument or strength of hands open him againe but letting him alone and not touching him hee opened himselfe and ranne away as I said before And because I am now in hand with Fishes of India I will here declare a short and true Historie of a Fish although to some it may seeme incredible but it standeth painted in the Viceroyes Pallace in India and was set downe by true and credible witnesses that it was so and therefore it standeth there for memorie of a wonderfull thing together with the names and surnames of the ship Captaine day yere when it was done and as yet there are many men liuing at this day that were in the same shippe and aduenture for that it is not long since and it was thus That a ship sayling from Mosambique into India and they hauing faire weather a good fore winde as much as the Sayles might beare before the winde for the space of fourteene dayes together directing their course towards the Equinoctiall line euery day as they tooke the height of the Sunne in stead of diminishing or lessening their degrées according to the Winde and course they had and held they found them selues still contrarie and euery day further backewards then they were to the great admiration and wondering of them all and contrarie to all reason and mans vnderstanding so that they did not only wonder theraf but were much abasht beeing stedfastly perswaded that they were bewitched for they knew very well by experience that the streame or course of the water in those countries did not driue them backe nor withholde them contrarie to all Art of Nauigation whereupon they were all in great perplexity and feare standing still and beholding each other not once knowing the cause thereof At y e last the chiefe Boteson whoÌ„ they call the masters mate looking by chance ouerbord towards the beakhead of the ship he espied a great broad taile of a Fish that had winded it selfe as it were about the beake-head the body therof beeing vnder the keele and the heade vnder the Ruther swimming in that manner and drawing the shippe with her against the wind and their right course whereby presently they knewe the cause of their so going backewards so that hauing at the last stricken long with staues and other weapons vppon the fishes taile in the ende they stroke it off and thereby the fish left the ship after it had layne 14 dayes vnder the same drawing the ship with it against wind and weather for which cause the Viceroy in Goa caused it to be painted in his pallace for a perpetuall memory where I haue often read it with the day and time and the name both of the shippe and Captaine which I can not well remember although it bee no great matter There are many other fishes in those seas and riuers In the Riuer of Bengala called Gâ—aâ— and by Malacca there are Crocodiles and other sea Serpents of an vnspeakeable greatnes which often times doe ouerturne smal fisher boates and other sentes and deuoure the men that are therein and some of them creeping out of the water vnto the lande do snatch vppe diuers men which they hale after them and then kill them and eate them as it dayly happeneth in those Countries There are by Malacca certaine fish shelles found on the shore much like Scalop shelles so great and so heauie that two strong men haue enough to doe with a Leauer to draw one of them after them Within them there is a fish which they of Malacca do eate There were some of those shelles in the ballast of the shippe that came from Malacca kept company with vs from the Island of S. Hâ—lenâ— to the Islande of Tercera where the shippe was cast away and some of the shelles taken out of her which the Iesuites of Malacca had sent vnto Lisbone to set in the wals of their church and Cloyster which they there had caused to bee made and most sumptuously built The like happened to a shippe called S. Peter that sayled from Coâ— towardes Portingall that fell vpon a sande which at this day is called after the same ships name S. Peters sande lying from Goa South Southeast vnder 6. degrees vpon the South side where it was cast away but all the men saued themselues and of the woode of the shippe that was cast away they made a small Barke or Caruell wherewith they all arriued in India while they were busied about building of their ship they found such great Crabbes vpon that sand and in so great numbers that they were constrained to make a sconce and by good watch to defend themselues from theÌ„ for that they were of an vnreasonable greatnes so that whomsoeuer they got vnder their claws it cost him his life this is most true and not long since done for that in the same shippe wherein I came out of India into Portingal there were two of the Saylors that had beene in the same shippe called S. Peter and affirmed it for a truth as it is likewise paynted in diuers places in Goa for a perpetual memory which I thought good to set downe to shewe the strangenesse of those fishes and it is to be thought that there are many other fishes and sea monsters as yet to vs not known which are dayly found by such as continually vse to sea and doo often meete with them And this shall be sufficient for the fishes sea monsters of India The 49. Chapter Of all fruits trees plants and common hearbs
somewhat pleasanter but in taste it is most like vnto the Peach somtimes like a Hony Combe sometimes like a Citron but they are hard to digest doe commonly come vp againe out of the stomacke vndigested euen as they were eaten This fruit being cut vp and opened longwise in the middle is white within and full of meate with many partitions ful of long Nuts thicker and greater then Dates with a graye sâ—n the Nut white like our Chesnuts Being greene they eate earthy and sharpe of taste and ingender much Wine but being rosted or soden they are like our Chesnuts are verie pleasant they increase lust for the which cause they are most vsed to bee eaten They stop the Flux of the belly the skin about them is heauie for the maw and corrupting therein doth breed many euil and pestilent humors wherof such as eate much of this fruit doe easily get the Plague which the Indians call Morxi He that desireth to see more hereof let him Reade Lodouicus Romanus in his fifth Booke and fifteene Chapter of his Nauigations and Christopherus a Costa in his Cap. of Iaca Gracia ab Horto in the second booke and fourth Chapter Iaaca grow on great trées like Nut trees onely on the sea shores that is to say in such countries as border on the seas cleane contrarie vnto al other fruites for they grow aboue the earth vpon the trunkes or bodies of the trees vpon the great thick branches but where the branches spread abroad being small and full of leaues there groweth none they are as big as a great Melon and much like it of fashion although some of them are as great as a man can well lift vp and outwardlie are like the Ananas but smoother and of a darke gréene colour the fruit within is in huskes like Chesnuttes but of an other forme and euerie huske hath a Nutte which is half white the rest yealowish and sticketh to a mans handes like honnie when it is in the beehyues among the waxe and for toughnesse in taste for sweetnes not much vnlike The fruite is on the out side like a Chesnutte and in forme or fashion like an Acorne when the gréene knob that groweth vnder it is taken away and of that bignesse and some what bigger this fruite that is outmost being eaten the rest is good to be rosted or sodden and are not much vnlike in taste to the Chesnuts of Europa There are of these huskes in euery Iaacca a hundreth and more according to the greatnes thereof There are two sorts of them the best are called Girasal and the common and least estéemed Chambasal although in fashion and trées there is no difference saue that the Girasals haue a swéeter taste By this name Girasal ChaÌ„basal the Indians doe make difference of their Ryce and other things they call the best Girasal and the worst Chambasal after the which names they haue their prices the Iaaccas continue all the yeare The 51. Chapter Of Mangas MAngas growe vppon great trees like Iaca trees they haue many branches and are of quantitie as bigge as a great Goose Egge and in some places of India doe weigh two pounds and more the peece And many times there are of seuerall colours vpon one tree some being a light green others Yelow some a reddish green and for smel and taste pleasant and not being perished are of better tast then any Peach As touching their name they are commonly called Mangas in Canarijn Ambo of the Turkes and Persians Amba They beare fruit vpon the trees from Aprill to Nouember according to the situation of the place they growe in many places but the best in Ormus where before all other fruites they are desired next vnto them are those that grow in Gusarate which for their goodnes are called Gusarates they are smaller then the other but of better taste sauor within they haue a small Nut or kernell A thirde sort there is that groweth in Balagatte and those are the greatest for there are of them that waigh two pound a quarter of a verie pleasant taste Euen so are those that grow in Charanna Quindor Madanagor and Dultabado being the chiefe townes in the kingdome of Nisamoxa and like vnto them are the Mangas of Bengala Pegu and Malacca The shel of them being taken off is eateÌ„ in slices with wine and also without Wine as wee eate Peaches they are also preserued the better to keepe them either in Suger Vineger Oyle or Salt like Oliues in Spaine and being a little opened with a Knife they are stuffed with greene Ginger headed Garlike Mustard or such like they are sometimes eaten only with Salt and somtimes sodden with Rice as we doe Oliues and being thus conserued and sodden are brought to sell in the market This fruite is colde and moyst although commonly they esteeme it to bee hotte say it ingendereth a paine and griping in the maw of such as eate it and more ouer the Heathen Physitians say it is hotte and reiecte or refuse it because it ingendereth Saint Anthonies fire Carbuncles hotte burning Feauers and swellings with scabbes and scuruines which I thinke happeneth to men that eate this fruite and being eaten lyeth corrupted in their Mawes or rather by reason of the great heate and season of the yeare At the time when this fruite is ripe many doe fall into the forenamed diseases although they eate none of this fruite Before this fruite is fully ripe it is somewhat hard of taste specially the inner part next to the Nut but being ripe verie sweete and sauorie The Nut that is within it hath a hard huske or shell with hard threeds about it wherein groweth a long Nut as big as an Acorne white within and outwardly couered with a thin white skin Being raw it is bitter of tast therefore it is good against wormes and loosenes of the belly against wormes when it is eaten raw and against loosenesse of the belly when it is rosted and then it tasteth like a rosted Acorne There is an other kinde of this fruite without stones which is very pleasant There is also a third sorte which is wilde called Mangas Brauas and is verie poyson wher-with they poyson each other for whosoeuer eateth but a small quantitie thereof dyeth presently They doe sometime mingle Oyle with it to make it stronger and being taken in that sort howsoeuer it be it killeth very quickly and as yet there was neuer any remedie found against it This fruite is light greene and somewhat bright full of white milky Iuice and but a litle meate The Nut is couered with a hard shel as bigge as a Quince Mangas groweth vpon trées like Iaaca trées they are as big as a great Peach but somewhat long and a little crooked of colour cleere gréen somewhat yealowish and some times reddish it hath within it a stone bigger then a Peach stone but it is not good to be eaten the Mangas is
This fruite at the first for the strangenes thereof was much estéemed but now they account not of it There are likewise in India some fig trées of Portingal although the fruite doth neuer come to good perfection Oranges Lemons Citrons and such like fruite are throughout all India in great abundance and for goodnes and taste surpasse those of Spaine Grapes are not ther to be found but onelie vpon some houses as we haue theÌ„ in netherlaÌ„d yet against Christmas and Lent there are raysins brought into Goa by the Decanaes and Indians out of the firme land and from Ballagate but they are not so good as those in Spaine and verie fewe they are but for price as good cheape as other fruites There are also in India manie Melons but not so good as those in Spaine for that they must be eaten with Suger if you wil haue any swéetnes in theÌ„ but ther is an other sort like Melons called Patecas or Angurias or Melons of India which are outwardlie of a darke gréene colour inwardlie white with blacke kernels they are verie waterish and hard to byte and so moyst that as a man eateth them his mouth is full of water but yet verie swéet and verie cold and fresh meat wherfore manie of them are eateÌ„ after dinner to coole men Cucumbers and Radishes are there in great numbers also Colewortes but not so good as in Europa for the Colewortes neuer grow to their full growth but are loose with their leaues open They haue likewise some sallet hearbs but verie little hearbs whereof men make Porridge are not there to be had nor manie swéet smelling hearbs nor flowers as Roses lillies rosemary or such like sorts of flowers plants there are none yet they haue some fewe Roses and a little Rosemarie but of no great smell The fields neuer haue any other flowers in them but onelie grasse and that is in Winter when it rayneth for in SuÌ„mer it is cleane burnt off with the excéeding heat of the Sunne There is onelie a kinde of blossomes of trées which grow all the yeare long called Fulle that smell verie swéet the women doe ordinarily throw them among their Lynnen and apparell to make them swéet They likewise make Collers or strings ful of them which they weare about their necks and strew them in their beds for they are verie desirous of swéete sauors for other sorts of swéet flowers hearbs whereof thousands are found in Europe they are not in India to be had so that when you tell them of y e sweet flowers and herbes of these countries they wonder much thereat and are verie desirous of them By these pictures you may sée the forme and fashions of the fruites called Iaacka Ananas Mangas Caius Iambos which are the fyue principallest most estéemed fruites in all India for others are but of small account of Ginger also as it groweth whereof in an other place I will say more when I make mention of the spices and drie wares of India all which are set down according to the life although the leaues are not altogether so proportionable with their strings and veynes as they should be or as the Physitions and Doctors in their Herbals haue described them hauing onely shewed the forme and growth of the fruites as I haue seene and vsed them The 55. Chapter Of the Indian Figges Nuces Indicae magni in India usus et ques tuosae cibum et potum homi nibus suaves et navibus materiam prebent idonâ—am quibus e aedem et onerantur et aluntur nautae Indiaensche nooten ofte Palmboomen welcke in Indien veel opbren gen want geven soete spijs en dranck stoff tot scheepen sensen en touwen en daer die selffde scheepen met gelaeden en die schip luyden mede gevoet werden Ficus Indica per totum annum ferens fructâ— copâ—ose â—entes quotidianam mul to rum escam Een plante draegende het qeheele Iaer vruchâ—n dâ—â—men Indiaâ—nsche vygen noâ— seer voâ—denâ— en â—en daegelickse spijse der Indianen Fructuum icon quos Arrecca sive Faufel vocant et Bettele folia quos pauco calcis subactos integrum diem masticant succum deglutientes ad corporis purgationem aliasque utilitates Eruyten diemen Arrecca ofte Faufel noemt en die blaeden Bet telle welcke met wat calcks vermenâ—t die Indianen een gant schen dach kauwen het say doorswelgen om â—lichaem te purge ren en ander haerder crachten Piperis fruteâ— haederae non absimilis Orientaelsche Peeper wasschen de â—inuer cruyt niet ongelyck Indian Figges are by the Arabians called Moris and not Musa not Amusa and the tree Daracht Moris by the Brasilians Pacona and the tree Paquouer by Brocardus in his description of the holy land Paradise Apples by Ouâ—edus in the Historie of India in his eight Booke and first Chapter Platanus in Guinea Bananas in Malauar Patan in Malayen Pican in Canara Decan Gusurate and Bengala Quelli Auicenna Serapio and Rhasis haue likewise written certaine Chapters heereof Auicenna in his second Booke and 491. Chapter writing of the properties and qualities of this fruite sayeth that it yeeldeth but small sustenaunce that it ingendereth Choller and Flegme and that it spoyleth the stomake wherefore he counselleth such as are of a hotte constitution after they haue eaten these Figges to take some Honie and Vinegar sodden together with cold seeds They are good against heate in the stomake Lungs and Kydnies and prouoke Vrine Rhasis of the same in his thirde Booke of Physicke and twentie Chapter sayth also that they are hurtfull for the maw which I also found being in Syrie when I vsed them they make men to haue an euill appetite to their meate a desire to ease their bodies and doe qualifie the rawnesse of the throate Serapio in his Booke of Phisicke in the 84. Chapter sayth that this fruit is in the ende of the first degree warming and moystning and that they are good against the heate of the stomake and Lungs but for him which eateth many of them they breede a heauinesse in his Mawe but by meanes of their hastâ—e ripening they are good for the Kidnies prouoke Vrine and make men apt for leacherie The Indian Phisitians doe vse this fruit in medicines for Feauers and other diseases The opinion as I thinke why this fruite is called Paradise Apples is partly for the pleasantnes of taste smell and colour for the taste is betweene sweete sower the smell somwhat like Roses and the colour a faire yelow and green partly also because this fruit being cut in the middle haue certaine veines like a crosse whereon the Christians in Siria doe make many speculations and discourses which many strangers that haue trauelled in those countries doe verifie He which desireth to reade more heereof let him reade the worthie and learned Commentaries of Carolus Clusius vpoÌ„ Garsia ab horto wher he shall receiue good contentment and satisfaction There
two knots or partitions vncarued In those scutes the Indians sit naked at ech end one crosse legged in each hand an oare wherewith they rule the boate and driue her swiftly against the streame specially in the riuer called Cranganor and they are of this opinion that those Scutes are neuer ouerturned by the Crocodiles although they come about them as others are but for these it was neuer heard of The 59. Chapter Of the tree called Arbore Triste THe Tree called Arbore Triste that is the sorrowfull tree is so called because it neuer beareth blossoms but in the night time and so it doeth and continueth all the yeare long it is a thing to be wondred at for that so soone as the Sunne setteth there is not one blossome seene vppon the tree but presently within halfe an houre after there are as many blossomes vppon it as the Tree can beare they are very pleasant to behold and smell very sweet and so soone as the day commeth on and the Sunne is rising presently all the blossomes fall off and couer all the ground so that there remayneth not one to be seene vpon the tree the leaues shut themselues close together so that it seemeth as though it were dead vntill euening commeth againe and then it beginneth to blossome as it did before the tree is as great as a Plum tree and is commonly planted behinde mens houses in their gardens for a pleasure and for the sweet smell it groweth very quickly vp for that many young plantes do spring out of the roote and as soone as those young plantes be aboue halfe a fadome high they haue presently as many blossoms vppon them as the branches on the trees and although they cut the tree down to the ground yet within lesse then halfe a yeare there will branches spring out of the roote and likewise if you breake a branch off from the tree set it in the earth it will presently take root and grow within few dayes after beareth blossoms the blossomes are in a manner like Orange tree blossomes the flowre being white and in the bottome somewhat yellow and reddish which in India they vse for Saffron therewith to dresse their meats and to die with all as wee doe with our Saffron but it is neyther so good nor of so pleasant a taste yet it serueth there for want of the other Some say that the water of this tree being distilled is good for the eyes steeping linnen clothes in it and so laying them to the eyes This tree is found in no place but in Goa and Malacca in some other places where the Portingalles inhabiting haue planted them for that they first came out of Malacca into India but within the land there is none they are called in the Malayan tongue Singady in Decanun Parisatico in Decan Pul of the Arabians Guart of the Persians and Turkes Gâ—l The cause of this name as the Indians say is that a Gentleman â—alled Parisatico had a faire daughter of whom the Sunne became amorous and in the end obtained his pleasure of her but not long after he fell in loue with another forsook her wherupon she falling into dispaire killed herselfe and according to the custome of the countrie her body was burnt of whose ashes they say this tree sprang vp and for the same cause was called Parisaâ—ico and therefore they say by reason of the hatred it beareth vnto the Sunne it neuer bringeth foorth blossome or flowre but hy night and in the day time for griefe they presently fall off The description of this Tree by Christopherus de Costa is set downe in this manner that it is of the greatnes and similitude of a plumme tree with many small branches seperated by diuers knots and partitions the leaues growing two and two together and as bigge as plumme tree leaues soft and rough on the out side verie like to leaues of Sage and inwardlie greene and somewhat sharp but not so vneuen on the sides as plumme leaues neyther yet so full of veines In the middle betweene the two leaues there groweth a little stalke whereon are fiue small heads out of them foure little rough leaues out of the middest wherof there doe spring fiue small white blossomes of the greatnesse and forme of Orange blossomes but somewhat smaller fairer and sweeter The stalke seemeth more red than yellow wherewith the Indians colour their meate as wee doe with Saffron The greene fruite is of the greatnes of a Lupyne and in fashion like a little hart somwhat long and deuided in the middle hauing two places wherein the seed doth lie which is also like a hart and as bigge as the seeds of Saint Iohns bread couered with a greene Skin and somewhat bitter Of all other Trees these are the pleasantest of smell so that they bee not handled for if they be they doe presently loose their sweetnes and smell The Indians are of opinion that these flowers doe quicken and comfort the heart but they are somewhat bitter the Heathens likewise doe account the seede among their medicines that strengthen the hart The flowers may be vsed in meat the seed hath oftentimes bin caried into Portingall and there sowed but neuer would grow what meanes soeuer they vsed the flowers fall off when the sunne riseth as Clusius saith eyther by reason of some contrariety or because of the subtill nature of the sap which the beames of the Sunne doe drie and consume for those wheron the Sunne shineth not stay somewhat longer on the tree These flowers are very carefully gathered whereof a very sweet and pleasant water is distilled which is called water de Mogli some of this seede was brought me out of India by Iohn Hughen which I sowed in the grouÌ„d but it came not forth The 60. Chapter Of the Bettele leaues the fruit Arecca THe leaues called Bettâ—eâ—e or Bettre which is very common in India and dayly eaten by the Indians doe grow in all places of India where the Portingals haue discouerd not with in the countrie but only on the sea coast vnlesse it bee some small quantitie It wil not growe in cold places as China nor in ouer hot places as Mosambique and Sofala and because it is so much vsed I haue particularly set it downe in this place although it is already spoken of in many other places You must vnderstand that this Bettele is a leafe somewhat greater and longer out than Orange leaues and is planted by sticks wherevpon it climeth like Iuie or pepper and so like vnto pepper that a farre off growing each by other they can hardlie bee descerned It hath no other fruite but the leaues only it is much dressed and looked vnto for that it is the dayly breade of India The leaues being gathered doe continue long without withering alwaies shewing fresh and greene and are sold by the dozen and there is not any woman or man in all India but that euery day
blacke sauing the first outmost huske is white and smooth without any wrinckle but hath the verie self same vertue and taste that black pepper hath It cometh oftentimes mingled with the Malacca pepper The pepper that groweth in the countries about Malacca is many times also brought into Portingal but verie little for that it is 2 yeares betweene euery ship that sayleth out of Portingale thither which being there taketh in some pepper but most Cloues and Nutmegges with their flowers and other marchandises of China But the most part of that pepper is vsed in the same countries as in Pegu Syon specially in China and other countries bordering on the same which deal continually one with an other Pepper by the Malabares is called Molanga and in the countries by Malacca Lada in Arabia Filâ—il the Gusarates of Cambaia and Decamins of Ballagate cal it Meriche and they of Bengala Moroâ—s and the long pepper which groweth onely in BeÌ„gâ—la and Iaua is called Pelcâ—m Pepper groweth and is planted at the foote of an other trée and most part at the foote of the trée called Arecca or some such like trée groweth vpon the tree like Bettele or Iue The leaues of pepper are like Orange leaues but somewhat smaller they are green and sharp at the ends in the chawing it biteth the tong and tasteth much like to Bettele it growes in bunshes like grapes but a great deale lesser and thynner yet somewhat thicker then Gooseberries they are alwaies green til they begin to drie and to ripen which is in DeceÌ„ber and Ianuary for at that time they are gathered The long pepper groweth in Bengala and some in the Iland of Iaua and is an other kinde of trée the long pepper is of the length of a néedle or the tagge of a point but somewhat thicker and all of a like thicknes it is outwardly rugged and of an ashie colour and within somewhat white with small seedes but in taste and vse it is like the other black and white pepper The white pepper as I sayd is like the black both in taste and forme yet it is accounted for better stroÌ„ger and is not in so great quantitie as the black The Pepper called Canariins in the countrie of Goa and Malabar almost of the fashion of Panike it is of an ashe colour and holow within with some smal kernels which in eating tasteth and heateth like other pepper yet it is vsed onely by the poore people and therefore is called Canariin pepper that is to say Countrie mens pepper or poore peoples pepper therefore it is neuer laden away for it is verie course and of little value neither would it be able to rayse the fraight and therfore is it left in the countrie The other pepper is in India and all other Eastern countries much vsed and spent by the Indians themselues and that in greater quantitie then yearelie is carried or laden from thence for other places for they eate not any kinde of meate but they put therein handfuls of pepper al vnbeaten so that they waste the more In the description of Malabar I haue set downe in what places pepper doth grow and is coÌ„monlie laden and the hauens where the Portingall shippes doe come and fetch it therefore it néedeth not here to be rehearsed pepper is likewise much vsed wheÌ„ it is green to be put in pots with vineger and salt and so is kept a long time and in the same manner carryed into Portingal but it is most vsed in that sort to be eaten in India and is called pepper in Achar in which manner they vse to dresse all other sorts of spices in India and eate it commonlie to procure an appetite as we doe Capars Oliues and Lemons being pickled Pepper is vsed in the kitchen and in Apothecaries shoppeâ— although in both places not as a meate or food but for physicke it warmeth the mawe and consumeth the cold slymenes thereof to ease the payne in the mawe which proceedeth of rawnesse and wind It is good to eate fyue pepper cornes euerie morning He that hath a bad or thick sight let him vse pepper cornes with annis â—ennel seed and Cloues for thereby the mystinesse of the eyes which darken the sight is cleered and driueÌ„ away The Apotheâ—ries make a confection of 3. sorts oâ— peppeâ— in this sort of whâ—te blacke and â—ong Pepper of each 25 draÌ„mes wilde tyme ginger â—nis seed of each an ouâ—ce with honnie is much as needeth to make a conâ—eâ— which is good for such as haue a cold 〈◊〉 the Nucken the paine in the liuer and the Dropsie The 63. Chapter Of Cinamom CInamon in Latin is called Cinamoâ— by the Arabians Quirsa by the Persians Daâ—china by the men of Seylon where it most groweth Curdo of the people of Malacca Caysman and by the Malabares Camea the trees are as great as Oliue trees and some lesser with leaues of Colmi like Baye leaues but of fashion like Citron leaues though somewhat smaller They haue white blossomes and a certaine fruite of the greatnes of black Portingall Oliues whereof also Oyle is made which is vsed for manie thinges The tree hath two barkes but the second bark is the Cinamon it is cut off in foure square péeces and so laid to dry at the first it is ashe colour after as it beginneth to dry it roulleth together of it self and looketh of the colour as it commeth hether which procéedeth of the heate of the Sunne The trée from whence the barke is taken they let it stand within 3 yeres after it hath an other barke as it had before These trees are in great abundance for they grow of themselues without planting in the open fields like bushes the roote of this tree yeeldeth a water which smelleth like Camphora it is forbidden to be drawn forth for spoyling the trees The Cinamon that is not wel dried is of ashe colour that which is ouer much dryed blackish but the best dryed is reddish there is much and excellent water distilled out of CinamoÌ„ while it is half gréen which is much vsed in India manie times caryed into Portingal and other places it is very pleasant both to drinke and to smell but very hote and strong it is vsed against the Colicke and other diseases procéeding of cold it is likewise good against a stincking breath and euill sauor of the mouth There is likewise a water made of the blossomes of this tree but not so good nor so well esteemed as that of Cinamon it self The places where Cinamon groweth is most and best in the IlaÌ„d of Seylon wherin there is whole woods full of Cinamon trees in the coast of Malabar there groweth likewise great store and some woods of Cinamon but not half so good and lesser trees the barke being grayer and thicker and of smal vertue The Cinamon of the Iland of Seylon is the best and finest and is at the least three times dearer in the price The
Cinamon of Malabar is called Canella de Mato or wilde Cinamon and is forbidden to be carried into Portingale yet there is great quantity shipped but all vnder the name of Cinamon of Seylon whereby it passeth and the King hath his full custome as well for the good as for the bad When the â—on of Seylon is worth in India 50 or 60 Pardawes the Quintale the wilde Cinamon is worth but 10 or 12 Pardawes but it is all registred in India for Seylons Cinamon and payeth custome in Lisbon each Quintale 15 or 16 Milreyes as well the good as the bad and all other spices after the rate and there may be nothing shipped in India no not so much as the slaues but it must all be registred in Cochin and if there be any thing found to be brought into Portiâ—l and not registred there it is forfait to the King There groweth Cinamon also in the Ilands of Iaua and by Malacca but very little and not so good as that of Seylon The trees which they burne in India for wood some of them are like Cinamon in burning and smell Cinamon healeth it openeth streÌ„gtheneth all the inward parts it is somewhat attractiue stretcheth the mawe and digesteth the meate it is also vsed against all kinde of poyson that may hurt the hart Cinamon with Pennyâ—oy all and Biuoet water drunk driueth away the Volgher openeth the matrice and maketh women haue their flowers it is likewise good against Fusten and Catharres that fall downe from the head into the lower parts also against the Dropsie and breaking or stopping of the kidneyes c. The water and Oyle of Cinamon doe greatlie strengthen all the inward parts as head hart mawe and lyuer c. The 64. Chapter Of Ginger GInger groweth in manie places of India yet the best most caryed abroad is that which groweth in the coast of Malabar it groweth like thin and young Netherland reedes of two or thrée spannes high the roote whereof is the Ginger being greene it is much eaten in India for sallets as also sodden in Vineger which they call Achar as I said of pepper and other fruites that are vsed in that maÌ„ner throughout al India the time wheÌ„ they are most gathered and begun to be dried is in December and Ianuarie they drie it in this sort that is they couer it with pot-earth which they doe to stop and fill vp the holes and thereby to make it continue the fresher for the pot-earth preserueth it from wormes without the which it is presentlie consumed by them it is little estéemed in India notwithstanding there is much shipped as well to the red sea as to Ormus Arabia and Asia but little for Portingal because it will not saue y e fraught and custome onlie the gunner of the Indian shippes may lade and bring certaine Quintals without paying any custome which by the King of Portingale was of long tyme granted vnto them and is yet obserued and this they may fel to marchants and so by this meanes there is some brought otherwise but very little for that the most part of Ginger brought into Spain cometh from Cabo verde the Ilands of S. Thomas Brasiliâ— and the IlaÌ„d of S. Domingo in y e spanish Indies which is much trafficked withall in Spaine wherefore that of the Portingall Indies is little brought out of the couÌ„try because of the loÌ„g way great charges yet it is better theÌ„ other Ginger as also all other spices mettals and stones that are brought out of the Orientall Indies that is out of the Portingales Indies are for goodnesse and vertue better then any other which the continuall traffique hath sufficiently made knowne There is likewise much Ginger conserued in Suger which commeth out of the countrie of Bengala but the best commeth from China it is verie good to eate and much vsed in India broght out of Portingal into these countries Ginger by the Arabians Persians and Turkes is called Gengibil in Gusurate Decan and Bengala when it is freshe and greene Adrac and when it is dryed Sucte in Malabar both dryed green Imgi in Malayo Aliaa It groweth like water Lillies or Sword-hearbe but somewhat blacker with a stalke aboute two or three handfuls high and with a roote like a Lillie not spreading forth as Antonius Musa writeth and is not so sharpe specially that which groweth in Bacaim because of the ouer great moysture This roote is cut small and mixed with other rootes and so eaten for Sallets with oyle salt and Vineger it is also sodden with flesh and fish It goweth in all places of India and is sowed or Planted for that which commeth vp of it selfe is not so good The best and greatest store commeth out of Malabar and by the Arabians and Persians it is much desired next it is the Ginger of Bengala The third is that of Debut and Bacaim and of all the coast along in the wilde fields and inwardly within the land there is little found There is also some found in the Ilands of S. Laurence and Comaro The vertue and properties of Ginger is that it maketh a man to goe easily to the stoole and restoreth a mans strength that is decayed But it is found contrary in other Authors that Ginger stoppeth for that it causeth good digestion and so laskements proceeding of raw moystnesse is stopped It heateth a colde maw and is good against humors that darken the eyes and is vsed in many medicines The 65. Chapter Of Cloues CLoues are by the Turkes Persians Arabians and most part of the Indians called Caâ—aâ—â—r and in the Ilands of Maluco where they are only found and do grow Chamke These Ilands are fine lying vnder the Equinoctiall line as in the descriptions therof is declared They haue nothing else but Cloues which are caried froÌ„ thence through out the world the trees whereon they grow are like Bay-trées the blossomes at the first white then greene and at the last red and hard which are the Cloues and when the blossomes are gréene they haue the pleasantest smell in all the world The Cloues grow verie thicke together and in great numbers they are gathered and then dried their right colour when they are drie is a darke yelow and to giue them a blacke colour they are commonly smoked The Cloues that stay on the trée vngathered are thicke and stay on till the next yeare which are those that are called the mother of the Cloues And in the place where the trées stand there groweth not any grasse or gréene Hearbe at all but it is wholly drie for that those trees draw all the moysture vnto them That which the Portingals call Baston or with vs the stocke of the Cloue and is the stalke whereby they hang on the trees is gathered with the Cloues and so they are mingled together for that in Maluco they neuer garble their Cloues but in India they are many times parted though verie little for they are
most part sold and vsed with dust and stalkes and all together but such as are to bee sent to Portingall are seuered and clensed The Cloues are so hotte of nature that whensoeuer them are made cleane and seperated from their Garbish if there chance to stand either Tubbe or Payle of water in the Chamber where they clense them or any other vessell with wine or any kind of moysture it will within two dayes at the furthest be wholly soken out and dryed vp although it stand not néere them by reason of the great heate of the Cloues that draw all moysture vnto them as by experience I haue often séene The same nature is in the vnspunne Silke of China so that whensoeuer the Silke lyeth any where in a house vpon the flowre that is to say vppon boordes a foote or two aboue the ground and that the flowre is sprinkled and couered with water although it toucheth not the Silke in the Morning all that water will bee in the Silke for that it draweth it all vnto it And this tricke the Indians often times vse to make their Silke weigh heauie when they sel it for it can neither be séen nor found in the Silke But returning to our matter the Cloues grow about the length of a great shot from the Sea side and are neither planted nor set and nothing else is done vnto them but only when they plucke and gather them they make the place vnder the trées verie cleane The trée will not grow verie close to the Sea side nor farre from it for these Ilands are altogether compassed about with the Sea When it is a fruitfull yeare then the Cloues are in greater abundance then the leaues When they gather them they do not pluck them with their hands but with ropes which they fasten about the branches and by force they shake them off and by that meanes the trées are so spoyled that the next yeare after they yeelde but little fruite but the second yeare then after ensuing there grow vp trées of the Cloues that fell vpon the ground when they gathered them two yeares before like Chesnut trées and they growe verie sound because of the great rayne that falleth in those places for those Ilandes lye vnder the Equinoctiall line and yéelde fruite within eight yeares and so continue aboue a hundreth yeares The time when they are gathered and dried is from September to Ianuarie When the Cloues are gréene they make good conserues in Sugar and are likewise salted in Vineger so kept in pots and made of Achar in which manner they are carried into Malacca and India They likewise distill water out of the gréen Cloues which is verie cordiall and vsed in many Medecines The Indian women vse much to chawe Cloues thereby to haue a swéete breath which the Portingales wiues that dwell there doe now begin to vse the leaues of the Cloue-trees are altogether like Bay-leaues Cloues grow on trees like Bay-trees both in forme and quantitie saue onely that their leaues are somthing lesser like Almonds or Willow leaues They are full of branches and haue aboundance of blossomes which doe turne these fruites and are called Cloues because in forme and shape they doe resemble a Birdes clawes They growe like the Mirtle-tree vpon the vttermost branches Cloues are much vsed both in meate and in medicines The people of Iaua desire the gray Cloues that hang a whole yere and more vpon the trees and are no Males as Auia doth absurdly aduise and as we of the common sort doe who couet the thinnest When they are greene they vse to salt them with salt and Vineger in Maluco and some they put in Suger which are verie pleasant to bee eaten The water of greene Cloues distilled is very pleasant of smel and strengthneth the hart likewise they procure sweating in men that haue the Pox with Cloues Nutmegges Mace long and black Pepper some lay the poulder of Cloues vpon a mans head that hath a paine in it that proceedeth of colde They strengthen the Liuer the Maw and the hart they further digestion they procure euacuation of the Vrine and stop lascatiuenes and being put into the eyes preserueth the sight and foure Drammes being drunke with Milke doe procure lust The 66 Chapter Of Mace Folie or flowers of Nutmegges and of Nutmegges THe Nutmegge trée is like a Peare tree or a Peach trée but that they are lesse and it hath round leaues These trées growe in the Iland of Banda not farre from Maluco and also in the Ilandes of Iauas Sunda from whence they are carried to China and Malacca and also into India and other places The fruite is altogether like great round Peaches the inward part whereof is the Nutmegge This hath about it a hard shell like wood wherein the Nut lyeth loose and this wooden shel or huske is couered ouer with Nutmeg flower which is called Mace and ouer it is the fruite which without is like the fruite of a Peach When it is ripe it is a verie costly meate and of a most pleasaunt sauor This fruite or Apples are many times conserued in Sugar being whole and in that sort caried throughout India and much estéemed for in truth it is the best conserue in all India and is many times brought ouer into Portingall and from thence hether They are likewise salted and put in Vineger which is much vsed in India When the Nuttes begin to be ripe then they swell and the first shell or huske bursteth in péeces and the Nutmegge flowers doe continue redde as any Scarlet which is a verie faire sight to behold especially if the trées bee full of fruite Sometimes also the Mace breaketh which is the cause that the Nutmegges come all together without the Mace and when the Nutmegge drieth then the Mace falleth off and the red changeth into Orenge colour as you sée by the Mace that is brought hether The Ilands where they grow specially Banda are very vnholesome countries as also the Ilands of Maluco many that traffique thether die before they depart from thence or if they escape they are in great perill of their liues by sicknesse notwith standing great gaine maketh men to trauell thether The Nutmegge by the inhabitants of Banda where they are most growing is called Palla and the Mace or Nutmegge flower Buna Palla The Decanijns and Indians call it Iapatry and the Mace Iayfol The trees whereon Nutmegs and Mace do grow are not vnlike to Peare trees but shorter and rounder leaues they are good for paine in the head for the mother and the Sinewes The Nut is compassed about with three kinds of Barkes The first outermost is like the greene shell of an Acorne and when they are ripe that shel openeth then you find a thin shell or barke like a Nutte which compasseth the fruite and by vs is called Mace which both in meate and Medicine is verie seruiceable and wholesome The third shell is harder and more
like vnto wood then the first and is like the Acorne but that it is blacker which being opened you find the Nutmegge therein When the fruit is ripe and that the first shell breaketh open then the Mace is of a most faire red colour and when the fruit is drie the Mace likewise doth change and becommeth a Golden yellow There are two sorts of Nutmegges one long which are called Males the other round which are better stronger The Nutmeg comforteth the braine sharpneth the memorie warmeth and strengthneth the Maw driueth winde out of the body maketh a sweet breath driueth downe Vrine stoppeth the Laske and to conclude is good against all colde diseases in the heade in the braine the Mawe the Liuer and the Matrice The Oyle thereof is better then the rest for all the aforesaid named infirmities Mace is specially good for a colde and a weake maw it procureth digestion of the meate drieth vp all euill humors and breaketh wind The 67. Chapter Of Cardamomum CArdamomum is a kinde of spice which they vse much in India to dresse with their meates and commonly they haue it in their mouthes to chaw vpon It is very good against a stincking breath and euill humors in the head and serueth also for other things in medecines it groweth like other graynes and is verie like to Panyke but of a white colour drawing somewhat towards yealow The huskes are as great as the huskes of Panyke graines but somewhat smal within there is about 10 or 12 graines of berryes which is the Cardamomum There are two sorts of Cardamomum that is to say great and small and called by the Malabares Etremilly the Gusurates Decaniins Bengalers cal it Hil and the Mores inhabiting among them call it Hilachij This is much vsed in India and is a marchandise which is caryed into all places of India most of it groweth in Calecut and Cananor places on the coast of Malabar it is likewise in other places of Malabar and in the Iland of Iaua and from the countries aforesaid it is most caryed into other places but little brought into Portingal because of the great charges and long way yet many times the Saylers and other trauellers bring it They sieth no flesh in India but commonly they put Cardomomum into the pot it maketh the meaâ— to haue as good a sauor and a taste as any of the other spices of India Auicenna sayth there are two kinds of it the one he calleth Saccolaa quebir that is great Cardamomum and the other Saccolaa Regner that is smal Cardamomum in Malabar it is called Etremelly in Seylan Encal in Bengala Gusaratte and Decan sometimes Hil sometimes Elachi but that is by the Moores for the Heathens throughout all India call it Dors Cardamomum to the auncicient Grecians as Galen Dioscorides and others it was altogether vnknowne although Galen in his seuenth booke of Simples saith that Cardamomum is not so hot as Nasturcium or water Cresses but pleasanter of sauour and smell with some small bitternesse yet those signes or properties doe not agree with the Cardamomum of India Dioscorides in his first booke and fift Chapter commending the Cardamomum brought out of Comagens Armenia and Bosphoras although hee saith also that such doe growe in India and Arabia saith that wee must choose that which is full and tough in breaking sharpe bitter of taste and with the smell thereof causeth a heauinesse in a mans head yet is the Indian Cardamomum caryed into those places from whence Dioscorides affirmeth that his Cardamomum doeth come although it bee neyther tough in breaking nor annoyeth the heade neyther is bitter of taste nor so sharpe as Cloues the great Cardamomum hath a shell that is long and three cornered wherein are certaine pale red kernels with corners the small Cardamomum hath likewise a three cornered huske yet shorter and with smaller kernels parted in the middle with a thinne skinne this Cardamomum is of three sorts as minus medium minimum that is small smaller and smallest of all It heateth the Mawe digesteth the meat and driueth away the giddines of the head it is also eaten with Bettele to purge the head maw of slime and filthinesse The 68. Chapter Of Lacke or hard Waxe LAcke by the Malabares Bengalers and Decaniins is called Aâ—sii by the Moors Lac the men of Pegu where the best is found and most trafiqued withall doe call it Treck and deale much therewith by carrying it vnto the Island of Sumatra in time past called Taprobana and there they exchange it for Pepper and from thence it is carried to the redde sea to Persia and Arabia wherevpon the Arabians Persians and Turkes call it Loc Sumutri that is Lac of Sumatra because it is brought from thence into their countries The manner how it is made is thus in Pegu and those places from whence it commeth there are certaine very great Pismyres with winges which fly vppe into the trées that are there like Plum trées and such other Trées out of the which trées comes a certaine gumme which the Pismires sucke vp and then they make the Lac rounde about the branches of the trées as Bées make Hony and Waxe and when it is ful the owners of the trees come and breaking off the braunches lay them to drie and being drie the branches shrinke out and the Lac remayneth behinde like a Reede sometimes the woode breaketh within them but the lesse woode it hath within it the better it is the peeces and crummes that fall vpon the ground they melt them together but that is not so good for it hath filth and earth within it it happeneth oftentimes that they finde the Pismires winges within the raw Lac. When the Lac is raw as it commeth from the Tree it is a darke red colour but being refined and cleansed they make it of all colours in India They beat the Lac to powder and melt it and so mixe all manner of colours vpon it as they list redde blacke greene yellow or any other colour make peeces thereof such aâ— are sold here to seale letters withall Them they dresse their bedsteds withall that is to say in turning of the woode they take a peece of Lac of what colour they will and as they turne it when it commeth to his fashion they spread the Lac vpon the whole peece of woode which presently with the heat of the turning melteth the Waxe so that it entreth into the crestes cleaueth vnto it about the thicknesse of a mans naile then they burnish it ouer with broad straw or dry Rushes so cunningly that all the woode is couered withall and it shineth like Glasse most pleasant to behold and continueth as long as the wood being well looked vnto in this sort they couer all kinde of housholde stuffe in India as Bedsteddes Chaires stooles c. and all their turned woodworke which is wonderful common and much vsed throughout all India
Mosseliat is the ballockes or stones of that beast the others although they passe among them for Mosseliat are not so good as the stones therefore the Chinars who in all thinges are very subtill and fine workemen make the purses cleane round like the stones of the beaste therewith to deceiue the people and so the sooner to procure them to buy it This beast hath a very strange nature and great vnderstanding for when it is chased and perceiueth it selfe not able anie longer to continue in breath it taketh the stones betwéene the téeth and biteth them off and so casteth them away as if it would say if you come for them there they are while the huntsman is busie to looke for them shee oftentimes escapeth away and saueth her life The Chinaes are very deceitfull in selling of Mosseliat or Muske for they falsifie it verie much sometimes with Oxen and Cowes liuers dried and beaten to powder and so mixed with the Mosseliat as it is dayly found by experience in searching of it When the Mosseliat beginneth to decay and looseth the smel they take it out of the purse and beate it verie small in a morter and that done being moistned with the vrine of a childe and so put into an earthen pot that is leaded and cloase stopped it will presently be good againe if there were any goodnes or strength left within it Some are of opinion that muske groweth at certaine times of the yeare about the nauell of a certaine beast as if it were swolne The pale yellow is the best it strengtheneth the trembling cold hart all diseases of the same beeing drunke or swallowed It cleanseth the white spots of the eyes it dryeth moist catharres it comforteth the head healeth the old aches thereof proceeding of sleame Algalia or Ciuet is much found in India that is to say in Bengala but because they caÌ„not leaue their villanie falsifying thereof it is not so much estéemed by reason they mixeted but the best Ciuet commeth from Myna in the coast of Guynea which is very faire and good It is the sweat that proceedeth froÌ„ the Cats called Ciuet Cats which are many times brought ouer aliue both into Spaine and also to these countries but because it is so sufficiently knowne vnto vs I will leaue to speake thereof and proceede to other spices hearbes and drugges of India Ciueâ— groweth in the outermost part of the coddes of a certaine beast which therof hath her name is called a Muscat and as Hughin very well saith is the sweat that groweth or ingendreth in the hinder part of the beast and is hotte and moist being laid vpon a womans nauill it healeth the rising of the mother and maketh women apt to leacherie The 71. Chapter Of Beniom BEnioin is a kinde of stuffe like Frankemsence Mir but more estéemed for it serueth for manie medicines and other thinges Benioin by reason of the sweet smell comforteth the heart the head and the braine it clenseth the head from all superfluous humors sharpneth the wit beeing smelled vnto it is good to be vsed when diseases begin to goe away As when they make balles or péeces of Amber and Muske they must alwaies haue Benioin with it to make it perfect it groweth much in the kingdome of Syan in the Iland of Sumatra in the Islands of Iauas the countrie of Malacca they are high trées full of branches with leaues like lemmon trée leaues with a thicke high stemme or stock in the middle from whence procéedeth the Gumme which is the Benioin When the tree is young then it yéeldeth the best Benioin which is blackish of colour and of a very sweet smell and is called Benioin de Boninas that is to say Benioin of the Flowers because of the perfect smell The second Benioin is called Benioin Amendoado that is Benioin of Almondes because it is mixed with peeces of white Benioin among the blacke like to Almondes that are cut in peeces This Benioin is not so good because the white Benioin is of the old trees and is not so strong nor of so good a smell as the blacke but is mixed with the blacke because it should be sold the better These two sortes of Benioin are the best and much vsed and caried into Arabia Persia the land of Ballagate China and other places as also into Portingal Most part of this Benioin groweth in the country of Sion and by Maâ—aâ— there is other Benioin which is worse and groweth in the Ilandes of Sumatra and Iauas The inhabitants of the countries where it groweth call it Câ—mingion the Mores and Arabians call it Louaniany which is as much to say as frankensence of Iaua The Decaniins and Ballagaters call it Vdo they cut the trée and branches full of slits to make the Benioin the better to come foorth it is much trafficqued withall throughout India for it is one of the coâ—â—liest drugges in all the Orient because it excelleth all other in sweetnes The 72. Chapter Of Frankensence and Mirre FRankinsence groweth in Arabia and is called Louan and by Auicenna Conder it is the gumme that floweth out of the bodies of the trées like Benioin the best Frankinsence groweth vpon the trées that stande on hilles and stony rockes and stony places for those which growe in the fieldes and in flat grounds yeeld not so good Frankinsence they haue so great quantitie of it that oftentimes they marke their shéepe withall as if it were Pitch Tarre or Rosin from thence it is carried into India China and other places in great abundance and very good cheape Frankinsence is of two sorts one white that is round and like vnto drops which is the best and called the maâ—le the other blacke which is not much worth but only in smell In India and with vs they vse Frankinsence against the loosenes of the bellie sickenesses of the head Cataâ—rlies surfeits and paâ—brâ—king is good for such as spit blood it filleth vp hoâ—â—ow swellingâ— healeth freâ—h and bloody wounds Mirre by the Indians is called Bola it groweth in the same that Benioin and frankinsence doth and commeth also out of Arabia Fâ—lix but most out of the countrie of Abexin from the inward parts of the countrie lying betweene Mosambique and the red sea which is called Prester Iohns land and from thence brought into India and other places Mirre is vsed in medicines to dâ— downe the Flowers and the fruite of women also for old cougâ—es for laskes for bloody Flixes The 73. Chapter Of Manna and Rubarbe MAnna commeth out of Arabia and Persia but most out of the Prouince of Vsbeke lying behind Persia in Tartaria the Manna y t is brought from thence in glasse Vsalies is in péeces as bigge as preserued Almonds but of another fashion and haue no other speciall forme but like broken péeces it is whitish and of taste almost like Sugar but somewhat fulsome sweetish like Hony the Persians cal
it Xercast and Xerkest that is to say milke of trees for it is the dew y t falleth vpon the trées and remayneth hanging vpon the leaues like water that is frozen and hangeth in drops at gutters and pentises It is also gathered and kept in glasse Vials and so brought into India and other Countries for in India they vse it much in all sorts of purgations There is another sorte of Manna called Tiriamiabiin or Trumgibiin which they gather froÌ„ other leaues and hearbes that commeth in small peeces as big as Hempeséed and somewhat bigger which is red of a reddish colour Some thinke this Manna groweth on the bodies of the trées as Gumme doth it is much vsed in Ormus and Persia for purgations but not in India so much as the first sort there is yet another sorte which commeth in great peeces with the leaues among it it is like the Manna of Calabria this is brought out of Persia vnto Bassora and so to Ormus and from thence into India and is the dearest of all the rest There commeth also a Manna that is brought in leather bags or flasks which in Turkey and Persia they vse to ride withall is melted like Hony but of a white colour and in taste like the other sortes of Manna being altogether vsed for purgations and other medicines Manna very gently purgeth the gall it easeth and moystneth the harshnes of the throat the breastes and the stomacke it quencheth the thirst but because it purgeth but weakely it is strengthened with Tyme or Isop mingled with some strong purgations maketh them to effect their operations with more perfection and power by meanes of the sweetnesse thereof which is apter and more plyable vnto nature But because it is no special marchandise I will speake no more thereof but for that wee are nowe in hande with medicines to purge I wil say some thing of the roote called Rhubaâ—be although there is no certaintie how or in what sort it groweth yet it is most certaine y t it is not to be found in any couÌ„try but in China and in the farthest parts therof it is most brought by land through the Prouince of Vsbeke whereof I spake before which Prouince lyeth in Tartaria and bordereth on the one side vpon China and so reacheth behinde India vnto Persia Out of this Prouince it cometh vnto Ormus and from thence into India yet it is likewise brought by water but because it is not so good and doth sooner rot and spoyle by water then by land therefore most part of it is brought by land That which is most esteemed best sold and greatliest desired cometh in this manner that is first from China through Vsbeke and so through Turkie from whence it is caryed to Venice from thence into all these countries so that the Rhubarbe of Venice is better because it cometh ouer land then that which is brought into Portingall because it cometh by water as also all thinges and herbes that belong to Physicke because they are better preserued by land then by water they are little brought by sea but it is a marchandise that is most caryed by land vnto Venice as also because the Portingales deale not much therein and are little giuen to curiosities conteÌ„ting themselues to deale with such wares as are commonlie knowne to all men without seeking further for they trouble not themselues with other things The 74. Chapter Of the wood called Sanders THere are 3. sorts of Sanders that is white yelow and red the white and the yealow which is the best come most out of the IlaÌ„d of Tymor which lyeth by Iaua This Iland hath whole woods and wildernesses of Sanders both of white and yealow and froÌ„ theÌ„ce it is caryed throughout all India and other couÌ„tries and trafficke much therewith the red Sanders groweth most in the coast of Choramandel and Tanassariin which is in the countrie of Pegu the trees of Sanders are like Nut trees and haue a certaine fruite vpon them like Cheries at the first green and after black but of no taste nor any thing worth for it presently falleth off onlie y e wood of y e trée is accounted of which is the SaÌ„ders It is called by the Inhabitants of the countrie where it groweth Chandanacon the Decannus Gusurates Canariins and other Indians cal it Sercandaa the Arabians and Persians Sandal wherevpon the Portingalles likewise doe call it Sandalo The yellow and white Sanders is much vsed and spent ouer all India by all the inhabitantes both Indians Moors Heathens and Iewes whatsoeuer they beate it or stampe it in water till it be as soft as pappe that done they besmere themselues therewith and let it drie vpon their bodies for it cooleth very much also because all the Indians doe much delight in sweet smelling sauours The white yellow or bleakish Sanders is likewise vsed by vs with Rose-water against the hotte paines in the head annointing it therewith all those woods as well the red as the white and yellow are good against hotte feauers being beaten and drunken into the body they help the hot stomacke as also laid vpon the stomacke with Rose water in burning feauers This Sanders is not onely good for the purposes aforesaid but also for strengthening the hart and therefore with great vse it is put into Cordiall medicines such as are made against the beating of the hart The red Sanders is little spent in India but they vse it onely against hot agues annointing their pulses therewith as also the temples their foreheads but it is much â—ryed into other countries as being very medicinable for many thinges and the Indians make their Pagodes and Idoles thereof because they should be the costlier The â—5 Chapter Of Palo de Cebra or Snake-wood SNakewood is most in the Island of Seylon it is a lowe Trée the roote thereof being the Snake-woode is of colour white shewing somewhat yellowe very harde and bitter in taste it is much vsed in India they stampe and bruse it like Sanders in water or Wine and so drinke it it is very good well proued against all burning feauers one ounce thereof bruised and mixed with water is good against all poison and sicknes as the collick worms and all filthie humors and coldnes in the body and specially against the stinging of Snakes whereof it hath the name it was first found by means of a little beast called Qâ—il or Quirpele which is of bignesse very like a Ferret wherewith in those Countries they vse to driue Cunnies out of their holes and so ketch them whereof in India they haue many in their houses which they play withall to passe the time away as also to kill their Myce and Rattes and to driue them away This beast by nature is a great enemie to the Snake so that wheresoeuer she findeth any she fighteth with them and because it is often bitten by the Snake it knoweth how to heale it selfe with
this Snake-woode whereof there is much in Seylon where also are many of those beastes and great store of Snakes so that if it be neuer so sore bitten hauing eaten of this wood it is presently healed as if it had neuer béene hurt By this means the inhabitants haue found it out begun to make account of it since that time it is proued and found to be good for many â—iseases as aforesaid wherefore nowe it is much traffiqued withall and carryed into all countries as also into Portingall from thence hether Garcius ab horto writeth of three sorts of this wood whereof you may there reade two of these sortes of Snake-wood I haue in my house to be shewen one is that which Iohn Hughen writeth to bee the root of a tree white and bitter of taste with a rough Ash colouâ— barke the other was sent me â—u◠〈…〉 from the learned Doctor Simon 〈◊〉 Tonar which is as thicke as a maâ— arâ—e with a barke besprinckled spotted like a Snake which inwardlie is white and bitter of taste The 76 Chapter Of the wood Caiamba or â—num Aloes THe â—ignuÌ„ Aloes which in India is called Calamba and Palo Dâ—guilla is most in Malacca in the Islande of Sumatra Camboia Sion and the Countries bordering on the same the trees are like Oliue trees and somewhat greater when it is cut off it smelleth not so well because it is gréene for the dryer it is the better it smelleth the best and that which smelleth most is the innermost part of the wood some of it is better then the rest which the Indians doe presently knowe howe to finde out the best and finest is called Calamba and y e other Palo Daguilla Now to know which is the best you must vnderstand that the wood that is very heauie with black and brown veynes and which yéeldeth much Oyle or moystnesse which is founde by the fire is the best and the greater and thicker that it is the better it is and hath the more vertue Of this wood they make many costly thinges and it hath a speciall and precious smell so that it is greatly estéemed specially the Calamba which if it be good is solde by weight against siluer and gold The Palo Daguilla next after the Calamba is much accounted of There is another kind of Palo Daguilla which is called Aquilla Braua or wild Aquilla and is also much esteemed for the Indians vse it therewith to burne the bodies of their Bramenes and other men of account when they are dead and because it is costly therefore it is a great honour to those that are burnt therewith as it is to those that with vs are buried in Tombes of marble stones but it is not comparable to the other Palo Daguilla nor the Calamba The wilde Aguilla groweth most in the Island of Seylon and on the coast of Choramandel and the best Palo Daguilla and Calamba groweth in Malacca These costly woods are much vsed in India for Beades and Crucifixes which are holden in great reuerence and in truth is very much to be esteemed for without all doubt it hath an excellent smel which surpasseth all other woods and the like can not bee founde but onely in the soresaide places from whence it commeth Lignum Aloes Agallochum Xylo alias Paradise-woode by the Arabians called Agalugen and Haud by the inhabitantes of Gusurate and Decan Vd in Malacca Garro and the best Calamba Of this wood I haue many sortes all very pleasant of smell speckled with veines and full of moysture and withall close and very heauie this wood being taken inwardly is good for a stinking breath it is also very good against a watrish and moyst stomacke which can receyue no meate but casteth it forth it is also good for one that hath a weake liuer that is sick of the red Melison or of the Plurisie The 77. Chapter Of the root China THe root China came into India and was there first knowne in Anno 1535. for before that time they knewe it not for that as then they cured the Pore which in India is a common disease with the woode called Guaiacum that is brought out of the Spanish Indies and was at that time in a manner weyghed against Gold and as the land of China is much subiect to the disease of the Pore it seemeth that God hath giuen them this roote to cure and help the same and since it was knowne and found out in India they would neuer vse any other remedy because there is great store of it and the best in all the world wherby men in those countries doe not once make any account of the Poxe or feare the healing therof for that it is more easilier healed then any other disease also it is no shame with them although they haue had it at y e least 3 or 4. times this root is now with them in so great abundance and common vse that it is very good cheape for that it is not worth at the most aboue halfe a Pardaw the pound which in Portingall money is a Teston and a halfe The sicke persons do vse it in this manner following they take of the root cut it in smalll peeces or slyces the wayght of an ounce which they seeth in foure pottes or quartes of water letting it séeth till it be halfe consumed whereof they séeth fresh euery day this water they must drink alone eat bisket with nothing els but smal rosted Chickens without any Butter suet salt or any other sauce but onely drie with the Bisket and this must bee their dinner at night some Reasons and tosted breade with Hony and nothing els euery day twice they must lie on their beddes wel couered to make them sweat euery time an hower or an hower and a halfe which they must continue for the space of thirtie dayes alwaies kéeping themselues out of the ayre and from the wind and lapping their heads and their eares very close staying continually within the house and aboue all thinges abstayning from the carnall company of women These pointes aforesaid being obserued without all doubt they shall find great profite and if the roote doth worke within them they shall know it by this meanes for that the paine in their lims and specially in their ioyntes will grieue them more and more which is a good signe that it worketh in their bodies and thoroughly searcheth the same and this paine will still increase for the space of 15. or 20. dayes yea and sometimes vntill 25. dayes and therefore he that will vse it must not dispaire for without faile it wil be so as I haue said within a day two or thrée more or lesse The 25. dayes at the furthest being passed then their paine will begin to deminish with so great a lightnes and ease that within the other fiue dayes whereby the 30. dayes will bee accomplished the whole paine will be gone so that the body and all the members
will be as fresh and liuely as if they neuer had béene sicke hauing vsed this rule aforesaid And although the roote China being sodden in the water causeth a great appetite and a hungry stomacke neuerthelesse they must in any sorte beware that they eate but little and with measure that according to the rule prescribed for if they break it but one day nay but one houre all their labour were lost and so they must be forced to begin their diet again It must likewise bee vnderstood that the older and longer of continuance the pockes are so much the sooner will the roote heale them as also the older the persons to be healed are of yeares because that then the humors are not so ripe as in young yeares When the 3â— dayes are expired they must beware of drinking other drinke and to that end they must keepe the peeces and slices that were cut and sodden as before euery ounce by it selfe and therof take euery day a heape of the same roote so sodden and seeth them againe in a pot with as much water as they shall need to drinke but this seething need not to be done as the first seething with consumption of the water but only let it seeth vp once and no more This water must they drinke in this sorte for the space of 2â— or 30. dayes more and beware of fish or any goose or heauie meates as Oxe Cow or Hogges flesh and such like as also they must keepe themselues from much aire or winde whereby their bodies beeing healed may returne to their perfect healthes againe and after these twenty or thirty dayes are full expired then they must begin to vse all kinde of meates and drinkes although when the first thirtie dayes are out they may well goe abroad so they bee carefull of themselues and they shall not neede to sweate any more after the said first thirty dayes also it must bee remembred that such as meane to take this diet for their healthes it will bee good before they vse it to take a good purgation when the first fifteene dayes are out then take a second and so at the end of the thirtie day anâ— other whereby it will worke with more effect and with Gods help they shall be as lustie and sound as euer they were as it hath beene prooued by many thousandes in India This roote is not onely good for the Pockes and Piles but also for crampes and palsies and all cold diseases as for lumites that are stiffe and benummed with cold for the Gout for the Emperour Charles the fift himselfe did vse the same and found that it did him good But it must bee vnderstood that it is not good to vse it at all times of the yeare for in the dogge dayes and also in Summer by reason of the heat it is not good neyther in winter because of the cold but it is best to be vsed in Lent and Haruest time for then it is most temperate weather yet alwaies with the counsell of the learned Phisition the better to know the disposition complection inclination and age of the persons together with the time of the yeare the situation and climate of the countrie The manner of healing aforesaid is as it is vsed in India but in China which is a colder countrey and almost vnder the same degrees that these Countries are vnder they vse to seeth the water stronger for there they put 2 ounces or an ounce and a halfe of the wood into so much water and let it seeth vntill the water be two partes consumed which in India will not bee borne because of the great heate It is likewise to be vnderstood that the person and the disease of the person must be well considered for that if the sicknes bee not very great they must take lesse roote and let lesse water consume in the seething the younger persons also must haue stronger drinke then old â—olkes because they haue more humors in their bodies And yee must consider that hee which will take or vse this roote or the water thereof not beeing sicke it will waste and consume his flesh and good blood and doe himselfe great hurt wherfore good counsell and aduise must alwaies be taken before it be vsed and also iâ— it bee taken too hotte and too much it burneth both the liuer and the lunges and will fill the body full of pyles scurffe and maâ—gâ—es with other such like diseases whereby a man shall haue worke enough to driue those new diseases out of his body and fall out of one sicknes into another rather become worse then hee was at the first This I thought good in briefe to shew you thereby to teach such as knowe it not the true vse of his roote if it bee done in time when neede requireth for that many doe spende their wealthes and which is more are all their liues long out of hope for eâ—er to recouer their healthes againe vpon a disease which with so little cost is so easilie to be cured The summe of the foresaid water is likewise good against all scabbes and swellinges of the said Mâ— Neapo◠〈◊〉 or y e French pockes the best rootes are the blackest with few knots and white within for the reddish are not so good the wood or trée wherof it groweth is like a Haw-thorne straight and about three or foure spannes high the roote thereof is called the wood of China or Pockewood when they are gréene they eate them raw and being sodden they taste almost like suger canes but not so sweet The tree hath but few leaues but they are almost like the leaues of a young Orange tree These plants or trees in China are called Lampaton as the Chinos themselues doe say This shall suffice for this root of China so called because it is found in no place but in China what is more to be said of it I leaue vnto the learned Phisitions others that deale withall and haue better experience thereof The roote of China is commonlie vsed among the Egyptians not onelie for the pockes but for many other diseases specially for a consumption for the which they seeth the roote China in broth of a henne or cocke whereby they become whole and faire of face This roote drieth much and cooleth sweate it resisteth euill humors and strengthneth the liuer it healeth watery and filthie Vlcers and scurffes Leprie Is is good for a man that hath the pockes and for those that are dried vp and medicinable against a hard and a great milt The 78. Chapter Of Amsion alias Opium AMsion so called by the Portingales is by the Arabians Mores and Indians called Affion in latine Opio or opium It commeth out of Cairo in Egypt and out of Aden vpon the coast of Arabia which is the point of the land entring into the red Sea sometimes belonging to the Portingales but most part out of Cambaia from Decan that of Caâ—o is whitish and
Borneo is likewise in the Iland of Sumatra and Sunda as also in some other places there abouts It is of bignesse like a seede called in Portingall Mâ—lho and with vs Barley of colour whitish It is of foure sorts whereunto the Indians vse certaine Siues with holes purposely made in them the first hauing smal holes and that which passeth through them is the worst the next following it is somewhat greater and so forth after that rate as it is said before of Pearles and so it is prised accordingly It commeth sometimes all spotted with some filth or foulenesse which the Bamaners of Cambaia know well how to wash away with water Sope and the iuice of Lemons which done they set it to drie in some shadow place wherby it is whiter then it was at the first and keepeth the former waight It is likewise falsified with other Gum or poulder of other rootes as the Indians can well handle all their wares This is the right and true Camphora of Borneo yet I belieue there commeth verie little of it into these countries but the Camphora of Chyna which commeth from Chincheu is in great aboundance and is brought in cakes or balles and is much carried into al places and verie good cheape For one pound of Borneo is worth a hundred pound of Chincheu although the Champhora of Chincheu is mixed with Champhora of Borneo and they know how to giue it a colour in such sorte that it is both taken and vsed for good and because it is so much vsed in medicines I haue particularly set it downe in this place as also because it is one of the principallest wares in India The 81. Chapter Of Tamarinio TAmarinio groweth in the most parts of all India speciallie in the land of Gusâ—ate and the North parts beyond Goa the Malabares call it Pulu the Gusurates and the other Indians cal it Anbilii the Arabians Tamarindii because Tamaras in Arabia are the same that with vs we cal Dates and because they know not what to liken Tamarinio vnto better then vnto Dates therefore they call it Tamarindi y t is Tamaras or Dates of India wherevpon the Portingales cal it also Tamarinio and the Dates which are in great abundance brought out of Persia Arabia into India they name them after the Arabians Tamaras The trees of Tamarinio are almost like vnto Chesnuts or other nut trees the branches being full of leaues with a close strong wood the fruite of the Tamarinio is about a finger long bowing or crooked hauing greene shelles or pilles without and béeing drie are grayish hauing within certaine kernels of the greatnes of a Beane which are couered about with that which they call Tamarinio it sticketh to mens hands for it is like lime therewith they prepare all their compositions throughout India for it hath a sowrish and sharp taste and is the best sauce in all India like vergis with vs and they neuer sieth Rice but they put Tamarinio into it wherewith their composition called Cariil is made as in many places it is alreadie declared yet those that see it drest will haue no great desire to eate it for they crush it through their fingers whereby it sheweth like rotten Medlers yet it giueth the Rice the meate a fine sharp taste Tamarinio is likewise proued to be a very good purgation for the poore that are of smal habilitie and are not able to be at charges of Rhabarbo Mannâ— and such like costlie Apothecaries ware doe onlie vse Tamarinio pressed out into a little water which water being drunk fasting in a morning is the best purgation in the world which is to be done when the Tamarinio is ripe or when it is greene it is vsed likewise in dressing meate to put in among their flesh in steed of Vineger for it is much sowrer then Vineger much like gréen gooseberries or grapes the Physitians vse it in purgations medecines coÌ„pouÌ„ded with other herbes and spices and it worketh well it is likewise salted to send for Portingal Arabia Persia other places yet the Indians kéepe it in their houses in the huskes as it commeth from the tree and it haÌ„geth on the trées like sheathes of kniues but that they are somewhat bowed as I said before there is likewise sugar coÌ„serues made therof which is verie good The nature of this tree is to be wondered at for that the Tamariniâ— that is to say the long crooked huske wherein it is in the night time shrinketh it self vp vnder the leaues to couer it from the cold of the night and in the day time it vncouereth it self again all naked and outright as I haue often séene and beheld it when it is caryed abroad or sold it is out of the shelles or huskes and béeing put together they make balles thereof as bigge as a mans fist but it is clammie and sticketh together It is not very pleasant to looke on nor yet to handle but verie good cheap throughout all India by reason of the great quanttitie thereof Tamarinde is by the Aegyptians called Derelside The tree wheron it groweth is as great as a Plumme tree with thicke branches and leaues like a Mirtle The flowers white like Orange flowers from the middle whereof do proceede fower white thinne threeds which growe out of the huske wherein the seede and the pith is which wee call Tamarindi The leaues of the tree doe alwaies turne towards the Sunne and when it goeth downe they shut together and couer the huske in the night time At Alcayro in their gardens I saw some of these trees and one by Saint Macarius Cloyster in the wildernesse where no other Hearbs nor trees doe grow The Turkes and Egyptians vse this Tamarinde much in hotte diseases and Feauers they put it into faire water and so drinke it I healed my selfe therewith of a pestilent Feuer being in Siria It is a common Medecine among them which as they trauel through the drie woods and wildernesse they doe vse and also against the Plague and other hot diseases proceeding of Cholericke burning humors and against the heate of the Liuer and Kidneyes it is verie good I can shewe the whole huske or shell of the Tamarinde with the leaues as they grow and the Canna Fistula which I my selfe gathered in Egypt The leaues of Tamarinde trees are vsed against Wormes in childrens bellies and the young huskes as also the Cassia Fistula are in Egypt vsed to be conserued in Honnie oâ— Saint Iohns bread or Suger whereof I brought great Pots full ouer The Canna Fistula which is likewise much vsed for Purgations and other such like Medicines is much found in India as also in Cambaia Sion Malacca and the places bordering on the same but because there is the like in the Spanish Indies and many other places and sufficiently knowne I will speake no more of it but follow on with matters of lesse knowledge Of these trees I haue seene in Egypt at the least thousands
together specially about Damiata a famous towne in Egypt lying on the ryuer Nilus euen in like sort as the towne of Campen lyeth vppon Issel about a mile from the Sea The Egyptians call it Cassia Chaiarx-Ambar The trees whereon Cassia groweth are altogether like our Wallnut trees both for body branches and leaues only the flowers are Golde-yellow and of a sweete sauor out of these groweth the great huskes wherein the Cassia lyeth The huskes being small and without any woode are conserued likewise The Egyptians vse the huske of Cassia with white Suger the iuice of Calissi-wood against grauell and all diseases of the bladder and the Kidnies also against coughing and stopping of the brest with Agaricum also outwardly against hotte inflamations laying the Cassia vpon them Hee that desireth to know more hereof let him reade Mathiolus and other Physitions that haue written most diligently vpon the same The 82. Chapter Of Mirabolanes THe Myrobalanes are found in many places of India that is in Cambaia in the land of Baâ—gate in Goâ— in Malabar and in Bengalen whereof there are fiue sortes The first by Physitions called Citrinos and by the Indians Araâ—e those are round and are vsed to purge choller The second which are called Emblicos and in India Amuale are vsed in India to tanne Leather withall as Tanners vse Sumach and when they are ripe and also gréene they eate them for an appetite The third sort in India called Resonualle and by the Physitions Indius are eight cornered The fourth by the Physitions called Bellericos and by the Indians Guâ—ij are also round The fift last are in India called Aretean by the Physitions Quebulus those are somwhat long roundish with points The trées are almost like Plumme trees but they haue seuerall sorts of leaues each tree by himselfe They are commonly one with the other in greatnesse and fashion like Plummes but that some of them are squarer and rounder as I said before Thrée sorts are onely vsed and estéemed of by the Physitions in India that is Quebulus which grow in Cambaia Bisnagar and Bengala which are likewise preserued eaten in that sort as also carried into diuers places as well to Portingall as else where likewise the Cetrinos and Indius which also are preserued and they grow in Malabar Batecala and Bengala they are much vsed estéemed and carried into other countries The Mirabolans when they are ripe are almost in taste like vnripe Plummes but because this matter concerneth Physitions Apoticaries I will speake no more thereof hauing onely set it downe for a common thing in India All these fiue sorts of Mirabolanes are brought vs hether out of India ready dried and some conserued in pickle others in Suger The first wee call Citrinas or Flauas which are yellow Mirabolans and the yellower the better shewing some thing greene close and fast and gummie with a thicke shell They purge the stomake from choller and are good against Tertians and other hotte burning Feauers and verie necessarie for a hotte nature The second wee call Indus these the blacker they are the better they purge choller specially black choller they are good against shaking of the limmes they cause a faire colour and driue away sadnesse The third is called Cepule or Chebulae the greater they are the better blackish and somewhat reddish heauie and sinking in the water they purge fleame they sharpen mens wits and cleare the sight They are here preserued in Suger and Honnie they doe strengthen and purge the stomak they heale the dropsie and are good against olde Agues they likewise giue a man an appetite and helpe digestion The fourth wee call Emblicas and the fift Bellericas they haue in a manner one kinde of operation like the other called Cebulus They cleanse the body from fleagme specially the braines the Kidnies and the stomake they strengthen the hart giue an appetite and ease belching The Emblice are also conserued eaten to the same ende All these fruites purge but in an other kinde of manner then doth Cassia or Manna or such like drugges but they do it by astriction or binding thrusting that out which is in the members They that desire to knowe more hereof let him reade Mathiolus and Garcius ab Horto and others The 83. Chapter Of other Spices and Hearbes in India SPiconardus groweth in the countries of Sitor Mandoâ— which are places that border vppon the lands of Decan Dely and Bengalen it is sowed and groweth on plants about 2 or 3. spâ—ns high like corne with great veines wherein the Spiconardus groweth They doe commonly come close out of the earth by the roote and by that sort are brought into Cambaia and other places to sell and from thence sent into all places The Indian Spica comforteth the mawe being taken inwardly and also outwardly applyed and consumeth cold humors Aloe by the Arabians called Sebar by the Decaners Area by the Canarijns Cate Comer and by the Portingales Azeure is made of the Iuyce of an Hearbe when it is dried the Herbe is called by the Portingales Herba Baboza that is Quil hearbe There is much of it in Cambaia Bengala and other places but in the Iland called Sacotora which lyeth on the mouth of the redde Sea or the strength of Mecca there is great quantitie and the best It is a marchandise that is carried into Turkie Persia Arabia and also into Europe whereby the Iland is much esteemed and the Aloes called after the name of the Iland Aloes Socotrino or Aloes of Sacotora Aloes purgeth the stomacke from choler and tough fleagme specially a watrie and weake stomake it taketh away all stopping and consumeth rawe moystures preseruing it from foulenesse besides this it strengthneth the stomake it is made stronger of more force by adding to it Cinamon Mace or Nutmegges Aloes is good specially against Kooren and rawnesse and for such persons as haue their stomakes ful of raw moysture it is also vsed outwardly against sores that breake forth of the body and for the eyes The fruite called Anacardi is in manye places of India as in Cananor Calecut and the countrie of Decan and in diuers other places The Arabians call it Balador the Indians Bibo and the Portingall Faua de Malacca that is Beanes of Malacca because it is like a beane but somwhat greater then the Beanes of these countries they are vsed in India with milke against a short breath for the Wormes and for many other things When they are greene they make Achar thereof that is to say they salt them and lay them in Vineger as they do with the most kind of fruites and Spices as in diuers places I haue shewed This fruite hath her name from the hart because in colour and likenesse it resembleth the heart specially beeing drie When the fruites are greene and hanging on the tree as I haue seene theÌ„ in Sicilia vpon mount Aethna they are like great Beanes
parts with a very good table and were to bee compared with a Diamond of one Quilate it would bee worth 40. duckets but hauing any imperfections euery maÌ„ may well consider what hurt and abate they may doe in the price and after the same rate make his account as hee doth in Rubies the Ballayeses are likewise sold by waight but not in that sort as Diamonds and Rubies but they are estéemed according to the waight that is the best â—layes that may be found being of one Quilate may be worth ten duckets and hauing any faults eyther in colour or other perfections is of lesse valew but beeing perfect as I said alreadie it is worth ten duckets and two Quilates twentie duckets of three Quilates thirtie duckets and so after the rate as it is small or great being of the waight it should bee and beeing imperfect euery man ofskill may well consider what it is worth being of one Quilate estéeme it thereafter The 91. Chapter Of Orientale Pearles THe Orientale Pearles are better then those of the Spanish Indies and haue great difference in the price for they are worth more and haue a better glasse being clearer and fairer Those of the Spanish Indies commonly beeing darker deader of colour yet there are some found in the Portingall Indies that are nothing inferiour to the Orientale Pearles but they are very few Now to valew them as they shuld be I wil only set the good Pearles at a price A Pearle that in all partes is perfect both of water glasse and beautie without knobs of forme very rouÌ„d or proportioned like a pearle without dents being of one Quilate is worth a ducket and after this rate I will make my reckoning as I doe with Diamonds Rubies and Emeraulds and if there be any faults in the water clearenes and fashion or that it hath any knobs or other defaults it may well be considered what hurt it may bee vnto the sale thereof and according to the goodnes or badnes valew the price therof which hauing valewed we must sée what it weigheth and then make the reckoning thereof as with Diamonds Rubies Emeraulds if there be a whole string or a chaine full of Pearles you must looke well vpon theÌ„ for where there are many they are not all alike the greatest beeing the best the other after the rate for the goodnes of the great wil beare the badnes of the smal but if it be contrary then the bargen is not very good This shall suffice for instruction to such as desire to deale therewith to haue alwaies in their memorie and what herein is wanting for the better vnderstanding and knowledge hereof it may be supplied by true Iewellers and stone cutters that are skilfull in this point and with these instructions can easily help so that a maÌ„ shall not need wholly to put his trust in those that for their owne profit will giue them but bad counsell therein The 92. Chapter Of â—rtaâ—ne â—emorable thinges passed in India during my residence there IN the month of December Anno 158â— there ariued in the towne and Island of Ormus foure EnglishmeÌ„ which came from Aleppo in the couÌ„trie of Suria hauing sayled out of England and passed through the straightes of Gibraltar to Tripoli a towne and Hauen lying on the sea coast of Suria where all the shippes discharge their wares and marchandises and frome thence are caryed by land vnto Alleppo which is nyne dayes iourney In Aleppo there are resident diuers marchants and Factors of all Nations as Italians Frenchemen EnglishmeÌ„ Armenians Turkes Mores euerie man hauing his Religion apart paying tribute vnto the great Turke In that towne there is great trafficke for that from thence euerie yeare twyse there trauelleth two Caâ—ylen that is companies of people and Camelles which trauell vnto India Persia Arabia and all the countries bordering on the same and deale in all sorts of marchandise both to and from those Countries as I in an other place haue alreadie declared Three of the said Englishmen aforesaide were sent by the Companie of Englishmen that are resident in Aleppo to see if in Ormus they might keepe any Factors and so trafficke in that place like as also the Italians doe that is to say the Venetians which in Ormus Goa and Malacca haue their Factors and trafficke there as well for stones and pearles as for other wares and spices of those countries which from thence are caryed ouer land into Veâ—e One of these Englishmen had beene 〈◊〉 before in the said towne of Ormus and there had taken good information of the trade and vpon his aduise and aduertisement the other were as then come thether with him bringing great store of marchandises with them as Clothes Saffron all kindes of drinking glasses and Haberdashers wares as looking glasses kniues and such like stuffe and to conclude brought with them all kinde of small wares that may be deuised And although those wares amounted vnto great summes of money notwithstaÌ„ding it was but onlie a shadow or colour thereby to giue no occasion to be mistrusted or seen into for that their principall intent was to buy great quantities of precious Stones as Diamantes Pearles Rubies c. to the which ende they brought with them a great summe of money and Gold and that verie secretly not to be deceyued or robbed thereof or to runne into anie danger for the same They being thus aryued in Ormus hyred a Shop and began to sell their wares which the Italians perceyuing whose Factors continue there as I sayd before and fearing that those Englishmen finding good vent for their commodities in that place wold be resident therein and so daylie increase which would be no small losse and hinderance vnto them did presently inuent all the subtile meanes they could to hinder them and to that end they went vnto the Captaine of Ormus as then called Don Gonsalo de Meneses telling him that there were certaine Englishmen come into Ormus that were sent only to spy the Country and said further that they were Heretickes and therefore they sayd it was conuenient they shuld not be suffered so to depart without béeing examined and punished as enimies to the example of others The Captaine being a friend vnto the Englishmen by reason that one of them which had bene there before had giuen him certaine presents would not be perswaded to trouble them but shipped them with all their wares in a Shippe that was to sayle for Goa and sent them to the Viceroy that he might examine and trye them as hee thought good where when they were aryued they were cast into prison and first examined whether they were good Christians or no and because they could speake but bad Portugale onlie two of them spake good Dutche as hauing bene certaine yeares in the lowe Countries and there traffiqued There was a Dutch Iesuite borne in the towne of Bâ—gges in Flaunders that had bin resident in the Indies for the space
they passed ouer it on foote and so trauelled by land being neuer heard of againe but it is thought they arriued in Aleppo as some say but they knew not certainely Their greatest hope was that Iohn Newbery could speake the Arabian tongue which is vsed in al those countries or at the least vnderstoode for it is very common in all places there abouts as French with vs. Newes being come to Goa there was a great stirre and murmuring among the people and we much wondered at it for many were of opinion that wée had giuen them counsel so to doe and presently their suertie seased vpon the goods remaining which might amount vnto aboue 200. Pardawes and with that and the money he had receiued of the English men he went vnto the Viceroye and deliuered it vnto him which the Viceroy hauing receiued forgaue him the rest This flight of the English men grieued the Iesuites most because they had lost such a pray which they made sure account of whereupon the Dutch Iesuite came to vs to aske vs if we knew thereof saying that if he had suspected so much he would haue dealt otherwise for that he said hee once had in his hands of theirs a bagge wherein was fortie thousand Veneseanders each Veneseander being two Pardawes which was when they were in prison And that they had alwayes put him in comfort to accomplish his desire vpon the which promise hee gaue them their money againe which otherwise they shoulde not so lightly haue come by or peraduenture neuer as hee openly said and in the ende he called them hereticks and spies with a thousand other rayling spéeches which he vttered against them The Englishman that was become a Iesuite hearing that his companions were gone and perceiuing that the Iesuites shewed him not so great fauour neither vsed him so well as they did at the first repented himselfe and séeing he had not as then made any solemne promise being counselled to leaue the house told that he could not want a liuing in the towne as also that the Iesuites could not kéepe him there without he were willing to stay so they could not accuse him of any thing he told them flatly that he had no desire to stay within the Cloyster and although they vsed all the meanes they could to kéepe him there yet hee would not stay but hyred a house without the Cloyster and opened shop where he had good store of worke and in the end married a Mesticos daughter of the towne so that hee made his account to stay there while he liued By this Englishman I was instructed of al the waies trades and viages of the countrie betwéene Aleppo and Ormus and of all the ordinances and common customes which they vsually hold during their Viage ouer land as also of the places and townes wher they passed And since those Englishmens departures froÌ„ Goa there neuer arriued any strangers either English or others by land in the sayde countries but onely Italyans which daylye traffique ouer land and vse continuall trade going and comming that way About the same time there came into Goa from the Iland of Iapan certaine Iesuites and with them thrée Princes being the children of certaine Kings of that country wholly apparelled like Iesuites not one of them aboue the age of sixtéene yeares being minded by perswasions of the Iesuites to trauel into Portingall and from thence to Rome to sée the Pope therby to procure great profit priueledges and liberties for the Iesuites which was onely their intent they continued in Goa till the yeare 1584. and then set sayle for Portingall and from thence trauelled into Spaine whereby the King and all the Spanish Nobilitie they were with great honour receiued and presented with many gifts which the Iesuits kept for themselues Out of Spaine they roade to sée the Pope where they obtained great priueledges and liberties as in the description of the Iland of Iapen I haue in part declared That done they trauelled throughout Italy as to Venice Mantua Florence and all other places and dominions of Italy wher they were presented with many rich presents and much honoured by meanes of the great report the Iesuites made of them To conclude they returned againe vnto Madril where with great honor they took their leaue of the King with letters of commendation in their behalfes vnto the Viceroye and all the Captaines and Gouernours of India and so they went to Lisbone and there tooke shipping in Ano. 1586. and came in the ship called Saint Philip which in her returne to Portingall was taken by Captaine Drake and after a long and troublesome Viage arriued at Mosambique where the ship receiued in her lading out of an other shippe called the Saint Laurence that had put in there hauing lost her Mastes being laden in India and bound for Portingall where the shippe was spoyled and because the time was farre spent to get into India the said Saint Phillip tooke in the lading of Saint Laurence and was taken in her way returning home by the Englishmen as I saide before and was the first ship that had beene taken comming out of the East Indies which the Portingales tooke for an euill signe because the ship bare the Kings owne name But returning to our matter the Princes and Iesuites of Iapan the next yeare after arriued at Goa with great reioycing and gladnesse for that it was verily thought they had all béene dead when they came thether they were all thrée apparelled in cloth of Golde and Siluer after the Italian manner which was the apparell that the Italian Princes and Noblemen had giuen them they came thether very liuely and the Iesuits verie proudly for that by them their Viage had beene performed In Goa they stayed till the Monson or time of the windes came in to sayle for China at which time they went from thence and so to China thence vnto Iapon where with great triumph and wondering of all the people they were receiued and welcomed home to the furtherance and credite of the Iesuites as the Booke declareth which they haue written and set foorth in the Spanish tongue concerning their Viage as well by water by land as also of the intertainment that they had in euerie place In the yeare 1584. in the month of Iune there arriued in Goa many Ambassadours as of Persia Cambaia and from the Samoriâ— which is called the Emperour of the Malabares and also from the King of Cochin and among other thinges there was a peace concluded by the Samorijn the Malabares with the Portingall vpon condition that the Portingales should haue a Fort vpon a certaine Hauen lying in the coast of Malabare called Panane ten miles â—rom Calâ—cut which was presently be 〈◊〉 built and there with great costs and changes they raysed and erected a Fort but because the ground is all Sandie they could make no sure foundation for it sunk continually wherby they found it best to
yet laying hold thereon and hauing his hand half cut in two he would not let go so that in the end they were constrained to take him in againe both the which brethren I knew and haue bene in company with them in this miserie and paine they were â—0 daies at sea in the end got to land where they found the Admiral and those that were in the other boate Such as stayed in the ship some tooke bords deals and other péeces of wood bound them together which y e Portingals cal bangadas euery man what they could catch all hoping to saue their liues but of all those there came but two men safe to shore They that before had taken land out of the boates hauing escaped that danger fell into an other for they had no sooner set foote on shore but they were by the Mores called Caffares Inhabitants of that couÌ„try spoiled of al their cloaths so y t they left not so much vpon their bodies as would hide their priuie members whereby they indured great hunger and miserie w t manie other mischieffes which would be ouer tedious to rehearse In the end they came vnto a place where they found a factor of the Captaines of Soffala Mosambique he holp them as he might and made means to send them vnto Mosambique and from thence they went into India where I knew manie of them and haue often spoken with them Of those that were come safe to shore some of theÌ„ died before they got to Mosambique so that in all they were about 60 persons that saued themselues all the rest were drowned smothered in the ship there was neuer other newes of y e ship then as you haue heard Hereby you may consider the pride of this Pilot who because he would be couÌ„selled by no man cast away that ship with so many men wherefore a Pilot ought not to haue so great authority that in time of need he should reiect and not heare the counsell of such as are most skilfull The Pilote when he came into Portingale was committed to prison but by giftes and presents he was let loose and an other shippe beeing the best of the Fleet that went for India in Anno 1588. committed vnto him not without great curses and euill wordes of the Mothers Sisters wiues and Chidren of those that perished in the ship which all cryed vengeance on him and comming with thy ship wherein he then was placed called the S. Thomas he had almost laid her on y â— same place where the other was cast away hut day comming on they romde themselues off and so escaped yet in their voiage homeward to Portingal the same shippe was cast away by the Cape de bona Speranza with the Pilot and all her men whereby much speech arose saying it was a iust iudgement of God against him for making so many widdowes and fatherles children whereof I will speake in another place This I thought good to set downe at large because men might see that many a shippe is cast away by the headinesse of the gouernours and vnskilfulnesse of the pilotes wherfore it were good to examine the persons before a shippe be committed vnto them specially a shippe of such a charge and wherein consisteth the welfare or vndoing of so many men together with their liues and impouerishing of so many a poore wife and child this losse happened in the month of August An. 1â—â—5 In May An. 1586. two ships laden with â—are set saile out of the hauen of Chaul in Indâ—a that belonged vnto certaine Portingalles inhabitantes of Chaul the owners being in them those shippes should haue sayled to the straites of Mecca or the â—dde sea where the said marchantes vsed to traficque but they were taken on the Sea by two Turkish Galleyes that had beene made in the innermost partes of the straites of Mâ—a by Cairo on the corner of the redde sea in a towne called Sues the sayde Galleyes began to doe great mischiefe put all the Indian marchants in great feare The same month there was a great army prepared in Goa both of Fustes and gallies such as in many yeares had not béene séene and was appointed to saile to the red sea to driue the Turkish Galleyes away or els to fight with them if they could they were also commanded by the Viceroy to winter their shippes in Ormus and then to enter into the straights of Persia lying behind Ormus and to offer their seruice to Xatamas K. of Perâ— against the Turke their common enemy thereby to trouble him on all sides if they had brought their purpose to effect but it fel out otherwise as hereafter you shall heare for Chiefe of this army there was appointed a Gentleman named Rioy Gonsalues da Canâ— who once had béene Captaine of Ormus being a very fatte and grosse man which was one of the chiefe occasions of their euill fortune and with him went the principallest soldiers and gentlemen of all India thinking to winne great honor thereby this army being ready minding to sayle to the redde sea they found many calmes vpon the way so that they indured much miserie and begunne to die like dogges as well for want of drinke as other necessaries for they had not made their account to stay so long vpon the way which is alwaies their excuse if any thing falleth out contrary to their mindes this was their good beginning and as it is thought a preparatiue to further mischiefe for comming to the redde sea at the mouth thereof they met the Turkish Gallies where they had a long fight but in y e end the Portingals had the ouerthrow escaped as well as they might with great dishonour and no little losse and the Turkes being victorious sayled to the coast of Abex or Melinde where they tooke certaine townes as Pate and Braua that as then were in league with the Portingalles there to strengthen themselues and thereby to reape a greater benefit by indamaging the Portingall and lying vnder their noses The Portingall armie hauing spedde in this manner went vnto Ormus there to winter themselues and in the meane time to repaire their armie and to heale their sicke soldiers whereof they had many and so when time serued to fulfill the Viceroyes commandement in helping Xatamas thinking by that meanes to recouer their losses being ariued in Ormus and hauing repaired their Fustes the time comming on the General by reason of his fatnes and corpulent bodie stayed in Ormus appointing Lieuetenant in his place one called Pedro Homen Pereira who although he was but a meane gentleman yet was hee a very good soldier and of great experience commanding them to obey him in all things as if he were there in person himselfe giuing them in charge as they sailed along the coast to land vpon the coast of Arabia there to punish certain pirates that held in a place called Nicola and spoiled such as passed to and fro vpon
the seas and did great hurt to the ships and marchants of Bassora that traffiqued in Ormus whereby the trafique to the saide towne of Ormus was much hindered to the great losse and vndoing of many a marchant With this commission they set forwarde with their Lieuetenant and being come to Nicola where they ran their fustes on shore so that they lay halfe dry vpon the sand euery man in generall leaped on land without any order of battaile as in all their actions they vse to doe which the Lieuetenant perceiuing would haue vsed his authoritie and haue placed them in order as in warlike affaires is requisite to be done but they to the contrarie would not obay him saying hee was but a Bore that they were better Gentlemen soldiers then he and with these and such like presumptuous spéeches they went on their course scattering here there in all disorders like shéepe without a shepheard thinking all the world not sufficient to containe them and euery Portingall to bee a Hercules and so strong that they could beare the whole world vpon their sholders which the Arabians being within the land and most on horsebacke perceyuing and séeing their great disorder knowing most of their Fustes to lie drie vpon the strand and that without great payne and much labour they coulde not hastily set them on floate presently compassed them about and being ringed in manner of a halfe Moone they fell vpon them and in that sorte draue them away killing them as they list till they came vnto their Fustes and because they could not presently get their Fustes into the water through fear and shame they were complled to fight where likewise many of them were slaine and not aboue fiftie of them escaped that had set foote on land and so being gotten into their Fustes they rowed away In this ouerthrow there were slayne aboue 800. Portingalles of the oldest best soldiers in all India and among them was a Trumpetter being a Netherlander who being in the thickest of the fight not farre from the Portingalles ensigne and séeing the Ensigne-bearer throw downe his Ensigne the easier to escape and saue his life and that one of the Arabians had taken it vp casting his Trumpet at his backe he ranne in great furie and with his rapier killed the Arabian that held it and brought it againe among the Portingals saying it was a great shame for them to suffer it so to bee carryed away and in that manner he held it at the least a whole hower and spoyled many of the Arabians that sought to take it from him in such manner that he stood compassed about with deade men and although hee might haue saued himselfe if hee woulde haue left the Ensigne yet he would not doe it till in the ende there came so many vpon him that they killed him where he yeéelded vp the Ghost with the ensigne in his armes and so ended his dayes with honour which the Portingalles themselues did confesse and often acknowledged it commending his valour which I thought good to set downe in this place for a perpetuall memorie of his valiant mind The Lieuetenant perceyuing their disorder and how it would fall out wisely saued himselfe and got into the Fustes where hee behelde the ouerthrow and in the ende with the emptie vessels he turned againe to Ormus without doing any thing else to the great griefe and shame of all the Indian soldiers being the greatest ouerthrow that euer the Portingals had in those countries or wherein they lost so many Portingalles together among the which was the Archbishoppes brotherâ— and many other young and lustie Gâ—tlemen of the principallest in all Porâ—ngall At the same time the Queene of Oâ—mus came to Goa being of Mahomet religion as all her auncesters had beene before her and as then were contributarie to the Portingall She caused her selfe to be christened and was with great solemnitie brought into the Towne where the Viceroy was her Godfather and named her Donna Phillippa after the King of Spaines name being a faire white woman very tall and comely and with her likewise a brother of hers being verie young was also christened and then with one Mathias Dalburquerâ—k that had beene Captain of Ormus she sailed to Portingall to present her selfe to the king She had married with a Portingall Gentleman called Anton Dazeuedo Conâ—nho to whome the king in regarde of his mariage gaue the Captaine shippe of Ormus which is worth aboue two hundred thousande duckets as I said before This Gentleman after hee had beene maried to the Queene about halfe a yeare liuing very friendly and louingly with her hee caused a shippe to bee made therewith to saile to Ormus there to take order for the rentes and reuenewes belonging to the Queene his wife but his departure was so grieuous vnto her that she desired him to take her with him saying that without him she could not liue but because he thought it not as then conuenient hee desired her to be content promising to returne againe with all the speede he might Wherevppon hee went to Bardeâ— which is the vttermost parte of the Riuer entering into Goa about thrée myles off and while hee continued there staying for winde and weather The Quéene as it is saide tooke so great gréefe for his departure that she dyed the same day that her husbande set saile and put to sea to the great admiration of all the Countrey and no lesse sorrowe because shee was the first Quéene in those countries that had béene christened forsaking her kingdome and high estate rather to die a Christian and married with a meane Gentleman then to liue like a Quéene vnder the lawe of Mahomet and so was buried with great honor according to her estate In the month of August 1586 there ariued a man of Mosambique in Goa y t came from Portingal in y e ship y t shold saile to Malacca that brought newes vnto the Viceroy how the ship called the Boa Viagen that in the yeare before sailed from India towards Portingall was cast away by the cape de Bona Speranza where it burst in peeces beeing ouerladen for they do coÌ„monly ouerlade most of their ships â— affirmed that the ship had at the least â— haÌ„dfull high of water within it before it departed froÌ„ Cochiin althogh before their ships set sayle they put the Master and other Officers to their othes therby to make them confesse if the ship be strong and sufficient to performe the voyage or to let them know the faults which vpoÌ„ their said oathes is certefied by a protestation made wherunto the Officers set their handes yet though the ship haue neuer so many faultes they will neuer confesse them because they will not loose their places and profit of the Voyage yea although they doe assuredly knowe the ship is not able to continue the Voyage for that couetousnes ouerthrowing wisedome pollicie maketh them reiect all feare but when they fall
out of Portingall Their names were S. Antony S. Francisco our Lady of Nazareth and S. Alberto but of the S. Mary that came in company w c them from Portingall they had no newes but afterwards they heard that shee put backe againe to Portingal by reasoÌ„ of some defaults in her and also of the foule weather Eight dayes after the said 4. ships ariued in Goa where with great ioy they were receiued At the same time the Fort called Columbo which the Portingales hold in the Island of Seylon was besieged by the king of Seylon called Ram and in great danger to bee lost which to deliuer there was an armie of fustes and gallies sent from Goa whereof was Generall Barnaldin de Carualho And at the same time departed another armie of many ships fustes and gallies with great numbers of souldiers munition victuals and other warlike prouisions therewith to deliuer Malacca which as then was besieged and in great misery as I saide before thereof was generall Don Paulo de Lyma Pereira a valiant Gentleman and an olde souldier who not long before had bin Captaine of Chaul and being very fortunate in all his enterprises was therefore chosen to bée Generall of that fléet The last of Nouember the foure ships afore said departed from Goa to lade at Cochiin and from thence to saile for Portingale In December after while the Fort of Columbo in the Island of Seylon was still besieged the towne of Goa made out another great fléete of ships and gallies for the which they tooke vp many men within the Citie and compelled them to goe in the ships because they wanted men with a great contribution of mony raysed vpoÌ„ the Marchants and othrr inhabitants to furnish the same of the which armie was appointed general one Manuel de Sousa Courinho a braue gentle man and souldier who in times past had bin Captaine of the said Fort of Columbo and had withstood another besieging whereuppon the king put him in great credit and aduanced him much and after the Viceroyes death he was Viceroy of India as in time place we shall declare He with his armie ariued in the Isle of Seylon where hee ioyned with the other armie that went before and placed themselues in order to giue battaile to Raâ— who perceiuing the great number of his enemies brake vp his siege and forsooke the Fort to the great reioycing of the Portingales and hauing strengthned the Forte with men and victuals they returned againe to Goa where in the month of March Anno 1â—88 they were receiued with great ioy In the month of Aprill the same yeare the armie of Don Paulo de Lyma that went to Malacca ariued in Goa with victorie hauing fired Malacca and opened the passage againe to China and other places the maner whereof was this In their way as they passed the straight of Malacca they met with a ship belonging to the king of Achein in Samatra who was a deadly enemie to the Portingales and the principal cause of the besieging of Malacca In the same ship was the Daughter of the said king of Achein which he sent to be maried to the king of â—oor therby to make a new aliance with him against the Portingales and for a present sent him a goodly péece of Ordinance whereof the like was not to be found in all India and therefore it was afterwards sent into Portingale as a present to the king of Spaine in a ship of Malacca which after was cast away in the Island of â—eâ—cera one of the Flemmish Ilandes where the same peece with much labor was weighed vp and laid within the fortresse of the same Isle because it is so heauie that it can hardly be caried into Portingale But to the matter they tooke the ship with the kings daughter and made it al good prize and by it they were aduertised what had passed betweene the kings of Achein and Ioor so that presently they sent certaine souldiers on land and marching in order of battaile they set vppon the towne of Ioor that was sconsed and compassed about with woodden stakes most of the houses being of straw which wheÌ„ the people of the towne perceiued and saw the great number of men and also their resolution they were in great feare and as many as could fledde and saued themselues in the countrie to conclude the Portingales entred the towne and set it on fire vtterly spoyling and destroying it razing it eueÌ„ with the ground slaying al they fouÌ„d and taking some prisoners which they led away Captiues and found within the towne at the least 2500 brasse péeces great small which were al brought into India You must vnderstand that some of them were no greater than Muskets some greater and some very great being very cunningly wrought with figures and flowers which the Italians and Portingales that haue denyed their faith and become Mahometistes haue taught them whereof there are many in India and are those indéede that doe most hurt when they haue done any murther or other villanie fearing to be punished for the same to saue their liues they runne ouer by the firme land among the Heathens and Mores and there they haue great stipendes and wages of the Indian kinges and Captaines of the land Seauen or eight yeares before my comming into India there were in Goa certain TruÌ„peters and Cannonyers being Dutchmen Netherlanders and because they were reiected and scorned by the Portingales in India as they scorn all other nations in the world as also for that they could get no pay when they asked it they were presently abused and cast into the gallies and there compelled to serue In the end they tooke counsell together and seeing they could not get out of the countrie they secretly got into the firme land of Balagate and went vnto Hidalcan where they were gladly receiued and very well entertained with great payes liuing like Lords there being in dispaire denide their faithes although it is thought by some that they remaine still in their owne religion but it is most sure that they are maried in those countries with Heathen women and were liuing when I came from thence by this meanes are the Portingales the causes of their owne mischiefes onely through their pride hardines and make rods to scourge theÌ„selues withall w c I haue onely shewed in respect of those cast péeces other martiall weapons which the Indians haue learned of the Portingals and Christians whereof in times past they had no vnderstanding and although they had placed all those péeces in very good order yet it should seeme they knew not howe to shoote them off or to vse them as they should as it appeared hereby for that they presently forsooke them and left them for the Portingals With this victory the Portingals were very proude and with great glorie entred into Malacca wherein they were receyued with great triumph as it may well bee thought being by them deliuered from
great miserie wherein they had long continued Which y e king of Achein hearing and that his daughter was taken prisoner he sent his ambassadour to Don Panto de Lyma with great presentes desiring to make peace with him which was presently granted and all the waies to Malacca were opened and al kinds of marchandises and victuailes brought thether which before had béene kept from them whereat was much reioycing This done order being taken for all things in Malacca they returned againe to Goa where they ariued in safetie as I said before in the month of April and there were receyued with great triumph the people singing Te Deum laudamus many of the soldiers bringing good prises with them In the month of May following vppon the 1â— of the same month the Viceroy Don Duarte de Meneses died in Goa hauing beene sicke but foure daies of a burning feauer which is the common sicknes of India and is very daungerous but it is thought it was for greefe because hee had receyued letters from the Captaine of Ormus wherein hee was aduertised that they had receyued news ouer land from Venice that the Archbishop was safely ariued at Lisbone and wel receiued by the king and because they were not friends at his departure as I said before they said he was so much grieued therat that fearing to fall into the displeasure of the king by information from the Bishoppe hee dyed of griefe but that was contrarie as hereafter by the shippes we vnderstood for that the Bishop dyed in the shippe eight dayes before it ariued in Portingal and so they kept companie together for they liued not long one after the other whereby their quarrell was ended with their liues The Viceroyes funerals were with great solemnity obserued in this manner The place appointed for the Viceroyes buriall is a Cloister called Reys Magos or the three kings of Cullen being of the order of Saint Francis which standeth in y e land of Bardes at the mouth of the Riuer of Goa and thether his bodie was conueyed being set in the galley Royall all hanged ouer with blacke pennons and couered with blacke cloth being accompanied with all the nobilitie and gentlemen of the countrey And approching neere the cloister of Reys Magos being thrée miles from Goa downe the Riuer towards the sea the Friers came out to receyue him and brought his bodie into the church where they placed it vpon a herse and so with great solemnity sung Masse which done there were certaine letters brought forth called Vias which are alwaies sealed and kept by the Iesuites by the kinges appointment and are neuer opened but in y e absence or at the death of the Viceroy These Vias are yearely sent by the King and are marked with figures 1.2.3.4.5 and so forth and when there wanteth a Viceroy then the first number or Via is opened wherein is written that in the absence or after the death of the Viceroy such a man shal be Viceroy and if the man that is named in the first Via bee not there then they open the second Via looke whose name is therein being in place he is presently receyued and obeyed as Gouernour and if he be likewise absent they open the rest orderly as they are numbred vntill the Gouernour bee found which being knowne they neede open no more The rest of the Vias that are remayning are presently shut vp kept in the cloyster by the Iesuites but before the Vias are opened there is no man that knoweth who it shal be or whose name is written therein These Vias are with great solemnitie opened by the Iesuites and read in open audience before all the nobles Captaines Gouernors and others that are present and if the man that is named in the Vias bee in any place of India or the East countries as Soffala Mosambique Ormus Malacca or any other place of those countries as sometimes it happeneth he is presently sent for and must leaue all other offices to receyue that place vntill the king endeth another out of Portingal but if the maÌ„ named in y e Vias be in Portingal China or Iapan or at the cape de bona Speranza then they open other Vias as I said before The Masse being finished the Iesuites came with the kings packets of Vias which are sealed with the Kings owne signet and are alwaies opened before the other Viceroyes body is laide in the earth and there they opened the first Via and with great deuotion staying to know who it should be at the last was named for Viceroy one Mathias Dalbuâ—kerke that had beene Captaine of Ormuâ— and the yeare before was gone in companie of the Archbishoppe to Portingall because he had broken one of his legges thinking to heale it but if he had knowne so much he would haue stayed in India He being absent the seconde Via was opened with the like solemnitie and therein they found named for Viceroy Manuel de Sousa Coutinho of whom I made mention before and who was the man that raysed the siege in the Island of Seylon to the great admiration of euery man because he was but a meane gentleman yet very well esteemed as he had wel deserued by his long seruice although there were many rich gentlemen in place whome they rather thought should haue been preferred therto yet they must content themselues and shew no dislike and thereupon they presently saluted him kissing his hand and honoured him as Viceroy presently they left the deade bodie of the olde Viceroy and departed in the Galley with the new Viceroy taking away all the mourning clothes and standerds and couering it with others of diuers colours and silkes and so entred into Goa sounding both Shalmes and Trumpettes wherein he was receyued with great triumph and ledde into the great Church where they sung Te Deum laudamus c. and there gaue him his oath to hold and obserue all priuiledges and customes according to the order in that case prouided and from thence ledde him to the Viceroyes pallace which was presently by the dead Viceroyes seruantes all vnfurnished and by the newe Viceroye furnished againe both with housholde stuffe and seruantes as the manner is in all such chaunges and alterations The bodie of the deade Viceroy being left in the Church was buried by his seruantes without any more memorie of him sauing onely touching his owne particular affaires In the Monthes of Iune Iulie and August of the same yeare Anno 1588. there happened the greatest winter that had of long time béene seene in those Countries although it rayneth euerie winter neuer holding vppe all winter long but not in such great quantitie and aboundance as it did in those thrée Monthes for that it rayned continually and in so great aboundance from the tenth of Iune till the first day of September y t it could not be iudged that it euer held vppe from rayning one halfe hower together neyther night nor day whereby many houses
by reason of the great moysture fell downe to the grounde as also because the stone wherewith they are built is verie soft and their morter the more half earth In the same month of August there happened a foule and wonderfull murther within the towne of Goa and because it was done vpon a Netherlander I thought good to set it downe at large that hereby men may the better perceyue the boldnesse and filthie lecherous mindes of the Indian women which are commonly all of one nature and disposition The thing was thus a young man borne in Antwarpe called Frauncis King by his trade a stone cutter was desirous as many young men are to sée strange countries for the same cause trauelled vnto Venice where he had an vncle dwelling who being desirous to preferre his cosin sent him in the company of other Marchantes to Aleppo in Suria where the Venetians haue great trafficke as I saide before there to learne the trade of marchandise and specially to deale in stones to the which ende he deliuered him a great summe of money This young youth being in Aleppo fell into company in such sort that in steede of increasing his stocke as his vncle meant he should doe he made it lesse by the one halfe so that when the other Marchants had dispatched their businesse and were readie to depart for Venice Frauncis King perceyuing that hee had dealt in such sorte that halfe his stocke was consumed and spent in good fellowshippe knew not what to doe as searing his vncles displeasure not daring to returne againe to Venice vnlesse hee caried as much with him as hee brought from thence in the end hee tooke counsell of some Venetians with whome hee was acquainted that willed him to goe with the Caffila or Caruana that as then was ready to go vnto Bassora and from thence to Ormus in India assuring him seeing hee had knowledge in stones that hee might doe great good and winne much profite in those Countries and thereby easily recouer the losse that by his folly hee had receyued which would turne to his great benefite and likewise no hurt vnto his vncle Which counsell hee followed determining not to returne backe againe before hee had recouered his losse and to the same ende and purpose hee ioyned himselfe with certain Venetians who at the same instant trauelled thether and so went with the Caffila till they came vnto Bassora the best Towne in all those Countries lying vppon the vtter parte of Sinus Persicus that goeth towardes Ormus and from thence by water till they arriued in Ormus where euerie man set vppe his shoppe and began to sell his wares but Francis King being young and without gouernment séeing himselfe so far distant from his vncle made his account that the money he had in hie hands was then his owne and began againe without anie foresight to leade his accustomed life taking no other care but onlie to be merie and make good cheare so long till in the end the whole stock was almost clean spent and consumed and beginning to remember himself and to call to mind his follies past hee knewe not what course to take for that to goe home again he thought it not the best way as wāting the meanes and again he durst not shew himself in the sight of his Vncle. At the last he determined to trauell vnto Goa where he vnderstood he might well get his liuing by setting vp his trade til it pleased god to work otherwise for him and so he came to Goa and being there presently set vp shoppe to vse his occupation But because he found there good company that is to say Netherlanders and other Dutchmen that serued there ordinarily for Trumpetters and Gunners to the Viceroy who did daylie resort vnto him he could not so well ply his worke but that he fell into his wonted course which he perceiuing in the end determined to make his continuall residence in Goa and for the same purpose set downe his rest to seeke some meanes there to abide as long as he liued seeing all other hope was cleane lost for euer returning againe vnto his Vncle or into his owne countrie At the same time among other strangers there was one Iohn de Xena a French man borne in Deepe that in former times was come into India for drum vnto one of the Viceroyes and hauing beene long in the countrie was maryed to a woman of Ballagate a Christian but by birth a More This French man kept a shoppe in Goa where he made Drummes and other Ioyners worke and withall was the Kings Oare maker for the Galleyes whereby he liued in reasonable good sort He had by his foresaid wyfe two sonnes and a daughter and as strangers of what nation soeuer they be vse to take acquaintance one of the other being out of their owne countries speciallie in India where there are very few and do hold together as brethren which to them is a great comfort so this Frauncis King vsed much to this French mans house by whome he was verie much made of and very welcome as thinking thereby to bring him to match with his daughter because of his occupation which is of great account in India because of the great number of Diamants other stones that are sold in those countries and to conclude as the manner of India is that when they haue gotten a man in once they will neuer leaue him he ceassed not with many promises and other wonderful matters to draw Frauncis so farre that he gaue his consent thereunto which afterwardes cost him his lyfe as in the historie following you shall heare the true discourse To make short they were maried according to their manner the Bryde being but 11 yeares old very fair and comelie of bodie and limme but in villanie the worst that walked vppon the earth yet did her husband account himselfe a most happie man that had found such a wyfe as he often times said vnto me although he was so ielous of her that he trusted not any man were they neuer so néere friends vnto him but he in whome he put his greatest trust least suspected was the onelie worker of his woe When he was betroathed to his wife the father promised him a certain péece of money and vntill it were payde he and his wyfe should continue at meat and meale in his father in lawes house and should haue a shop adioyning to the same and whatsoeuer he earned should be for himself When all this was done and the matter had remained thus a long while by reason that the father in law could not performe the promised summe because their houshold increased it came to passe that the old man fel into a sicknesse and died and then Frauncis King must of force pay his part towards the house kéeping which he liked not of thereupon fel out with his mother in law and on a certaine time made his complaint to me asking my counsel therein I
almost slaine two or three of our men But God had pittie on vs so that there happened no other hurt but that some of them were a litle amazed This continued to the fourteenth of April without any change whereupon all the Officers of the shippe assembled together with others of the companie taking counsell what was best to be done and perceiuing the shippe not to bee strong enough to passe the Cape they concluded by protestation whereunto they subscribed their hands to sayle with the ship to Mosambique and there to winter and to repaire the shippe and prouide all necessaries for it which greatly greeued the common sort because they did find as great danger in turning backe againe to Mosambique as to passe the Cape for that they were to sayle againe by the land Donatal which they feared as much as the Cape and also though they did arriue at Mosambique yet they accounted it as much as a lost Viage For that they must stay there till the next yeare and there spend all they haue for that all things that come thether are brought out of India so that euerie thing is there as â—eare as gold which would bee hard for the poore Saylers and Swabbers as hauing but little meanes to relieue themselues and therby they should be constrained to sel that litle they had broght with them for halfe the value and besides that they were as then about â—00 miles froÌ„ Mosambique Wherefore there grew great noyse and murmuring in the ship among the Saylers that cursed the Captaine and the Officers because the ship was badly prouided for it had not one rope more then hung about the ship nor any thing wherof to make them if those that we had should haue chanced to breake The Captaine laide the faulte on the Master because hee asked them not when hee was at land and the Maâ—ter saide that he had spoken for them and that the Cairo or Hemp whereof in India the ropes are made was deliuered vnto the Captaine and that he had sold y e best part thereof to put the money in his purse that was the cause why we wanted with this disorder they bring their matters to passe not once remembring what may after fall out but when they are in danger theÌ„ ther is nothing els but crying Misericordia and calling to our lady for helpe the Captaine could not tell what to answere séeing vs in that trouble but said that he maruelled at nothing so much as why our Lord God suffered them beeing so good Christians and Catholiques as they were to passe the Cape with so great torments and dangerous weather hauing so great and strong shippes and that the Englishmen béeing as he said Heretickes and blasphemers of God with so smal weake vessels passed y e Cape so easilie for they had receaued newes in India that an English Shippe had passed the Cape with verie great ease And so wee made backe againe towards Mosambique being in great dispaire for that no man cared for laying his hand to worke and hardlie would any man obay the Officers of the Shippe In this manner sayling wee perceiued diuers vesselles and bordes with dead men bound vpon them driuing in the Sea which comforted vs a little thinking that some other of the shippes were in the same taking and had throwne some of their goods ouer bord and so made towardes Mosambique before vs whereby we thought to haue company and that we alone were not vnfortunate for that is commonlie said that companions in miserie are a comfort one to an other and so it was to vs but I would to God it had bene so as we imagined but it was farre worse then turning backe againe for those were the signes of the casting away of the S. Thomas as being in the Iland of S. Helena as we were afterwards aduertised The 15. of April we had an other great calme which continued till the 17 day and taking the hight of the Sunne we found our selues to be vnder 37 degrees to the great admiration of al the company for that being as I said vnder 35 degrees and hauing sayled for the space of 5 dayes with so great a wind and stormy weather towards Mosambique we should rather by al mens reason haue lessened our degrees by estimation wee made account to haue bene vnder 30 or 32 degrees at the highest but the cause why our shippe went backward in that sort against wind and weather towards the Cape thinking wee made towards Mosambique was by the water which in those countries carieth with a verie strong streame towards the cape as the Pylot tould vs he had proued at other times yet he thought not that the water had runne with so great a streame as now by experience he found it did so as it séemed that God miraculouslie against all mans reason and iudgement and all the force of wind and stormes would haue vs passe the Cape wheÌ„ we were least in hope thereof whereby we may plainelie perceiue that all mens actions without the hand of God are of no moment The same day againe we saw gréene water and the birdes called Mangas de Velludo or veluet sléeues which are certain signes of the cape de bona Speranza which put vs once againe in hope to passe it and about euening a swallow flew into our shippe wherat they much reioiced saying that it was a sign and foreshowing that our Lady had sent the Swallow on bord to comfort vs and that we should passe the Cape wherewith they agreed once againe to proue if we could passe it séeing we had such signes and tokens to put vs in good comfort that God would help vs. This being concluded we sung the Letany with Ora pro nobis and gaue many almes with promises of pilgrimages and visitations and such like things which was our dayly worke With that the saylers others began to take courage and to be lustie euery man willinglie doing his office offering rather to lose life and welfare in aduenturing to passe the Cape then with full assurance of their safetie to returne vnto Mosambique we had as then great waues and very bigge water in the sea which left vs not till wee came to the other side of the Cape The 18 of Aprill we fell againe into the wind with as great stormes and foule weather as euer we had before so that we thought verily we should haue bene cast away for that at euerie minute the sea couered our ship with water to lighten her we cast diuers chestes and much Cinamon with other thinges that came first to hand ouer bord wherewith euerie man made account to die and began to confesse themselues and to aske each other forgiuenes thinking without more hope that our last day was come This storme continued in this sort at the least for the space of 24 houres in the mean time great almes were giuen in our shippe to many Virgin Maries and other Saints
with great deuotion promise of other wonderfull things when they came to land at the last God comforted vs and sent vs better weather for that the 19 of Aâ—â—ill the wether began to cleéere vp and therewith we were in better comfort The 20. of Aprill we tooke the hight of the Sunne and found it to be â—6 degrées and againe we saw greene water and some birds which they call Alcatraces and many Sea-wolues which they hold for certain signes of the cape de Bona SperaÌ„za as we thought were hard by the land but yet saw none the same day we had the wind somewhat fuller and were in great hope to passe the Cape so that the men began to be in better comfort by reason of the signes we haue seene All that day we saw greene water till the 22 of Apr. vpon which day twice and in the night following we cast out the Lead and found no ground which is a good signe that wee had passed the Cape called das Agulhas or the cape of needles which lieth vnder 35 degrees and is about 20 miles from the Cape de bona Speranza which lieth vnder 34 degrées a half And because that about this cape Das Agulhas there is ground found at the least 30 or 40 miles from the land we knew wee were past it as also by the colour of the water and the birds which are alwaies found in those countries and the better to assure vs thereof the great high sea left vs that had so long tormented vs and then we found a smoother water much differing from the former so that as theÌ„ we seemed to be come out of hell into Paradice with so great ioy that we thought we were within the sight of some hauen and withall had a good winde though somewhat cold The 23 of Aprill we passed the Cape de Bona Speranza with a great and generall gladnes it being as then 3 months and three dayes after we set sayle from Cochiin not once seeing any land or sand at all but onelie these assured tokens of the said Cape which happened very seldome for that the pilots doe alwaies vse what meanes they can to see the cape and to know the land thereby to know certainlie that they are past it for then their degrees must lessen and there they may as soone make towards Mosambique as to the Iland of S. Helena for although they can well perceiue it by y e water yet is it necessary for them to see the land the better to set their course vnto S. Helena wherein they must alwaies kéepe on the left hand otherwise it were impossible for them to come at it if they leaue that course for if they once passe it they can not come to it again because there bloweth continually but one kind of wind which is South east and thus hauing passed the Cape we got before the wind The 24 of Aprill the Pilot willed vs to giue the Bona viagen vnto the Cape de Bona Speranza according to the custome with great ioy and gladnes of all that were in the shippe for that as theÌ„ they assure themselues that they sayl to Portingal and not to turne againe into India for so long as they are not past the Cape they are alwaies in doubt and as then we were about 50. miles beyond the Cape The signes and tokens whereby they know themselues certainly to haue passed the Cape are great heapes and péeces of thicke réedes that alwaies thereabouts driue vppon the water at least 15 or â—â— miles from the land as also certaine birds by the Portingals called Feyâ—oins somewhat greater then sea mâ—wâ—s being white full of blacke spots ouer al their bodies very easie to be known from al other birds These are certain signes whereby the Pilotes doe certainly perswade themselues that they are past the Cape and hauing passed it they set their course for S. Helena Northwest Northwest by west The 27 of Apr. we were right in the wind and so continued till the next day and theÌ„ we had a calm being vnder 3â— degrees on Portingal side The â—9 of Apr. wâ— gâ—t before the wind which is the generall wind y t alwaies bloweth in those countries al the whole yere vntill y â— come to the Equinoctial line and is a Southeast wind so y t they may wel let their sayles stand lay them down to slâ—ep for in y e greatest wind y t bloweth there they need not strike their maine yard aboue half the mast The 12 of May in the morning betimes we discouered the IlaÌ„d of S. Helena whereat there was so great ioy in the ship as if we had bene in heauen as then we were about 2 miles from y e land the Iland lying from vs West south west whereunto we sayled so close that with a caliuer shot we might reach vnto the shore being hard by it we sayled about a corner of the land that from vs lay Northwest which hauing compassed wee sayled close by the land West North west the land on that side beeing so high and still that it séemed to be a wall that reached vnto the skyes And in that sort we sayled about a mile and a half and compassed about y e other corner that lay westward from vs which corner béeing compassed we presentlie perceiued the shippes that lay in the road which were those ships that set sayle before vs out of India lying about a small half mile from the foresaid corner close vnder the land so that the land as then lieth South east from them and by reason of the high land the shippes lie there as safe as if they were in a hauen for they may well heare the wind whistle on the top of their maine yards but lower it can not come and they lie so close vnder the land that they may almost cast a stone vpon the shore There is good ground there at 25 and 30 fadomes deep but if they chance to put further out or to passe beyond it they must goe forward for they can get no more vnto y e land and for this cause we kept so close to the shore that the height of the laÌ„d took the wind froÌ„ vs the ship wold not steer without wind so that it draue vpon the land wherby our horesprit touched y e shore therwith we thought that shippe goods had all beene cast away but by reason of the great depth being 1â— fadomes water and with the help of the Boats and men off the other ships that came vnto vs we put off from the land without any hurt and by those Boates wee were brought to a place wher the other ships lay at Anker which is right against a valley that lyeth betwéene two high hilles wherein there standeth a little Church called Saint Helena There we found fiue shippes which were the ship that came from Malacca and the S. Mary that had béene there about 15. daies
which came both together to the Cape de Bona Speranza the S. Anthonie and the S. Christopher being Admiral that had arriued there â—0 daies before and the Conception which came thether but the day before vs so that ther wanted none of the Fléet but the S. Thomas and by the signes and tokens that we and the other ships had séene at Sea we presumed it to be lost as after we vnderstoode for it was neuer seene after for the other shippes had seene Mastes Deales Fattes Chestes many dead men that had bound themselues vpon boards with a thousand other such like signs Our Admiral likewise had béene in great danger of casting away for although it was a new ship this the first Viage it had made yet it was so eaten with Wormes that it had at the least 20 handfuls déepe of water within it and at the Cape was forced to throw halfe the goods ouer bord into the Sea and were constrained continually to Pumpe with two Pumpes both night and day and neuer holde still and being before the Iland of S. Helena had ther also sunke to the ground if the other ships had noâ— holpen her The rest of the shippes coulde likewise tell what dangers and miseries they had indured About thrée Monthes before our arriuall at S. Helena there had béene a ship which the yere before set out of Ormus with the goods men that remained in the S. Saluador that had béene saued by the Portingal armie vpon the coast of Abex and brought vnto Ormus as in an other place I haue declared That ship had wintered in Mosambique and had passed verie soone by the Cape so sayled without any companie vnto Portingall hauing left some of her sicke men in the Iland as the maner is which the next ships that came thether must take into them These gaue vs intelligence that about foure monthes before our arriuall there had béene an English ship at the Iland of Saint Helena which had sayled through the Straights of Magelâ—anaes and through the south seas from thence to the Ilands of Phillippinas and had passed through the Straights of Sunda that lyeth beyond Malacca betwéene the Ilands of Sumatra and Iaua in the which way she had taken a shippe of China such as they call Iunckos laden with Siluer and Golde and all kind of Silkes and that shee sent a letter with a small present to the Bishop of Malacca telling him that shee sent him that of friendship meaning to come her selfe and visite him Out of that ship of China they tooke a Portingall Pilot so passed the Cape de Bona Speranza and came to the Iland of Saint Helena where they tooke in fresh water and other necessaries and beate downe the Alter and the Crosse that stoode in the Church and left behind them a Ketle and a Sword which the Portingales at our arriual found there yet could they not conceiue or thinke what that might meane Some thought it was left there for a signe to some other ships of his companie but euerie man may thinke what he will thereof In the ship of Malacca came for Factor of the Pepper one Gerrit van Afhuysen borne in Antwarpe and dwelling in Lisbone who had sayled in the same ship from Lisbone about two yeares before for that they staied in Malacca at the least fourtéene Monthes by reason of the warres and troubles that were in that countrie vntill Malacca was relieued as I saide before whereby they had passed great miserie and béene at great charges And because it is a very vnwholesome countrie together with y e constraint of lying there so long of 200. men that at the first sayled from Lisbone in the ship there were but 18. or 20. left aliue and all the rest dyed so that they were enforced to take in other vnskilfull men in Malacca to bring the shippe home This Gerrard van Afhuysen being of mine acquaintance and my good friend before my departure out of Portingall for India maruelled and ioyed much to find me there little thinking that we should méete in so strange a place and there we discoursed of our trauels past And of him among diuers other things I learned many true instructions as well of Malacca as of the countries and Ilands lying about it both for their manner of dealing in trade of Marchandise as in other memorable things By the pictures following you may sée the true description of the Iland of Saint Helena and of the thrée sides therof as we passed by it and as we sayled about it to the road as also of the Iland of Ascention The description of which two Ilands you may here perceiue and learne as I my selfe could marke the same The 94. Chapter A briefe description of the Iland Saint Helena SANCTA HELENA THe Iland of Saint Helena is so named because the Portingales discouered it vppon Saint Helens day which is the twentie one of May. It is in compasse sixe miles little more or lesse and lyeth vnder sixtéene degrées and a quarter on the South side of the Equinoctall 550. Spanish miles from the Cape de Bona Speranza and from the coast called Angola or Ethiopia 350. miles from Brasilia 510. miles These are the two néerest lands adioyning to it It is a verie high and hillie countrie so that it commonly reacheth vnto the cloudes the countrie of it selfe is verie ashie and drie also all the trees that are therein whereof there are great store grow of themselues in the woodes are little worth but only to burne for it hath no special substance but sheweth as if it were halfe consumed so that it should seeme that some mines of Brimstone hath in times past béene in that Iland as commonly all the Ilands are all much subiect to the same for that in some places thereof they find Sulphur and Brimstone When the Portingales first discouered it there was not any beasts nor fruite at all within the Iland but onely great store of fresh water which is excellent good and falleth downe from the mountaines and so runneth in great abundance into the Valley where the Church standeth and from thence by small chanels into the Sea where the Portingales fill their vessels full of fresh water and wash their clothes so that it is a great benefit for them and a pleasant sight to behold how cleare in how many streames the water runneth downe into the valley which may bee thought a myracle considering the drinesse of the country together with the stonie Rockes and hilles therein The Portingales haue by little and little brought many beastes into it and in the valleyes planted al sorts of fruites which haue growne there in so great abundance that it is almost incredible For it is so full of Goates Buckes wild Hogges Hennes Partridges and Doues by thousands so that any man that will may hunt and take them ther is alwaies plentie and sufficient although there came as many shippes more
all places There is likewise great store of Sugar which is much esteemed and also caryed into all countries of Christendome which causeth great trafficke vnto those Ilands as well by Spaniardes and Portingalles as other nations and is the common staple for the shippes that sayle out of Spayne into the West Indies and refreshe themselues there and also take in such Wyne as they commonly vse to carry with them to the West Indies They haue also great abundance of Cattle and Cammelles and are now inhabited by Spanyardes hauing yet therein many of the naturall borne inhabitantes which they doe call Guanchas who by reason of their long conuersation with the Spaniardes doe wholly vse their customes and manner of apparell The chiefe of these Islands is great Canaria where there is a Bishop and the inquisition with the tribunal Royall and it hath the gouernment ouer all the other Islandes that are called the Canaries The 6. of Iulie wee were vnder 32. degrees where wee lost the generall North-East wind and had a calme and saw much of the hearbe called Sargasso which couered all the sea The 〈◊〉 of the same month we got againe before the wind being vnder 34. degrees and then we saw no more of the hearbe Sargasso but a faire cleare sea The eighteenth of Iulie wee were vnder 39. degrees vnder which height lieth the Iland called de Coruo and the Island of Tercera and also the riuer of Lisbone all these dayes we had many calmes The next day wee had a West winde being a right fore-wind and saw many flying fishes almost as great as Haddockes that flew thrée or foure fadomes high aboue the water The 22. of Iuly the winde continuing about noone we saw the Ilands called Flores and de Coruo which lie one close to the other from thence to the Island of Tercera Eastward are 70. miles At that time wee began to haue many sick men that is to say some sicke in their eyes and some in their breaste and bellies by reason of the long voiage and because their victuals began to loose the taste sauour and many wanted meat whereby diuers of them through want were compelled to seeth rice with salt water so that some of them died which many times were found vnder the fore deck that had laine â—ead two or three dayes no man knowing it which was a pittifull sight to behold considering the miserie they indured aboard those ships There died in our ship from India vnto that place of slaues and others to the number of 24. persons The same day about Euening being hy the Islandes of Flores and Coruo wee perceiued thrée shippes that made towards vs which came from vnder the land which put vs in great feare for they came close by our Admiral shot diuers times at him at another ship of our companie whereby wee perceiued them to be English men for they bare an English flagge vpon their maine tops but none of them shewed to be aboue 60. tunnes in greatnes About Euening they followed after vs and all night bore lanternes with Candles buâ—ning in them at their sternes although the Moone shined The same night passing hard by the Island of Fayarl the next day being betwéene the Island of S. George that lay on our right hand and the small Island called Câ—oâ—o on our left hand we esspied the thrée English ships still following vs that tooke counsell together whereof one sayled backwards thinking that some other ship had come after vs without company for a small time was out of sight but it was not long before it came againe to the other two wherewith they tooke counsell came all thrée together against our shippe because we lay in the lée of all our ships and had the Island of S. George on the one side in steede of a sconce thinking to deale so with vs that in the end we should be constrained to runne vppon the shore whereof wee wanted not much and in that manner with their flagges openly displayed came lustily towardes vs sounding their Trumpets and sayled at the least three times about vs beating vs with Musket and Caliuer and some great péeces and did vs hurt in the body of our shippe but spoyled all our sayles and ropes and to conclude we were so plagued by them that no man durst put forth his head and when wee shot off a peece we had at the least an houres worke to lade it againe whereby wee had so great a noise and crie in the ship as if we had all bin cast away whereat the English men themselues beganne to mocke vs and with a thousand iesting words called vnto vs. In the meane time the other shippes hoised all their sailes did the best they could to saile to the Island of Tercera not looking once behinde them to help vs doubting they should come too late thether not caring for vs but thinking themselues to haue done sufficiently so they saued their own stakes whereby it may easily be séene what company they kéepe one with the other what order is among them In the end the English men perceiuing small aduantage against vs little knowing in what case and feare we were as also because we were not far froÌ„ Tercera left vs which made vs not a litle to reioyce as thinking our selues to be risen from death to life although we were not well assured neither yet voide of feare till we lay in the road before Tercera vnder the safetie of the Portingales fort that we might get thether in good time we made all the sailes we could on the other side we were in great doubt because wee knew not what they did in the Island nor whether they were our friendes or enemies and wee doubted so much the more because wee found no men of war nor any Caruels of aduise froÌ„ Portingal as we made our accounts to doe that might conuay vs from thence or giue vs aduise as in that countrie ordinarilie they vse to do because the English men had bin so victorious in those parts it made vs suspect that it went not well with Spaine they of the Iland of Tercera were in no lesse feare then we for that séeing our deer they thought vs to be Englishmen that we came to ouer run the Iland because the 3. English meÌ„ had bouÌ„d vp their flags came in company with vs for the which cause the Iland sent out 2. Caruels that lay there with aduise from the King for the Indian ships that should come thither Those Caruels came to view vs and perceiuing what wee were made after vs wherevppon the English ships left vs made towardes them because the Caruels thought them to be friends and shunned them not as supposing them to be of our company but we shot foure or fiue times and made signes vnto them that they should make towards the Island which they presently did The English men perceiuing that did put forwards into
the sea and so the Caruels borded vs telling vs that the men of the Island were all in armes as hauing receiued aduise from Portingall that Sir Francis Drake was in a readines and would come vnto those Islands They likewise brought vs newes of the ouerthrow of the Spanish Fléet before England and that the English men had béene before the gates of Lisbone wherupon the king gaue vs commandement that we should put into the Island of Tercera and there lie vnder the safetie of the Castle vntill we receiued further aduise what wee should doe or whether we should saile for that they thought it too dangerous for vs to goe to Liâ—bone Those newes put our fleet in great feare and made vs looke vppon each other not knowing what to say as being daÌ„gerous for them to put into the road because it lieth open to the sea so that the Indian ships although they had expresse commandement from the king yet they durst not anker there but only vsed to come thether and to lauere to and fro sending their boates on land to fetch such necessaries as they wanted without ankering but being by necessity coÌ„pelled thereunto as also by the kinges commandement and for that wee vnderstood the Earle of Cumberland not to bee farre from those Islands with certaine ships of war we made necessitie a vertue and entring the rode ankered close vnder the Castle staying for aduise and order from the king to performe our voyage it being then the 24. of July S. Iames day We were in al 6 ships that is 5. from East Indies one from Malacca lay in the rode before the Towne of Angra from whence we presently sent three or foure Caruels into Portingal with aduise vnto the king of our ariuall There we lay in great daunger and much feare for that when the month of August commeth it is very dangerous lying before that Iland for as then it beginneth to storme The shippes are there safe from all windes sauing onely from the South and Southeast windes for when they blow they lie in a thousand dangers specially the east IndiaÌ„ ships which are very heauily laden and so full that they are almost readie to sinke so that they can hardly be stéered The fourth of August in the night we had a South winde out of the sea wherewith it began so to storme that all the ships were in great danger to be cast away and to run vpon the shore so that they were in great feare and shot off their péeces to call for help The officers and most of the sailers were on land none but pugs and slaues being in the ships for it is a common custome with the Portingales that wheresoeuer they anker presently they goe all on land and let the shippe lie with a boy or two in it All the bels in the Towne were hereupon rung and there was such a noyse and crie in euerie place that one could not heare the other speak for those that were on land by reason of the foule weather could not get aboard and they in the Shippe could not come to land Our Shippe the Santa Crus was in great danger thinking verily that it shuld haue run vpon the sands but God holy them The ship that came from Malacca brake her Cables and had not men enough aboard the shippe nor any that could tell how to cast forth another anker so that in the end they cut their mastes droue vpon the Cliffes where it stayed and brake in péeces and presently sunke vnder the water to the vpper Dorlope and with that the winde came North West wherewith the storme ceased and the water became calme If that had not béene al the ships had followed the same course for that some of them were at the point to cut their Masts and Cables to saue their liues but God would not haue it so In that ship of Malacca were lost many rich and costly Marchandises for these ships are ordinarily as rich as anie ships that come from India as being full of all the rich wares of China Mâ—luco Laua and all those countries so that it was great pittie to sée what costly thinges as Silkes Damaskes clothes of gold and siluer such like wares fleeted vpon the sea and were torne in péeces There was much goods saued that lay in the vpper part of the ship and also by duckers as pepper Nutmegs and Cloues but most of it was lost and that which was saued was in a manner spoyled and little worth which presently by the kinges officers in the Island was seased vpon and to the Farmers vses shut vp in the Alsandega or Custome house for the Kinges custome not once regarding the poore men nor their long and dangerous Voiage that had continued the space of three yeares with so great miserie and trouble by them indured in Malacca as in another place I haue alreadie shewed so that they could not obtaine so much fauour of the king nor of his officers that of the goods that were saued and brought to land they might haue some part although they oâ—fered to put in suerties for so much as the custome might amount vnto or els to leaue as much goods in the officers hands as would satisfie them and although they made daily and pittifull complaintes that they had not where with to liue and that they desired vppon their owne aduentures to fraight certaine shippes or Caruels at their owne charge and to put in good suerties to deliuer the goods in the Custome house of Lisbone yet could they not obtaine their requests but were answered that the king for the assurance of his custome and of all the goods would send an Armado by sea to fetch the goods which fetching continued for the space of two yeares and a halfe and yet nothing was done for there came no Armado In the meane time the poore saylers consumed all that they had and desperately cursed both themselues the king and all his officers yet in the end by great and importunate sute of the Farmers of the pepper euery maÌ„ had licence to lade his goods in what ship hee would after it had laine there for the space of two yeares and a halfe putting in suerties to deliuer the goods in the custome house of Lisbone where they must pay the halfe more of the same goods for custome to the King without any respect of their hard fortune and great miserie during their long and dangerous Voyage and he that will be dispatched in the Custome house there must sée the officers otherwise it is most commonly three or foure monthes before the goods are deliuered vnto the owners and the best thinges or any fine deuise that the Marchants for their own vses bring out of India if the officers like theÌ„ they must haue them yet they will promise to pay for them but they set no day when so that the poore Marchants are forced to giue them rest and wel contented that
and desert as it sheweth and nothing but harde stones and rockes In good ground their Vines will not grow but onely in the wild stony places for that cause they are much esteemed The good groundes and plaine fieldes which in some places are verie many specially by villa da Prava are sowed with corne and woad they haue so much corne that they neede not bring any from other places although that besides their inhabitants natural borne Islanders They haue continually with them 14. companies of Spaniards which are all fed and nourished by the corne that groweth in the countrey vnlesse there chance to come a hard vnfruitfull yeare as oftentimes it doth for then they are forced to helpe themselues with forraine corne and that specially because of the soldiers that lie in the Iland yet it is strange that the corne and all other things in the Iland continue not aboue one yeare and that which is kept aboue a yeare is nought and nothing worth And therefore to keepe their corne longer then a yeare they are forced to bury it in the earth for the space of foure or fiue monthes together to the which end euery townseman hath his pit at one ende of the towne in the common high way which is appointed for the purpose and euery man setteth his marke vpon his pitte stone the Corne is but lightly buried in the earth the holes within are rounde and the toppes thereof so wide that a man may créep in wherunto there is a stone purposely made to couer it which shutteth it vppe very close Some of the pittes are so great as that they may holde two or thrée lastes of corne some greater some smaller as euery maÌ„ hath his prouision and as soone as the corne is reaped and fanned which is in Iuly euery man putteth his corne into those pittes laying straw vnder and round about it then they fill it ful or but half ful according as their quaÌ„titie is and so stoppe it vppe with the stone which they couer with earth so let it stande vntill Christmas when euery man that will fetch home his corne some let it ly longer and fetch it by little and little as they vse it but the corne is as good when they take it out as it was at thâ— first houre that they put it in and although that Cartes horses and men do commonly passe ouer it and also that the raine rayneth vppon it yet there entreth not any droppe of rayne or moysture into it and if the corne were not buried in that manner it woulde not continue good aboue foure monthes together but would bee spoyled and when it hath béene thus for a long time buried in the earth it will continue the whole yeare through and then they keep it in chestes or make a thing of mattes like a coope to preserue it in not once stirring or mouing it and so it continueth very good The greatest commoditie they haue in the land and that serueth their turnes best is their oxen I belieue they are the greatest fayrest y t are to be found in al Christendom wâ— vnmeasurable great and long horns Euerie Oxe hath his seuerall name like men and although there bee a thousande of them in a hearde and that one of them be called by his name hee presently commeth forth vnto his mayster that calleth him The land is verie high and as it séemeth hollow for that as they passe ouer a hill of stone the grounde soundeth vnder them as if it were a Seller so that it séemeth in diuers places to haue holes vnder the earth whereby it is much subiect to earthquakes as also all the other Ilandes are for there it is a common thing and all those Ilandes for the most part haue had mynes of brimstone for that in many places of Tercera and Saint Michael the smoke and sauour of Brimstone doeth still issue forth of the ground and the Countrey rounde about is all sindged and burnt Also there are places wherein there are fountaines and welles the water whereof is so hotte that it will boyle an egge as well as if it hung ouer a fire In the Iland of Tercera about three miles from Angra there is a fountayne in a place called Gualua which hath a propertie that all the woode which falleth into it by length of time conuerteth into stone as I my selfe by experience haue tryed In the same fountayne by the roote of a tree whereof the one halfe runneth vnder that water and is turned into as harde stone as if it were steele and the other parte of the roote which the water toucheth not is still woode and roote as it should bee The Iland hath great store and excellent kindes of woode specially Cedar trees which grow there in so great numbers that they make scutes Cartes and other grosse workes thereof and is the commonest woode that they vse to burne in those Countries whereby it is the wood that with them is least esteemed by reason of the great quantitie thereof There is another kinde of wood called Sanguâ—nlâ—o and is very fayre of a redde colour and another sorte that they call white woode being of it selfe as whyte as Chalke other that is pâ—râ—â—ite yellow and all naturall without any dying and therefore there are diuers good workemen in Tercera that are skilfull in Ioyners ocupation make many fine peeces of worke as Deskes Cubbordes Chestes and other such like thinges whereof many are caried into Portingall and much esteemed there as well for the beautie of the woode as for the workemanshippe and specially the Spanish Fleete which ordinarily refresh themselues in that Iland do carry much of it from thence for it is the best and finest that is made in all Spayne and Portingall although it be not comparable to the Seskes and fine workemanshippe of Nurenbergh and those countries but for wood it excelleth all other countries for that they haue in the Spanish Fleete besides their owne kindes of woodes at the least a thousande sortes of Woode of all colours that man can imagine or deuise and so fayre that more fayrer can not be paynted There is a certaine kinde of Woode in the Islande Pico situate and lying twelue miles from Tercera called Teâ—xo a most excellent and princely wood and therfore it is forbidden to be cut but only for the Kings owne vse or for his Officers The wood is as hard as Iron and hath a colour within as if it were wrought like red Chamlet with the same water and the older it is and the more vsed the fairer it is of colour so that it is worthie to be estéemed as in trueth it is All those Ilands are inhabited by Portingals but since the troubles in Portingall there haue bene diuers Spanish soldiers sent thether and a Spanish Gouernor that kéep all the Forts and Castles in their possessions although the Portingales are put to no charges nor yet hardly
vsed by them but are rather kept short so that not one soldier dareth goe out of the towne without licence and therefore men may quyetlie trauell throughout the Iland both day and night without any trouble Likewise they will not suffer any stranger to trauel to sée the Country and this order was not brought vp by the Spaniards but by the Portingals themselues before their troubles for they would neuer permit it and which is more all strangers that came thether were vsually appointed a certain street wherin they should sel their wares and might not goe out of that stréet Now it is not so straightlie looked vnto but they may goe in all places of the towne within the Iland but not about it to view the coast which notwithstanding was graunted vnto vs by the Gouernor himself who lent vs his horses to ryde about and gaue vs leaue to sée all the fortes which at this time is not permitted to the naturall borne Ilanders neyther are they so much credited We road twice about the Iland which he granted vs leaue to doe by meanes of certaine particular friendship we had with him neyther could the Portingales hinder vs therein because wee were in the Kinges seruice as Factors for the Kinges Pepper and for that they held and accounted vs as naturall borne Portingalles for the Gouernor would willinglie haue had mee to haue drawne a plot of the whole Iland that hee might haue sent it to the King wherein I excused my self yet I made him the town with the Hauen coming in and Fortes of Angra which he sent vnto the King the like whereof you may in this Booke behold for the which the Gouernor was greatlie affected vnto mee and shewed mee much friendshippe Wee had in our Lodging a French Marchant and a Scot that willinglie would haue gone with vs to sée the Iland but could not be suffered for the Portingalles thinke that they would take the proportion thereof and so seeke to defeate them of their right But returning to our matter the Ilandes are verie good and holesome ayre and the diseases that are most common in those Countries though not verie plentiful but only here there one are one sicknes called O Ax that is a kind of bad ayre y t taketh them maketh them altogether lame or half lame of their limmes or of some one limme and an other sicknes that is called O Sange that is a certaine blood that hastelie cometh vppon a man as a swelling in the eyes or other places of the face or of the bodie is as red as blood for as they say it is nothing els but méere blood these are two diseases like the plague and are commonest sicknesses in those Countries which grow by reason of the great windines of the Ilandes that are subiect to all stormes and foule weathers and are vnreasonable moyst which is one of the principall causes of these diseases for the windes are there so strong and dangerous that they consume both the Iron and the Steele of their houses and bring them into powder for I haue seene Iron grates in the Kings Custome house as thicke as a mans arme and the windowes of hard free stone which were so consumed by the wind that the Iron in some places was become as thynne as a straw and the stone in like sort and therefore in those Countries they vse to make their Rooffes and painthouses of stones which they digge in the water out of sandes vppon the Sea coast of those Illandes whereon the wind hath not so great a power to consume it and yet that Custome house had not bene made aboue 6 or 7 yeares before at the most In this Iland besides the two townes there are diuers great villages as S. Sebastians S. Barboran Altares Gualua Villa noua with manie other parishes and hamlets so that for the most part it is built and inhabited sauing onely the places that are wild and full of woods which can hardlie bee trauelled much lesse inhabited Their most traffique is as I said before the wood that groweth in those countries I meane for such as deale in marchandise and the workemen that make it but the rest waight for the fleets that come and goe to and from the Spanish and Portingall Indies from Brasilia Cabo Verde and Guinea all which countries doe commonly come vnto Tercera to refresh themselues as lying very fitly for that purpose so that all the inhabitants doe thereby richlie maintaine themselues and sell at their wares as well handie works as victuals vnto those shippes and all the Ilandes round about doe as then come vnto Tercera with their wares to sell it there For the which cause the English men and other strangers keepe continually about those Ilandes béeing assured that all shippes for want of refreshing must of force put into those Ilandes although at this time manie shippes doe auoid those Ilandes to the great discommoditie of the Ilands and the shippes From Tercera Southeast about 27. or 28. miles lyeth the Iland of S. Michael which is about 20 myles long and is likewise full of Townes and Villages inhabited by Portingalles for ayre and all other thinges like vnto Tercera The chief Towne is called Punta del Gada where there is great traffique of English Scots and French men onlie as in Tercera because of the woad which is more abundant in that Ilande then in all the rest of them for that euerie yeare there is made aboue two hundreth thousand Quintalles of Woad It hath likewise great abundance of Corne so that they helpe to victuall all the Ilandes that are round about them It hath neither Hauens nor Riuers but onlie the broad sea and haue lesse safegard and defence then those which are of Tercera but there they ly not vnder the commandement of any Fort so that many set sayle with all the windes and put to sea which in the road of Tercera they may not doe and therefore the strangers shippes had rather sayle to S. Michaels for there they can not be constrayned to doe anie thing but what they will themselues to doe There is also a company of Spaniards in a Castle that standeth by the Towne of Punta del Gada which is made by the Spaniards for the defence and maintenance of the same towne From the Iland of S. Michaels Southwardes twelue myles lyeth the Island Santa Maria which is about ten or twelue myles compasse and hath no traffique but onlie of pot earth which the other Ilands fetch from thence It hath no Woad but is full of all victualles like Tercera and inhabited by the Portingales There are no Spaniardes in it because it is a stonie Countrie like Tercera and hard to bord whereby the inhabitantes themselues are sufficient and able enough to defend it While I remained in Tercera the Earle of Comberland came thether to take in fresh water and some other victuals but the inhabitants would not suffer him to haue it but
Fryday the Cardinall going to Masse all the Captaines and Commanders made so great intreaty for him that in the end they got his pardon This I thought good to note that men might vnderstand the bloodie and honest mindes of the Spaniardes when they haue men vnder their subiection The same two English shippes which followed the Spanish Admirall till he had got vnder the Fort of Tercera as I said before put into the sea where they met with an other Spanish ship béeing of the same Fléet that had likewise bene scatered by the storme and was onlie missing for the rest lay in the road this small shippe the Englishmen tooke and sent all the men on shore not hurting any of them but if they had knowne what had beene done vnto the foresaid English captiues I beleeue they would soone haue reuenged themselues as afterwards manie an innocent soule payed for it This ship thus taken by the English men was the same that was kept and coÌ„fiscated in the Iland of Tercera by the English men that got out of the Iland in a fisher boate as I sayd before and was sold vnto the Spaniardes that as then came from the Indies wherewith they sayled to S. Lucas where it was also arrested by the Duke and appointed to goe in company to fetch the siluer in Tercera because it was a shippe that sayled well but among the spaniardes fleet it was the meanest of the company By this meanes it was taken from the Spaniards and caryed into England and the owners had it againe when they least thought of it The 19 of Marche the aforesaid shippes being 19 in nuÌ„ber set sayle hauing laden the Kings siluer and receiued in Aluaro Flores de Quiniones with his company and good prouision of necessaries munition and soldiers that were fullie resolued as they made shewe to fight valiantly to the last man before they would yeeld or lose their riches and although they set their course for S. Lucas the wind draue them vnto Lisbon which as it seemed was willing by his force to helpe them and to bring them thether in safetie although Aluaro de Flores hoth against the wind and weather would perforce haue sayled to Saint Lucas but being constrained by the wind and importunitie of the Saylers that protested they would require their losses and damages of him he was content to sayle to Lisbone from whence the Siluer was by land carried into Siuilia At Cape Saint Vincent there lay a Fleete of twentie English shippes to watch for the Armada so that if they had put into Saint Lucas they had fallen right into their handes which if the wind had serued they had done And therefore they may say that the wind had lent them a happie Viage for if the Englishmen had met with them they had surely beene in great danger and possibly but few of them had esâ—â—ped by reason of the feare wherewith they were possessed because fortune or rather God â—as wholly against them Which is a sufficient cause to make y e Spaniards out of hart to the contrarie to giue the Englishmen more courage and to make them bolder for that they are victorious stout and valiant and seeing al their enterprises doe take so good effect that thereby they are become Lordes and masters of the Sea and neede care for no man as it well appeareth by this briefe discourse In the month of March 15â—â— There was a blasing Starre with a tayle seene in 〈◊〉 that continued foure nights together stretching the taile towards the South In the Month of May a Caruel of Fayâ— arriued at Tercera in the Hauen or Roade of Angra laden with Oxen sheepe Hennes and all other kinds of victuals and full of people which by a storme had broken her Ruther whereby the Sea cast her about and therewith shee sunke and in her were drowned three children and a Frier Franciscan the rest of the men saued themselues by swimming and by helpe from the shore but all the Cattle and Hennes came drowned to land the Frier was buried with a great procession and solemnitie esteeming him for a Saint because hee was taken vp dead with his Booke between his armes for the which cause euery man came to looke on him as a myracle giuing gret offerings to say Masses for his soule The first of August the Gouernour of Tercera reeceiued aduise out of Portingall and Spaine that two yeares before the date of 〈…〉 there were sayled out of England 〈◊〉 great shippes wel apointed with full resolution to take their fourme seuen of them into the Portingall Indies and the other fiue to Maâ— of the which fiue two were cast away in passing the Straightes of Magellaneâ— and three sayled to Malacâ—â— but what they had done there was as then not knowne The other seuen passed the Cape de Bona Speranza and arriued in India where they put into the coast of Malabar and there tooke sixe Foistes of the Malabares but let them goe againe and two Turkish Gallies that came out of the Straightes of Mecca or the redde Sea to whome likewise they did no hurt And there they laded their shippes with Spices and returned backe againe on their way but where or in what place they had laden it was not certainely knowne sauing onely that thus much was written by the Gouernour of India and sent ouer land to Venice and from thence to Madâ— The seuenth of August a Nauie of English shippes was seene before Tercera being 20. in number and fiue of them the Quéenes shippes their Generall was one Martin Furbuâ—her as wee after had intelligence They came purposely to watch for the Fleet of the Spanish Indies and for the Indian shippes and the ships of the countries in the West which put the Ilanders in great feare specially those of Fayâ—el for that the Englishmen sent a Trumpet to the Gouernour to aske certaine wine flesh and other victuals for their mony and good friendship They of Fayael did not onely refuse to giue eare vnto them but with a shot killed their messenger or Trumpeter which the Englishmen tooke in euill part sending them word that they were best to looke to themselues stand vppon their gard for they ment to come and visite them whether they would or no. The Gouernor made them answere that he was there in the behalfe of his Maiestie of Spaine and that he would doe his best to keepe them out as he was bound but nothing was done althogh they of Fayael were in no litle feare sending to Tercera for aide from whence they had certaine Barkes with poulder and munition for warre with some Bisket and other necessarie prouision The 3. of August we receiued very certaine newes out of Portingal that ther were 80. ships put out of y e Câ—â—â—nlâ—o laden with victuals Munition money and Souldiers to goe for Britaine to aide the Catholicks and Leaguers of Fraunce against the King of Nauarre At the same time two Netherland Hulkes comming
wee receiue further aduise and order from his Maiestie of Spaine All this being thus past the Farmers of pepper and other Marchants that had their goods in Tercera which were taken out of the lost ship that came from Malacca seeing that the hope of any Armada or any ships in the kinges behalfe to be sent to fetch it was all in daine they made request vnto his Maiestie that he would grant them licence euery mâ—n particularly to ship his goods in what ship he would at his owne aduenture which in the end after long sute was granted vpon condition that euery man should put in suerties to deliuer the goods in the custome house at Liâ—bone to the end the king might be paâ—ed his custome as also that the goods that should bee deliuered vnto them in Tercera should all bee registred wherevpon the Farmers of pepper with other Marchants agreed with a Flushinger to fetch al the Cloues Nutmegs Mace and other spices and goods that belonged vnto them the Pepper onely excepted which as then the King would not graunt to lade The same shippe arriued in Tercera about the last of Nouember and because it was some what dangerous being the latter end of the yeare wee laded her with all the speed we could for as then the coast was cleare of Englishmen To bee short this Flushinger being laden with most part of the goods sauing the Pepper that was left behind we set saile for Liâ—bone passing some small stormes not once meeting with any ship but onely vppon the coast where wee saw ten Hollanders that fayled with corne towards 〈◊〉 and other places in Italie and so by Gods helpe vpon the second of Ianuarie Anno â—5â—â— we arriued in the riuer of Liâ—bone being nine yeares after my departure from thence and there I stayed till the mouth of Iulie to dispatch such things as I had to doe and vpon the seuenteenth of the same month I went to Sentinial where certaine Hollanders lay with whom I went for 〈◊〉 The 2â— of Julie wee set saile being in all twelue ships and because we had a contrarie winde we put out higher into the sea The 2â— of the same month wee had a lasting storme whereby wee ranne against another ship being both in a hundred dangers to bee sunke for we were within a spanne of touching one another but God holp vs and wee parted from each other which almost séemed impossible for that the bore sprite of the ship that came against vs strake vpon our Fankyard and there with brake in peeces and presently thereupon his Fouke-maste fell ouer borde whereby hee was forced to leaue the fléete Another also of our companie had a leake so that he made towardes the coast againe where to saue the men hee ran the ship on shore as afterwards we vnderstood and so we remained but ten in companie The 1. of August being 90. miles in the sea because the wind held contrarie so that we could not keepe our right course we espyed three strange shippes but were not long before we lost the sight of them againe The 4. of August there came three other shippes among our fléete which we perceiued to bee Biscaines whereupon wee made towardes them and shot certaine peeces at them and so they left vs. The 16. of August the winde being yet contrarie and because wee were about 15. passengers aborde our shippe our victuailes specially our drinke beganne to faile so that wee were constrained to keepe an order and to stint euery man to his portion being as then 120. miles from Heâ—ssant inwardes in the sea vnder 46. degrees which is called the half sea The 18. we had a storme whereby three of our fleet were left behind because they could not follow vs. The 24. of August we cast out the lead and found ground wherewith wee were all glad for it was the entrance into the channel betweene England and Fraunce The â—â— of August being in the channel there came two small English shippes to view our floete but presently put in againe to the coast of England The â—â— we descried land being loofeward from vs which was Goutsteâ— and Dâ—rtmouth The next day we passed by the Isle of Wight sayling alonge the coast The 30 of August we put into the head betwene Douer and Calleys where there laye one of the Queenes ships but she hoised anker and sailed to the coast of England without lookinge after vs so wee set fower men on shore and then we had a scant winde wherwith wee entred into the North sea not seeing any bodie The 1 of September being clowdie we had a storme out of the northwest wherby we could not descerne land but in the euening we met with two shippes that came out of the East countries which told vs they had seene land saying it was the Terel willing vs to follow them and so we discouered lande being the Vlie but wee thinking it to bee the Teâ—ell would no longer follow the other ships but put so neare vnto it that wee were in great danger and then we perceiued that we had deceiued our selues and saw the other ships to take another course towards the Terell but we had the wind so scant and were fallen so low that wee could hardly gette from the shore and withall we had a sodaine storme wherewith our Fouke maste brake our maine maste being alreadie crackt wherevppon wee were fully determined to anker there and stand vpon good comfort and hope in God and sodainely the wind came better so that with great paine and labour about Sunne setting wee entred the mouth of the Terel without any Pylot for that by reason of the great winde they durst not come out so that to conclude we got in and there with thankes giuen vnto God we ankered In the morning being the seconde of September our Gunner thinking to charge the Peeces and for ioy to shoote them off before the towne by fortune a ladle full of powder tooke fire and with the force thereof strake off all his right hande and burnt him in many places of his bodie wherewith our ioy was wholly quailed and abated The third of September wee ariued in Enchuisen where I founde my mother brother and sister all liuing and in good health it being twelue yeares nine monethes and a halfe after my departure from thence For the which God Almighty with his sonne Christ Jesus our Sauior be praised and blessed to whom belongeth al power honor and glorie now and for euermore Amen The end of the first booke THE SECOND BOOKE The true and perfect description of the whole coast of Guinea Manicongo Angola Monomotapa and right ouer against them the Cape of S. Augustin in Brasilia with the compasse of the whole Ocean Seas together with the Ilands as S. Thomas S. Helena the Ascention with all their hauens channels depths shallows sands grounds Together also with diuers strange voyages made by the Hollanders also the description of the
to saluation The country is very hot and intemperate for our countrey people specially theâ—r signe which is very hurtful and breedeth much filth and wormes because it is warme and moyst and mother of â—ll corruption whereby springeth many diseases as burning feuers lâ—skes the bloody thâ—â—nd 〈◊〉 like Sailing along the coast they passed by the Island of 〈◊〉 and then vnder S. Thomaâ— line so called because it was first discouered vppon S. Thomas day the Island is in breadth about threescore Italian miles which is twelue of our miles and is in compasse one hundred and foure score miles which are threescore Dutâ—h miles in forme almost round abounding 〈◊〉 sugar and ginger and all kind of 〈◊〉 alles by reaâ— of the came and moâ—â—nes of the dewes which euery morning â—aâ—r the earth as a most soueraigne thing â—o make such fruit increase and growe â—â— From 〈◊〉 southeast and by â—â—st they came before 〈◊〉 or th◠〈…〉 〈◊〉 before the which riuer 〈…〉 three or foure 〈…〉 daungerous 〈…〉 commeth out 〈…〉 with it which make an extreame rough water the riuer is aboue two miles broade with many trees on both the sides but there they found no man to traffike withall wherevpon they sailed further as the wind serued them sometimes close by the â—hoare and sometime further into the sea there the coast lieth north and south and very shalow so that at the least a mile or a mile and a halfe into the sea there is not aboue twelue or thirteene fadomes water and neerer within halfe a mile of the shore foure fiue sixe or seuen fadoms but a man may go neere vnto the shore bicause it is cleere and faire ground to anker in and commonly in the night time they haue the land winde from off the shore which is called Vento 〈…〉 Terra specially being neere a litle further the coast reacheth somewhat more to the west vntill you come to the cape of Lopes Gonsales where thâ—y stayed certaine days to traffike with thâ— country people but not much because the French men had beene there not long before and spoiled the country and during the time of their staying there they obserued many strange customes and maners of that people First concerning their religion they know neither God nor his laws for some of them pray to the sunne to the moone some is certaine trees or to the earth because thâ—y â—â—â—ad vpon it thinking it a gret offence to â—ort â—hereon they go most commonly in the streetes with a great broade naked knife in their handes they are all both men and women pincked and raced on their bodies in diuers maners and very strong to behold which they doe with a knife racing their skinnes then they take a certaine oyntment mixed with some colour which they put into the races they neuer drinke but first they poure some of the drinke out of the pot they drinke not likewise betweene meales but when they haue eaten their meate they drinke a harty draught of water or of their palme tree wine or else of water sodden with honny In the morning and at any other time of the day when they meete any man or reuerence their ruler or gouernour in token of obedience they fall vppon their knees and beate their handes together where they kneele vntill hee clappeth his handes and sometimes they clap handes together one with the other vttering these words Fino Fino Fino wherewith they giue eache other leaue to departe and by the same they signifie and shewe themselues to be friendes The countrey people are much addicted to steale from straungers but not from their owne nation and the women much giuen to lust and vncleanenesse specially with straungers which among them is no shame There are some men that weare round bores about their neckes made of barkes some great some small not much vnlike the bores which with vs are vsed to bee hanged in Innes and Tauernes to putte money in for the poore but they will by no meanes let anie man see what is in them For the most part both men and women goe bare headed with their haire frizeled and folded yet very shorte some weare hartes that commonly are made of barkes of trees or of Indian nuttes some weare plumes or feathers which are made fast to theyr haire with certaine wyars whereof diuerse sorts were brought me from thence some haue hoales in theyr vpper lippes and also through the middle parte of their nose and in the holes in theyr lippes they thrust peeces of bone as broad as a 〈◊〉 with a stalke that passeth through the hole which being thrust in hangeth both before his nose and his mouth some thrust small hornes or teeth through the holes and so weare them all as they think to beautifie themselues some bore a hole in theyr neather lippes and vsually thrust theyr tongues through it manye of them both men and women weare Rings in their eares whereof some are at the least seuen or eight ounces in weight and some haue stickes thrust through their rings that are fiue or sixe fingers long As touching their apparell they haue nothing but a matte made of the barke oâ— a tree dyed redde which they weare before their priuy members ouer some of theyr mattes they weare Apes or sea cattâ—s skinnes or the skinnes of some wilde beasts in the middle whereof there hangeth a bell such as wee hang about the neckes of cowes or sheepe they paint theyr bodies redde with a colour made of redde wood whereof had some brought me from thence it maketh a fayre colour and is somewhat lighter than bâ—astil many times they make one 〈◊〉 red the other white or yellow with a strike or two of the same colour in their faces Most of them weare a gerole or string about theyr middles of buffles skinne with they hayre vpon it which meeteth not together vpon theyr bellies by the breadth of a hand but hath twoo endes sticking or turning vppe and wyth a verâ— small string are made fast about them and before vppon their bellies they weare a short broad Iron knife with a sheathe of the same mettal those girdles some of them are a handful broad some two some three and some broader besides these kniues they vse throwing kniues with three or foure poyntes being verie dangerous whereof I can shew you The women weare great Iron copper or tinne rings about their legges some one others two and some more many of them weying at the least three or foure poundes waight the peece being almost close about their legges whereby a man can hardlie iudge how they gette them on some men likewise vse them but not manie There are also some women that weare aprons before them made of Bresen whereof I can shew you This shal suffice for the description of their apparrell and beautifying of their bodyes which is verie strange and vnseemely no lesse disorder is there in their houses for they liue like beastes and sleep on
mattes laid vpon the ground Their meat is made of great white rootes taken out of the earth called Iniamos very pleasant of taste like the spanish Baâ—at 〈…〉 or chesnuts They are both rosted and sodden with other rootes and sugar canes and Bananas which are a fruite of a tree like the Indian figges mentioned in this booke long like cucumbers with a tart sweetish but a pleasant taste sometimes likewise they eate both fish flesh which they lay al in one vessell togither and so sit round about it like a company of beastes and neuer drinke but after they haue done eating The gouernours eate alone out of a tin vessel the rest out of a filthie earthen vessel and sit vpon a mat spread vpon the ground The most worke that the women do is to fetch water and fruite and to dresse the meate they will by no meanes ease themselues vppon the ground esteeming that a great offence but haue great vessels made for the same purpose which are sette in the earth They vse no other weapons against their enemies but onely fistes and traues they that dwell by the mine are better appointed with bowes arrowes pikes and targets as long as a man made of barkes of trees and such like things Their Drums are broade aboue and narrow below they haue likewise Cornets of Elophants teeth of all these kindes of instruments and weapons I had some brought from thence Our men being in the Riuer of Gaban came vnto an Iland where they were carried on shore by a Moore that had a great tooth sticking in his vpper lip with a broade knife in his hand and all his body rased and pinked as I saide before where he brought them into a house among the Moores wherein were certaine couerlets made of the rinds or barkes of trees laide vppon the earth where they sate downe not making anie choyse and being sette he clapt them on the shoulders pointing vpwards with his fingers saying in his language Maâ—â—bam they not knowing what hee meant looked vp where they perceiued a blacke man sate vppon the top of a certaine paire of Staires like an image with many chaines of bones and rings hanging about him fearefull to beholde at his feete lay certaine blacke women with Elephants tailes in their handes to beare away the flies and to make winde whereby they vnderstood him to be the Lorde of the Island Wherupon they kneeled vpon one of their knees honouring him according to the custome of the lande clapping their hands vntill the Maâ—â— or Lord made signes vnto them clapping his handes which done they rose vp the Maâ—â— giuing them some of those mars made of barks as a princely present of the which with their linnen I can shew you others of the same ship taking their pinnace entred into another creeke in the same Riuer about two miles higher and there founde a great village lying on the same riuer so neere that they might throw a stone ouer the houses and being within two ships length or the shore they cast anker on the shore there stood at least 1000. Moores men women and children whereof some had pikes kniues and other wepons in thâ—ir hands crying with loude voyces 〈◊〉 and other wordes clapping their handes together which to them was strange both to heare and see Not long after a Moore that by them about foure or fiue miles froÌ„ thence had beene taken into their pinnace stepped into the water and went on shore where being on land the Moores specially the women hong about him in such numbers that he could hardly passe singing and throwing grasse vppon him that our men could neither heare nor see the man neuer ceasing to sing and make a noyse but still continuing dancing leaping and with their kniues cutting off al the grasse meane time there came one out of the village hauing a long staffe in his hand as â—f he were some officer willing them to leaue off theyr noyse driuing thâ—m from the shore but to no end 〈◊〉 reason of the great number of people that were there assembled at the last the Moore that went out of the pinace from our men with one of their Canuyten for so they called their boates came aboord bringing two men and an old woman that was one of the gouernors wiues hauing her breast painted greene and in each hande a branch of a tree shaking both her handes and the two men clapping with their hands giuing to vnderstand as our men conceiued according to their manner that they were welcome with them two of our men went on land whereat the Moores made great ioy with singing dancing leaping and such like pastimes and going vnto the gouernor diuers of them followed specially the women running both before and behinde them leaping and dancing like mad men most of them hauing of the great broade kniues in their handes striking them together in most feareful maner but it was no wonder to see them make so great ioy and shew so much pastime for that it was strange for them to see white men which they neuer had seene for that neuer any had beene or traffiked among them true it is that the Portingales had beene in the same Riuer but not so high for our men were at the least tenne or twelue miles from their shippe within the Riuer and the Riuer before that village called Crementun was about a mile broade hauing another village on the other side and 〈◊〉 with their pinnace before that village they shot off a peece whereat all the people â—ne backe being afraid but came presently againe and as our men went vnto the â—ouernour they led them by the armes singing and shewing great signes of ioy for the comming of these white men into their countrie and being at the Gouernours house which was made of reeds they stayed about halfe an howre before he came out meane time the people that followed theÌ„ neuer left singing making anoyseâ— and when hee came there were three mattes and two stools a great and a little brought with him by certain Moores that followed him All his body and his face was painted white either with chalk or some other painting a sacke of whiting bring likewise brought after him On his head he wore a cappe made of a skin stuck ful of feathers with chains made of bones aboue 100. times about his necke armes and legs being set vpon his stoole there came an old woman that gaue him some of the whiting wherewith hee made as if he had washt his hands the rest he threw vpon his face with that he held vp both his hands meane time his wise had whiting giuen her which done shee began to come forth of the house singing and dauncing al the other women following her doing the like with that the gouernour called the Moore that brought our meÌ„ with him from the place aforesaid saying vnto him that our men were welcome clapping his handes together and saying Fuio Fuio
according to their manner and after many other wordes hee willed them to bring some Iron saying they should haue teeth for it which hauing done he brought forth his teeth This riuer as I saide is verie broad and full of Crocodiles and sea horses it hath many creekes and as they sailed from Crementun it lyeth Southeast where in the night they lauered 2. or 3. houres and came twice on ground and â—â— sayling forwardes they passed by an Island called Caraceâ—â—bo lying in the mouth of the riuer as there are many being verie low and flat land and ful of trees From that Island there came a Caâ—utien aboord their ship and in it eighteene persons and with them they had a smal drum of a hollow stocke whereon they played and being by the ship foure or fiue of them stept in whereof one of them vppon his face breast and armes was al white he bore a greene branch of a tree with a little bel and some whiting in his hand which hee strowed about the ship ringing the bel when they or any of our men spake hee made shewe as it were to consecrate and blesse the ship which done sirting downe and stammering in his words like a man possessed with some sprite or one that had a shaking feuer There was a great pot of Palme wine brought forth whereof they dranke one vnto the other which continued for the space of halfe an houre which done they went into their scâ—te rowed to land making signes to our men to come on shore and to barter with them for their wares which they did carrying them some Iron and other marchandise and went into the gouernors house being in a village where among other things they saw a little cottage about three foote high couered with straw and opeÌ„ on the side vnder the which stood a little gibet wheron hung a little horne with certaine stuffe therein which they would not lette them see by no meanes and vnder the gibet stood a staffe with a dead childes scul fixed vpon it hauing in the one eye a bone much like the bone that is founde in the head of a â—addocke whereof with vs they make horses bridles and collars for degs at the foote of the staff lay al sorts of bones both of fishes and beasts and among the rest the â—awes of a Prisâ—â— which in our countrey is called a sword fish without teeth which the master tooke away brought it vnto me our men asking what y t might signifie they said there lay a dead carcas and being in another village as they passed forwarde they sawe at the least twentie men sitting at the doore of one of their houses whereof some seemed to bee of the principal commanders and within that house there was a noyse of singing both by great and smal that it made them muse whereupon they asked what it meant they saide there was one dead The women being in trauel are not any thing ashamed but euery one both yong and old men and women run vnto her the doore standing wide open but one thing is to be wondered at that the children are al circumcised and yet they haue neither law order nor knowledge of God The countrey is fruitful and ful of al strange fruites and abounding in al kinds of beasts and birds of diners formes both great and smal There are some trees where vpon one branch there hang at the least 100. birdes nests altogether most pleasant to behold They hang by certaine strawes made fast vnto the boughes because snakes should not creepe in and suck their egges many of those nests were brought vnto me This shall suffice for the discription of the coast of Guinea after the which followeth the mightie kingdome of Congo The ancient writers helde opinion that this lande was not inhabited calling it Torriâ—â—am Zonam that is a place in the earth that through the heate of the sunne is burnt vp but they were altogether deceiued for as Odoardus Lopez a Portingale witnesseth hauing with many other Portingales long time inhabited therein There is good dwelling and the aire coÌ„trarie to al mens iudgements very temperate and that in winter there is no extreame cold but onely such weather as it is in haruest time at Rome They vse no linings nor shirte bandes nor change of clothes neither care they for the fire it is likewise no colder on the tops of the hilles then in the vallies but generally it is warmer with them in the winter then in the summer onely because of the continual raines specially about the middle of the day two houres before and as much after dinner which heat is very euill for our meÌ„ to endure The people of the countrie are black but part of the women fear what â—â—llow their haire for the most part is blacke and curled and some haue red haire they are of a mean stature therin not much vnlike the Portingales the balles of theyr eyes being of diuers colours blacke and sea colour their lips not so thicke as those of Nâ—bâ—a other Moores their faces of al proportions fat leane and indifferent betweene both like the Portingales and not like other Moores of Guinea that are foule and deformed The length of the day and night is in a maâ—er al one for that it differeth not one quarter of an houre to anie mans iudgement throughout the whole yeare their winter beginneth in our lent about the middle of March and their summer in the middle of September â— in winter it raigneth there continually for the space of fiue moneths that is Aprill May Iune Iuly August in which time there are but few faire daies and there the raine falleth in such great drops that it is wonderful which water is al dronke vp into the earth with the drienesse of the land in summer time wherein it raineth scarce once in sixe moneths with the raine likewise the riuer is filled with thick muddie water so that it floweth ouer the banks and moystneth the ground The windes that in summer doo continually blow in those countries are as Hippocrates and after him Iulius the first emperor of Rome naming them with a greek name Eâ—esâ—oâ— Northwest by the Portingales called Venâ—o Maestro or general wiâ—d as being ordinarie at that time of the yeare in all those countries which are likewise causes of the raines by driuing vp of mâ—stes and vapors vppon the tops of the hils which being there and resoluing into water doo fil the earth with raine and those continual raines are likewise causes of the growing and increasing of the great riuers that are in Egypt and Ethiopia as Niger and Nylus and al the riuers there abouts some running into the Mediterranean others into y e great Ocean seas by reason of their slime fattines and because in our sumer which is their winter for the most part it raineth throughout the countryes of Congo and Ethiopia it is not to be wondered at if the riuers be greater
and do ouerflow more then they are in the furder and very drie countries for in Egypt not accounting Alexandria with the places bordering on the same where it neuer raineth it is holden for a verie strange wonderful thing how the riuer Niâ— should grâ—w so high ful of thicke muddie water and alwaies at one time of the yeare not fayling therein thereby refreshing the earth and giuing foode both to man and beast whereby the ancient inhabitants of those countries did vse to offer sacrifices vnto that Riuer calling it as Ptolomeus in his fourth booke rehearseth a good Spirit and yet at this day many Christians esteeme it for a miracle for that without the increase thereof they would die for hunger their liues â—as Iohn Chrisostome sayth consisteth of the increasing of the waters so then the Northwest winds that in our summer time which is their winter blow in our countries are the meanes in those countries to gather cloudes and moystures vpon the high hilles from whence their raine proceedeth which raine is the cause that their countrey is not so colde as ours ingendering in those hot countries a certaine kinde of warme water Those raines then are likewise the cause of the growing ouerflowing of the riuer Niâ—us and other riuers in those countries wherof the inhabitants haue deuised and written to many fables But in their summer which is our winter there bloweth contrary windes as south and southeast which without al doubt are cold as blowing from the contrarie part of the Pole Antarctike and coole those countries as our winds do here in these countries like as with theÌ„ they cause a faire cleare aire so with vs they cause great store of raines by a certain natural disposition of the heauens the climates ruled and gouerned by the high wisedom of God that hath diuided the heauens ordained the course of the sun and other planets in such maner that al parts of the earth by their light brightnes are filled with warmth and coldnes therein do continue with great proportion and equalitie so that for certain if the freshnesse and coldnes of those winds did not refresh the countreyes of Ethiopia Congo and other places bordering on the same it were impossible for the inhabitants to indure the heate The same windes likewise doo refresh and comfort the inhabitants of Grecia the Islands of Candia and Cipies the countries of Asia Mynor and those of Suria and Egypt which liue by the refreshing of those generall Northwest west winds which rightly by the Grecians are called Zoephero that is bringing life those also are the cause that in Ethiopia Congo and other countries bordering thereon it neuer Snoweth no not vpon the highest hilles vnlesse it bee further off towardes the Cape de Bona Speranza or in some certaine places by the Portingales called Snow hilles as in Congo they finde neither Ice nor snow which with them would bee more esteemed then gold therewith to coole their drink so that the Riuers do not increase by the melting of snow but only by means of the coÌ„tinual raine of fiue moneths as I said before But returning to our former matter you may trauel to Congo by two waies one by the main sea to S. Helena and so further ouer or along by the coast of Affrica to the Island of Saint Thomas and so to the Cape of Lopes Gonzales lying vnder one degree vppon the South side of the Equinoctiall line about 21. Duch miles from Saint Thomas Island and from thence they saile with the wind that commeth off the land along the coast euerie euening casting anker in some creeke or hauen vntill they arriue at the place where they desire to be The kingdome of Congo beginneth at the Cape de S. Catharina which lyeth on the South side of the Equinoctial line vnder two degrees and a halfe and passing along the coast you saile by certain hils and strands not woorth the noting till you come to two creekes in forme somewhat like a paire of spectacles where there is a good hauen called Baro D Aluaro Gonzales that is the creeke or hauen of Aluaro Gonzaleâ— not farre from it runneth a little riuer into the sea by reason of the rednesse thereof by the Portingales called Rio de â—as Boreras Râ—slas because the water runneth ouer a certaine redde sande that coloureth the water at that place beginneth a high hill called by the Portingales la Sierra Complida that is a long hill passing further there is another riuer called â—a â—e â—as Almadias which is as much to say as the creeke or hauen for shippes because in that place many bankes are made in the mouth of this riuer there lyeth three Islands wherof the greatest is the middle being inhabited wherein there is a hauen for little ships the other two are not inhabited Parting from thence you come to the great riuer of Congo called Zaâ—e taking his beginning or spring partly froÌ„ the same lake froÌ„ whence the riuer Nylus doth flow This riuer casteth forth so great aboundance of water that it is incredible for that before it runneth into the sea it is at the least 5. miles broad on y e vpper part it is fresh water for 8 10. 16 Duch miles vnto the red sea whereby the pilots sailing ouer it know what place they are in Vpwards into this riuer you may saile with great barks she length of fine miles but not higher by reason of the discending and fall thereof from a steep high ground as the riuers of Nilus Donow and Rhein do in some places which are called Cataraâ—tas that is shedings or fallings of waters making so great a noyse that it may bee heard a great way from it In this riuer at the entry into the sea are many Islands al inhabited and very populous that haue diuers gouernours al subiectes to the king of Congo In tunes past those Islands made warres one against the other in certaine scutes cut out of the bodie of a great tree in their language called Licondo whereof some are so great that sixe men cannot fadome them with height and length correspondent so that one of the greatest being cutte in proportion of a scute woulde holde two hundred men Those scutes they rowe with ores wherwith they make great speede euery man hauing an ore and a bowe and when they fight they lay downe the ore and vse their bowe and to steere and winde those scutes they vse no other ruther than one of those ores In this riuer there are many strange beastes specially Crocadiles that are very great in their language called Carman the sea horse and another that seemeth to haue handes and a taile like vnto a Flaske which they call Ambize Angulo that is a sea hogge because it is as fatte as a hogge it hath a good and sauoury flesh not like fish although it bée a fish which feedeth not of that which is in the riuer but eateth
be othâ—rwise and thâ—t they haue ioynts in their legs and can bow them lifting vppe their two â—egges against trees to eate the â—arizes as also stooping or kneeling down to the water â—o drinke therof of the which wants in their legs â—can shew you what more 〈◊〉 the discription of Elephants seing many authoâ—s haue made mention of them I esteeme it needelesse to speake more thereof in this place There are likewis◠〈◊〉 of the same form and â—n as 〈…〉 haue beene seene in 〈…〉 â—heweth a won◠〈…〉 beast which is 〈…〉 vpon a white man 〈…〉 that if a blacke and a 〈…〉 both together they 〈…〉 blacke man and not 〈…〉 â—ng hungrie they come aâ—â—â—â—oure the catrel although the houâ—◠〈…〉 be neuer so neare which they doâ—◠〈…〉 and no other kind of beastes 〈…〉 they spare not any kinde 〈…〉 Coâ—â— they are called Engoâ— and are â—â—uel beasts like Lions but of anâ— colour and speckled they are taken 〈…〉 being putte into flesh and other 〈…〉 being hot with arrowes 〈…〉 of the Tiger is 〈…〉 extreame poyson which 〈…〉 procureth presit death 〈…〉 â—â—ke them are punished 〈…〉 their skins without the 〈…〉 â—une prouince hath another kind of 〈◊〉 called 〈◊〉 altogethâ—◠〈…〉 only differing herein that 〈…〉 which the mâ—le doth not this 〈◊〉 of a verie strange hatre for that 〈◊〉 â—he backe downe to the bellâ—e it is all 〈◊〉 with thee coâ—ours white blacke and â—arke red eaâ—â—â—ripe orderly followâ— the othâ—r and thâ—â—â—ingers broade as 〈…〉 the book printed at 〈…〉 Of these beasts 〈…〉 breede 〈◊〉 yeare there are 〈…〉 and â—de and there◠〈…〉 whereby the Portin◠〈…〉 sâ—â—th to say a man or other tâ—â—â—g is as swâ—ft as a Zebra meaning thereby as swift as possible may be being tamed they would serue in place of horses both to ride vpon to draw as also in wars and other necessary affaires so that herein a man may wel see the great prouidence of God that hath enriched all countries with necessary prouisions both of beastes and other thinges as also with victuals but because in al the kingdome of Congo there are no horses and that they know not how to vse them many of them know how to make their oren taine wherof they haue great numbers and setting saddles on their backes with bridles in their mouthes they ride vpon them also in steede of beasts they vse men which are brought vp to the same vse and stande in the streetes readie to beare men either in field beds like the Indians in Palamkins or sitting vpon stooles or chaires as you may see in the same booke that was printed in Rome Therfore such as desire to make great haste as wee doo in riding post take diuers slaues to beare them and when one is wearie there changeth and taketh another as wee do horses and by that meanes make speedy tourmes There are likewise many other beasts sâ—me as great as an ore some lesse by them called Empalanga many wilde buffles and wolues that are good of smel and loue oyle which they sucke out of the Palme trees fores harts hindes goates comes and hares in great aboundance for that they are neither hunted nor killed There likewise are many muske Cats by them made tame whereby to gette the muske which they delight in Snakes and adders in those countries are of a strange forme in respect of ours and verie great for there are some that are at the least 25. palmes long and fiue in breadth with their bellies mouthes so great that they will deuoure a hart or any other beast of the same bignesse they feede vpon the land and in the water vsing both the elements hauing filled theyr bellies they do oftentimes lie in some darke place to sleepe and so are killed and by the countrey people eaten esteeming them as daintie a meate as we doo hens and capons There are many venomous adders which if they bite a man he dyeth within foure and twentie houres after at the furthest There are other beasts as big as a Rans Owle like Dragons hauing wings and a taile with a long mouth and many teeth they eate raw flesh they are of colour blew and greene and with a painted skinne and two feete some of the Moores pray vnto them There are likewise many Camelions as great as a horsleach with a high backe and foure féete changing into al colours Birds there are of diuers sorts as Indian hennes Peacocks geese ducks wilde and tame partriges fezants pigins and turtle doues in great aboundance also Eagles Falcons Hawkes Pellicans and such like birdes besides al these there are diuers parrats both greene and gray and verie red by them called Framenghi with an innumerable number of small birdes singing as pleasantly as Canare birdes The second prouince of Congo called Songo lyeth about the Riuer of Zaire and Loango and reacheth to the Riuer Ambrizi towardes the North vnder seauen degrees and a halfe and endeth at the red stone Rocks which lie vppon the borders of the kingdome of Loango in the middle of that prouince There is a towne called Songo wherein the gouernor dwelleth and of the same town the prouince taketh the name In this prouince are many Eelphants where they vse to exchange theyr teeth for Iron likewise apes and munkies both great and little of diuers kindes whereof many are verie pleasant and louing good to passe the tune withall doing whatsoeuer they see any man do in this prouince they make much linnen of the Indian Palme trees wherewith they haue great traffike whereof I haue many sorts they are rich of kine and of other beasts aforesayde for Religion they are heathens and pray to what thing soeuer they will they esteeme the sunne as husband and for the greatest God and the Moone as wife for the seconde God Their apparrell is like those of Congo and haue war with theyr neighbors the people of Anzicana Sundi the third prouince is the first as it were a parte of the kings owne inheritance and therfore it is ruled by the kings eldest sonne or a Prince of the bloud royall that is next heyre vnto the crowne it lyeth about the Citie of Congo by the portingals called S. Saluatoâ— and reacheth from thence about fortie Italian miles or eight Duch miles to the Riuer of Zaire The people of that countrey as also of Pango deale much with salte and coloured linnen by the Portingales brought out of India vsing schelpkeÌ„s for their money for the which wares they barter linnen made of Palme trees Elephants teeth sables Martires and some girdles made of the leaues of Palme trees much esteemed of in those countries whereof I can shew you in this prouince there groweth much Cristall and many kindes of mettals yet they esteeme of iron more then of al others mettals saying that other mettals are vnprofitable of iron they maâ—e kniues swords and other weapons with such like instruments necessarie for the vse of man Pango the fourth
prouince was in time past a free kingdome ruled and gouerned of it selfe on the North side reaching towardes Sundy on the South side to Batta on the West to the country of Congo and on the East to the Sunne hilles The cheefest towne is called Pango and lyeth on the West side of the Riuer Barbela which issueth out of the great lake from whence Nilus floweth their traffike is like those of Sundi Batta the fift prouince on the North side ioyneth to Pango and on the East to the Riuer Barbela and so to the sunne hilles and to the foote of the Saltpeeter hils and of the South side of the same hils it reacheth to Barbela til you come to the burnt hil The cheefe towne is called Batta where the gouernor is resident which gouernor is allowed to haue musket and caliuer shot because that Eastward beyond the sun Saltpeeter hils on the East and West side of the riuer Nilus there dwelleth certaine people of the Congoers called Gâ—aquas and in their owne countrie Agag verie fierce and cruel and much giuen to fight to steale whose ordinary incursions into the countries about theÌ„ and also into Batta maketh them necessarily to stand vpon theyr guard so to defend theÌ„selues This prouince can raise 70. or 80. thousande men well armed from thence are brought many Sables and Flumen the rest of their traffike is like these at Pango and Sundi In Peniba being the sixt prouince â—â—th the cheefe Citie 〈◊〉 in times past called Banza that is the head and now by the Portingales S. Saâ—tor it lyeth on a hill within the land distant from the sea 1â—â— Italian miles or thirty Duch mâ—les 〈◊〉 hil verie great and high and most 〈◊〉 yet it yeeldeth iron being about two Duch miles in compasse al built with man â—lages and houses where there are about 100. thousand men This hil is very fruitful by reason of the fresh ayre which is very cleare and sounde it yeeldeth much good water which neuer hurteth inâ— is rich of grasse and al kindes of beastes and fruitfull trees which are alwaies greene aboundant in al sorts of graine that are vsed in those countries specially of one sort called Luco which is holden and esteemed for the best and principall kinde of graine as our wheat but smaller like mustardseed and somewhat greater which they grinde in handmilles whereof they make a verie white flower making bread that is both wholesome and of a good sauour and not much vnlike our bread made of wheate of this grain they haue great store in Congo which not long since was first brought thither from the riuer Nylus specially from that place where Nilus fills the second lake There is also much barly called Mazza di Congo that is graine of Congo and also great quantitie of Maiz that is Turkishe wheate which is there but little estéemed and by their country people called Mazza Manprito that is graine of Portingale wherewith they fatten their hogges of rice they haue great plenty but nothing worth This country is likewise ful of diuers sorts of fruitful trées so that the common sort of people for the most part doe nourish themselues therewith as citrons lemons and specially very pleasaunt oranges neither swéet nor sowre but indifferent betwéene both there are likewise many Bananes which some thinke to be the fruit that in Siria and Egypt are called Mase and in this Booke Indian Figs they are very pleasant and sauery fruit of a swéete and sowerish taste being a good sustenance for the countrey in the fatte land there groweth many sortes of palme trees as the Indian Nutts and such as bring forth Dates some greater and other sortes of Palme trees whereof they make oyle wine vineger fruit and bread they presse the oyle out of the fruite as the Spaniardes do oliues which for colour and substaunce is like our butter but gréene and somwhat yelow which they vse in stéede of oyle and butter and burne it in lampes they likewise annoynt their bodies therewith to conclude it is good to eate in tune of néede as it hapned to our men that without this oyle had died for hunger Of the same oyle brought from thence together with the wine and vineger of the same palme trees I can shew you the wine they draw out of the top of the tree which being bored there issueth a certaine iuyce like milke being colde and fresh to drincke the first that commeth foorth is sweete and very pleasant next issueth sowre and the last is vineger which may be vsed in sallets but beeing drinke when it is fresh and newe it maketh the water to auoyde whereby in those countries men are little troubled with the stone and drincking much it maketh them drunke and fasseneth well The bread they make of the stones of this fruit which in forme are like almonds but much harder within those stones are certaine kernels very pleasaunt to eate increasing sound and good flesh this fruit both inwardly and outwardly is gréene and is eaten both rawe and sodden There are other trées that bring foorth a certaine fruit called Cola as great as a pine apple within it hauing an other kinde of fruit like chesnuts wherein are foure redde or carnation hoales which they holde in theyr mouths sucking and chawing them thereby to quench their thirst This fruit put into water maketh it sowre and of a good taste they strengthen the stomacke and are passing good for an euil lyuer other sortes of wilde Palme trees are likewise found there which yéelde much fruiâ— to bée eaten the leaues seruing to make mais to couer houses and to make baskets or other necessary housholde stuffe whereof I haue many sortes There are likewise other trées caled Ogbeghe which bring forth fruit in forme like yellow plumbes pleasant both in smel and taste from these trees they cut certaine braunches which they plant or sette close together making them fast each to other as wée doe Bore or Thornes therewith making sences for their houses which branches growing vp they make likewise galleries and arbors therein to kéepe them from the heate of the Sunne Besides al the fruits aforesaide there are many other sorts verie good for phisicke as also to eate specially Tamarinde of a verie tart and pleasant taste and verie good against burning feauers The Moores and Turkes trauelling by land take the rind of Tamarinde with them and mixing it with water drinke it to coole the inward heate specially the lyuer kidnies thereby also to make them laxatiue as also Cassia Fistula which is there verie plentiful also Citrons Melons Pompions Cucumbers and al other sorts of fruites that grow out of the earth Such as desire a larger discourse touching the same let them reade Odoardus Lopez translated by Pigaâ—etta and printed in Rome from whence I haue gathered the most parte heereof and although the houses in Congo are small and low yet there wanteth no substance to
builde withall specially Stones for there are great store whereof may bee made whose Pillers and foure square peeces of fine redde Marble stone and there are such great peeces that a whole Church might bee hewed out of one of them Besides this marble there are hilles of iasper porphier or red marble nured with white and other colours which in Rome is called marble of Numidia Affrica and Ethiopia whereof many pillers are to be seene in Rome There is likewise found many grained stones among the which there are that are mixed with iacinths which maye bee taken foorth and separated from the other stones wherein they growe of those maye likewise pillars and other workes be made wherein might bee seene diuers sortes of stones There are also other strange stones mixed with mettall of diuerse colours as copper in shew greene and shining whereof they maye make Images and other princely workes so that want of substance to builde withall is not the cause of theyr small houses for neyther stone chalke wood nor beastes to drawe or carry them is wanting onelie they haue no masons carpenters nor brickelayers that shoulde make thâ—ir houses so that they dwel in little cotages Heere might be declared how this kingdome in the discouerie of the East Indies being in the yeare 1490. and 1491. was by the Portingales brought vnto the Christian faith also howe shamefully the countrey was left when golde beganne to faile I meane not by the decaying or diminishing of the golde but because the King of Congo was persuaded by a Portingale not to discouer the mine as also not mentioning the euill gouernement of the Bishoppes Priestes Moonkes and Friers that were sent thither as beeing sufficiently declared by Odoardus Lopez in his description thereof shewing that they desired not the health and saluations of mens soules but rather glory and rule and to satisfie their insatiable lustes and gréedinesse after golde Yet not long since the King of Congo now liuing hath twice sent his embassadors to the King of Spaine the Pope of Rome friendly hartily desiring them to send certaine preachers and teachers of the word of God to instruct his subiects withall offering to discouer the rich mines of gold that are within his countrey thereby to winne them to bring preachers to instruct his country but christendome hath other matters in hand as to hang suppres pursue and destroy their christen brethren which being beyond my profession is not for me to deale in But returning to the further description of the coast of Angola to the great cape de Bona Speranza first as touching Angola it is by report very populous and abundant in siluer copper and other mettall rich of al kinds of beasts and victualles specially kine yet the people rather eate dogs flesh which they buy and pay dearer for it than for any other flesh their mony is schulpens like theirs in Congo and are like in speech yet different in some words as Spanish and Portingale their king is an idolater or a Heathen They haue as many wiues as they will whereby they haue such aboundaunce of people that Angola alone can make a million of armed men all ready to serue theyr gouernours in the warrs They vse many glasse beades brought out of Venice beeing of diuerse colours which they weare for an ornament about their neckes and armes in their speech they doe call them Anzoles and being hanged on strings Mizanga Hauing passed the kingdome of Angola and the shoare of Kine called Seno delle Vache southward to the black cape or Out hooke the coast stretcheth about 220. Italian miles This coast is all one land like Angola and is vnder the gouernement of many lordes and from this blacke cape reacheth a line Eastward parting the hills called the colde hilles which also in some high places néerer to the Equinoctiall line are by the Portingales called the Snowe hilles which end at the foote of the Cristall hill taking her name from the great abundance of cristall found therein out of those Snow hilles the waters that make the lake haue their beginning by the Portingales called Dumbea Zocche and this cristall hil stretcheth further into the north toward the siluer hilles as farre as Malomba where the kingdome of Câ—ngo endeth beeing diuided by the riuer of Coari Coasting along the shoare from the kingdome of Angola to the cape de Bona Speranza you must passe by the kingdome of Climbebâ— wherein raineth king Matama this country reacheth to the riuer of Bauaghul springing out of the hill called Luna or the Moone and both together running into the riuer Magnice which floweth out of the lake aforesaide behind this lieth Tropicus Cancri and betweene this Tropicus Cancri and the cape de Bona Speranza there raigneth no king but diuerse seuerall Lords This land is compassed by high sharpe and colde unhabited hilles the people that are there liue in the fields like labourers in cotages apparelled in beasts skins wild rough people and not to be credited not induring or permitting anie traffike with straungers Their weapons are dartes and arrowes their meate fruites of the earth and flesh of beasts The ancient Writers thought the riuer Niâ—uâ— to haue her off spring in the hils of the Moone so that many to this day are likewise of the same opinion In this hil towardes the weast lieth a small lake called Gale out of the which lake floweth the Riuer Camilla by the Portingales called the fresh riuer which about the end of the falce cape de Bona Speranza runnes into the sea This Hooke is called the false or vnright Cape because the ships that saile from India to Portingale doe first discouer a great corner or hook of land called Deâ—li Aguâ—â—ie and after that this smaller hooke and therefore call it the Faise Cape beeing seperated from the right and great Cape The space betweene these two Hookes or Capes is 20 Dutch miles which bearing out like twoo hornes make an intercourse or gulfe where the Portingales at times take in water out of the fresh riuer aforesaide and the people dwelling about this riuer are blacke although the pole antartike is there at 35 degrees as also those that dwell in the colde hilles of the Moone so that it is not the heat of the Sunne but the nature of the Countrey that maketh them blacke And bicause this is the greatest hooke or cape and that reacheth furthest into the sea of any Cape whatsoeuer in al the world and very daungerous to passe as al other Capes are as also because that in this place the sea makes a most fearful noyse that the land windes comming downe make the sea thereabouts most rough and troublesome whereby so many Portingale ships haue there bin cast away and because by ancient Historiographers so litle hath bin said therof before and since the Portingales discouered the same thinke it good in this place to set downe the measure and certaine knowledge of the greatnesse
of the Portingales voyage towards the Indies for that there are about 6000. Italian miles to saile before you com to compas this great cape for that from the riuer of Fernando Poo where the head first beginneth to iut into the sea to the furthest point which as I said is called Delli Aguglie that is the néedles the coast from north to south is accounted 2200. Italian miles and on the other side of the same hooke or corner to the point or cape Guarda fuâ— lying ouer against the Iland Socotora the coast from south to north is accounted 3300. Italian miles whereof 1000. Italian miles make 200. Dutch miles and is 660. Dutch miles so that from Lisbon sailing about the coast of Affrica the cape de Bona Speranza to the kingdome of Goa are about 15000. Italian miles and thence to Malacca China is as much againe so that not any people in the world did euer make so dangerous a voyage as the Portingales haue done except within these few yeares certain English gentlemen that not onelie haue performed this voyage but haue sayled round about the worlde This head is called the cape de Bona Speranza that is head of good Hope for that al the ships that saile to India or from India to Portingale do feare the passing of this cape thinking if they passe it to haue passed al danger Now to returne to our matter touching the coast of Affrica hauing passed the cape delli Aguglie there are diuers good hauens for ships to harbor in first Seno Formoso il Seno del Lago because in that place the sea makes a gulfe or entrance wherein are certaine Ilands and hauens alitle further the riuer called S. Christofer runs into the sea in the mouth whereof lieth iii. Ilands and somewhat further there comes a riuer out of the land which the Portingaâ—eâ— call â—eria della Natiuita that is the land of Christs birth bicause it was discouered on the same day downe to the cape de la Pescheria between this cape the riuer Mâ—gnice lieth the kingdome of Burtua which reacheth to the hils of the Moone and so to this riuer towardes the north where the country of Monomoâ—apâ— lieth and on the west side to the riuer Bauagul In this country are many gold veines the people being altogether like the men of Monometapa passing in this maner by the coast you sée y e riuer of Magnice by the which begins the kingdome of Sofala the country of Menomotapa This riuer springeth out of the same lake where Nilus issueth forth runneth into y e sea in the middle of the entrance betwéene two corners of land one called Della Pescheria the other Delli Correnti liyng vnder 23. degrees ½ on the south side of the pole vnder Tropicus Caneri Into this riuer not far from the sea run three other riuers whereof one is called S. Christopher and by the inhabitants of the country called Nagoa the second hath her name of a particular man called Lorenzo Marchoâ— because he found it first and in that country Toroa these two issue out of the hils of the Moone the third is called Aâ—râ—e springing out of the other side of the hills by the golde mines of Mone motapa in some places of this riuer they finde golde as small as sand These three riuers together with the riuer of Magnice running into the sea cast foorth great abundance of water and from the mouth of these three Riuers stretcheth the kingdome of Sosala to the riuer of Cuania which hath receiued hir name from a Castle of the same name inhabited by Mahometanes This riuer of Cuama diuideth it selfe into seuen partes besides the channel that floweth vpwardes al inhabited and very populous and floweth out of the same riuer from whence Nylus doeth issue so the kingdome of Sofala lieth betwéen these two riuers Magnice and Cuama on the sea side yet very small hauing but fewe townes or villages whereof the principall cittie is Sofala lying in an Island of the same riuer giuing the name to the whole country inhabited by Mahometanes their King being of that sect but subiect to the King of Portingale onely because they wil not be vnder the obedience of Monomotapa In the mouth of this riuer Cuama the Portingales haue a fort where there is much traffike for golde iuorie and amber which is found by the slaues vpon the coast bartering the same for linnen made of cotten and for silke brought from Cambaia The people as nowe inhabiting therein were not borne in that country but before the Portingales discouered the land they came out of Arabia Felix with small barkes to traffike there and being once brought in subiection by the Portingales doe nowe inhabite and dwell there being neither Turkes nor heathens In the inward parte of the countrey between those two riuers beginneth the kingdome of Monomotapa wherein are manie golde mines which is carried into all the places round about as well to Sofala as throughout Affrica some being of opinion that out of this country Solomon caused golde and iuorie to be brought into Ierusalem which seemeth not vnlikely for that in this Kingdome of Monomotapa were found many olde and princely buildings very costly both for timber stone chalke and wood which in the countries about it are not found The gouernement of Monomotapa is very great and reacheth ouer many warrelike people all Heathens and Pagans blacke of a middle stature and very swift in the which gouernment are many kings that are subiect to the same and doe often rebell their weapons are dartes and light targets This Emperour holdeth many armies in seuerall prouinces diuided into legions after the maner of the Romanes thereby to defend hys great countrey and to maintaine his estate amongst his men of warre the legion of women is the best which are greatly esteemed of by the King wherein consisteth his greatest power These women do burne theyr breastes because they shoulde not hinder them in shooting like the Amazons whereof the auncient Historiographers make mention these women are very swift expert and cunning in shooting out of their bowes In theyr fight they vse a certayne subtiltie which is that seeming to runne away and flee from their ennemies as being scattered vpon the sodayne returne agayne and do their ennemy great mischiefe especially when they thinke to haue gotten the victory and by that subtiltie are ouerthrowne These women haue places appointed them to dwell in by themselues and at certayne times haue the company of men that they may haue children which if they be boyes they send vnto their fathers if daughters they keepe them The countrey of Monomotapa is in maner of an Island formed in that order by the sea the riuer of Magnice and a parte of the lake from whence the riuer springeth together with the riuer Cuamâ— borduring on the south vppon the Lordes of the cape de Buona Speraâ—za and on the north vpon the kingdome of Monemugi Sayling
about with hils whereof those that lie eastward are called Caâ—ates with rockes of Saltpeeter and of siluer on the one side and on the other side hilles through the which Nylus descendeth about foure hundred miles right north and then runneth into an other lake that is greater which the inhabitantes doe call a Sea or Meere because it is greater than the other being in breadth about twoo hundred and twentie miles lying right vnder the equinoctiall line Of this second lake we are truely aduertised by the people of Arzichâ— the which bordure vppon Congo who traffiking in that country reporte that in that lake there are people that do saile in great shippes that can write vsing weights and measures which they haue not in the bordures of Congo which also build their houses of stone and chalke as it groweth in the earth much like the people of Portingale whereby it may be saide that Prestor Iohns land is not farre from thence Out of this second lake aforesaide the riuer Nylus runneth to the Island of Meroe being distant from the lake 240. Dutch miles whereunto other Riuers haue their course as the riuer of Colues c. lying on the bordures of Melinde and comming to the saide Island of Meroe it diuideth it selfe in two partes compassing about a high land called Meroe on the right side of Meroe towardes the east runneth an other riuer called Abagni springing out of the lake Bracina which riuer runneth through Prestor Iohns land to the saide Island and on the other side towardes the west runneth other riuers among the which is Saraboe This riuer entring into Nilus and running about the Island of Meroe runne together in a broder streame through Ethiopia which is called Ethiopia lying aboue Egypt and reacheth to the descending thereof where the riuer Nylus meeteth againe with both the streames together in a high valley and so with a great fall runs to the Island of Siene with so horrible a noyse that the people thereabouts by that means are most part deafe and thence running through Egypt it watereth al the countrey and maketh it fruitfull and from thence runneth into the Mediterranean sea right ouer against Cipres and that with two notable streames besides others whereof one at Rossetto a dayes iourny from Alexandria runneth into the sea the other at Pelusio now called Damiata so that hereby I conclude that the riuer Nylus in Egypt the riuer Zaire in Congo and the riuer Nigri in Eâ—â—iopia are the causes of the fruitfulnesse of those countries al at one time increasing and ouerflowing by meanes of the exceeding great raines that for the space of fiue moneths do continually fall in the countrie of Congo and the places borduring on the same Touching the coast of Aden the coast of Arabia Felix and the country running along by the gulfe of Persia vntil you come to Goa it is sufficiently already declared in this booke whereunto I refer you The description of America and the seuerall partes thereof as Noua Francia Florida the Islandes called Antillas Iucaya Cuba Iamaica c. with the situations degrees and length how farre they are distant one from the other likewise the fruitfulnes and abâ—undance of beasts birdes fishes and fruits of the same countreyes with the manners fashions apparrels and religions together with the principall actions of the people inhabiting therein When the authour of this booke as also the Printer had bestowed and vsed great labor and charges herein to set forth some perfect Cardes of America because that often times the Indian shippes in their sailing out or returning home do fall vpon those coasts specially Brasilia which herein is most discouered they thought it expedient therewith to place a briefe discription of the same countries thereby to shew the readers the principall places therein whereunto at this day most ships do traffike hoping they wil take it in good part THe fourth parte of the world which at this day we cal America or west India was because of the great distance vnknowne to the ancient Cosmographers til the yeare of our Lord 1492. that Christopherus Columbus a Geneuois discouered the same and fiue yeeres after that one Americus Vespacio by the King of Castilliaes commandement sailed thither and called al the countrey America after his owne name and for the greatnes therof is also called the new world reaching as Postillus is of opinion from the one pole to the other beeing diuided by the straigths of Magellana where it endeth vnder 52. degrees on the south side of the Equinoctial line This countrie by diuers men is diuersly parted some making it a parte of the whole worlde and cal it the fourth part by the name of America others make out of that countrey in generall two other parts of the world diuiding the world in sixe parts as Asia Affrica Europe Mexicana or the new Spaine Peruana and Magellanica as the sixt part which as yet is but litle discouered others diuide it into three parts in Peru newe Spain others Mexico new France They that first found it accounted it but for one part after that the Spaniardes discouering more land diuided it into two parts into Mexico or new Spaine and Peru after that the Frenchmen discouering more countreyes called that which they discouered Noua Frauncia which in time beeing by the Spanniardes woonne from the Frenchmen was accounted for a péece of newe Spaine at the last the straights of Magellana being founde out was by Petrus Plantius a minister of the worde of God added as a sixt parte but because our Card extendeth no further then to certaine limits of Noua Frauncia namely to the prouince or countrey of Florida we wil not speake much of the rest and proceede with the other partes with certaine Ilandes in our Carde called Antillas or foure landes because they lie before the firme lande defending and couering the same as a henne with her wings couereth her chickens The land then which stretcheth towards the pole Arcticum or northward is called new Fraunce for that in Anno 1524. Iohannes Verrazanus of Florence being sent by the King and Queene mother of France into the new world did almost discouer al that coast beginning from Propicus Cancri about 24. degrees til he came to 50. degrees and somewhat further into the north where he erected the French standard so that from thenceforth that countrey was called by the name of Noua Frauncia and Villagagno Frauncia Antarctica The breadth of this countrey is from 24. degrees to 54. degrees towardes the North. The length from 280. to 330. miles whereof the East part by the writers in these dayes is called Norumbega reaching to the gulfe Gamus where it is seperated from Canada About this land which is not lesse in compasse then Europa or whole Christendome lie diuers Islands among the rest Terra di Laborador stretching towards Groenland whether diuers ships both Spaniards French and English do often times resort seeking
some passage through the same to enter into the East Indies but al in vaine for the most part consuming and destroying themselues therein found much ice and snow The people of this Island are wel proportioned of bodie and limbes wel made and fitte to labour they paint their bodyes thereby to seeme faire and weare siluer and Copper rings in their eares their apparrel is speckled furres and marternes and such like in winter they weare the furs inward and in summer outward like the Lapelanders and Vinnen they gird themselues with cotteÌ„ girdles or with fish skins and such like things their cheefe foode is fish specially Salmon although they haue both birdes and fruit inough their houses are made of wâ—od whereof they haue great quantities and couered with the skinnes of beastes or fishes In this land are griffons white beares and birdes There is a countrey vnder 44. degrees and a halfe called Baccalao taking the name of some kind of fishes which thereabouts are so aboundant that they let the shippes from sailing This countrey of Baccalaos reacheth nine hundred miles that is from the Cape de Baccalaâ—â— to Fâ—orida which is accounted in this sort from the point of Baccalao to the bay of the riuer are 70. miles froÌ„ the bay of the Riuer to the bay de los Islos 70. miles from thence to Rio Fundo 70. miles from thence to Cabo Baxo 160. miles and again to the riuer of Saint Anthony 100. miles from thence to the furthest Cape 180. miles and againe to the Cape of saint Elena 110. miles and from Saint Elena to the poynt of Canauerall or the Reedlyooke 100. miles then to Florida 40. miles which is in all nine hundred miles which is the greatnes of this land whereof the least latitude from the Equinoctial line is 48. degrees and a halfe this country both on the sea coast and otherwise is verie populous and like the low countries because it lyeth in a corner This Land hath many Islandes lying about it as Curia Regia Baya Bica Stella the Cape of Hope and the Brittons Cape Before you come to Florida the prouince Cichora lyeth by the Riuer Iordan and another hard by it called Guada Lupa The west side of Noua Frauncia hath diuers prouinces now discouered as Quiui a â—euola Astaclan Tethchichimichi The south side of Florida is called by the Spaniards Floridum Pascha because Iohannes Pontio Legionensi founde it out on Easter day in Anno 1512. and not because of the greennesse and budding of the trees in the same land as Theueâ— writeth The north side of noua Frauncia is as yet not discouered and because our Carde discouereth no further then to Florida we wil begin therwith and describe some part of the situation thereof because it is worthie memorie as beeing a place wherein many Spaniards Frenchmen haue lost their liues as also because it is the first best knowne of al new France whereunto the Frenchmen haue vsed to saile and therein in the time of Charles the ninth had a certaine fort which was called by his name Charles burgâ— but was after taken by the Spaniards and al the Frenchmen slaine contrary to their fayth and promise specially such as yeelded themselues into their hands But because my meaning is not to recite histories I remit the reader to the bookes which make mention thereof Florida hath a Cape lying far into the sea stretching Southward in maner of a tong reaching an hundred miles the measure being taken from the lowest northerne corner to the south poynt This Cape or hooke as I sayde is long and narrow like Italy in length an hundred miles and in breadth twentie or fiftie miles where it is broadest On the East side it hath the Islands of Câ—ehora Banama and Lucaya on the west side towardes Spaine and the gulfe of Mexico it is diuided from new Spaine by the land of Anauaca On the north side it bordureth on the firme land it lieth right against the point towards the south 25. miles into the sea lieth the famous Island Cuba otherwise called Isabellâ— the sea that runneth between this poynt of Florida and Iucâ—tan is called Mare Catayum by other the gulfe of Ferdinando Cortosi or the gulfe of Florida or of Mexico It is a flat lande wherein are many riuers which moysture the land and make it fertile the sea side being sandie whereon there groweth diuers pine trees without nuts or shels also many acornes wild cherries mulberies chesnuts but ranker of taste then oures in these countreyes many Mastike Cedars Cipres Bayes Palme trees Nuls and wild vines which grow vppon the trees that are next them bringing forth grapes that are good to be eaten also a certain fruit of Medlars greater and better then ours there are also plums verie faire to behold but not good of taste there are also Framboisen or Hinnebesien and some verie small round berries of a pleasant taste not much vnlike our Clappe beries there groweth rootes which in their speech they cal Hatle whereof in time of dearth they make bread Fourefooted beasts are there likewise in great aboundance as Harts Hinds rain Deare Goats Beares Leopards Fores many kind of Wolues wild Dogs Hares Conies c. Their birds are Peacocks Partriges Parrats Pigeons ring Doues Turtledoues Meerelens Crowes Hauks FalcoÌ„s Marlens hearns Cranes Storkes wild Geese Ducks water Rauens white red blacke and ash coloured Reighures and many other water foules Crocadiles in so great aboundance that it is incredible which ofteÌ„ times do eat and deuoure men swimming in the water there are likewise many kindes of snakes and a certain kind of beast not much vnlike the lion in Affrica Golde and siluer wherewith they traffike they haue it as they say out of the ships which fal on ground vpon the Cape which is not vnlikely because most of the ships are cast away vpon that Cape so that there is more money thereabout then in the north parts They said likewise that in the hils Apalatcyaeris there is gold to bee found in this countrie also groweth the roote China which by meanes of the Emperour Charles hath gotten a great report and is much vsed by phisitions which some also vse to heale the French pocks Besides al these things aforesaid there are diuers sortes of seedes and hearbes whereof many kindes of collours are made very profitable for painters the inhabitants knowe well how to vse them therewith to die al kindes of leather The people are in a manner a black yellow and euil fauoured yet strong of good proportion of bodie They couer their members with verie faire drest hart skins most part of them paint their bodies and also their armes and thighes with many figures which colour wil not off vnlesse it bee washed it is so printed and sunke into the flesh they haue black haire downe to theyr hippes being long which they verie cunningly bind vp in their dealings they are wholly light and
not to bee credited but verie bolde and valiant in armes and in the warres wherein they vse bowes and arrowes whereof the shafts are made of hartes goates or skinnes finely painted and so cunningly wrought that in these countries they cannot be mended and in steede of heades they take fishes teeth or sharp peeces of wood they exercise their boyes in leaping shooting in bowes and playing with balles they haue great delight in hunting and fishing their kings holde continuall warres not sparing any of theyr enemies if they ouercome them but presently cutte off theyr heades to bee no more troubled with them which comming home they set vp in certaine places for a triumph and victory Women and children they will not hurt but keepe and nourish them among them and returning from theyr warres they call all theyr subiects together where for the space of three dayes they doo nothing but banket and make good cheere with singing and dauncing To the olde women that are among them they giue the skinne and the haire of the heades of their enemies that are cutte off compelling them to daunce and sing songs in prayse and thanksgiuing to the Sunne as hauing by his meanes obtained victorie They haue no Religion nor any knowledge of the true and liuing God but in steede of him as other Americans they honour the Sunne and the Moone They feare theyr Priestes and put great credite in them because they are great coniurers southsayers and inuocaters of Diuelles which by most feareful meanes they cause to appeare Their priestes are likewise theyr phisitions and surgeons for the which cause they vse continually to beare a sacke full of hearbes and salues to heale theyr sicke people with for the most parte haue the pocks as beeing verie hot of nature and much addicted to lecherie whereby often times they vse women maydes children and Boyes Euerie man hath but one wife onely the king to whome it is permitted to haue twoo or three but with this condition that the first hee marrieth shall bee honoured before the rest and onely holden for Quéene and her children to inherite his goods and to be heires of the crowne The women doo al the worke about their houses and when they are once with child their husbands neuer deale with them vntill they be deliuered and eate no meate of their dressing at such time as they haue their flowers Besides this al the countrey is ful of Flermophroditers which of nature are both man and woman those are kept to labour and to carrie their munition and weapons when they go to warres they paint their faces and put certaine birds feathers into their haires thereby to seeme the fairer and more fearful Their prouision of virtuals is bread and Meele of wheate and hony they rost their Meele of Maiz because it may continue the longer cause some broiled fish dried to be carried with theÌ„ In time of dearth they eate many bad things putting sande and coales among their meale When they go to warres the king goeth first hauing in one hand a staffe in the other a bow with arrowes in a case hanging on his shoulder the rest follow him with bowes and arrowes either in cases or else stucke in their haire at their meeting with the enemie and also in fight they vse great and fearefull cries like other Barbarians Turkes and Tartarians They neuer beginne war before they haue taken counsell together meeting about it in the morning in which their assemblies they vse a very strange custome which is to be noted for that being assembled they lette themselues downe on both sides of the king in maner of a half Moone the king sitting alone in the middle of them vppon a stoore made of nine peeces of round wood higher then the rest that hee may bee knowne which done they come and do him honour saluting him the oldest beginning first and lifting their handes aboue theyr heades speake and say Ha He. Ya Ha Ha the rest answering Ha. Ha which done each man sitteth downe And if there be any matter of great importance to bee handled the king causeth the priests by them called lauas and the auncients to be sent for asking their aduice meane time he causeth certain women to seethe Cacinam which is a certain drink prest out of leaues which being sodden and clarified the king being set with his Lords others each man in his place there commeth one in presence of them all and lifting vp his hands and blessing and wishing them al good lucke filleth a cuppe of mother of pearle ful of that hot drinke which he first presenteth to the king which hauing drunke he willeth him giue it to the rest This drinke they make great aâ—câ—at of and giue it not to any man that sitteth in councell before he hath shewed some valiant act in the fielde against the enemie which drinke is of such force that presently after they haue drunke it 〈◊〉 maketh them sweate and such as drinke it 〈◊〉 it vp againe are not imployed in an great affaires nor may not serue as Captaine or other officer in the fielde as being vnfit for such a place for that when they are in the field they must of force often times fast two or three dayes together to the which ende this drinke is verie good for that whosoeuer drinketh it may wel fast foure and twentie houres after and neither eate nor drinke wherefore when they go to warre they cause the Hern oâ— hrediter to carry diuers bottles of that drinke with them which sustaineth feedeth and strengthneth the body not once making their headesâ—le nor light They sow their wheate twice euerie yeare that is in the moneths of March and Iune all vpon our land in three moneths being ripe and readie to reape The other sixe moneths they let the earth he vntitled they haue very great Pumptans melons very good beanes they neuer dung their ground but burne off the Stubble which in the sixe monethes consumeth and with those ashes fatten the ground as they do us some places of Italy they plow and dig vp their ground with a woodden spit or shouel and throw two or three graines of wheate into one hole as wee vse to set beanes or pease when their corne is to be sowed the king sendeth one of his seruants to assemble the people that they may plow and dig the earth and then causeth much of the aforesaide drinke to be made to giue it to the labourers The wheate being reaped they carrie it into a common barne or place made for the purpose whereof euerie man according to his desert hath a parte They sow no more then necessarily wil serue keeping the rest to serue theÌ„ for the six months wherein they sow not and for longer time they prouide not also euerie yeare in winter time they withdraw themselues into the woods for three or foure moneths together continuing there in certaine places made of Palme tree branches meane time feeding
vpon Acornes flesh of Darts fish and oysters peacocks and other foules All their meate is broyled vpon coales making it somewhat hard by reason of the smoke and extreame heate among other meate they are verie desirous of Crocodiles flesh which sheweth very white and faire like veale but tasteth like rotten Moschus if any man be sicke in stéed of letting bloud their priests do suck the place where their paine lyeth vntil the bloud doth issue forth The women in Florida are great and verie wise and coloured like men and pinked on their bodies legges and armes putting such colour into the places that will not easily come forth but the women kind when they come first into the world are not so blacke but verie white the blacke yellowish colour is made vpon them by a certaine oyntment as the Tartarians and other heathens vse to do which oyntment they vse to make of a certaine ceremoniall oyle by them vsed Their colour likewise changeth because they go naked and with the burning heate of the sunne The women likewise are verie quicke and subtile like the women of Egypt and can swim ouer great riuers holding their children fast vnder one of their armes and will likewise climbe vppe the highest trees that are in all those countries The chiefe prouinces in Florida which the Spaniards both in the beginning and since at other times haue founde out are these first Panuca lying on the borders of Noua Spaigna discouered by Franco de Gray in An. 1518. who left many spaniards bohind him being slaine eaten and deuoured by the wild people whose skinnes being dryed they hung for a memorie and euerlasting triumph in their Iools Temples Those people are verie vnchaste and helde open stewes where by night they meete and lie together They bore holes in their noses and also in their eares to hang rings at theÌ„ they scrape their teeth to make them cleane and marrie not before they be fortie yeares of age although their daughters are deflowred at the age of ten or twelue yeeres There are in Florida other prouinces as Anauares Albardaosia Iaguasia Apalachia Autia Samouia and diuers others al obseruing one kinde of religion customes wholly without any feare of God pollicie manlinesse or reason The best and fruitfullest part of Florida bordereth on Noua Spaigna to the riuer and prouince of Panuca which riuer runneth with so great a streame into the sea that it is a verie good hauen for ships Here followeth the description of the coast of Florida forasmuch as is contained in the Carde hereunto annexed THe length of the furthest poynt of Terra di Laborador vnto the Cape of Saint Elena lying in Florida is before declared nowe shall follow that which is furder sette downe in the Carde beginning from Saint Elena which lyeth vnder 32. degrees This is a verie faire and broade riuer surpassing al others whatsoeuer in the north coastes wherefore by the Frenchmen it is called Porto Real or kingly hauen hauing found it to be tenne seadom water about this riuer there are many woods of Dakes and Ceder trées wherein are many Harts and other wilde beastes and Peacocks The mouth of the riuer is three miles broade and hath two Capes or hookes of land one stretching West the other North vppon this riuer the Frenchmen haue built a fort called Charles for t some say this riuer runneth vnto the riuer Iordan and so into the other sea Betwéene both these hookes of lande in the mouth of the Riuer there lieth a fayre Island full of trees from Saint Elena to Rio Secco is fortie Spanish miles whereof seuentéene and a halfe make a degree and this Riuer lieth vnder 31. degrees from Rio Secco to Santa Cioce and from thence to the point of Cannaueral which lyeth vnder 20. degrées are forty miles Here I must pause a while follow the Frenchmens rule because this countrey was likewise discouered and also described by them So then the Frenchmen recon from Saint Elena sayling southward along the coast foure French miles where you come to the Riuer Magnus or Grandis that is the great Riuer then Guade or as it is in our Carde Guate and further Bellum or Bellus from thence to Gironda then to Garumna and so to Charenta from Charenta to Ligetim or the Loire sixe miles from Loire to Axona in the mouth whereof lyeth an Island in our Carde called Rio di S. Pero from Axona to Sequana or Seine because it was like the riuer that runneth throgh Paris vnto Roan lieth sixe miles and all these nine riuers lie within the space of sixtie French miles leauing the Seine and sailing southward by the shore you passe certaine small Riuers as Ay Serrauahi then you come to the great Riuer Maius so called by the Frenchmen that is the Riuer of May because it was found by one Landometo vpon the first day of May and is distant from Sequana or Seine 14. miles thereabout grew certaine redde and white mulberie trées vppon the highest branches whereof hung great numbers of silke wormes from this riuer you come to a gulfe that reacheth somewhat inward into the land beeing the place where Landonerius first arriued when hee sayled out of France into those countreyes and there hee saw in the mouth of a certaine riuer many sea Swine or Dolphins wherevpon he called the same Riuer by the name of those Dolphins on the South side of the gulfe lyeth the French Cape about thirtie degrees from the line so called because the Frenchmen did first land there This Cape is not high but a flatte strand al ful of high trees and thick woods From the French Cape you come to Cannaueral another Cape fiue thirtie miles distant taking the name form the reeds that grow thereon The Spaniards and also our Carde doo not set downe many of these Riuers and the greatest parte of them that are described are altered in their names for the Riuer of May by them is called Maranca the Seine Saint Augustin the Gaâ—â—mna S. Matheo the great riuer S. Pero From Cannauerâ—l to the cape of Florida are fortie miles and betweene these two Capes lie many flats The cape of Florida lyeth vnder fiue and twentie degrees and before it lie many cliffes which they name Martires or Maâ—tiâ—s and on the other sides litle Islands called Testudines that is Torteaux because they are in forme like those kindes of beasts The Cape of Florida is in breadth twentie miles and from thence to Ancon Bâ—xo are 100. miles and lieth fifty miles east and west from Rio Secco which is the breadth of Florida The description of some Islands that lie ouer against the coast of Florida FIrst you most note that the whole coast of Florida is ful of Islands cliffes banks flattes and such like dangerous places and as touching the Islandes they are at the least foure hundreth in number besides the great Island called Lucaâ—ae that giueth the name to al
to all that countrey This land is great and hath many people and countries vnder it but the principall and chiefe prouince which the Spanyardes holde therein is Mexicana also â—enustiran or Culhuacan as I saide before the other prouinces are Guatimala Xaliscus Hondura Cha'cos Taicâ— Chamoâ—la Claortomaca Huâ—cacholla and the kingdomes of Michuacan Tescuco Utazcalia Tenuacan Maxcalcinco and Mixâ—eâ—apan Mexico or Culhuacan was brought vnder the subiection of the kings of Spaine by Fernando Cortes Merches deila Valo in the yeere of our Lorde one thousand fiue hundred and eighteene which countrey is very rich of golde and siluer for that many riuers haue golde in the sand The Sea shore in those Countries yeeldeth manye pearles mustles or oysters wherein they finde the pearles whereof there is a great fishing and much traffike for them There are likewise in this countrey many lakes or meeres that are stil and haue no issue which by the heate of the Sunne tourne into salt There is likewise no lesse aboundance of Cassia Fistulâ— then in Egypt growing on trees with leaues like walnuts and yellow blossoms from whence the pipes or cases of Cassia do issue forth which are vsed to purge in hote feuers to coole and cleanse the gall and heart blood as also very good against the stone in the bladder and kidneys and other diseases There is likewise in that countrie a kinde of fruit that groweth in great abundance called Cacao altogether like an almond which is taken out of the huske and couered with a thinne skinne whereof the kernel is diuided into three or foure partes of a darke yellow with blacke veines being harsh in the mouth and of an euill taste but with them is much esteemed whereof being beaten with some of their countrey pepper they make a certaine drinke which they esteeme of great price giuing it vnto great Lordes and such as are their especiall friends as we esteeme of muscadel or maluesie The sea bordering vpon this countrey as also the riuers running through it are ful of fish wherein also they finde diuers Crocodiles as in Egypt the flesh whereof is so much esteemed before al other meates that they account it for a princely dish whereof some are aboue 20. foote long The country is full of hilles and stony rockes and great difference in their speeche so that they hardly vnderstand each other without Interpreters The places wherein the Spaniardes first placed their men were Compostella where the Bishop and the Kings counsell are resident and Colima which they call the Purification in new Galicia is the chiefe Guadalahara and the head or principall part of the kingdome Mecheocan also a Bishops sea Cacatula the towne of Angels a chiefe towne and bishopricke Mâ—xâ— a kingly citie and Queene of al cities in the new world lyeth vpon the border or side of a lake the market place of the Towne lying ful vpon the lake whereby they can not come at it but they must passe ouer bridges This lake is lâ—â—t and is in length sixe lucas or twelue miles and is in breadth tenne miles without fish onely a smal kind that may rather be called wormes than fishes from the which lake in summer time there ariseth such a stiâ—ke and infecteth the ayre in such manner that it is vnwholesome to dwel there notwithstanding it is inhabited by as many marchants as any towne in Europe the cittie is great at the least three miles in compasse wherein are so many temples that it is incredible the particularitte whereof before it be long shal be translated out of Spanish into our mother tongue by the author therof whereunto I referre you Not farre from this cittie lieth an other fresh lake very ful of fish whereon as also vpon the shore lie many townes When this towne was first taken by the Spaniards there raigned a king called Mâ—ntezâ—mâ— being the ninth in degree and as then the towne was but 140. yeares old which is to bee wondered at howe it is possible that so great a citie in so few yeers should be so famous The marchandises that are most carried out of this countrey are golde siluer pearle balsam cochenilia the white roote Macheocan which is good to purge Salla Pariglia and an other roote which maketh men sweate brimstone beasts skinnes and fish And thus much for new Spaine in generall and of Mexico in particular Not minding at this present time to make any longer discourse because that our Carde sheweth little thereof and now returning to our owne Carde you must vnderstand that the lower ende of Cuba hath an out Hooke called P. de Santa Anthonio which is very fitte for to take in fresh water and to calke and mend the shippes Sailing from this hooke sixtie fiue miles to the firme land you come to the hooke of Iucatan which runneth into the sea like a halfe Island Iectetan is in Indian speech I vnderstand you not for that vpon a time when certaine Spaniards put out of the hauen of Saint Anthony to discouer newe countries and arriued in that Island they made signes vnto the people to knowe the name of the country whereuppon the Indians answered them and saide O Tectetan Tectetan that is We vnderstand ye not and so the Spaniards corrupting the name Tectetan call that land Iucatan yet the furthest point therof in their spéech was called â—ecampi This point of Iucatan lyeth vnder 21. degrees vnder the which name a great countrey is comprehended by some called Peinsula that is a place almost compassed about with water for that the further this point reacheth into the sea the broader it is being in the narrowest part 80. or 90. Spanish miles broad for so farre it is from Xicalanco Therefore the sea Cardes that place this land nearer or smaller do erre much for that it is in length from East to West twoo hundred miles being discouered by Francisco Hernandez of Cordua in the yeare of our Lord 1517. but not al of it for that sailing from out of Cuba from Saint Iacobs to discouer new countries or as some say to fetch labourers to trauell in his mines he came about the Island Guanaxos herein called Caguan xâ— to the cape di Honduras where good honest ciuill and simple people dwelt being fishermen hauing no weapons nor vsed to the warres and proceeding further sayled to an vnknowne point of land where hee found certaine salt pannes whereunto he gaue the name of Donne that is women for that there were certaine stone towers with staires chappels couered with wood and straw wherein were placed diuerse Idols that shewed like women whereat the Spaniardes maruelled to finde stone houses which till then they had not seene and that the inhabitants were rich and well apparelled with shirtes and mantles of cotten white and coloured with plumes of feathers and iewels of precious stones sette in golde and siluer their women likewise appareled from the middle downewardes as also on the head and breast which
hauing seene hee stayed not there but went vnto an other poynt which hee named Cotehe where hee met with certayne Fishermen who with feare fled from him into the countrey aunswering or calling vnto him Cotehe Cotehe that is to say home home thinking hee asked them the way into the land whereby this poynt hath holden the name of Cotehe There vpon the sea side they found a great towne which for the greatnesse thereof they called Alkair after a Towne of the same name lying in Egypt yet I thinke it not to be halfe so great as they affirme it to be where by the Inhabitantes they were friendly receiued and being entered into the town they meruelled to see houses with high towers goodly churches paued streets and great trade of marchandise The houses were of hewen and carued stones woâ—kmanlike made and built with chalke but couered with strawe and leaues the chambers within them of tenne or twelue steps high they were likewise apparelled but not with wollen cloth because they had no sheepe but with cotten wouen in diuerse sortes very finely coloured the women likewise apparelled from the middle downe to the foot couering their heads and breasts in diuers sorts very carefully seeking to couer their feete that they might not be seene going diligeÌ„tly to church to which end such as were rich of authoritie had their owne paued stréet from their dores to the church but were Idolaters although they offred men vnto their Idolles yet they did not eate mans flesh They were likewise circumcised but it is not knowne why they vsed it vnlesse it were the diuell that ruled ouer them willed them so to do in their dealings they were vpright and kept their promises they traffiked without mony by bartering specially for cotten and apparell or gownes made therof all without sleeues which is the greatest riches they bring vnto their Lordes and which they carry to Mexico Capo di Honduraâ— and Cuba they haue likewise many Bees hony and ware but they knew not how to vse ware before the Spaniardes came thither golde and siluer mines they had none although the Countrey was a rough sharpe and stonie land yet it is fruitlesse ful of Maâ—z or Turkish wheate and aboundant in fish there was in those Countries before the Spaniardes arriuall at the least foure hundred thousand Inhabiters whereof there are scarce eight thousand left they haue beene so rooted out by the Spaniards some slaine some solde for slaues and carried into wild vnhabited places to see for golde and others by hiding themselues from the cruell Spaniardes Guatimala BY Iucatan inward to the land lieth the prouince of Guatimala wherein there was a towne hauing the name of the Prouince which vppon the eight day of September An. 1541. by meanes of continuall stormes and raine was wholy ouerthrown and destroyed wherein were killed about a hundred and twenty Spaniardes The day before it hapned some of the Indians went vnto the Bishop of Guatimala whose name was Franciscus Masoquin teling him that at the foote of the hill whereon the towne stoode they had heard a most horrible and fearefull noyse whereunto the Bishop answering them saide haue I not often times willed and instructed you not to thinke vppon such thinges and presently after about two houres after midnight there fell an vnmesurable water downe out of the hill that ranne with so great a force that it carried stones and all thinges with it diuers fearefull sightes and horrible cries beeing heard and séene in the aire after the which the Towne was new built placed in a plaine field about 3. miles distant from the place wherein it stood hauing about 80. or 90. houses in it all of free stone couered with tiles In this Prouince are many Earthquakes as Benzo writeth who continued long in those countries otherwise the countrie is of a good and temperate aire fruitful of corne and of trées that were brought out of Spaine thether yet fewe of them prosper onlie Figge trées and Apricockes but the fruit is not very sauorie There are likewise many Cacauaren as touching the Religion and manner of those people they are much like those of Mexico and of Nicaragua whereof I wil speake they likewise deale together but because this Prouince standeth not in our Carde I haue spoken sufficiently thereof Fonduras NExt to Guatimala is the great countrie of Fonduras wherein before it was inhabited by Spaniards there were at the least 410000. Indians whereof there are not at this present nor many yeares since aboue 8000. left aliue part of them slaine by the Spaniards part led Captiues and consumed in their golden mines and part ranne away to hide themselues in desert places and holes vnder the earth so to auoide the Spanish tirranie In this Prouince the spaniards haue erected 5. townes which are not in all aboue 120. or 130. houses most part built of reedes and stâ—aw and at this present not much inhabited because the gold which is their onlie desire beginneth to faile The chiefe of these townes in our Card is named Truxillo of others Trugillum or Turtis Iulia wherein there is a Bishop this Towne is situate vpon a litle hil on the sea side in the north part the rest of the townes shall likewise bee spoken of in the description of the coast And returning againe to the Cape of Iucatan right against it there lieth a most sweete and pleasant Iland by a king named Cozumelaâ— whose ancestors dwelt therein called Cosumell which from the further corner of Cuba Porto di Saâ—nt Anthoniâ— is seuenty miles and from Iucatan fiue miles it is round 45. miles being a flat and euen couÌ„trie very fruitfull they haue gold but it is brought from other places and great abundance of honie and war and all kind of fruits hearbs birds and foure footed beasts for other thinges as Churches Houses streets traffique apparrell and customes altogether like Iucatan some of the houses are couered with straw because they want stones yet there are many stonie places in some places pillers of Marble as they haue in Spaine At the first entrie of the Spaniards into that Iland they were not receaued but after the ruler thereof entertained them very curteouslie and brought them vp into a tower where they erected a Crosse because that they arriued there vpon the 5. of May being as then holie roode day and called the Iland S. Câ—â—s but in our Carde it keeptâ—h the old name In this Tower they found certaine chambers wherin they saw many Idols lying among other Images which they with great noyse called vpon prated vnto offering certaine sweet sauours and incense vnto them as other Idolaters and Heathens vse to doe therein fulfilling their Heathenish Ceremonies they are likewise circumcised From this cape to Rio Grando are 100. miles wherein are contained La Punta de las Mugeres and the Baliya de la Ascention Rio Grando lieth vnder 16. degrees and from thence are 150.
miles to Câ—uo di Camaron which are accounted in this manner first from the great riuer to the hauen of Higueras are 30. miles from Puerto Higueras to the hauen et Puerto di Caualloâ— other thirtie miles This is the second place by the Spaniards diuided into a colonie a dayes iournie from thence lieth Saint Pedro in a plaine field close to certaine hilles being the third Colonie of the Spaniardes not farre from thence runneth the riuer Vilua and the lake in the middle from whence he certaine hard groundes like Ilandes couered ouer with weedes which as the wind bloweth fleet from place to place From Puerto de Cauallas to Puerto del triumpho de la Crus are thirtie miles betweene the which lieth next to Guamareta Saint Iacob and Truxillo From Puerto del triumpho de la Crus to Capo de Honduras are 30. miles and from thence to Cabo del Camaron 20. miles from thence to Cabo de Gatias a dios lying vnder 14. degrées are accounted 70. miles this is likewise a Spanish colonie or towne builded by them and betweene them on the same coast lieth Carthago also a Spanish towne from Gracias a dios are 70. miles to del Aguadera which springeth out of the lake or sea of Nicaragua and is heere called Aguadaco now againe for a time we will leaue speaking of the coast to declare the Prouince and Countrie of Nicaragua Nicaragua DEparting from Fondura and passing the borders of Chiulutecca you come to the Prouince Nicaragua stretching towardes the south sea which is not verie great but rich fruitfull and pleasant but of so vnreasonable a heate that in Sommer time the heate cannot be indured in the day time but only in the night it raineth there for the space of 6. whole monthes together beginning in Maie The other sixe moneths are exceeding drie the day and night being all of a length honny waxe cotton wool and balsam growe there in great aboundaunce and many kindes of fruites which are not found in other prouinces neither yet in Hispaniola nor any other place and among the rest a kind of apple in forme much like a peare within it there is a round nut almost twice as bigge againe as one of our common nuttes very swéete and pleasant of taste the tree is great with small leaues There are few kine but many hogges which were brought out of Spaine to bréede therein The country is ful of Indian villages all with smal houses made of reedes and couered with strawe they haue no mettall yet at the first entraunce of the Spaniards the inhabitants had certaine common and base gold among them which was brought out of other places thither there are many parrats which doe great hurt vnto the seedes and would doe more were it not that they are driuen away by slings and other meanes The Spaniards at their arriuall in those countries by reason of the great abundance of al things called them the Paradise of Mahomet There are many Ginny hennes and a certaine fruit called Cacauate which they vse insteed of mony it groweth on an indifferent great tree and onely in warme and shadowe places as soone as the Sunne commeth vpon it it withereth and therefore it is sowed in woodes vnder trées and in moyst places and al little enough but the trées whereby it is planted must be higher than it and bound close together that they may defend and couer them from the heate of the sunne the fruit is like almonds and being taken out of their shels are couered with a thinne blacke skinne and the piths being taken out it may be diuided into two or thrée partes hauing browne and gray veines but of a hard taste When they make drinke thereof they drie it in a pot by the fire and then bruise it with stones which done they put it in a cullender or potte made with holes mixing it with water and putting thereto a litle of their pepper and so drinke it This drinke is somewhat bitter it cooleth the body not making them drunke and by them throughout all the country it is estéemed for a most pretious thing which they present to men of great account as we do maluesey or hypocrase The maners of this people are not different from those of Mexico they eate mans flesh their clokes and garments are without sléeues they kindle their fire by rubbing two péeces of wood one against an other which is their common custome throughout al India and although they haue great store of waxe yet they knew not how to vse it for that in steede of candles they vsed lights made of pine trée boughes their speech is diuerse but the Mexican spéech is the best and that is furthest knowen for that therewith men may trauell through the country aboue fiftéene hundred miles and is very easie to learne when they daunce they vse a very strange manner for they are at least three or foure thousand together sometimes more according to the number of inhabitants in the fielde where they wil daunce being all together they make the place very cleane then one of them goeth before leading the daunce commonly going backeward turning in and out all the rest following by three and foure together vsing the like apish toyes their minstrels and drummes singing and playing certaine songs whereunto hee that leadeth the daunce aunswereth and after him all the rest some bearing Wayerkens in their hands some rattles ful of stones wherewith they rattle others haue theyr heades al slucke with feathers some their legs and armes bound about with stringes full of shels some ouerthwart and some crooked turning their bodies some opening their legs some their armes some counterfeiting the deafe man and others the blind man some laughing others grinning with many strange deuises they keep their feasts al that day till night drinking nothing but Cocauate The ships that saile ouer the south sea to Nicaragua passe thorow the narow stream about fiue and twenty miles inwards towards the land til they come to a dorp called Reâ—lâ—gio where there are certaine reed houses inhabited by Spaniardes where the ships anker by reason of the good hauen and because of the wood A dayes iourney from this place eastward lieth Legio or Leoâ— the Bishops sea of Nicaragaa standing vpon the border of the lake of Francisco Fernandez as also Granaten and other Spanish townes lying vpon the same lake fifty miles from each other almost at the other ende where the lake issueth into the northerne sea Those two townes are both scarce fourescore houses part made of lime and stone and parte of reedes and strawe Fiue and thirtie miles from Leon lieth a hill that casteth out fire in such abundance that by night they may beholde at the least 100000. sparks of fire flying into the aire many Spaniards are of this opinion that therin must be gold which giueth the fire a continual essence wherby they haue sought many meanes to trie it but al in vaine
and therefore needelesse to rehearse Returning againe to the lake of Nicaragua therein are great fishes and amongest the rest a certaine kinde of fish in Spanish called Manâ— hauing finnes hard by their heades like two hands this fish is almost like an otter of 35. foote long and twelue foote thicke the head and tayle like an oxe small eies hard and hairie skinne of colour light blew with two feete like elophantes feete the sinnes standing out like Kopen feeding their yong ones with their dugges This fish feedeth both on land and in the water they are very familiar with men whereof the Indians tell a most wonderful thing which is that there was a king called Caâ—aâ—amavuis that had taken a yoong Mâ—nate which for the space of six and twenty yeres he kept and broght vp with bread in a lake called Guamabo that bordered vpon his house which fish in time became so tame that he surpassed the dolphin wherof we reade so many histories for that at what time soeuer the kings seruants called him Matto Matto which in Indian spéech is Manisecale or curteous hee would presently come out of the lake and eate meate out of their handes and woulde likewise come out of the water and goe into the house to fetch his meate and there woulde play with the children and when any man was desirous to go ouer the lake he would oftentimes take eight or tenne of them together and swimming beare them lightly on his backe ouer the water in which manner playing with him the Indians kept this fish long time til by some iniury done vnto him he became angry for that vppon a time as a Spaniard would prooue if his skinne were as hard as they reported it to be threw an arrow or dart at him and although it hurt him not yet he felt the sharp point of the arrow and from that time perceiuing that men with beards and in apparel were there they might wel call him but al in vaine for he would neuer come vp againe but in the end when the riuer Aâ—bunicus chaunced to flowe so high that it ranne ouer the bankes and so into the lake Guaniabo the fish folowed the streame and swamme into the sea these kindes of fishes are much seene and taken in that countrey for that their flesh is of a very good taste like hogs flesh which being salted is carried to Nombre de Dios and other places The lake of Nicaragua lyeth not farre from the south sea and about a hundred miles from the north sea running through a riuer that is ful of ships which the Spaniardes called Desaguadera that is falling of water therein Thereabouts in that riuer there are many crocadiles that lay their egges vpon the sands on the riuers sides as bigge as geese egs which being throwne against a stone wil bruised but not breake and in time of hunger are eaten by the spaniards their taste is like a Moschuâ— halfe rotten and by the Indians is accounted for an excellent kinde of meate by Nicaragua the country is rough and sharpe because of the thicke woodes and vneuen hilles where not onely horses but men can hardly passe ouer vnlesse it be with great paine and labour about this countrey for the space of foure months there are certaine Torteâ—ux that doe continue in the sea as also vppon the shoare which lay their egges as the crocadiles doe in the sand vppon the shoare whereof presently by reason of the great heate of the sunne there commeth yoong Torteaux the flesh of this beast being fresh is wholesome and pleasant to eate From Cabo de Gratias a dios to the Rio Grande or Desaguadera as I said before are seuenty miles from Desaguadera to Corobaro are fortie miles from Corobaro to Nombre de Dios fiftie miles betwéene Corobaro and Nombre de dios lieth Veragua and the riuer Swerus these 90. miles lie vnder nine degrees and ½ so that from the poynt of Iucatan to Nombre de Dios are 500. miles As touching the maners of the Indians of Sweren that are about the riuer Swerus dwelling by Veragua they are not much different from the rest onely that they eate no mans flesh in their countrey are many beares tigers and lions that are very fearfull and flee when they see a man there are likewise very great snakes but not venomous and many sea cats there is likewise an other kinde of beast called Cascui in a manner like a blacke pigge hairie with a hard skinne smal eies open eares like an elephant but not ful so open nor hanging down clouen feet and a litle snowt armed like an elephant and of so shril a voyce that it maketh men deafe and is of a good and sauory flesh There is likewise an other wonderful and straunge beast of Gesnerus called a Foxe apâ— on the belly whereof Nature hath formed an other belly wherein when it goeth into any place it hideth her young ones and so beareth them about her This beast hath a body and member like a foxe feete like mens hands or like sea cattes feete eares like a batte it is neuer seene that this beast letteth her yong ones come foorth but when they sucke or ease themselues but are alwayes therein vntil they can gette their own meate also there is another kind of beast called Iguanna or Iuanna not much vnlike our eftes hauing a thing hanging at his chinne like vnto a beard and on her head a combe like a cockes combe vpon his backe certaine sharpe quilles sticking vpright like thornes and amongest the rest some hauing teeth like a sawe with a sharp taile and stretching out sometimes winding like the adder This beast is accounted among the vnhurtfull snakes euery time it layeth it hath fortie or fiftie egs round and as big as a nut whereof the yellow is seperated from the white like hennes egs they are good to eate and very sauory flesh but not roasted either in oyle or butter onely in water this beast feedeth both on land and in the water it climeth trees and is fearful to behold specially to those that knowe not the nature thereof yet it is so gentle quiet that it maketh not any noyse and being taken and bound it liueth at the least tenne or twelue dayes without meate it is of a good and sauoury flesh and is kept for likorishnesse specially the women onely such as haue had the pox if they eate it their paine reneweth Nombre de Dios. NOmbre de Dios is a towne of traffike lying on the north sea so named by Diego de Niquesa a Spaniard that had indured some hard fortune and landing in that hauen with the rest of his men saide â—n Nombre de Dios that is in the name of God and so began his worke againe which before he did pretend and there erected certaine houses giuing the place the name aforesaid this towne lieth east and west vpon the sea side in the middle of a very
water wherein they stay the gold which is in great grains it was discouered by Roderigo de Bastidas in the yeere of our Lord 1502. And within two yeares after by Giouanni de la Cosa And then againe in the yeare of our Lorde 1509. by Don Ancisus and after him followed Alonso de Hoieda who desiring to discouer their sands or barter with the inhabitants as also to learne their speech and to know the riches of the country sought to come acquainted with them but the Indians withstoode them and determined to fight wherewith the Spaniardes shewed signes of peace causing an interpreter that Franciscus Pizairo had brought from Vraua to speake vnto them saying that hée and his companions the Spaniards were christians peaceable and quiet people and such as hauing by long voyages passed the great Ocean seas had as then need of all necessary prouisions and of golde desiring them to barter the same with them for other costly wares which they had neuer seene Wherevnto the Cariben of Zenu answered them that it might well be they were such quiet people but yet they shewed not the signs of peace and therefore they willed them presently to departe out of their countrey for they saide they were not minded to be mocked by them neither meant they to indure an enemies or straungers weapon within their country Wherevpon D. Ancisus replying answered them and saide that he could not with honour depart from thence before he hadde deliuered his message vnto them for the which he was sent thither making a long oration thereby to perswade them to the christian faith grounded onely vpon one God maker of heauen and earth and of all creatures therein in the end telling them that the holy Father the Pope of Rome Christs lieutenant throughout al the world hauing absolute power ouer mens soules religion had giuen their countrey to the mighty king of Spaine his master that he was purposely sent thither to take possession thereof wishing them therefore not to oppose themselues agenst him if they meant to become christians and subiects to so great a Prince onelie paying a small yeerely tribute of golde Whereunto they in iesting manner and smiling aunswered much after the same manner as it is written of Attabalipa that they liked well of his proposition touching one only God but as then they were not minded to argue therof neyther yet to leaue their religion that the Pope might well bee liberall of other mens goods that belonged not to him or at least that he should giue that which was in his power to deliuer as also that the king of Spaine was either very poore to desire that which was none of his or very bold to seeke that which he knew not and that if he came to inuade their countrey they would set his head vpon a stake as they had done manie other enemies his like but the Spaniardes not esteeming their words entred vpon the land and ouercame them From the gulfe Vraba to Carthagena are 70. miles betweene the which two places the hauens and riuers aforesaide do lie the partition being passed ouer as also Puerto de Naos that is the hauen of Ships it is from Carthagena to S. Martha fiftie miles Carthagena CArthagena was so named because that in the mouth of the hauen there lieth an Island in Indian speech called Codego as also new Carthago in Spaine Scombria or els bicause al the Spaniards dwelling therin came out of the Cittie of Carthago in Spaine the Island is about two miles long and a mile broad When the Spanyardes came first into that countrey they found it ful of Fishermen whereof at this time they can hardly find any remnant which is not to be wondered at for that not onely in this prouince but in al the other Islands wherin the Spaniards haue béene there is hardly any Indians left because the Indians as long as possibl they might wold neuer haue any dealings with the Spaniardes because of their tyranny This Countrey is rich of fish fruites and all kinde of victualles necessary for men they couer their priuy members with clothes of cotten wooll both men and women go to the wars for in the yeere of our Lorde 1509. as a Spaniard called Martinus Amisus made warre vppon those of Zenu bordering vpon Carthegena hee tooke an Indian woman of the age of twenty yeeres that with her owne hands hadde slaine 28. Christians their arrowes are poysoned and they eate their â—nueâ—â—tes flesh and spoiled many Spanyards at their feasts which in times past they vsed to hold they beautifie their bodies in the best maner they can deuise with iewells and golden bracelets mingled with pearles and stones called smaragdes wearing them about their faces armes legges and other parts of their bodies their chiefe merchandises are salt fish and pepper which groweth in great abundance all along the coast it is of forme long and sharper than the â—st Indian pepper and much sweeter and pleasanter of smell than the common Braâ—ilia pepper which wares they carrie into such places as want it where they barter for other things before they were vnder the subiection of the Spaniards they had many kindes of fruites and trees cotten wooll feathers golde bracelets gold many pearles smaragdes slaues and diuers rootes wherwith they traffiked bartering them without any respect desire or couetousnes vsing these wordes Take this and giue me some other ware for it but no ware was more esteemed with them than victualles but now they likewise beginne to couet after golde and other thinges whiche they haue learned of the Spaniards Benzo in his second booke of the Indian historie and fift chapter sheweth a notable example saying that vpon a time he being very hungry went into an Indians house praying him to sel him a chickin and the Indian askt him what hee would giue him he pulling foorth a spanish riall of siluer gaue it him which the Indian taking helde betweene his teeth and saide Then I perceue you would haue my victualles and giue mee that which no man can eate neither is it of any account therefore take you your peece of siluer and I wil keep my victualls Betweene Carthagena and saint Martha there runneth a great swift riuer called Rio Grande which standeth in our Carde which issueth with such force into the Sea specially in winter that it beats the stream of the sea backe againe whereby the shipps that passe by it may easily take in water Sayling vpwardes into this riuer to the kingdome of Bogota by the Spaniards called Granada there are certaine mines of emeraldes found in the valley of Tunia in this Carde called Tomana whereabouts the spaniards haue builded new Carthage The inhabitantes of the valley of Tunia and the people bordering on the same doe worship the sunne for their chife god with such reuerence that they dare not stare or once looke stedfastly vpon it they likewise worship the Moone but not so much as the
sun in their wars insteed of Ancients they tie the bones of certaine men who in their liues were valiaunt in armes vppon long staues and so carry them before them to incorage others to be the like and make them the readier to fight Their weapons are arrowes pikes made of palme tree wood and stone swordes They bury their kings with golden neckelaces sette with emerauldes and with bread and wine wherof the Spaniards haue foūd many such graues which they haue opened The people that dwell vpon the aforesaid great riuer are all Caniballs or Caribes as also those that dwell about saint Martha and in time past were Caribes The inhabitants of the Islandes of Boriquen Dominico Matitini Cibuchine now called saint Croce and Guadalupe as it is already declared which rowe on the water with scutes made of a certayn wood called Canois and that fought against those of Hispaniola and the people of the firme land whome they spoyled and eate The common opinion is that they came first out of the firme land of Caribana by Vraba and from Nombre de Dios in Indian speech called Caribes and all strong and valiaunt menne are nowe by them called Caribes which are very expert in bowes and arrowes The Brasilians name them Prophets or Soothsayers and Caribes Priests The people inhabiting in the valley of Tunia poison their arrowes and before the Spaniards ouercame them they hadde continuall warres against the people of Bagota or Bogota they are good souldiers cruel and very reuengeatiue when they goe to warres they carry their Idoll Chiappen with them as a iudge of the victorie vnto whome before they enter into the field they offer many sacrifices and offerings of certaine liuing men béeing the children of slaues or of their ennemies painting all the Image with bloud which doone they doe eate the flesh when they retourned victorious they helde great feasts with dauncings leapings and singings some drinking themselues druncke and agayne besmeering their Image with blood and being ouercome they were sorrowfull and heauy seeking by new sacrifices to intreats theyr Chiappen that hée woulde helpe and assist them and send them victory against theyr enemies S. Martha SAint Martha is also a Towne and Hauen of the Spaniardes lying on the firme land vnder eleuen degrees on the north side of the Equinoctial line about fiftie Spanish miles from Carthagena it lieth at the foote of certayne hills so monstrous high that it is incredible howe in so great extreame heate so great quantitie of snowe should lie vpon the toppes of those hills which is seene a great way off and whereby the hauen is knowne This country was discouered and taken by Roderigo de Bastidas in 1524. where it cost him his life not by the enemy but by his owne men that when he was asleepe killed him and gaue him fiue woundes in his body The people of this country are so cruell and fierce that they haue oftentimes driuen the Spaniards from their countrey not caring for the shippes but running into the sea till the water mounted as high as their breasts shooting with thousandes of poysoned arrowes and neuer would giue ouer were it not by meanes of the great shot together with the cries of such as were afraid and ran away thinking them to be thunder claps which oft times happen in those countries by reason of the euennesse of the countrey with the height of the hills The compasse of this hauen is three Spannish miles and so cleere that they may see stones lying on the ground within the water although it is at the least twentie elles deepe into this hauen there floweth twoo running waters but not fit for great ships but onely for little boates cut out of peeces of wood it is a great pleasure to heare what they report of the great numbers and goodnes of the fishes that are taken thereabouts both in fresh and salt water for the which cause they found many Fishermen thereabouts with many nettes made of packethreede hanging on cotten ropes which was their greatest liuing for that for fish they had whatsoeuer they desired of their neighbours In this country they found saphires emerauldes calcedonies iaspers amber brasil wood golde and pearles that is in the two prouinces Caramaira and Sacurma wherein the two hauens Carthagena and S. Martha do lie Caramaira is a very fruitfull and pleasant countrey wherein there falleth neither hard winter nor ouer hote summer day and night being there almost of a length The Spaniardes hauing taken in this country found gardeins ready planted moystned with strange waters like the gardeins in Italie their common meate is Ages luca Maiz Batatas and some fruites of trees such as other Indians therabouts do vse they eate fish also and mans flesh but not often Ages are rootes of the greatnesse of long turnopes in Italie pleasant of taste not much vnlike chesnuttes which they vse in banquets insteede of fruit Iuca is also a kinde of roote whereof they do make bread the Iuca that groweth in Cuba Hayti other Ilands is very hurtful being eaten raw and to the contrary that of S. Martha is very wholsome being otherwise eaten it is very good of taste these roots are planted not sowne which being ripe are as great as a mans arme or the smal of his leg ripeneth in halfe a yere but if it stand two yéeres in the ground it maketh better bread being ripe they are prest betweene 2 stones wherby the sap runneth forth which is very hurtful in the Islands vnlesse it be sodden as we doe milke otherwise being drunke of men or beasts it kills them as being a strong poison but sod till it consumeth to the half so let stand til it be cold it may be vsed insteede of vineger being sod til it be thick it becoms sweet like hony so they vse it in the firm land being raw for drink and sodden for vineger hony I said in the firme land for that in the Islands it is very dangerous venomous of the material substance of the roote being prest which is like almonds that are stampt they make round cakes as big as dollars which they bake is their Cacaui or bread wherewith they so long haue norished themselues this bread is somwhat harsh in the throat if it be not tempered with water or mixed with other meate Yet I had rather eate bread made of Maiz that is Brasilia wheate for that it giueth no lesse sustenance than our wheate is very wholsome agreeing with y e stomak wherof they make bread as we do of wheat Batatas are also common in great aboundance in this country which are roots of the thicknesse of a mans arme some smaller pleasant of taste and procuring good norishment yet they cause wind vnlesse you rost thē then they loose that effect specialy when they are eaten with any good wine of these rootes they also make conserues not much vnlike that which
is made of Quinces and cakes with other such kinds of deuises At this time there are many of them in Spaine whence they are likewise brought into our countries Those that are desirous to reade more hereof let them peruse the Writers of the new World or the bookes of the learned doctor Carolus Clusius which writeth therof at large from whence this is taken In S. Martha is great traffike for fish cotten feathers their houses are of earth hanged with mattes made of â—esen and of diuers colours they haue many couerlets of cotten wherin are wouen the figures of Tigers Lions Eagles and such like From Saint Martha to the Cape de la Vela that is the cape of the saile are 50. miles this cape lieth vnder 12. degrees is 100. miles from S. Dominico betweene S. Martha and the cape de la Vela lie these places Cape de la Guia the point of the needle or of the compasse Ancon de Gacha an open hauen of Gacha Rio de Palominas the riuer of Palominas Rio de la Hacha the riuer of the Tocrtse Rio de Pâ—edras the riuer of Stones Laguna de S. Iuan the lake of S. Iohn From the Cape de la Vela to Coquiâ—ocoa are fortie miles in our Carde it is placed with twoo words diuided which should be but one Thâ—s is another point lying on the same corner behinde the which beginneth the gulte of Venâ—zâ—elâ— which in compasse and breadth is from the cape of S. Roman eightie miles Porete Venezuela little Venice THe whole coast from the Cape de la Vela to the gulfe of â—arâ—â— was discouered by Christophero Coâ—anâ—o in An. 149â— and the first gouernour of Venezuela was a hâ—gh Duchman called Andâ—â— sius Aâ—mgâ— who in the name of Welâ—ren trauaâ—â—ed into those countries the Emperour hauing besieged their towne in the yeare of our Lorde 1518. and died of a wound giuen him by a poysoned arrow and most of his men dyed for hunger after they had eaten dogs and some Indians flesh it is a Bâ—shoprâ—cite the towne being called Venezuela because it is binlded in the water vpon an euen rocke which water and lake is called Mâ—â—acaâ—â—o and by the Spaniards Lagâ— di Nostra Dâ—nna the women of this place are preuder better mannered then others of the prouâ—ces thereabouts they painte their brests and armes al the rest of their bodies are naked only their priuities which they couer with certain deaths which to leaue off were great shame vnto theÌ„ likewise if any man should lift it vp he shuld do them great 〈◊〉 dishouor The maides are knowne by their colour the greatnes of their girdles that they weare which is a certaine signe oâ— their maidenhead The men carrte theyr members in a shell they prâ—â— to Idols and to the diuel whom they paint in such a â—riue as he instructeth them or as hee the â—â—d himselfe vnto them In warres they vse poysoned arrowes pikes of fiue and 〈◊〉 â—â—â—â—ful long kniues of reedes great tâ—â—â—â—s made of barks of trees and also of 〈◊〉 Their priests which also are Phâ—â—â—tions aske the sicke person by whom they are sent for if they certainly beleeue that they 〈◊〉 help them and then lay their hands vpon the place where they say theyr paines â—â—postumes or swellings are crying or calling out and if it fortune that they heale not they put the fault either in the sicke person or in their gods and in thâ—s sort their Phâ—â—tions deale with them In the â—â—â—ht time they mourne for theyr Lords which is singing certaine songs in their commendations that done they roast them and beate them to smal pouder which them drink in wine which among them is a great honour From Venezuela to Câ—â— S. Roman is eighty miles and from S. Roâ—â—n to Golfo Triste are fiftie miles wherein lyeth Curiana Curiana CVriana hath a hauen like that of Callice in Spaine where on the shore there are about eight houses but not farre from thence within the land there was a vâ—llage full of people that went naked but very friendly for ple innocent and familar and receiued the Spaniards wâ—th great ioy and for pinnes néedles Lels glasses and beads they gaue them many strings of pearles receiuing them into their houses seruing them with al kinds of meates and for foure pinnes gaue them a peacocke for two pins a phesant for one pinne a turtle doue or house pigeon for a stone gâ—â—sse or a pin or two a gooâ—â— they asking them what they would do with the pinnes seeing they were naked they said they were good to pick their teeth and for the belles they tooke great delight to heare them ring the country is very ful of the birdes before rehearsed also of hartes wilde swine and cennies of colour and greatnesse like our hares which birdes and deeres flesh is their meate as also the pearle oysters whereof thereabouts are great aboundance and much eaten they are al very sâ—â—ful in shooting at wild beasts and birds their beates are hewed out of a peece of hard wood but not so well proportioned as those of the Canniballes and in Hâ—spaniâ—lâ— which they call Gallâ—â—s their houses are made of wood and couered with palme 〈◊〉 â—â—ues wherein when they are at resâ— thâ—â— may easily heare the fearefull cries of wilde beasts which hurt not any man for 〈◊〉 inhabitants go al naked and without campany into the wooddes onely with their beâ—â—s and arrowes and not it was neuer heard that any of them was euer slaine or deuoured by wild beasts They likewise brought the Spaniardes as many hartes and wilde swine as they desired all killed with theyr arrowes their breade is of rootes or Maiz like other Indians the people haue blacke and halfe curled hayre and somewhat long they make their teeth white with an hearb which all the day they chawe in their mouthes which hauing chawed they spâ—tte out againe washing their mouthes The women are better for keeping of a house than to labour in the fieldes and the men vse to worke in the groundes and to hunt also to goe to warres to dance and to play In their houses they haue many earthen vessels as cups pots such like which are brought them from other places They keepe certayne yéerely fayres euery one carrying to ech other such things as they want They weare strings of pearles about their necks as common as the countrey women in Italie weare cristall beades whereon hangeth many beastes and birdes made of base gold like Rheins gold which is brought vnto them from Carichieta sixe dayes iourney from thence towardes the south and when the Spaniardes asked of them where they had the golde they made signes which way shewing them it was in an other countrey beyond them but counselled them not to go thither saying they were Canniballes and such as eate mans flesh The men bore a goard which they weare for a codpeece and tie about their middles with a
string hiding their members therein or in a Snakes shel the rest of theyr bodies are al naked Thus much for the customes and manners of Curiana Betweene the Cape of Saint Roman and Golfo Triste lieth Core Taratara and P. Secco From Golfo Triste to Cariari are a hundred miles the coast lying vnder tenne degrees betweene them lieth manie hauens and riuers specialy Puerto di Canna Fistola P. Fleâ—chado that is the point where they were shotte at with arrowes Punto Muerte the dead hauen Cabo de Ioan Blanco the cape of Iohn White Cabo la Colhera Rio Dunari Illa de Pirico Maracapana Chelheribiche St. Fee that is holy Faith Rio de Cumana Punta D'araâ—a Câ—mâ—â— and Maracapana along by the coasts aforesaid lie many Islands as Moines that is the Isle of Moonks Quiracao Buenaire Good Ayre Rocques or Roca Stone Rockes de Aues the Birds Tortuga Torteaux and then Cubagna or Margaritha the Isle of Pearles A certaine description of Maracapana and Cumana CVmana signifieth a Prouince and a Riuer wherin there is a towne and a cloister of grey Friers because of the great numbers of pearles that are found thereabouts The people of this countrey went naked onely that they couered their members eyther in a gorde or Snakes shels or else with bandes of reedes or cotton wooll in wars they weare mantles and decke themselues with feathers at feasts and bankets they paint themselues or else stroke themselues ouer with certaine gum and salues that be clammy wherein they sticke feathers of all colours which is no ill sight they cut their haire aboue their eares and if any haire grow vpon their knees or on their faces they pul them out and will haue no haire vpon any place of their body although they are by nature most of them without beards or haire and such as let their haire grow after the Spanish manner they call them beasts these people make great meanes to make their teeth blacke and such as haue them white they esteeme them to be women because they take no paines to make them blacke which they do with the powder or sap of a certaine hearbe by them called Hay or Gay which leaues are very soft like turpentine leaues and in fashion like Mortella being of the age of 15. yeers and that their courages began to rise they begin to beare those leaues in their mouths and to chaw them vntil their teeth become as blacke as coles which blacknesse continueth vntill they die which likewise preserueth the teeth from rotting spoyling or any paine they mire the powder of that leafe with another sort of powder of a kinde of wood and with chalk of white shells burned in which sort those of the East Indies vse their betele and Arrecca with chalke of oysters which is already declared in the description of the East Indies the powder of these leaues woodde and chalke they beare continually in their mouthes still chawing it which they keepe in basketts and boxes made of reedes to sel and barter the same in the markets round about them for gold slaues and cotten and for other wares al the maides goe naked only they weare certaine bandes about their knees which they binde very hard that their hips and thighes may seeme thicke which they estéeme for a beauty the married women weare shooes and liue very honestly and if they commit adultery they are forsaken by their husbands punished The lords and rich men of the country haue as many wiues as they list and if any man come to their houses to lodge they giue them one of the fairest to lie by them the rest haue but one and some none the women till the land and looke to the house and the men not being in the warres doe fish and hunt they are highminded reuengeatiue and hastie their chiefe weapons are poysoned arrowes which they prepare in diuers maners as with the blood of snakes the iuice of hearbes and mixtures of many other things whereby there is no means to heale such as are once wounded therewith The children women and men from their youth vpwards learne to shoote in bowes their meate is horsleaches battes grashoppers creuishes spiders bees and rawe sodden and rosted lice they spare no liuing creature whatsoeuer but they eat it which is to be wondered at considering their country is so wel replenished with good bread wine fruite fish and all kinde of flesh in great aboundance whereby it commeth that these people haue alwaies spots in their eyes or else are dimme of sight which some notwithstanding impute to the propertie of the water in the riuer of Cumana they close their gardens or lands with cotteÌ„ yarne by them called Bexuco placing it about the height of a man and among them it is accouÌ„ted for a great offence if any man should venter either to climbe ouer or creep vnder that cotten holding for certaine that whosoeuer doth teare it shal die presently after it The men of Cumana as I said before are much giuen to hunting wherein they are verie skilful They hunt and kil Lions Tigers Goates Ileren Hogs and al other kinde of foure footed beasts which they kil with bowes or take with nettes There are likewise in these prouinces many verie strange beasts part whereof are alreadie described and part not he therefore that desireth further instruction heerein let him reade the Spanish historiografers that write larger The women as I said til the ground sow Maiz and all kinde of corne plant Batates and other trees watering them specially the Hay wherewith they make their teeth blacke they plant trées which being cutte there issueth a white liquour like milke which changeth into a sweete gumme verie good to smell vnto They plant likewise other trees called Guareâ—ma whereof the fruit is like a Mulberie but somewhat harder whereof they make a certaine kinde of sodden Must which healeth colde and out of the wood of the same tree they make fire They haue another kind of high and sweete smelling trée which seemeth to be Cedar whereof the wood is verie good to make chests cases by reason of the sweetnesse of the wood good to keep things in but putting bread into them it becommeth so bitter that it is not to be eaten the wood is likewise good to make ships for that it neuer consumeth in the water by wormes or any other meanes There are other trees from whence they haue lime wherewith they gette birdes and annoint their bodyes therewith wherein they stick feathers The land of it selfe bringeth forth Cassia but they eate it not neither knowe how to vse it There are so many Roses and sweete flowers in that countrey that the smel thereof maketh mens heades to ake in smel exceeding muske wormes as grashoppers Caterpillers and such like there are verie manie which destroy the seed There are likewise vains of sea coles burning like pitch whereof they make great profite Thus much concerning the fruitfulnesse of the countrey their
manners and customes in planting hunting c. Besides this these people take great pleasure in twoo things that is dancing and drinking often times spending eight dayes together in banquetting dancing and drinking themselues drunke besides their ordinarie dancings and meeting together at the feasts and coronations of their Kings and Lordes or in common assemblies and publike bankets many of them meete together euerie one drest in a seueral maner some with crowns of feathers others with shelles or fruits about their legges like Iuglers heere in our countrey vsing al kinds of toyes and deuices some straight others crooked some backwards some forwards grinning laughing counterfetting the deafe blind and lame man fishing weauing and doing al kinde of workes and that for the space of fiue or sixe howres together for that hee which continueth longest in that manner is the best man and he that drinketh wel is a lustie fellow hauing danced they sitte down crosse legged like a Taylor and make good cheare drinking themselues drunke at the kings charges of which their dancing I haue spoken in another place so that to speake any more thereof it were needlesse They are great Idolaters praying to the Sunne and the Moone thinking them to bee man and wife and to be great Gods They feare the Sunne verie much when it thundereth or lightneth saying that it is angry with them they fast when there is any eclipse of the Moone specially the women for the married women plucke theyr haires and scratch their faces with theyr nailes thâ— maides thrust thornes of fishes into their armes and therwith draw bloud thinking that when the Moone is in the full they thinke it is to be shot or hurt by the sunne by reason of some anger or greefe he hath conceiued against it when any blazing star appeereth they make a great noise with Drummes and hallowing thinking by that meanes it will bee gone for they thinke a blazing starre signifieth some great hurt or euill fortune Among many Idols and figures which they honour and inuoke for Gods they haue a certaine thing like a Burguinion Crosse which they hang vpon their new borne children thinking thereby they are preserued in the night from all euill things Their priests are called Pâ—aces who in those countries haue the maiden-heades of their Daughters when they marrie Their office likewise is to heale the sicke and to say truth to call vppon the the diuel and to conclude they are skilful in the blacke art and coniurers They heale with hearbes and rootes both sodden and raw beaten and miâ—â—ed with fat of birdes fish or beasts with wood and other things vnknowne to the simple men vsing certain darke wordes and sentences which they themselues do not vnderstand They sucke and sicke the place where the paineâ—s therby to draw out the euil humours and if the paine or feuer increaseth the priests say that their patients are possessed with euil spirits wherewith they rubbe their bodyes all ouer with their handes vsing certaine wordes of coniuracion and charmes sucking after that very hard often making them beleeue that by that meanes they cal the spirit which done they take a certaine wood wherof no man knoweth the vertue but onely themselues wherewith they rub their mouthes and throats so long vntil they cast al whatsoâ—uâ—r they haue within their stomackes and with so great force that ofteÌ„ times they cast forth bloud mean time stamping stammering calling and knocking with theyr feete against the earth with a thousande other toyes needlesse to rehearse Cubâ—gua or Margaritha CVbagua or Margaritha is the Island of pearles and is in compasse three miles lying vnder twelue degrees and a halfe vpon the north side of the Equinoctiall line foure miles from the point 〈◊〉 a countâ—â— wherein there is much salt although the grounde is both flat and euen yet it is vnfruitfull and drie both without water and trees and wherein there is little els found then onely Comes and some Sea foules The inhabitants paint theyr bodies they eate the oysters wherein the Pearles are founde and fetch all their fresh water from the firme land giuing pearles for it there is not any Island in the world so smal as it is that hath raised so much profit and made both the inhabitants and strangers rich as this hath doone for that the pearles which in few yeares hath bin brought from thence doe amount vnto aboue two millions of gold although thereby many Spaniards and slaues haue lost their liues From the point â— Arya to the Cape de Salines that is to the poynte of the Salt pans are seuentie miles between them lyeth Caâ—be and the Cape de tres Puntas which is the Cape of three poynts from the Cape de Salines to Punto Auegado that is the drowned hauen are more then seuentie miles and the ceast running along by the gulfe of Paâ—a the lande maketh with the Island Trinidad Paria IN the mouth of the gulfe of Paria lyeth the Island la Trinidad taking the name from a certaine promise made by Columbus in his second voyage in An. 1497. being in danger or because he first perceiued three hilles seeking for fresh water his people in a maner dying with thirst The mouth of this gulf was called os Draconis y t is the Dragons mouth because of the great streame that runneth therein The whole countrey and shore of Paria stretching towardes the South is the goodliest country in all India and the fruitfullest as Benzo and Columbus both doe witnesse so that by some it is called the earthly Paradice it is a great flatte and euen land ouerflowing and aboundant of all things alwaies bring forth flowers of sweete and vnsweete sauour The trees continually greene as it were in May or lent but not many fruitfull or wholsome trees and in some places thereof is great aboundance of Cassia Fistula the whole countrey is generally hot and moist whereby there are diuers wormes among the which are many Mytes which by night fall verie heauily vpon the people and many grashoppers that doo much hurt the inhabitants beare there members in a goord or reede as it were in a sheath letting their stones hang out before the Spaniards came into the countrey they wore such kind of codpeeces bordered with gold pearles and such like things which custome the Spaniards made them to leaue the marrted women couer their secret parts with an apron by them called Pampanillas and the maides tie a peece of cotten before their bellies their kings haue as many wiues as they will yet one of them is accounted for the right Queene and hath commandement ouer all the rest the common people haue three or foure as they think good and when they are olde they put them away and take yong for them They likewise let theyr Piacchos or priests he with their gentlewomen and their maids the first night of the marriage This people as also most part of the Indians maintaine themselues
with fish and wine made of Maâ—z which is with them in â—eede of corne and also with other fruits and rootes as all the rest of the Caribes do and some eate Lice Apes Meerecats Frogs Wormes and such vnprofitable things as those of Cumana they vse a kinde of salue to make their teeth black like those of Cumana which is made in this maner they take shels wherein the pearles are sound with the leaues of the trée called Axis the fruit of the which tree they eate continually al the yeare like sauce or pepper which they burne together and beeing burnt they put a little water vnto it wherwith the white looketh like chalke with the which salue they make their teeth as black as coles and therewith preserue them from ach their bodyes are painted red and blacke with colours made of the iuice of Hearbes and the filthier it sheweth the fairer they estéeme it to bee Their beddes are like nettes made of cotten which they make fast to twoo bordes and therein they sleepe Sleeping in the fields they haue on the one side of their beddes a fire to warme them in the night their weapons are arcowes made either of reeds or palme wood whereon they putte sharpe stones or bones in place of iron which they smeere with pitch which is a most cruel poyson made of rootes hearbs Antes fruites and certaine stinking iuice which the olde women do verie diligently seethe with snakes bloud with the venimous aire whereof many of them die while they seethe it if any man be strucken with an arrow that is new dipt therein theyr bodye presently swelleth and they die with al speede in a manner rauing and when the poyson is olde it looseth the greatest parte of the strength the remedie against such poyson is to thrust a hot burning iron into the wound all the slaues that the Spaniards take out of this country they carrie them into the countrey of Cubagâ—a burning them in the foreheades with a letter C. whom they keepe for fishers or pearles by which meanes many of them are carried out of the Island whereby at this present it is almost desolate for that the fishing for pearle is there almost clean done and the gold consumed which maketh the Spaniards not to esteeme of that place Hereafter followeth the description of the coast of Paria to the straights of Magellanes FRom Punto Anegado which lyeth vnder eight degrees are fiftie miles to Rio Dulce which lieth vnder sixe degrees from Rio Dulce that is the sweet riuer to Râ—ode Oâ—ellana which is called Rio de la Amazones is 110. miles so that there is accounted eight hundred Spanish miles or 3200. Italian from Nombre de Dios along to the coast of the Riuer Orellana which cunneth into the sea as it is saide hauing fiftéene miles in the breadth of the entrie and most vnder the Equinoctial line From this Riuer I will shew the coast as it lieth yet first I must tel you the riuers their names that lie betweene it and Punâ—o Anegado first Rio Grando the great Riuer then Rio Dulce the sweete riuer Rio de Canoas the Riuer of Canos Canoas are scutes by the Indians made out of peeces of wood which they make hollow and therewith they fish in the riuers Capo de Corrientes the point of the streame Aldea the village Capo de los Farillonâ—z the point of the cliffes Rio de Ancones the riuer of the open hauens Rio de Lagaâ—tos the riuer of y e Crocadiles Rio de vincente Pâ—â—zon Rio de Cacique the K. riuer for Cacici in Indian speech is Kings Costa Braua the wild poynt Capo de Corrientes Rio de Caribes the riuer of Caribes or eaters of men Rio de Canoas Rio de Arboledas the riuer of bowes Rio de Montanna the riuer of the hill Rio Apercellado the riuer of the Bankes Bayha de Canoas the bay of Canaos or Scutes Atalaya sentinel or watch Rio dos Fumos y e riuer of Smoke Rio de Pracellet y e riuer of banks Capo de North the North point And there being past that point the great riuer Oregliana in Spanish Orellana runneth forth which 〈◊〉 the greatest riuer in India or in all the world some called this riuer the sweete sea it is at the mouth or entrie fifteene Spanish miles broade there are some that said this riuer and the Riuer of Maragnon which hereafter shall follow haue all one head or spring from Quito by Mullubamba then this riuer runneth vnder the Equinoctial line at the least 1500. spanish miles as Orellian his companions recite that came out of Peru from the south sea cleane ouerwhart the countrey through this riuer with great hunger much trouble and so entred into the north sea not that it runneth straight outright but crooking and compassing in and out which maketh it so long a iourney for that from the head of this riuer to the sea it is but seuen hundred Spanish miles to trauaile right forth ouer the country This Riuer within the land is in some places foure and some fiue miles broade making many Islands The common opinion is that vpon this riuer there dwelleth women that burne off their right breasts that they be not hundred therby to shoote in bowes which they vse in the warres by the ancient writers they were called Amazons and had a great parte of Asia vnder theyr subiection from the riuer Orellana to the Riuer Marannon or Maragnon are 100. miles which in the mouth or entry is 15. miles broad lyeth vnder 3 degrees on the southside of the Equinoctial line in it also are many Island thereabouts likewise there groweth good Frankensence which is esteemed better then that of Arabia there also were founde certain Emeralds and tokens of gold with other riches They make wine of diuers kinds of fruit specially of great dates in quantity as big as spanish Quinces which is verie good may be kept the men weare iewels at their eares and thrée or foure rings through their lips which they likewise sâ—t as a beautifying vnto them they sleep in beds stretched abroad and made fast to trees a good height from the ground without any couerlets as all the Indians from Nombre de Dios so to the straights of Magellana vse to do There are in this riuer filthy flies which make men lame being bitten or stinged by them vnlesse they doo presently pul out the stings there are many of opinion that this Riuer Mâ—ragnon and the aforesaide Riuer of Orellana doo both spring out of the countrey of Peru but no man knoweth the certaintie thereof From Maranhon to tetra de Humos or Fumous that is the country of Smoke where the line parteth is 100. miles from thence to Angla di S. Lucar are 100. miles and from thence to Cabo de S. Augustin lying vnder 8. degrées and a halfe on the South side of the Equinoctial line are 70. miles the length of the
coast from the riuer of Maragnon to Cabo de S. Augustin is as followeth first an Island called Isla de S. Sebastian Acencâ—o Ascension P. de Pracell the hauen of Bankes P. de Corrientes the hauen of the Streame Rio de Ilâ—ieo the riuer of y e Islands Costa Branca the white coast Rio de Coroa the riuer of the Crowne Cabo del este the Easter coast Rio des Lixos the riuer of filth Rio dos Reciffes the riuer of cliffes Rio S. Miguel the riuer of saint Michael Bahya dos â—ortugos the Riuer of Torteeux Grand Bahya the great Bay Cabo de S. Roque the point of S. Roche Cabo de S. Raphael the poynt of S. Raphael Baya de Traicam the Bay of Treason Paraiba os Petiguares Pernambuco the Cape of S. Augustin was discouered in An. 1500. by Vincentio Ianes Pinzon in the first month of the yeare Brasilia NOw followeth the East prouince of America or of Peruana commonly called Brasil the which was most discouered by the Portingales and by them subdued and brought vnder subiection they had therein from North to south 40. miles and from East to West 160. miles which stretching along by the coast is more then 700. miles This country hath the name of Brasilia by reason of the great aboundance of red brasil wood which from thence is brought into these countryes in this countrey are manie prouinces and sundrie people some subiect to the Portingales some to the Frenchmen as Margaâ—atan Tabaâ—arren Ouetaâ—aten Tououpiâ—ambaultiem and Morpions all cruel Indians and most of them Canibals whereof in the description of the coast we make mention not far from the Cape S. Augustin lyeth Pernambuco a place where the Portingales haue great traffike for sugar and Brasil wood This cape lyeth vnder eight degrees and a halfe on the south side of the Equinoctiall line and was discouered by Vincente Ianes Pinzon in the yeare of our Lord 1500. in the moneth of Ianuary and is the neerest place to Affrica or Spain of al the country of America for y t it is accounted but 500. miles from this pointe to Cabo Verde in Affrica the common reckoning of the sea Cards yet some esteeme it to be lesse From this cape to Baia de todos Sanctos lying vnder 13. degrees are 100. miles between the which two places I let passe S. Alexio S. Miguel Rio de Aguada that is the riuer of watering Rio di Francisco Rio de cana Fistola because in that place there groweth much Cassia such as is in Egypt Rio Real the kings riuer Rio de Tapuan A. Pouoacam the village or commom assemblie c. after the which followeth the Baya de todos Sanctos From this bay to the Cape dos Abrollios or dos Baixos that is the Cape of the droughts which lieth vnder 18. degrees are 100. miles and between them lieth these places Rio de S. Giano that is the riuer of S. Iulian os Ilhos the Islands Rio de S. Antonio Rio de S. Crus P. Seguro the sure hauen Rio de Brasil Rio de Caruelas c. Margaiates MArgaiates are certaine people mingled with the Portingales are Canibals the country wherin they dwel is gran both in winter and summer as it is with vs in May and Iune both men and women go naked as they come out of their mothers wombes painting themselues with blacke strikes like the Tartarians The men shaue themselues like Friers they make holes in their nether lippes wherein they weare certaine greene polished Iasper stones wherewith they shutte and open the holes which stones they weare for a great ornament which notwithstanding being taken out of the holes maketh them shew most vgly as it they had two mouthes one ouer the other the women lette their haires grow long like our women and bore not their lippes but make holes in theyr eares wherein they hang certaine white bones which hang as low as their shoulders This countrey yeeldeth much Brasill wood from the Cape dos Baixos to Cape Frio which lyeth like an Island are an hundred miles betweene these two places lye many riuers and hauens specially these P. del Agnado Rio Dulce Reâ—os Magos Spirito Sancto where the Portingales haue a Castle which the Margarites or Barbarians call Moab from Moab you come to Tapenury where there lieth certaine Islands friends vnto the Frenchmen from thence you come to Paraiba people that dwell in cottages made like ouens From thence passing along the coast you come to certaine running sandes whereabouts also are certaine cliffes that iutte into the sea whereunto the sailors are to take great regard Right against those shalowes or flattes there lyeth an euen or flat land about twentie miles great inhabited by the Ouetacaters most cruel Barbarians Ouetacates THis people make warres not onely against their neighbours but also one against the other as likewise agaâ—nst al strangers They suffer no man to deale or traffike with them and being hardly besette by the enemies although neuer ouercome they can runne so fast away that they seeme in a manner to surpasse the wild Hart as it is seene by their hunting of wild beasts They go naked like other Brasilians and let their haire grow long downe to the middle of their bodies coÌ„trary to al other Brasilians yet they cut it away on the fore part of their heades and behinde in their neckes as the rest doo These cruel Canibals dwel in a smal but an inuincible countrey they eate raw flesh like dogs and wolues they haue a seueral speech different from their neighbours and because of their cruelty they haue but little of our wares brought vnto them and that they haue they get it in exchange for certaine gréene feathers This exchange is done one standing distant from the other at the least an hundred paces shewing each other their wares without speaking one word and each of them laying their wares in a certaine place appointed they take it away giuing no longer credite one to the other then for the time that they haue exchanged their wares after that beeing returned to their places they to then best to rob each other of his marchandise wherein the Ouetacaters running faster then the other and faster then hounds do oftentimes win the prise Being past this countrey of the Ouetacaters you come to another prouince called Maq-He which is likewise inhabited by cruel Barbarians which neuerthelesse cannot sleepe nor rest in peace for their bad neighbours the Ouetacaterâ— Vpon this coast lyeth a great high sienie rocke made like a tower whereon when the sun shineth it glisters like Sinaragâ—uâ— whereby many haue thought it to be a recke of Sinaragdus stones and therefore by the Frenchmen and Spaniards it is called Mâ—nsis that is Sinaragduâ— It is not possible neither by ship nor on foote to get vnto that reck because of the cliffes wherewith it is compassed and being by it there is no wayes or meanes to get vpon it About this country lyeth three
some weare such stones that are sharpe and of a finger long when they take out the stones they play with their tongues in the hole which is most vgly to beholde for that it seemeth they haue twoo mouthes some of them weare not onely this stone through theyr lips but also through both their cheekes touching their noses they are flat which they cause to grow so by force when they are yong coÌ„trary to vs which desire straite noses but they esteeme their flat noses for a beauty they paint their bodies with manie colours specially aboue al others their legs with a blacke colour with the sap of a certaine hearbe by them called Genipat so that a farre off they seeme to haue blacke bootes or straight hose like the priests in our countries the blacknesse of this sap cleaueth so fast on that if they wash themselues for the space of ten or fifteene daies together yet it will hardly come off They haue likewise necklaces of eight fingers long made of bones as white as Alablaster which they call Iaci according to theyr forme which they putte vppon cotten strings and weare them about theyr armes as also other flatte and rounde bones like stiuers certaine peeces of money in Holland which beeing bored through the middle and hanged one by one vpon strings they weare them in such sort as wee weare chaines of gold which they call Bouze Besides this they make certaine rounde beades of blacke shining wood which they tie together vpon strings and weare them likewise about theyr neckes which shine as blacke and glistering as if they were Iet They haue likewise many Hennes of our countreyes which the Portingales brought thither from the which they pull the small white fethers which with irons they hacke and make soft and then colour them redde which done they annoint their bodies with gum and strow the feathers therein wherby they looke like new hatched birds wherof this opinion hath risen by some men that haue first gone into those Countries and séeing them drest in that manner that they wereso by nature They dresse theyr foreheades with feathers of diuers colours verie cunningly placed together like the French gentlewomen that ware periwigs of strange haire these apparrels and ornaments of feathers and stones as also the rattles wherewith they make a noyse with their woodden halberdes and many other things to them belonging you may see at Doctor Paludanus house those crownes on theyr heades they call Iempenambi in theyr eares likewise they weare certaine white bones not much vnlike those which the children weare in theyr lips In Brasilia there are certaine blacke Birdes like Crowes by them called Toucan which haue certaine rings about theyr neckes of yellow and red feathers which they flea and drie the skinnes and beeing drie are likewise called Toucan which they weare vppon each Cheeke sticking them on with ware and when they goe to warres or to a banket when they meane to kill a man and to eate him according to their manner because they will bee after the finest sort they putte on that kinde of apparrell made of feathers with hoodes vppon their heades and thinges made of greene redde blewe and other colours of feathers about their armes verie cunningly sette together which by vs coulde not bee mended shewing as if they were of wrought Veluet as Paludanus can shewe you Such feathers likewise they binde vppon theyr Halberdes which are likewise almost like a blacke Spitte Lappe of harde woodde made redde or blacke They wearelikewise on their shoulders certain mantles of Eastrige feathers which is a signe that they haue Eastriges that are verie cunningly set together and hang long about them by them called Aâ—aroy such as wil among them be accounted manly and stout haue the report to haue killed eaten many men they cut great slashes in their breasts hips and thighs wherby they make the flesh to rise which they couer with a certain pouder and make them looke blacke which colour neuer goeth off during theyr liues wherby a farre off they seeme to haue cutte leather Ierkins on their bodies such as the Switsers vse to weare When they will holde any drunken feast or dauncing wherunto they are much giuen to increase their mirth besides the great noyse and crie which they ordinarily make they haue a certaine kind of hollow fruit which Theretus calleth Ahonay the pith whereof being taken out some of them are filled with stones and some without and so are put vpon strings of cotten wooll which they tie about their legs dauncing therewith as our iuglers and morice dauncers in these countreyes dance with belles likewise they carrie in their hands certaine dryed goords which they fil with stones hauing a sticke in the ende make a noyse therewith as our children doo with a blather full of stones which instrument with them is called Maraca the women go naked like the men and pul away their haire from the eyebrowes and eyelids but weare it on theyr heades like our women which they wash and comb derie often and tie it vp with redde cotten hairelaces as our country women vse to do but most parte of them vse to lette it hang downe about theyr shoulders wherin they take great pleasure the women neyther bore lips nor cheekes but onely their eares with so wide holes that a man may thrust his finger through in theÌ„ they hang certain long things which reach vnto their breasts or shoulders like bloudhoundes or water spanels eares They paint their faces with all kinds of colours which their neighbors and other women do for them in the middle of the cheeke they make a rounde circle drawing lines from it of diuers colours vntill theyr face is ful not leauing so much vndone as the eye liddes they weare bracelets of white bones cut thin like plates very cunningly ioyned together with wax and gum also white necklaces which they cal Bonze weare them not about their necks like the men but onely their armes for the which cause they are verie desirous of the glasse beades of all colours such as we haue here in these countries by them caled Maurobi it is to be wondered at that if any apparrel be giuen vnto theÌ„ they wil not weare it excusing themselues saying that it is not their custome but had rather weare stones other things vppon their bodies then such cloathes they haue a custome that in euery riuer where they come they steepe vnto the water and wash their hands many times they duck into the water at y t least ten times a day to wash themselues like birds and if they were apparrelled should put it off as often as they do so it would be ouer troublesome vnto them likewise the women slaues being compelled to weare cloathes many euenings to pleasure themselues doo put off theyr cloathes smock and all and so runne naked about the countrey I must speake somewhat of their little children of the
age of foure or fiue yeares old which being fat of body with white bones in theyr lips their haire shorne and their bodyes painted runne playing in great numbers about the countrey leaping and dauncing most wonderfull and verie pleasant to behold lastly it is to be noted that many are of opinion that the nakednesse of their women should be an occasion to prouoke them vnto lust which notwithstanding is found contrary for that by reason of their vnseemly nakednesse the men rather haue a loathing then a lust and to the contrarie the great and costly apparrell as gownes and peticoates counterfeit haire the sumptuous dressing of the head the chaines and bracelets of gold which our women vse do more prouoke and intice men vnto lust then simple nakednes although it is against the ordinance of God and therfore not to be commended as not beeing conuenient but as therein they goe beyonde the limits of Gods worde our women also doo passe the boundes of godly matrones and sinne no lesse then they in such he athenish customes Of the meate and drinke of the Brasilians THe Brasilians haue twoo sorts of rootes called Aypi and Maniot which béeing planted in three or foure Moneths become a foote and a halfe long and as bigge as a mans thigh which beeing taken out of the earth are by the women dryed by the fire vppon a Boucano and then grated vppon sharpe stones as wee doo Nutmegs whereof proceedeth a certaine white meale and being moyst is of taste like our newe starch which to prepare they haue great earthen Pots wherein they seethe it stirring it continually vntill it bee as thicke as pappe yet they make twoo kindes of meale one sodden till it bee harde which they call Ouyentan that is hard meale which because it will continue long is carried with them into the warres the other is lesse sodden and somewhat softer called Ouypou that is soft meale which tasteth like white bread bran specially when it is eaten fresh and although both these kindes of meale beeing fresh are of a verie good taste and strong meate yet are they not fit to make bread they may well knead it as wée doo wheats or rie and it will bee verie white but being baked it wil on the out side burne and become drie and inwardly continue meals as it was at the first with the broth of fat flesh They make good pappe thereof verie pleasant of taste seeming like sodden ryce by them called Mingant with their hands they presse certaine iuice out of this roote which is as white as milke which being putte in earthen pots and set in the sunne it runneth together like curds which they put into earthen dishes frie them as we do egs The roote Aypi is much vsed to be rosted and eaten as being soft and tasteth like chesnuts the other must be made into meale and sodden otherwise it is dangerous to be eaten both the steeles of the rootes are not much vnlike each other being as great as a small iuniper tree and leaues like Poenie the strangenesse of these rootes consisteth in the great numbers for that the branches that are as brickle as the stalkes of hemp beeing broke into diuers peeces and so thrust déepe into the earth without any other vsage within three or foure months after do bring forth great quantities of those rootes they haue likewise much Indian wheate by theÌ„ called Anati and by others Maiz whereof they make meale which they bake and eat Touching their drinke which they make of those two rootes and also of Maiz it is made in this sort by their women being of opinion that if it should wee done by men that it would haue no taste They cut the rootes in smal peeces as we do turnops which they seeth in yellow pots vntil they be soft which done they set them from the fire and then set themselues round about the pots chawing the sodden rootes which they throw into another pot made ready for the purpose and set vpon the fire wherein they are sodden once againe and continually stirred vntil they thinke them to be inough which done they are poured into other fattes made of reedes not being clarifyed and a third time sodden and skimmed they couer the reedes and keepe it to drinke as their maner is and as hereafter I will shew you in the same manner the women make a drinke of Maiz or Indian wheate which they call Câ—ou-in thicke and troubled in a manner tasteth like milke and because this Maiz and rootes are there in great aboundance they make as much drinke as they wil which is by them likewise done kéeping it til they come altogether to drink and wheÌ„ they come to the drunken feasts and that they meane to kil a man and eate him theÌ„ the women make fiers about the vesseles wherby the drink becommeth warme and then it is first drawne and the women filling a goord halfe ful giue it to the men as they are dauncing which they drink at one draught and that so often and so long that they emptie al theyr vessels as Letio himselfe hath seene from whom I gathered this discourse that for the space of three dayes they haue done nothing but drinke and neuer ceased and being so ful that they coulde beare no more yet would they not leaue off but still kéepe companie at those drinkings they are merrie singing leaping dancing and exhorting each other to be valiant in armes and to kill many of their enemies That done they runne one after the other like cranes in their flight leaping vntill al theyr vesselles are emptie at the which feasts especially when they meane to kill and eate a man they are dressed in fine feathers and w t necklaces and bracelets in theyr daunces there are no women coupled with them but euery one daunceth by himselfe and these drinkings are obserued wheÌ„ those of one village meete together and neighbours drinke one with the other sitting in theyr hanging beds but with more good fellowship wherewith there are twoo things to be considered first that the Brasilians do neuer drinke when they eate as we do nor when they drinke they neuer eate secondly that they eat without word speaking and if they haue any thing to say each vnto other they do it after their meat they vse likewise no certaine houre to eate in but when they are hungrie they fall to their meate as well by night as by day yet they are verie sober in eating washing hands and mouthes both before and after meate which I thinke they doo to take the clamines of the meat off from their fingers Of certain great beasts and Crocadiles in Brasilia FIrst you must vnderstand that in al Brasilia there is not any foure footed beasts like these in our countries they haue great numbers of one kind which they cal Tapirouslou of a midle stature between a cow an asse this beast hath reddish long haire like a cow but hath no
hornes and a shorter neck long hanging eares smaller and longer legs a whole foot like an asse so that it is not wrong named to be called a cow asse yet different from both first because it hath a short taile as many beasts in America haue no tailes at al sharpe téeth yet without any corage for it runs from a man the Brasilians shoot at this beast with their arrowes or else take them in pits which they dig for the purpose esteeme much of it because of the skin they hauing fleyed it off they cutte the hide in rounde péeces which they drie in the Sunne whereof they make buklers wherwith they defend them selues from the enemies arrowes for that by reason of the heate of the sunne they become so harde that no arrow will pierce them be they neuer so fiercely drawne The flesh of the beast tasteth much like our bores flesh and by the Brasilians it is rosted vpon the coales and so kept for that because they haue no salt they al broyle theyr meat vpon woodden gardirons and so kéepe it in euery village you finde such girdirons which oftentimes he ful of mens flesh Secondly they haue a certaine kinde of Hart by them called Seouaslous yet lesse then ours and with shorter hornes with long haire like goates and wilde American Swine by them called â—aroslou which is as bigge of bodye eares head and feete as ours are as also the like teeth which are verie dangerous but because it is leaner and ranker and grinneth fearefully therefore it is mis-shapen This beast by nature hath a hole in the backe as the sea Swine haue in theyr heades whereat they receiue and cast foorth theyr breath There is likewise a fine coloured beast called Agouti which is a kind of hart with clouen feete a shorte taile with a nose and cares much like a hare very pleasant and sauorie of taste there are also two or thrée kindes of beasts called Tapitis not much vnlike our hares red of haire in the woods are great rats of body and haire like Ekehornes in tast not much vnlike our conies Pag. or Pague a beast of the height and greater theÌ„ an indifferent Grayhound with an euil fauored head a faire skin speckled white and blacke of taste much like veale There is likewise another beast called Sarigoy which because it stinketh y e Barbarians wil not eate yet it is good sauory flesh specially when the fat of the kidnies wherin the stinke lieth is taken away There are also Tatous or Armadillen wherof in other places I haue spoken which are of very white good and sauorie flesh also there are certaine Crocadiles which they cal Iacare as big as a mans leg and indifferent long not hurtfull they come into their houses where the children play with them without any danger The Crocadiles in those countries haue a wider mouth high feet y e taile neither round nor sharp but very thin at the end ther are likewise diuers kinds of Easts speckled like our little ones of foure or fiue foot long in thicknes correspondent feareful to behold but keepe in riuers moores like frogs doing no hurt they cal them Touous being sleyed soddeÌ„ they surpasse al meates for taste goodnes their flesh being as white as a capons flesh sweet short excelleÌ„t good They haue great toades which the Toupinambauiltu eate whole being rosted so that they are not poyson like our toades they eat likewise snakes of the bignesse of a mans arme fiue foote long but of no great taste ther are also many other snakes specially in the riuers that are as gréen as grasse long thin whose sting is very dangerous there are also in some meeres of woods diuers great and dangerous Easts Iohanes Lerus writeth that passing through a wood he met an East as bigge as a mans bodye of fiue or six foot long al couered with white scales like oyster shels which lifted vp one of her forefeete and casting vp her head looked vpon him with staring eyes breathing at the mouth most feareful to beholde and after he and his companie had stayed a quarter of an houre to behold it it clome vp y e hil with such a noise ouer and through the trées that not any Hart running through the wood could make a greater noyse There is yet in this countrey another kind of strange beast caled Ian-ouare feeding only vpon the pray this beast for length of legs and swiftnes is like the Grayhound but vnder the chinne it hath a beard or certain long haire a speckled skin like a Linx and in other parts not vnlike the Linx this beast is much feared by the Brasilians for that whatsoeuer it taketh it teareth it in peeces and spoyleth it like a Lion feeding therof the Indians take this beast in pits to reuenge themselues they cause her therin to pine to death wherby they double her paine Méerecats are there in great aboundance that are small blacke by them called Cay and among the rest one kind of Méerecat called Sagouin of a verie fayre coloured haire as big and of haire as an Ekehorne but as touching the forme of the chaps breast and necke other parts altogither like a lion being one of the airest little beastes in al that country but for the tendernes therof it cannot be brought ouer sea There is yet another very strange beast by the Indians caled Hay as big as a dog with a face like a Méerecat a hanging belly like a sow that hath new farrowed of haire dark white al black with a long taile with rough feet like a beare long clawes when it lieth in y e woods it is very wild but if they take it it will be tamed the naked Tououpinambaultiers play not willingly with it because it hath verie sharpe clawes no man as the Indians say did euer sée this beast wild or tame to eate any thing but as they think it liueth by y e aire wherof I haue spokeÌ„ in other places Lastly there is yet another strange beast called Coaty as high as a Hare with short speckled haire smal sharpe eies a head very smal downe from the eies a snout that riseth vp of a foote long more round like a stick somewhat smal at the end in such maner that it is al of one bignesse with so narrow a mouth that a man can hardly thrust his little finger therein very strange to behold and being taken it pulleth all his foure feete together and falleth either vppon the one side or the other and wil not rise vnlesse they giue it mice whereof it liueth in the wood this countrey aboundeth with al kinde of foule whereof some are to be eaten and some not as Indian Hens by them called Arignow Oussou and common hennes of these countryes first brought thither by the Portingales and among them the white hens are much esteemed to pull out their feathers and
to die them red therwith to dresse themselues yet they eat them not thinking likewise that their egs are poyson which they feare because they see the Frenchmen eate them whereby it commeth that in the villages where no strangers traffike there are so great numbers of hens that you may buy one for a penie besides the hens they bring vp many duckes which they cal Vpec but because they are of this minde that if they should eate such slow birdes they shuld likewise become slow and so might be taken by theyr enemies therefore they eate none of them nor any other beast that goeth softly nor fishes that swim slowly There are likewise many speckled hens of three sorts all blacke with white spots verie pleasant of tast like pheasants there are also two kinds of faire cocks called Moutor as great as pecockes speckled with white spots and black feathers Macocaua Yamboun-Ouaslou are two kindes of partriges as big as ducks and of taste like pheasants wood Doues Turtledoues and yet another kind of partriges al of one tast of foules that are not eaten there are many as diuers kindes of parrats wherof some are so faire that fairer cannot be found specially 2. sorts called Aras Canide the feathers wherof they vse for their apparell hats arme bands They haue verie faire redde blewe and gold yellow shining feathers whereof diuers of them sing Besides those they haue foure other kindes of Parrots whereof one kinde is very little brought hither by them called Aaâ—ourous which haue theyr heades parted in thrée colours as redde yellow and violet the wings all redde the taile long and yellow and the body greene which learne so perfectly to speake as if it were men wee reade of one that when it was bidden would daunce skippe sing and play all the parts of the wilde Barbarians being carried with them into the wars commanded to be stil it would be as quiet as if it had beene dumbe neither stirring soot nor tongue such Parrats as are brought hither they call Marganas and estéeme them not for they are as common there as pigeons with vs which although they haue a certaine harde flesh like heathcocks yet there are many of them eaten in those countryes there are likewise little Parrots which are brought hither but among the cheefe foules of that countrey there is a very smal bird called Toucan as big as a pigeon blacke like a Rauen onely the breast which is yellow with a round red ring about her necke as I saide in another place which they weare vppon theyr cheekes specially when they go to any feastes or dauncings whereupon it hath the name of Toucan-Tabourace that is the feathers to daunce with the bil of this bird is greater then all the body and is one of the strangest things that euer was seene there is another of the greatnesse and colour like a Merlin onelie vpon the breast which is as redde as an ore bloud it is also by the Indians fleyed and the skinne dried like the Toucan which bird they call Panon there is another like a Lister as red as scarlet which they cal Quempian I must not forget a wonderfull strange little bird no bigger then a Scalebiter or a horse flie with white shining feathers which hath so great and pleasant a voyce in singing y t it resembleth our nightingale in such sort y e it may be said it wer impossible that out of so smal a body there could issue so great a voyce which bird by the Indians is called Gonambuch There are yet many other kinds of birds of colour red white violet purple c. al much differing from ours needlesse to rehearse There is one among the rest which the Indians do much regard not suffering it to be hurt or to be taken as thinking it a bird of some secret diuination it is as great as a pigeon of a gray colour crying verie heauily which is heard more by night theÌ„ by day the Touepinambaultii are of opinion that those birdes are sent vnto them by theyr friendes that are dead to bring them good newes and prouoke and stirre them to bee of good courage against theyr enemies in the fielde they thinke also so they take good regard vnto this Birds song and fortune to bee slaine in the warres that after they are dead they shal goe vnto theyr forefathers beyond the hilles there for euer to be merry and continually to dance They certainely perswade themselues that those birdes bring newes from their friendes and that thereby they should be merrie and of better courage so that they take great regard vnto their cries There are likewise in this countrey many battes as big as crowes which by night enter into the houses and finding any man lying naked they sucke the bloud out of their toes in great aboundance whereof in another place I wil say more Their Bees are lesse then ours like blacke flies and make theyr honey in hollow Trées the Indians haue good knowledge howe to gette theyr ware and theyr honey they vse not the wax to burne but onely to stoppe their reedes wherein they keepe their feathers from the wormes Touching smal wormes like flies or Mytes as also scorpions and earth creuishes which are hurtful vnto men it is needelesse to write they haue diuers fishes wherof many are common here with vs as twoo sorts of Barbels the one called Rurema the other Parati both beeing sodden or rosted are of a verie good taste which because they swimme in companicars e by them killed with dartes sometimes two or thrée together The meate or substance of those fishes is verie tender and short wherefore the Indians drie them and make flower meale thereof There are three other kinds of verie great fishes wherof one is called Camoroupouy Ouassou the other Ouara the third Acara Ouassou al veeie good of taste good to be eaten there is a certaine kinde of flat fish called Acarapep which being sodden yeeldeth a certaine yellow fatte which they keepe for sauce This fish likewise is verie good meat Acarabouten is a slymie fish of a redde colour it is better then the other but not so sauorie in the mouth Pira-Ipochi is a long fish like an eele but not to be eaten the Rochets which are taken in the Créeke of Ganabara and thereabouts in the sea are much greater then ours with twoo long hornes sticking out before and fiue or sixe clawes in the belly which men would think not to be natural but rather artificiall with a long thinne venomous taile In their Riuers are many strangs fishes specially one called Tamouata which is a handfull long with a most great and monstrous head others called Pana Pana which likewise hath a great and monstrous head yet both good to eate and verie sauorie A description of certain trees and fruits in those countries FIrst there are many Brasil trées wherby the country hath taken the name this tree by them is
called Araboutan because of tha great and thick branches not much vnlike our oakes some of them are at the least three fadomes thicke their leaues are like boxe or palmetrées but yeelde no fruite the wood would with great labour and paine be conuayed aboord the shippes if the wild people did not helpe them for the marchants shuld hardly lade a ship in a whole yeare because of the hardnesse and troublesomenesse in the cleauing as also that there are no beasts to draw or carrie it to the shippes but must be brought downe by men which for cloathes shirts hattes kniues and such like things are hired to cleaue and rounde it and to bring it out of the woods farre within the lande vpon their shoulders to the shippes it is much burnt in that countrie and is of nature dry whereby when it it is burnt it maketh little smoke the ashes wherof yeeld a certaine red color the Tououpinambaultii wondered much what our men doe with all that wood asking if there were no wood in our countreies for to burne and answere was made vnto them that we vsed it to die withall as they died their ropes or strings this is shewed in another place Beside this Brasill tree there are fiue kindes of Palme trees whereof the principall is called Gerau the other Iri of these trées I haue sufficiently declared in the Histories of the East Indies as also in the description of the Affrican coast there is a tree called Ayri a kinde of Eban wood with leaues not much vnlike the palme trées the body couered with thicke thornes the fruite thereof indiffeeent great wherein there is a pith as white as snow but not good to eate the wood is blacke and verie hard whereof the Barbarians make theyr halbeards coluen arrowes it is likewise so heauy that it sinketh vnder the water there is also much wood in this countrey whereof some is yellow like Box some violet some white like paper some pale red some varnish red and some darke red whereof likewise they make Halberds another wood is founde therein called Copau whereof the trees are like our wallnut trées but beare no nuttes the wood being plained hath graines like Walnut tree there are many other kindes of trees whereof some haue leaues rounde like pence others great of a foote and a halfe long as also a tree which is very pleasant to beholde and so sweete of smell that it excelleth the rose specially when it is cut to the contrarie there groweth another tree called Aou-at which wood beeing cutte or burnt stinketh so vnreasonably that no man can abide it it hath leaues like our apple trée leaues and a fruit not vnlike the Egiel the nut whereof is so venemous that being eaten it worketh presently but because the Indians make their rattles of this fruit they esteeme it much Besides this there groweth in Brasilia many kindes of fruits and apples pleasant to looke on specially on the sea side but not to be eaten and very daungerous some are like mispelles whereof the Indians warned our men that they should not eate them Hiuourae is a barley about halfe a finger thicke good of taste specially being fresh it is a kinde of pox wood and by the Indians vsed for a certaine disease called Pians which is as daungerous with them as the pox with vs there is likewise a trée by them called Choyne of a reasonable height for leaues forme and greenenesse like the Bay trees the fruit as great as a childes head as bigge as an Estridge egge but not to be eaten the Tonoupinambaultians thereof make certaine rattles by them caled Muaracas of it also they make vessels to drinke with such like things cleaueing them in the middle The tree by them called Sabaneay beareth fruit bigger than a mans two fists whereof they make drinking cuppes and is much like a cup in this nut there are certaine piths not vnlike for forme and taste to the almon There is an other tree in bignesse like a Sorben the fruit wherof is by them called Aca iou of forme and greatnesse like a hennes egge which being ripe is of a golde yellow colour like a quince very good and sauory to eate hauing a certayne sharpe taste and in it a iuice that cooleth heate but because this fruit is not easie to be gathered as being high trees the meere-cattes eate them and such as fall to the ground are the Indians parte Paco-aire is a sprig about tenne or twelue foote high the body as thicke as a mans thigh but yet so soft that it may be cutte in twoo with one blow the fruit thereof is by them called Paco which are of a handfull long in forme like cucumbers and being ripe are of the same colour this fruit groweth 20. or 25. vpon a braunch which the Indians plucke off and carry into their houses they are very pleasant of taste whereof you may reade at large in the East Indian Histories the sprigs that bring foorth cotten are there in great aboundance being of an indifferent greatnesse and haue leaues like the yellow bels of the ash trees froÌ„ whence there groweth an apple as bigge as Bulken which beeing ripe openeth in foure partes and yeeldeth forth cotten the Barbarians call it Ameni iou in the middle of which wool are certain blacke kernels pâ—est together like mens kidneyes and as bigge as beanes this cotten is gathered by the Brasilian women which they spinne and therof make many things Citrons and Lemonds by the Portingales brought into those countries grow there in great aboundance very pleasant and good also many sugar canes whereby much sugar is brought from thence into Portingale it is much to be wondered at that seeing there is so swéet a substance in those reedes while they are fresh and newe gatherd that being but a little withered or put into the water they doo presently conuert into so sower a substance that it is as good Vinegere as any can bee founde Besides these sugar reedes there groweth other reedes as thicke as a mans legge which beeing greene are with one blow easily cutte in two peeces but when they are drie they become verie tough and hard whereof they make arrowes sticks to carry in theyr handes in that countrie likewise is much Masticke excellent good Gumme which was ordinarily brought out of Chio also diuers and innumerable sorts of sweete smelling flowers hearbes And although that about this Cabo de Frio there is much thunder raine and great winds as lying vnder Tropicus Capricorn yet because there falleth no frost snowe nor haile therefore the trees are there alwayes gréene as they are with vs in May and in December when the dayes are shortest and coldest here with vs they are there at the longest and hottest but it is to be vnderstood that they neuer fal out to be so long or short as they are with vs for they haue the day and night of an euener length then we and
a more temperate aire The fruits of this countrey are many whereof Ananas is the best the leaues whereof are like the leaues of Iris or aloes a little bowing and in manner rounde the fruit is long like Cucumbers or distaues when they are greene they presse a certaine iuice out of them which tasteth as pleasantly as Maluesie of this fruite I haue alreadie spoken in the description of the east Indians so that at this time it is needlesse to write any more thereof as being ther to be read there is an hearb in Brasilia by y e Tououpinambaultiâ— called Petum which we call Tabacum or Nicouana and now it groweth in our gardens but not so good nor so strong as theirs this hearb is sufficiently described by Clusius and other writers very well knowne it hath leaues like our dock leaues or Consolida Maior by the Brasilians it is much esteemed which they gather and make into balles and being dried take foure or fiue of the leaues and rubbing them togither they make theÌ„ burne the smoake whereof they receiue in to their bodies which doth so fill nourish them that hauing receiued in the smoake they will goe two or three dayes when they are in the warres and neither eate nor drinke which Leâ—ius likewise hath tried as also that the same smoake maketh men auoyde sleugine out of their heads therefore the Indians weare bundles thereof about their neckes to smel vnto it the rootes Maniot and Aypi I haue alredy described There is likewise another kind of roote called Hecich whereof there are three kindes some being sodden are blew others yellow like quinces and the rest white like parseneps they are all good of taste specially the yellow which being rosted are as good as peares are there in as great aboundance as turnops in Sauoy about two handfulles thicke and a foote and a halfe long the hearb runneth along vpon the ground and hath leaues like cucumers or great spinage but differing in colour neerer to the broome or white wilde vine leaues because these roots neuer yeeld seed they are cut in péeces and planted n the earth he that desireth to knowe more hereof let him reade Clusius his workes and they wil satisfie his desire There is also a kinde of nut by them called Manobi which groweth vnder the ground and hang by little thréedes one fast to an other hauing a substaunce within them like to our hazel nuttes of a browne whitish colour with huskes like the shelles of pease Touching Brasilia pepper which also at this present day groweth in our gardeins and very hot it is by Mathiolus called Sâ—iquastium and Brasilia beanes and pease whereof néedeth no great description as being commonly knowne To conclude you must vnderstand that séeing Brasilia hath no wilde beasts foules fishes nor liuing creatures such as are in Europa neyther yet trees nor hearbs onely pulcelen basill and vaarne or felix which growe in some places thereof we may say with the Prophet Dauid in his 104. psalme O Lord thy works most strange and wonderfull both far neere are seene known right well How wisely thou al things dost bring to passe whereby al creatures thy great goodnes feele And who can either number write or show the kindes of beasts that are in land and sea And surely these people might well be accounted happy if they had the knowlege of the true and euerliuing God A briefe discourse of their warres and armes TOuching their warres they vse them not thereby to get riches by force or to inlarge their dominions but only of meere affectioÌ„ and desire they haue to reuenge the deaths of their forefathers which by theyr enemies haue from time to time beene taken and deuoured wherein they are so zealous that as many of their enemies as they take are sure to die the like death and to be eaten by them and hauing once begunne warres with their neighbours they wil neuer be friends againe but where or howsoeuer they can intrap or catch each other they are sure to die The manner of the Tououpinambaulâ—ers warres are in this Although they haue no Kings nor Princes among them not one of them beeing of greater account than the rest yet they haue this custome that they honour their auncients by them called Peore ru Picheb and in euery village they are ready to do as they commaund them which their auncients many times walking among them or else sitting in their hanging beddes of cotten take occasion to vse this maner of spéech vnto the people saying Are not our forefathers that haue fought with ouercom slain and eaten so many of our enimies an example vnto vs not to stay coÌ„tinually at home shall we suffer our nation which in times past was so fearful to our enemies that they durst not looke them in the face be thus brought into so open shame and reproach that it shall be saide our ennemies came to assaile vs within our owne houses shal we by our negligence and slownesse stay and watch till the Margaâ—aters and the Peros Engaipa which are cruell Portingales doe first shew their powers and execute theyr tirannies vpon vs hauing spoken in that manner he clappeth his handes vppon his buttockes and crying out saith Erima Erima Tououpinambaults conomi ouassou Tan Tan c. that is Beholde my friends you strong yong men is this conuenient to be done let vs rather arme our selues and by force be ouerthrowne or els reuenge our iniuries receiued These and such like Orations which indure for the space of sixe howers at the least do the Elders vse vnto the people which they with great patience and quietnes hearken vnto and therewith are so incouraged that presently with all spéed they assemble themselues togither in a certaine place and in great numbers with swordes and holberdes by them called Tacapes of red or blacke wood very heauy like bore trees about fiue or sixe foot long round at the end like a spit a foote broad and the thickenesse of a thumbe in the middle al the other part sharpe Besides those weapons they haue orapats which are bowes there are likewise of blacke or red wood wherewith they can shoote so sure and certainly that no man excelleth them of the which bowes and arrowes because there are so many of them brought into these countries there needeth no great description withall they haue bucklers of the skinnes of Tapiroussou broad flat and round like the couer of a drumme wherewith they couer not themselues but vse them onely to receiue their enemies arrowes these are al the wepons they do commonly vse only that they do put on certayne kindes of apparell made of feathers wherewith they set foorth theyr bodies otherwise they will not haue any thing vpon their bodies were it but a bare shirt that might be any let or hinderaunce vnto them And being armed in this manner they set forward sometimes eight or tenne thousand men with certaine women not
a prouince lying on the south side of Brasilia and bordering vpon this Countrey whereof I speake is declared that they worship the sunne and the moone but these Toupins haue no god neither heauenly nor earthly and therefore haue no churches nor temples wherin they should assemble to worship their idols clean contrary to the custome and manner of all Heathens and Idolatours throughout the whole worlde They vnderstand not what the creation of the world meaneth neyther do they giue any names to the dayes or estéeme one more than the rest nor account not their times by wéeks months or yéers but onely by the moones and as touching godly or worldly literature they are wholy ignorant not vsing so much as any kind of characters or letters woondering much at the Frenchmen that wrote vpon paper and could reade it wherein we are greatly to praise god that hath giuen vs the grace that we can certifie each other by letters of our actions being in far countries and thereby also attaine vnto the knowledge of the true and liuely God maker of heauen earth wherof when any man speaketh vnto those simple people being in great admiration they stand still as it were abashed and crie I câ—â— and because they séemed to be very fearefull of the thunder clappes by them called Toupan and that thereuppon the Frenchmen taking occasion to marke their simplicitie and little knowledge tolde them that God to shew his great power and maiesty did thereby cause both heauen and earth to shake they aunswered that such a God must néedes be wicked that putte men in so great feare Such is the miserable estate of those poore men Now if any man aske whether they liue like beasts without and God it may be aunswered them that there is not much difference for that those people are wholy more thaÌ„ other men without any knowledge of God and yet being in this gréeuous blindenesse they beléeue the immortalitie of the soule and doe most assuredly perswade themselues that the soules of such as here in this life haue valiantly and well behaued themselues which their valiancie and well liuing is meant by killing and eating of their enemies doe fly behinde certaine high hilles where being in pleasant gardeins with the soules of theyr forefathers they continue in euerlasting ioy pleasure and dauncing and to the contrary that such as are slacke which liue without honour and will not defend theyr natiue country are borne away by the Aygnan for so they caled the diuel with whom they liued in euerlasting paine They are likewise in this life many times tormented by the diuell which also they call Kaagerre for Lerius writeth that he personally sawe them and heard them speake to the French men and raging like madde dogges began to crie out and say vnto them Alas alas helpe vs for the Aygnan beateth vs and would tell them that they did oftentimes see the diuell sometimes in forme of a beast sometimes in likenesse of a bird at other times in diuers shapes and because they maruelled that they were not troubled nor molested by him they made them answer that god who is of greater power than their Aygnan or diuell did preserue them from him wherupon they being tormented promised to become christians and to beleeue in the onely God yet their paines were no sooner ended but they presently forgot their promise And it is most certaine that they are so tormented for Lyrius saith that hee hath often séene them when onely with the remembraunce of their torments they were in so great feare and sighed so deepely that very griefe made them to sweat and sitting with their hands vpon their heades mourning and lamenting said Mair atourassap acequere aignan atoupaue that is O my good friend and my companion I feare wicked sathan aboue al other things whereunto he answered them that he feared him not wherewith lamenting their estate they would say O how happy should wee be if wee were fréeed from him if you will be frée saide Lerius then you must beléeue in him that is mightie Then the Aignan or the diuel which they being in paine promised him to doe but their torments past they had cleane forgotten what they saide Herein you must vnderstand that those of Peru and Cusco did not only beleeue the immortallitie of the soule but also the resurrection of the body as in the Historie of Peru is already declared by the example of the Indians who séeing the Spaniards to open graues of the dead Indians and to take away their Iewelles desired them that they wold not scatter nor throw away the bones to the end that the dead might not want them when they shoulde rise againe This is written to the ende that all vngodly men that are conuersaunt with the simple Tououpinambaultes perswading themselues that there is no God shoulde learne of the wild miserable wretches that there are certaine wicked spirites which torment the vngodly not beléeuing in the power of God here in this life And it they affirme as many of them doe that such wicked spirites are nothing else but the euill affections and conceites of the minde and that therefore the Barbarians doe foolishly perswade themselues of that which is not true it may be answered them as they may reade in our description that the Americans were openly and certainely tormented by wicked spirits whereby it may sufficiently appeare that such torments are no fleshly effects which torment the strongest of them in that maner Secondly although such vngodly men are altogether vnworthy to heare that which the holy scripture speaketh concerning the resurrection of the body yet this second poynt of the Barbarians may well be propounded against those which beléeue the immortalitie of the soule as also the Peruuians that beléeue the immortalitie both of soule and body whereby they may bee ashamed and learne of such wilde men and although those people knew how to bee quit of all their torments and gréefes aforesaide yet are they in great feare of thunder as fearing a certain power which they cannot resist or withstand yet will they not knowe it wherefore the Gospel in the Acts of the Apostles fourtéenth Chapter and seuentéenth verse most truely saith that God in time past suffered the heathens to walke in their own wayes although hee ceased not continually to make his power knowne by doing vs good sending vs raine from heauen and giuing vs fruitfull times and seasons filling our hearts with ioy and our bodyes with meate so that it is the onely wickednesse of man that will not acknowledge the eternall God and maker of all things And in another place in the first to the Romanes and twentieth verse Saint Paul sayth for that which is inuisible vnto man which is his eternitie and Godhead is manifested vnto vs by the creation of the world Therefore although those men wil not confesse God with their mouthes yet are they by their own actions ouerthrowne and made to knowe
houskeeper they presently change thou singing into weeping and mourning with such a noyse that all the whole night they neuer cease specially the women that crie out not like men but like wolues and dogs with stammering voyces vtter these or such like complaints saying Alax the strong maâ— is dead that vsed to bring vs so many men to eate others crying O what a lustie hunter and how cunning a fisher man was hee O what a strong and valiant man was hée in destroying our ennemies the Margaâ—aters and Portingales and in that sort lamenting and crying they imbrace each other neuer ceasing till the body be carried to the graue adding many times he is now gone whom we bewaile the man Eheu is dead whome we shall see no more before we goe behinde the hilles there to daunce with him as our prophets the Caribes teach vs with many other wordes which continue for the space of sixe hoâ—â—â—es for they kéepe not their dead bodies any longer vnburied and then they set the dead body in a round pit or graue in forme like a winde pipe wherein he standeth vpright but if the dead man be a house keeper he is lapped in his cotten bed and so buried in the middle of his house with fethers such like things put into his graue as if he were liuing in the same maner that the Perunians bury their kings with their iewelles about them as it shall be shewed The next night after the dead body is buried they set certaine dishes of meale flesh fish and other victualles by the graue because they are of opinion that the Aâ—gnan or the Diuell would come and digge the body out of the graue if hee founde not other meate to eate and withall they set some of their Coaâ—in which they do as long as they thinke the body is not corrupted from the which opinion they can by no meanes bee perswaded although in the mornings they finde the meate whole and in the same sort it was when they set it there This toy or foolish deuise seemes to spring out of the false gloses of certaine Rabines but he that desireth to see more hereof let him reade Lerius and because the Americans do often change their dwelling places by whole villages together therefore when they remooue they couer their graues with a great herb called Pindo whereby such as trauell may easily know where men are buried by the which places whensoeuer they passe they make a most fearefull noyse Thus much touching the generall custome of all the Brasilians and now we wil procéede with the description of the rest of the coast from Cabo Frio to the straites of Magellanes Heere followeth the description of the sea coasts FROM Cabo Frio to Punta de Buen Abrigo in our Carde called Abitrioga are a hundred miles Beyond this point reacheth Tropicus Capricornus and the line of repartition which beareth the name aforesaide from Buen Abrigo to the Bay of S. Michael are 50. miles and fro thence to the riuer of S. Francis which lieth vnder sixe and twenty degrees are seuentie miles from S. Francis to the riuer of Tibiqâ—â—â—e are a hundred miles wherein lieth Puerto de Patos which is vnder eight and twenty degrées and right against it an Island called S. Catherina Puerto de Faraâ—oâ— and others and from Tibiquire to Rio de la Plata are more than fiftie miles so that from Cabo de S. Augustin to Rio de la Plata that is the siluer riuer are sixe hundred and threescore miles which lieth vnder thirty fiue degrees on the South side of the Equinoctiall line This riuer by the Barbarians is called the riuer of Parana or Paranagnaâ—â— that is to say great riuer or a riuer like the sea hauing certayne entries that are very broade many Islands it is rich of siluer pearles precious stones and fish it is in breadth xx miles and many Islands between both the hookes of S. Mâ—â—iaâ— and Cabo Bâ—anco This riuer increaseth and flowesh ouer like the riuer Nilus making the country fruitful at certaine times of the yeere and as some are of opinion it springeth out of the hilles in the kingdome of Peru into this riuer there runneth many other great riuers as Auanca Vicas Purina and Xâ—â—xa which spring out of the high land called Bombon many of the Spaniardes that dwell vppon this riuer haue come vp as high as to Peru and the mines of Potosi The whole coast from Cabo Frio to the Rio de Plata or rio Solis is inhabited by goodly men and well proportioned but all eaters of mens flesh The country is ful of brasil wood and of white Anime From Rio de Plata to Puerto de S. Elena are thréescore miles from S. Elena to Arenas Gordas are thirtie miles from thence to Baros Anagedos forty miles from thence to Terra Baixa fiftie miles from terra Baixa to Bahya Sâ—n Fâ—ndo thréescore and fiue miles and from this Bay which is vnder one and fortie degrees to the Arrecifes de Lobos are fortie miles Vpon this bordereth the country of y e Patagones where the inhabitaunts paint theyr faces with certaine herbs froÌ„ Lobos which is vnder fortie foure degrees to Cabo dâ— S. Dominico are fiue and fortie miles from this cape to another called cabo Blanco are twenty miles to the riuer of Iohn Serrano which lieth vnder nine and fortie degrées and by others called Rio de Trabaâ—os are threescore miles betwéene them lieth Baâ—a de S. Iulian wherein is a good hauen The people being wilde and without weapons couered with skins and without any lawe but of a great stature from thence to the Promontorium or cape de las 11000. Virgins are fourescore miles from Cabo de las 11000. Virgins which lieth vnder one and fiftie degrees and a halfe to the entry of the straits of Magellanas which vnder the same degrees from east to west are accounted 110 miles some say 130. miles and the south and north part from Venezula twelue hundred miles it is two miles broad in some places more and very deepe and rather increaseth than diminisheth and runneth southward In this strait are many Islands and hauens The coast on both sides verye high and full of great rockes the countrie vnfruitful it hath no greene land but is very colde as hauing snowe the most part of the yeare about it groweth many trees whereof are diuers cedars and other trées bearing fruit like Bisnole or Creken There they find Estriges and other greater birds with many strange beasts also in that strait are many sardines flying fishes they eate of all kindes of meates there are likewise many seawolues wherewith they line or furre their clothes and whale fishes the bones whereof they vse to make shippes as also of the barkes of trees This strait was discouered by Fernando Magellanus a Portingale in the yéere of our Lorde one thousand fiue hundred twenty and one and as some saye one thousand fiue hundred
likewise be iudged by the history of Francisco Xeresio who writeth that in Cusco there were houses hauing the gates walls and roofe couered with plates of golde Besides this Giraua writeth that the inhabitantes of Anzerma hadde their weapons breastplates necke peeces and peeces for their shinnes all of massy gold he likewise writeth that about Quito there were gold hilles that yeeld more gold then earth the like do all Historiographers witnesse that write of king Atabalidas ransome which was so great that the like was neuer heard of for that he caused the chamber wherein he was kept prisoner beeing of twoo and twentie foot long and seuenteene foot broad to be filled so full of gold that hee standing vpright therein and stretching his armes and fingers aboue his head as high as hee could reach the gold couered them offering that if they would haue siluer and leaue the gold he would fill the Chamber twice full but the Spaniards tooke the gold whereof the kings duty being a fift part amounted to sixe hundred and seuenteene thousand six hundred fortie seuen Carolus gyldernes 30000. marks of siluer euery horseman had 12000. castilians euerie Castillian of fourteene rialles besides siluer and euerie footeman 1450. castillians besides siluer being 180. markes so that to conclude the golde onely ammounted vnto in Flemish money the summe of three millions eighty eight thousand two hundred fiue carolus gylderns besides the siluer wherby may be knowne the great aboundance of gold and siluer that is in those countries and although Atabalida payed so great a treasour for his ransome yet was it not comparable vnto y e which his elder brother promised to pay so that he might saue his life for that he had all the treasor of his predecessors and also his fathers which were not knowne to Atabalida when he first entered into the kingdome from whence by force he hadde driuen his brother and placed him selfe therein We reade likewise that when the Spaniards first entred that country they shooed their horses with shooes of golde and what it yeeldeth yeerly at this present doth sufficiently appeare by the Armada that came from thence into Spaine the last yeere whiche needeth not heerein to bee declared But now proceeding to the description of the coast of Panama to Peru you must first vnderstand that Panama and Nombre de Dios are two townes lying one right ouer against the other the one on the north sea or north side of Peru the other on the south sea seuenteene miles distant one from the other Panama lying in a little valley so neere vnto the sea that when the moone is in the full the sea entereth into the houses lying neerest to the shore the houses thereof are part of reeds and partly made of other substances mixed together most couered with tiles but there are not many houses in the towne There is in this towne a very fitte and safe hauen but very small where with the streame or floud the shippes doe enter and with an ebbe they go out but not heauy laden for that such as are deepe laden would be in danger to fall vpon the flattes in this hauen there runneth both a great floud and ebbe so that where the water is very deepe within an houre after it will bee drie sand whereby the shippes must keepe somewhat from the land discharging and lading their shippes by little scutes as well such as come out of Spaine thither as that goe from thence into Spaine This Towne hath from Peru maiz meale hennes and hony it hath of it selfe kine and hogges oranges lemons coleworts onions lettuce melons and such like things in great abundance This prouince of Panama in time past was much inhabited and haunted by the Indians and al the riuers yeelded gold but now by the Spaniards are most fished drie When men will trauel by land from Panama to Nombre de Dios the first dayes iorney is faire and good way the next day you enter into woods which continue till you come to Nombre de Dios. In the middle of this way you come vnto a water which in three houres can hardly be passed ouer because of the many crookings windings thereof and many are cast away therein the streame specially in winter when there falleth much raine running most swiftly Such as compare this towne to Venice are much deceiued for that both of them put together with many other townes erected by the Spaniardes in those countries wil not make the compasse or greatnesse of the Cittie of Venice although euery man may iudge as pleaseth him As touching the maner of sayling from Panama to Peru as also at what times of the yeare you must vnderstand that the best and fittest times of the yeere are in the three first moneths that is Ianuary February and March vntill the moneth of Aprill for as then the Sea is open summer comming on and many of the Brisen which are east and northweast windes doe blowe no weast or southerly windes as then stirring whereby the ships do easily performe their voyages and commonly ariue at their desired hauens before any other winde specially south winde which for the most part of the yeare vpon the coast of Peru doe blowe They may likewise put out in the moneths of August and September but make not so good ariuage as in the moneths aforesaide and if any ships do put out of Panama at other times than in the moneths aforesaide they are sure to haue a long and tedious voyage and commonly som one of them is forced to turne backe againe not being able to gette the coast and are by reason of the southern winds which for the most part of the whole yeere blow vpon the coast as I said before as likewise because of the great contrarie streame many of them are brought into great danger It is very good with the wind blowing from Peru to sayle to Panama Nicaragua and other quarters thereabouts but to sayle to Peru from Panama it is very dangerous and vncertayne The ships that are laden with Spanish wares and depart from Panama first come to â—aboga and the Ilands bordering on the same which haue receiued their names from the Pearles where they take in fresh water in those Islands that are at the least fiue and twentie or thirtie together The Spaniardes in times past founde many Pearles whereof they helde the name of Islas de Paâ—las They lie hardly vnder eight degrées northward The greatest of them in times past was woont to be inhabited but not now because the fishing for pearles beginneth to decay and such as are owners of those Islandes there in keepe slaues of Nicaragua and Cubagâ—a that looke to their beastes and sowe the ground as being very fruitfull from thence they put into the sea westward then see y e poynt called Carrachine which lieth northwest and southest from the great Island of pearles called Taboga distant about thirty Italian miles which are seuen Spanish
miles and a halfe as they come néere vnto this cape they shall perceiue it to be a high hilly land lying vnder seuen degrees and a halfe from this poynt to the Rio de Pinas or Pine trée hauen the coast runneth south west and southwest and by south and is distaunt from the poynt aforesaide foure and twenty miles which are six Spanish miles or sixe degrees and a halfe it is a high land with great hilles and dales on the sea side there groweth very great pine trees and therefore it is called the Hauen of Pine trees from thence the coast lieth southward and south and bywest to Cape de las Correntas that is the cape of Streames which is very small and reacheth into the sea and because of the great and stiffe streame that runneth like a strong fall of waters running eastward like riuers many times the Portingale ships which saile that way are forced to anker in the night and in the morning setting saile it happeneth oftentimes that when they thinke to winde that they are stayed and driuen backe agayne so hang somtimes 15. or 20. dayes about that Cape before they can passe it but passing forward beyond that Cape you come to the Island lying before the Rio de Palmas so called because of the aboundaunce of palme or Indian nut trées that do growe thereon This riuer is in compas somwhat more than fiue miles which is one Dutch mile and a mile and â— Spanish which was once inhabited it is distant from Cabo de Correntes seuentie fiue miles or foure degrees â— Thereabouts are many riuers all very good water and not farre from thence lyeth the land and riuer of Peru where Pizaâ—us arriued and after his name almost all the country is called Peru from the Iland de las Pâ—linas folowing along the coast and the same course you come to the strand of Bonauentura which is distant from the Island aforesaide somewhat more than nine miles which are two Spannish miles ¼ Hard by this strand which is very great lieth a high cliffe or rocke of stone and the entry of the Bay is vnder three degrées 1 â— All this side is full of very great hilles and there runneth into the sea many and verie great riuers that haue their springs out of the hilles by one of those the shippes enter into the land or haâ—â—n of Bonauentura but the â—ilots that puâ—â—h there ought to haue good knowledge of the riuer for that if they be not wel acquainted with it they are like to induâ—e much danger as it happeneth vnto many shippes that had Pilots to whom the riuer is not knowne from this Bay the coast runneth east and east and by south to the Island Gorgona which is distant from the strande seauenty fiue miles which are ninetéene Spanish miles the coast al along this course is very lowe full of trees and other wilde places and hilles from whence there runneth many great riuers whereof the chiefe and greatest is the riuer of Saint Iohn which is inhabited by Barbarians hauing builded their houses vppon great postes and stoopes in manner of houelles where many dwell in one house and some alone by themselues because the houses are very long and broade These Indians are rich of gold and their country is very fruitfull the riuers by force of the streames abounding with much gold but it is so sleeke and moorish that it can hardely bee gotten but with the losse of many people and with great labour This Island of Gorgona is vnmeasurable high wherein for the space of eight moneths yéerely it neuer ceaseth raining and thundering whereby it seemeth the Elements fight and striue one against the other it is in circuite about two miles or sixe Italian miles all high hilles vpon the the trees whereof are seene many peacocks phesants speckled cats great serpents many sea crabbes and night foules seeming as if it were not inhabited it hath likewise much fresh water Summer there beginneth at the end of Maie cleane contrary to Panama whereas then winter beginneth In this Iland Franciscus Pizarius with 13 others that had discouered the countrey of Peru stayed certayne days induring great paine and hunger before they coulde ouercome the countrey This country of Gorgona lieth vnder three degrees and as touching the miles that in this discourse as also in the description of Brasilia and other places I haue obserued they are all Spanish miles whereof seuenteene 1 â— make a degrée from this Iland the coast runneth west southwest to the Iland del Galâ—o or of the Cocke all this coast being lowe and full of vallies from whence there runneth many riuers this Iland is small and in compas scarse a mile or about three Italian miles it hath certayne redde Downes The same coast from the firme land thither lyeth twoo degrees from the Equinoctiall from thence the coast tourneth southwestward till you passe the point called Manglaâ—es which are trees so called and in our Card Manglalos which lieth scarce vnder two degrées and from the Island to the poynt which is sixe Spanish miles little more or lesse or foure and twenty Italian miles the coast is low and ful of vallies and thereabouts runneth certaine riuers into the sea which inwards to the land are inhabited from thence the coast runneth southwest to the strand called S. Iacob or S. Iago and maketh a greate Creeke where there is an open hauen or roade named by the Sardinians and from thence runneth the great riuer of S. Iacob where the gouernement of Pizarro began and this strand is 9. miles ¼ from the point of Manglares and it happeneth many times that the ships haue there at the beake head fourescore fadomes water and at the sterne they touch the ground and also it is often found that sometimes they sayle in two fadomes water and presently they find ninetie fadomes which the strong course and fury of the riuer causeth and although there are such banks yet are they not dangerous neither do the shippes refuse to passe in and out when they will The strand of S. Mathew in our Carde Mathias lyeth full in one degree from thence the coast runneth west to the Cape saint Francis which lieth from the strand thirtie Italian miles that is seuen Spanish miles and one halfe this poynt lieth on high ground and hard by it are certayne red and white Downes that are of the same height This poynt of saint Francis lyeth vnder one degrée on the north side of the Equinoctiall line From thence the coast runneth southweast to the poynt Passao which is the first hauen of Peru ouer the which passeth the Equinoctiall line Betweene these two poynts there runneth foure great riuers into the Sea which are called Liquixinus in Latine Quisinuae and there about there is an indifferent good Hauen where the ships finde good water and wood to burne From the poynt Passao to the firme land are diuers high hilles that are called De Quaque
which they vsed both with sailes and oares wherein they are very expert It chaunced on a time that the Peruuians bare certaine Spaniardes vpon one of those driftes and that they vntied the cordes that bound the wood thereof together whereby the Spaniardes were all drowned and the Indians saued themselues vpon the peeces of wood and many without them swamme to land as being very expert therein Their weapons are slings bowes clubbes and billes of siluer and copper also launces and pikes with heades of base golde both the menne and womeÌ„ weare many iewels their drinking cuppes and vesselles being of gold and siluer the Lorde of the Island was much honoured by his subiects and was so ielous that he cut off both the noses and priuy meÌ„bers of his seruaunts that attended on his wiues In this Island Pizarius and the Spaniards were very friendly entertained But the Gouernour perceiuing their great auarice and couetous desire in seeking for gold as also their lechery with the women fell vpon them with great numbers of Indians but in the end not being able to resist the Spaniardes he was forced to flie and keepe himselfe in the wooddes which victory was after by Pizarius most cruelly vsed and therewith passed ouer vnto the prouince of â—umbez which is about 12. miles distant but the inhabitants hauing heard of their cruelty vsed among those of Puna fled into a Castle lying somewhat inward from the sea but Pizarius to the contrary sent vnto the Gouernour making as thogh he would be friends with him whervpon the Gouernour came not alone but prepared himselfe very strong to go meete him thinking thereby to ouerthrowe him but the spaniards setting forward towards him in the night time passing ouer the riuer with their men being guided by such as were well acquainted with the way and going through sharp and rough waies they surprised the Peruuians by night as they lay sleeping and so ouercame them and after the ouerthrow entred the town of Tumbez which they robbed and spoiled the rich church taking away the same and in that towne hee was informed of the great riches in Perâ— Touching the Island Puna it is a common opinion both of the Indians Spaniards that in time past there was much golde and siluer hidden within theyr Temple Also the inhabitants at this present liuing do affirme that their forefathers were very religious and much addicted to soothsayings and other abuses very couetous and aboue all other things they vsed the accursed sin of Sâ—dome lying with their own sisters committing many other greeuous sinnes Into this Island fled brother Vincentius de Vaile viridi a Friar that was the chiefe cause of the warres against the Peruuians and after that first Bishop of Peru with two and fortie Spaniardes seeking to shunne the wrath of Didaci Almagâ—â— and hauing hidden himselfe in the night time the Ilanders with clubbes slew both him and his companye where hee receiued a very iust rewarde for his good workes In Puna and in the countries of Guaiaquil and Porto Veâ—o groweth the roote with vs called Zarzapeâ—â—â—a which is vsed against the por and other diseases In that Island they bruise it betweene two peeces of wood so presse out the iuyce which done they mixe it with warme water and giue it to the patient whereupon they sweate as much as possible they may which drincke they vse for certaine dayes eating onely a little bisket with a rosted henne in our country we vse to cut the roote in small peeces and seethe it causing the sicke person to drinke it certain dayes by this Island there lieth another but somwhat further into the sea called S Clara not that it is at this present neither was in time past inhabited as hauing neither woodde nor fresh water but onely because the predecessors of the Islanders of Puna vsed therein to bury their forefathers there offered their sacrifices y e place wherin they buried their dead was very high with whome they buried greate treasures of golde siluer other iewels as offered and layde vp for the vse and behoofe of their Gods which at the enterance of the Spaniards they caused to bee hidden no man knowing where it is become This riuer of Tumbez is greatly inhabited and in time past was much more populous by it there stoode a verie strong and beautifull Castle built by the Iugas or kings of Casco who ruled ouer all the countrey of Peru and therein kept a great treasor where there was a temple of the sunne and a couent of Maâ—aconas which is as much to say as cheefe or principall women and maides that were consecrated and appoynted for the seruice of the Temple which liued almost after the manner and custome of the Vastale virgins in Rome and were therein maintained but because these women with their seruices and works are spoken of hereafter I will for this present leaue them Touching the building of this castle it was long since destroyed yet not so wholly but that men may yet perceiue the greatnes and magnificence thereof The mouth of the Riuer Tumbez lyeth vnder foure degrees on the south side in the firme land Right ouer against Pana there are people that haue fiue or sixe of their foreteeth in the vpper gumme pulled forth some say they do it of pride and think it a beautie others say that they had their teeth pulled out as a punishment for certaine iniurie they hadde in times past doone and committed against the kings or Iugan of Pâ—ru and others say they offer theÌ„ vnto their Idols From the riuer Tumbez the coast runneth southwest to Cabo Blanco or the white Cape being distant full 11. miles and lyeth vnder three degrees and from whence it runneth west to the Island de Lobos or of â—olues betweene Cabo Blanco and the Isle de Lobos lyeth a poynt called Depaâ—na and in our Carde Pariana which reacheth almost as farre into the sea as Cabo Blanco from this pointe the coast reacheth againe southwest til you come to Parta betweene Cabo Blanco and Parta lyeth the towne of S. Michael which was the first town that the Spaniards built within Peru called Noua Castillia and was begun by Pâ—zâ—rius in the yeare of our Lord 1531. wherein also was the first Christian Church although at this time of small importance and so I wil leaue to speake thereof The whole coast from Tumbez is without hils or daies and where there are any dales they are bare only full of sand and stones and but fewe riuers issue from the coast the hauen of Pâ— lyeth beyond the Cape somwhat more then sixe miles and is a good hauen wherein they rig their ships newe tarre them being the principall staple of all Peru and of al the ships that sayle for those parts This hauen of Parta lyeth vnder fiue degrees from the Island of Wolues aforesaid thither you run east and by west which are distant three Spanish miles or
where they keepe their cattell their douehouses vineyards but no good grapes because of the grounde gardens of pleasure not onely full of all those countrie fruits but also of Spanish fruites as figges poundgarnats lemons oranges melons beanes pease and sugar canes all verie good and sauorie and better then in Spaine and to say the truth to passe a mans life in quietnesse were it not for the reporte that runneth of the Spaniards that they make warre against those people without a cause I thinke it the best and most pleasant place in all the world the aire being so temperate that all the yeare long there is no extremitie either of heate or cold and it was neuer heard that euer they had famine plague or any raine thunder or lightning but to the contrarie alwayes a cleare and faire skie it was builded by the Admirall Don Francisco Pizarro in the yeare of our Lord 1535. and was called 〈◊〉 Kings towne because they arriued therein vpon twelfe day by vs so called Touching victualles besides fish which they haue both out of the sea and the Riuer in great aboundance as also flesh and fruits of trees and of the earth as I saide before they haue no lesse quantitie of wheate and the foure moneths of summer in Spaine are winter with them onely somewhat colder then the summer in those soure moneths of winter there falleth euerie day in the forenoone a small dew or mist but not vnholsome as with vs for that those that haue any paine in their heades washing their heades therewith it healeth the ach it is verie likelie that this towne of Lima will daily increase in people and houses for many yeares together there were not aboue 500. houses therein yet the place is great inough to containe 2000. houses for the streetes are verie broade and the market as bigge as a great fielde euerie house is eightie foote broade and a hundred and sixtie foote long and because there is no conuenient woodde whereof to make chambers for that al their wood within two or three yeares is cleane consumed by wormes therefore the houses be but of one storie high yet verie costly and sumptuous with many chambers halles and parlers both fitte to dwell in and also to receiue strangers the walles of the houses are made of a certaine stuffe baked hard together and filled with earth They couer their houses with painted mattes or else with painted linnen and round about and aboue vppon the walles they make arbours of greene boughes wherein they sit to keepe themselues from the sunne for raine they neede not care for there it neuer raineth this Citie hath vnder it al these townes hereafter named where there are Bishops as Quito Cusco Guamanga Arequipa Pax Pâ—ata Trugillo Guanuco Chachapoâ—a Portus Vetus Guaiaquil Popatan Carchi Saint Michael and S. Francis Before it was saide that Peru is diuided into three prouinces in flat or plaine land on the sea coast in hillie lande that runneth through the middle of Peru in other lands lying beyonde the hilles touching the flat lande on the sea shore I haue hitherto spoken beginning from the line and the Cape Pasâ—ao hitherto so you must vnderstand that from Tumbez not onelie to Lima but also further southward the sea coast is full of many great droughts and wilde sandie places where for the space often miles it neuer thundereth lightneth nor raineth but beyonde that or all the space that is betweene those tenne miles and the hilles it thundereth lightneth and raigneth In this flatte land there are no fountaines nor welles but foure or fiue standing waters that are brackish because they are neare the sea the inhabitants vse the riuer waters that run out of the hilles which spring of the snow and raine that falleth on the hilles and not out of fountaines that stande among the hils The distance of these riuers are alreadie partly described lying seuen eight ten twelue fifteene and twentie miles one from the other yet most part seueÌ„ or eight wherby such as trauaile direct their course because they haue no other waters on both sides of these riuers about a mile broade or further and sometimes more or lesse according to the scituation of the countrey are diuers fruitfull trees and corne landes which are planted and sowed by the people of the countrey which they may do all the yeare long also there groweth about those riuers many wilde trees cotten reeds thistles and Lâ—s and since the Spaniards subdued the countrey they sowe wheate moystning the lande by certaine channels made out of the Riuers and because they runne with so great force out of the high hilles that without helpe men can hardly passe them and many are drowned such as trauaile in that flat countrey go so neare to the sea coast that they haue them alwayes in their sight when it is winter in the hilles and that it raineth much it is dangerous trauailing in those countries specially to passe the riuers which they must either do vpon drifts which they haue for the purpose or with a net which they fil with canworden or goords whereupon the trauailer must lie and one of the Indians swimmeth before him drawing the net or drift and an other behinde that steereth it The people in the flat land dwell in houses made of boughes the men weare shirts and cloathes vppon their knees and ouer it they cast an vpper garment or mantle the women weare a kinde of cotten pettiecoate from the head to the foot and although their manner of apparrel is in euerie place almost alike yet they vse certain differences in the attiring of their heades some wearing nothing but plaine hairelaces some double and wreathed others of one colour and some of diuers colours and there is no man but he weareth some thing vppon his head and all different according to the manner of the country Those Peruuians of the plaine countrie are diuided into three manner of people-ech hauing a different name wherof the first are called Iungas those are such as dwell in the hot country the second Tallanes and the third Mochicas ech hauing a seuerall speech only that the Lordes could speake the Cuscan speech as our Courtiers speake French the cause thereof is that their Kinges helde it for a dishonour vnto them to speake to their subiects by an interpreter for the which cause Guaynacapa father to Atabaleba commanded that all the ble men of the countrey shoulde send theyr children to his Court vnder pretence as he saide to serue him to learne that speech although his intent was none such but onely thereby to assure himselfe of his kingdome against such as might rise vp against him which they would not do he hauing theyr children in his power and by this same meanes al the noble men learned the speech commonly vsed in the Court wherewith a man may trauaile cleane through the countrie Of the windes that blow in the plain countrie of Peru also the
occasion of the droughts and of the other townes and places which lie in the further description of the sea coast BEfore I returne to procéeding with the description of the rest of the sea coasts from Lyma to Arequipa I thinke it not vnconuenient to declare why it raineth not in the plaine countrey of Peru lying on the sea side where neuertheles there is so great occasion giuen of raine because the Sea which commonly yeeldeth moysture lyeth vpon the one side and the hils whereon there is alwaies so great quantitie of water and snow vppon the other side you must vnderstand that vppon the hils summer beginneth in Aprill and continueth May Iune Iuly August and September and in October winter beginneth and continueth the other moneths til March not much differing from our Countries or froÌ„ Spain in that time they both plant build and gather in their fruites and seedes but day and night are al of a length onely that in Nouember they differ a little and in the plaine land it is contrary for when it is summer in the hils it is winter there so that in the plaine countrie summer beginneth in October and continueth til the moneth of Aprll where as then winter beginneth and surely it is a verie strange thing to thinke how so great difference should be in one countrey where a man may vppon one day in the morning trauaile from the hilles where it raineth and befoâ—e night bee in the plaine countrie where it neuer or verye seldome raineth for that from the beginning of October al the summer long it neuer raineth in that countrey onely there falleth certain dew which in many places hardly layeth the dust of the sandes wherefore the inhabitants of the plaine countrey must continually water their groundes and not till nor plant any more lande then they can bring the water vnto in other places by reason of the vnfruitfulnesse of the country there is no grasse as beeing all drie sandie and stonie grounds the trees growing theron are vnfruitfull with verie few leaues there likewise groweth diuers thistles and thornes and in some places nothing at all when it is winter in the plaine countrie there are certaine thicke and close cloudes onely as if the aire hung full of raine from whence there onely proceedeth a certaine small miseling that can hardly lay the dust of the sande which notwithstanding is a verie strange and wonderfull thing that the ayre being in that sort so thicke and close there falleth no other moysture and yet the sunne for many daies because of the clouds cannot be seene and as the hilles are verie high and the coast low it appeareth that the hilles draw the cloudes vnto them not suffering them to fal vpon the plaine lande so that when the waters do naturally keepe their course it raineth much in the hils and not in the plaine countrie but therein causeth a great heat and when the dew falleth then it is cleare weather vpon the hils and raines not there likewise it is very strange that for the most part of the yeere ther bloweth but one kind of wind in the plain countrie that is southwest windes which although in other countries they are commonly moyst and causes of raine there they are cleane contrarie I thinke because they are suppressed by the high hilles from whence they blow that they draw no moysture or dampenesse out of the sea into the aire wherby any great raine should folow by these windes also it happeneth that the water in the South sea runneth into the North and maketh a hard nauigation from Panama to Peru both against winde and streame in such sort that it cannot be done without lauering and striuing against the winde There is yet another thing to bee marked which is that vnder the line in some places it is moyst and in some places colde and moyst and in those plaine countries of Peru colde and drie and departing from thence to the other side it raineth continually Here followeth the description of the coast of the plaine countrey of Peru with the hauens and riuers lying therein between the towne of Lyma and the prouince of Dechia as also the degrees and the manner of the sayling on that coast THe Ships that saile from the towne of Lyma or of Kings take their course towards the south and so come to the hauen of Singalla which is verie great whereby at the first the Spaniards were in mind to haue built the town of kings in that place it lyeth distant from Lyma 2â— Spanish miles or 105. Italian miles whereof fiue make a Duch mile which is one and twentie Duch miles it lyeth not ful vnder fourteene degrees on the south side of the line Hard by the hauen of Sangalta lyeth an Island taking the name of the sea Wolues al the coast from thence forward is very low although in some places there are smal hils of plaine stone and some sandie downes wherein as yet neither before nor til this time it euer rained where also there falleth no other moysture then onely the smal dewe whereof I spake before about this Island of sea Wolues there are seuen or eight other Islandes which lie in Triangle wherof some are high some low and all vnhabited hauing neither water wood trees grasse nor any thing onely Sea Wolues and great store of sande The Peruuians of the firme land as they theÌ„selues say in times past vsed to goe into those Islands and there to offer sacrifices where it is thought much treasor lyeth hidden these Islands are distant from the firme land about three miles Further in the same course vnder 14. and 1 â— lyeth another Island of the same name and from thence sailing on and coasting along the shore southwest and southwest and by south and being 9. miles beyond the Island you come to a point called Nasca lying vnder fifteene degrees lesse ¼ vnder the which the shippes may anker but yet they cannot land with their boates neither throw foorth their Bocken following the same course vnder fifteene degrees 1 â— there is another head or poynt called S. Nicolas and from this cape the coast runneth southwest and when you haue sayled nine miles in that sort you come to a hauen called Hacan which lyeth vnder sixteene degrees from whence following on the coast you come to the riuer Diocouna on which side the coast is altogether wilde A little further there is another riuer called Camana and somewhat further the riuer Quilca and about halfe a mile beyonde it there is a verie good grounde where the ships may ride and anker which hauen is also called Quilca like the riuer and from thence as men put out they saile to the towne of Arequipa which lyeth 12. miles from this towne the hauen and the towne lying vnder seuenteene degrees ½ sayling along the coast of this hauen about three miles distant you see certaine Islands in the which certaine Indian fishermen of the firme lande doo
vpon a hil within a goodly vallie the foundation beeing of foure squared stones so cunningly closed together that it could not be perceiued how they were ioyned froÌ„ the which Castle there went a vast vnder the earth to the sea coast so that the waues beat against the entrie thereof with such force that it is wonderful to think how that péece of worke was made which Castle was most curiously painted and in it also there was a great part of the kings treasor the ruines whereof in regard of the Peruuians perpetual coÌ„mendations ought not further to be spoyled as being workes done by such people which vnto vs wold be altogether incredible if they had not bin seene a mile a half further vpward from the castle of Goarco there is a riuer called Lunaguana in our Card Laguna which vallie is altogether like the former and foure miles and a halfe from that is the great vallie of Chincha much esteemed in Peru specially by the auncient inhabitants In this vallie there is a cloyster of the order of saint Dominike At the spaniards ariual there were aboue 25000. men in that vallie where now there are scarce 5000. and were ouercome by Inga Iupangue of â—opaynga Iupangâ—e who had their gouernours therein with many houses of pleasure and the temple of the Sun yet the inhabitants lest not off to serue and honour their olde Idol called Cinciaycama the king hadde likewise in this vallie many pentioners and souldiers commaunding some of them for certaine moneths in the yeare to repaire vnto the Court and goe to warres with him This vallie of Cincia is one of the greatest vallies in all the countrey of Peru where it is a most pleasant sight to beholde the greene trees that grow in the waters that run vnder them with most sweete and pleasant Citrons not like the Spanish Citrons although in forme not differing much for that these being pilled are yellow and of a good taste and so pleasant that a man can neuer satisfie himselfe therewith in those woods there are many birds but beasts verie few because of the continuall warres in times past there was likewise many graues in this country wherein the Spaniards found much treasor Departing from this goodly prouince of Cincia and trauailing further ouer the plaine countrey you come to the pleasant vally Iâ—a which is no lesse inhabited then the former through the which also there runneth a riuer which in some times of the yeare is so small that they shuld want water but that they haue a channell of water that commeth out of the hilles heerein are many fruites there are likewise manie yong horses kine goates pigeons and turtle doues from thence you come to the vallie and riuer of Nasca otherwise called Caxa Malca which in times past was verie populous where they till their ground and water their fruits in manner before rehearsed These people for the most parte were spoyled and consumed by the disunion and contention of the Spaniards in it were many great places and houses of munition for the kings of Peru and diuers graues all spoyled and destroyed by the Spaniards the vallies of Nasca are many in number whereof one of them hath many canes that yeeld much sugar they haue likewise much sugar which they bring to sel in the townes bordering vpon them through all these vallies the kings great high way doth passe and in some sundrie places there are as yet certaine tokens or signes to shew the right way that men should not stray aside of the which way I meane to say more heereafter when I come to speake of the kings of Peru from this vally commonly called Nasca you goe to Hacary and then to Ocuna Icamanna and Iquilca where there are great riuers and although at this present there are but few inhabitants yet in times past they were no lesse populous then the first they are fruitfull and very fatte to feede cattel in the vallie of Quilca lyeth the hauen of Arequipa and the towne so that from Lima or the Kings towne to Arequipa are ninety Spanish miles or thrée hundred and sixtie Italian miles the town lyeth about eleuen miles within the vally of Quilca distant from the sea in the best and most pleasant place of all the vallie to bée built vpon where there is a verie good and temperate aire whereby it is commended for one of the most holsomest places in all Peru and the pleasantest to dwell in being a Bishopricke and vnder the Iurisdiction of Lyma hauing in it about thrée hundred Spanish houses the countrey thereabouts is verie fat and yéeldeth verie good Corne whereof they make bread the limites or Iurisdiction of the towne reacheth from the vallie of Hacari to Tarapaca and in the prouince or countrey of Condesuyo they haue likewise authoritie ouer certaine places which are vnder the Spanish gouernment those of Hubnas Ciqui Guanitta Quimistaca and Colagnas are all vnder the commandement of this towne in time past very populous and now most part destroyed by the Spaniards they pray to the sun as other Peruuians do and weare shirts and mantles most of their siluer and treasor is brought from Charcas and the mynes of Potoisi and Porco from thence it is carried to Lyma and so to Panama and Spaine about this towne there is a hill of Brimstone which burneth continually whereby it putteth the countrey in great feare doing great hurt vnto the countrey and the town sometimes by reason thereof they haue certaine earthquakes this towne was builded by Francisco Pizarro in his maiesties name in the yeare of our Lord 1536. Many Spanish wares as wine oyle oliues meale corne or wheate c. are brought thither therewith to serue the Countrey of Charcas and the mines of Potoisi Porco There also many of the Inhabitants of the pâ—â—ne countrey do come and traffâ—ke concerning the mines aforesaide wherby much siluer and treasor is brought thither to be conuayed froÌ„ thence into other places therabouts on the sea coast are many great Gieren that spread their wings at the least fiftéene or sixteene handfulles broade that liue vpon Sea Wolues which they take picking out theyr eyes and feeding of theyr bodyes There are likewise great numbers of Sea Mewes by the Spaniards called Alcatraces that likewise liue of sea fish and sea crabs and such like Their flesh is stinking and vnholsome so that many who for want of meate haue eaten them died therof And thus much for the first part of the plain countrey of Peru lying along the sea coast Nowe before I procéede further I will speake somewhat of the Peruuians dwelling vppon the hilles and of their townes withall not forgetting their kings that ruled ouer all those people and haue so rich a country of gold siluer Peru is in length 525. Spanish miles or 420. Duch miles which are 2100. Italian miles in breadth in some places 75. Spanish or 60. Dutch miles in some places broader and in
some narrower accounting the length from Quito to the towne Delia Platta in this country of Peru are thrée sorts of hilles wherein men cannot inhabite the first parte of the hilles are called Andes which are full of great Woods the country being vnfit and vnholsome to dwell in which likewise were not inhabited but beyonde the hilles the second parte of the hilles taketh her course from the Andes which are verie colde and are great snow hilles so that there also no man can dwell because of the great colde and aboundance of snow which maketh the ground so soft that nothing can grow therin The third parte of the hilles are the Sandie Downes which runne through the plaine land of Peru from Tumbez to Tarapaca where it is so hot that neither water trées grasse nor any liuing creature is seene thereon but onely certaine birdes that flye ouer them Nowe Peru beeing so long and scituate in this manner there are many wilde and desart places not inhabited for the causes before rehearsed and such as were inhabited were great vallies and dales that by reason of the hils are throwded and defended from the windes and snow wherby those vallies and great fields are verie fruitful so that whatsoeuer is plaÌ„ted therein yéeldeth fruit most aboundantly the woods about them bring vp manye beasts and birds the Peruuians that dwel betwéene these hils are wiser stronger and subtiller then those in the plaine countrey lying on the sea coast and apter to gouerne and for pollicy they dwel in houses made of stone whereof some are couered with earth others with strawe because of the raine whereof those in the plaine countrey by the sea side haue no care at all couering theyr houses thereby to keepe them from the sun with painted mattes or boughs of trees out of these vallies lying betweene the hilles there runneth many streames of good water into the south sea and moysten the plain countrey of Peru causing many fruitfull Trees corne and other things necessary for mans life to grow therein as I haue already declared Of the people and countries that are therein lieing from Pasto to Quito THe village of Pasto lieth in the vallie Atris which is in the land of Quillacinga people without shame and good manners as also they of Pasto little esteemed by their neighbours trauailing from Pasto you come to Funez and two miles and ¼ furder to Iles from thence to Gualnatan are two miles and a halfe and from thence to Ipiules two miles and a quarter in al these villages is very little maiz by reason of the colde although they are so neere vnto the line but much Papas and other rootes that are to be eaten from Ipiules you trauaile to Guaca but before you come at it you may see the Kings hie-way which is no lesse to be wondred at then the way that Hannibal made through the Alpes whereof hereafter I will speak also you passe hard by a riuer vpon the side whereof the King of Peru had made a fort from whence he made warre vpon those of Pasto and ouer this Riuer there is a bridge by nature so artificially made that arte coulde not possibly mend it it is of a high and thick rock in the midle whereof there is a hole through the which with great fury the streame passeth and vpon that rocke men may go ouer it this rocke in their speech is called Luâ—â—châ—ca that is a stone bridge about that place is a fountaine of warme water wherein a man cannot endure to holde his handes although the countrie about it and also the riuer are verie colde whereby it is hard trauailing by this bridge also the King of Peru ment to haue built another castle therin to keepe garrison but he was preuented by the Spaniardes ariuall in those countries in this countrie there groweth a certaine fruit as small as plumbs and blacke by them called Mortunnos whereof if any man eateth they are drunke and as it were out of their wittes for the space of foure and twentie houres From this small countrye of Guaca you come to â—usa where y e prouince of Pasâ—o endeth not farre from thence you come to a little hill wherevppon also the Kings of Peru had a castle much defended by the Peruuians and going furder you come to the riuer of Mira where it is very hot an there are many kinds of fruits and certaine faire melons good connies turtle doues and partriges great aboundance of corne barley and maiz from this riuer you trauaile downe to the rich and costly houses of Carangue before you come thither you must first passe ouer a lake in India called Aguarcocia in our speech the opeÌ„ sea because Guianacapa king of Peru at the Spaniards ariuall caused 20000. men of the places thereabout to be assembled destroyed them all because they had displeased him and threw their bodies into that lake making the water red with their blood The houses of CaraÌ„gue are in a little place wherin there is a goodly fountaine made of costly stone and in the same countries are many faire houses belonging to the kings of Peru all made of stone and also a Temple of the same wherein there was alone 200. maides that serued the temple and are verie narrowly looked vnto that they commit no vncleanes if they did they were cruelly punished and hanged or buried quicke with them also were certaine priests y t offered sacrifices and offerings according to their religious manner This Temple of the sunne in time of the kings of Peru was holden in great account being then very carefully looked vnto and greatly honoured wherein was many golde and siluer vessels iewels and treasure the walls being couered with plates of golde and siluer and although it is cleane destroyed yet by roums you may still behold the great magnificence thereof in times past the kings of Peru had their ordinary garison in the houses of Carangue with their Captaines who both in time of peace and warre continued there to punish offenders Departing from the houses of Carangue you come to Oâ—aballo which is also rich and mightie and from thence to Cosesqui and before you come thither you must passe certaine snowie hills where it is so colde that men trauaile ouer them with greate paine from Cosesqui you goe to Guallabamba which is three miles from Quito and because the countrie thereabout is lowe and almost vnder the line therefore it is there very hot yet not so hot that men cannot dwell therein or that it hindereth the fruitfulnes thereof by this discourse you may perceiue the eror of many ancient writers that say that vnder the line by reason of the great heate no man may dwell but to the contrary you see that after their maner they haue both summer and winter in some places colde and in some places hot as also that vnder it there dwelleth many people and there many fruites and seeds do grow In this way you passe
courteous and withall verie well apparrelled From thence you goe into another Prouince called Gâ—ancas a goodly countrey both those people of Cachapoia and Guanca are subiect to the Spaniardes of Frontiera as also those of Cascayunga people of another prouince In all those Prouinces the kings of Peru hadde their houses of amunition and in some of them rich mynes of Golde Both men and women in these countreyes go apparrelled In time past they hadde their Temples and offered to theyr Idols and were verie rich of Cattell and made much costlie apparrell for the king as yet at this day they doo and many fine couerlets and carpets In those Prouinces there are manie fruitfull trees and the countries are ful of Wheate and Barlie Touching their ceremonies customes burials and offerings they are like all the other Indians they burie much siluer and golde with their dead and some liuing women they offer vnto the Sunne as I will declare when I write of the Kinges of Peru. This Andes or hill beeing past you come to Maiobamba or Moyobamba another great riuer and some places inhabited From Mayobamba you trauaile to Guanuco a towne inhabited by Spaniardes and lyeth about fortie miles from Cachapoya it is likewise called Leon de Guanuco hauing the name of a Spanish Towne by the commaundement of Vacca di Castio borne in Leon. The scituation of this Towne is verie good and wholsome because the morning and night seasons are verie temperate where also by reason of the temperate aire men liue verie healthfull There they gather much Maiz and other graines Quinces Figges Citrons Lemons and other Spanish fruites as also much of their own country fruit besids this there is much Platain because it is a verie good soyle it is thought the towne will increase for all their kine goates horses and other beasts are kept in the fieldes There are likewise many Partriges Pigeons and other Birds wilde Hawkes and tame therewith to catch the other birdes In the hilles there are some Lions Beares and other wilde beasts and in most parte of the places that are vnder the gouernment of this towne the kings high way doth passe and there are likewise many houses for amunitioÌ„ among those people were certaine southsayers and coniurers that were skilful in the course and nature of the starres in time past there were so many of their countrie sheepe that it was incredible which by meanes of the Spanish warres were most part consumed Their houses are of stone and couered with straw The liuing womeÌ„ in those countries are buried with the dead men and are not so vnchaste as others are In their countrey are good mines of siluer Fortie miles further from Guanuco de Lion lyeth another towne inhabited by the Spaniards and builded on the hils by Francisco Pizarro in the kings name in the yeare of our Lord 1539. and called S. Iohan dila vitoria di Guamanga the cause why it was made was chiefly to cleare the passage betweene Cusco and Lyma from inuasion of the Peruuians before the countrey was wholly subdued by this towne there passeth a riuer of good sweete water to drinke and there are verie faire stone houses and some towers the market place is plain and verie great and there it is a wholsome aire for that neither sunne aire nor elements do any hurt but are verie temperate round about the towne the Spaniards haue their houses for cattell which lie in the vallies vpon the riuers side The greatest riuer that passeth thereabouts is called Vinaque where there are many ruines seene of great foure square pallaces built in other sort then the Peruuians vse to do that make theyr houses long and narrow They say those houses were built in olde time by strange people but what they were they knew not There is likewise goodly wheate whereof they make as good bread as any in Spaine and all kindes of fruites in great aboundance from Guamanga to Cusco are fiue and fortie miles little more or lesse in this way you passe the fields of Chiupas where the cruel battell was fought betwéene Vacca di Castra and Dondiego di Almagro and being eight miles beyond Guamanga lyeth Vilcas which is sayd to be in the middle of all the countreyes that are vnder the gouernment of the Kings of Peru for that Vilcas lyeth in the middle betwéene both and is as farre from Quito as from Chile where also were great and costly houses for the king and a temple of the sunne from whence fiue miles further you keepe on the kings high way to Vramarca whereabouts there is a bridge of two arches verie cunningly made that passeth ouer a riuer in breadth 166. paces The Riuer of Vilcas runneth out of the Prouince of Soras verie fruitful and aboundant in victuals golde and siluer mines and of warlike people apparrelled in wollen clothes and wel esteemed of by the kings of Peru. From thence to Andagnayla vpon the Riuer Abamcay are seuen miles and trauailing sixe miles further you come to another Riuer called Apurimâ— there the wayes are verie badde rough and sharp ouer hils and stony waies dangerous to descend for that many horses laden with gold do stumble and fall into the Riuer so are spoyled from Apurima you come to Maâ—ambo and passing the hilles of Vilca conga you come to Xaqui Xaguana which is verie euen but neither long nor broade in this vallie were certaine goodly houses and pallaces of pleasure for the kings of Cusco who vsed to go thither to recreate themselues and is scarce 4 miles from Cusco through the which also passeth the kings high way and otherwiâ—e it wold hardlie be trauelled as hauing certain moorish grouÌ„ds which crosse the way close by the wals and from thence you come to Cusco in times past the cheefe of all Peru and the whole countrey gouerned by the kings made by Mango Capo the first king of that race in a verie rough and sharpe place compassed with hilles and betweene two small riuers whereof one runneth through the middle of the towne and is inhabited on both sides it hath a vallie on the East side the streame that runneth through the towne taketh her course on the west side in this vally because it is colde there are verie few fruitful trees onely certaine Molles whereof hereafter I will speake because therewith they make their drinke On the north side this towne had a Castle vpon a hil which for the greatnesse and strength thereof was much esteemed but now most part destroyed although the foundation and some towers thereof are yet to be séene it hath likewise on the east and north side the Prouince of Andesuyo and Cinciasuyo on the south side the countreys of Callao and Condesuio vnder the which lyeth Callao betwéene East and South and Condesuyo betweene south and west a part of this Cittie was called Hauan Cusco the other Oren Cusco places where the Noble men and Gentlemen and principall of the
towne dwell on the other side the hill Carmenga where there stoode certaine small towers wherein they noted the course of the sunne in the middle where most of the people dwell was a great place from the which there passed foorth high wayes that went into the foure partes of the kingdome and this towne onely was orderly and fairely built with stone houses and richer and mightier then all the other Townes of Peru for that vpon paine of death no man might carrie any gold out of the same therein was the richest temple of the sunne in all the world which was called Curicanche in it was the high Priest by them called Villaona and part of this citie was inhabited by Mâ—timaes which are strangers that all were holden vnder good policie lawes ceremonies of their Idols most wonderfull to heare the Castle was made of so great foure squared stones that ten paires of oxen could hardly drawe one of them so that it cannot be imagined howe by mans handes those stones were brought thither hauing neither oxen horses nor any other beasts to draw withall The houses at this time inhabited by the Spaniards are most built by people of the countrie but are somewhat repaired and made greater in the time of their kings this citie was diuided into foure parts according to the foure partes of the worlde and hadde the names from the foure prouinces that lay vpon each corner of the Cittie and when the Kings were liuing no man dwelling in one quarter of the Citie might remooue houshold into another vppon great paine and punishments inflicted and although this Citie lyeth in a colde place yet it is very holsome and better prouided of all sortes of victuals and greater then any other thorowout all Peru round about it there vsed to be certaine mines of gold but now consumed and are left for the siluer mines of Potosi because now the profit is greater by siluer and lesse danger In this towne was great resort from the parts of Peru for till the nobilitie were forced to send their children thither vnder pretence of learning the speech and to serue the king but were there rather for pannes that in the meane time their fathers might not rise vp against the kings other people dwelling about it were forced to come thither to build houses to make cleane the Castles and to doo other kindes of workes whatsoeuer they should be commaunded about this Cittie there lyeth a great hil called Guanacaure of great account with the kings wher they offered both men and beasts and although in this Citie there were people of all nations as of Chile Pasto Cagnaâ—es Bâ—acamoâ—o Chacapoyas Guancas Charcas Collao c. yet euerie nation dwelt in a place by themselues appoynted for the purpose and helde the ceremonies of their auncetors onely that they were forced to pray vnto and honour the sun as the high God by them called Mocia There were likewise in this Cittie many great buildings vnder the earth wherein there dwelt certain coniurers southsayers and such as told fortunes who as yet are not all rooted out and in those holes there is daily found great quantities of treasor About the Citie are many temperate vallyes wherein there groweth certaine trees and corn although in times past euerie thing was brought thither in great aboundance Vpon the riuer that runneth through the towne they haue their corne milles nowe they haue likewise many Spanish capons and hens as good as any are in Spaine as also kine goates and other cattell although there are but fewe trees yet there groweth much pease beanes tares fitches and such like because therin was the most rich and sumptuous temple of the sunne and high priest I think it not vnconuenient to speak something of their Religion and of the Pettigree of the Kings of Peru and then in bréefe manner to go on with our course of shewing the â—ownes lying on hilles til you come to Arequipa as also the coast reaching to the straights of the Magellanes The Religion of the Peruuians TOuching their Religion they acknowledge and after their manner worshipped a creator of heauen and earth whome they caled Pachacama which signifieth creator a son of the Sun Moone like that in the vallie of Pachacama where they had made a great temple yet they accounted and held the Sun for the greatest God as a creator of all liuing creatures which in Cuscan speech they caled Ticebiracoce and although they had this knowledge and vnderstanding yet they vsed their olde customes not onely to pray vnto the Sunne and Moone but also to trées stones and other things the diuell through them giuing them answeres and because they had no certaine knowledge out of any writings or bookes of the scriptures or of the creation of the worlde neither yet of the floud therefore they obserue that which their forefathers told them which was that a notable and worthy man which they call Con in times past came out of the north into their countries with most swift pase that had no bones nor ioynts in his body neyther was it knit together by any kinde of substance that in one day could throwe downe or raise hilles and fill deep vallies and passe through a place where no wayes nor meanes to passe was found and that this man had made their predecessors giuing them hearbs and wilde fruits to liue vpon and that he being offended with the Peruuians inhabiting the plaine countrey conuerted their fruitfull land into sandie grounds and caused raine not to fall therein yet being moued with pittie because of the beasts and to water the drie fieldes hee opened diuers fountaines and riuers whereby the people might moisten theyr groundes This Con being sonne of the Sunne and Moone in times past they honoured for the highest God vntill an other came out of the south called Pachacama which signifieth Creator who also was ingendered by the Sunne and Moone and of greater power than Con at whose comming Con departed away and this Pachacama conuerted the people made by Con into Sea coltes Beares Lions Parats and other birdes and made other men that were the predecessors of the Peruuians now liuing and taught them the manner of planting and tilling the earth whome they after that esteemed for their God building Churches for him and praying vnto him and called a whole Prouince after his name Pachacama lying foure miles from Lyma as already is declared where in times past the Kings and noblemen of the land were commonly buried which theyr god Pachacama was long time worshipped by them til the comming of the Spaniardes into Peru and after that he was neuer séene Againe it is to be thought it was a Diuell who vsed that manner of subtiltie thereby to deceiue and blinde the people who in those times appeared in forme of a man as it is euident that before the Spaniards arriuall he shewd himselfe in that great costly temple in forme of a man and answered
Church and keepe the rest for themselues and you must vnderstand that all the offerings must be wrought with golde and siluer and of such forme and fashion as the thing is which they desire to haue of their Guaca They offer also liuing men and all kindes of beastes looking in the hearts and intrailes of the men or beastes which they did offer for certaine secret tokens which if they founde not vpon the offerings they still offered newe men or beasts vntil they founde the tokens thinking the Idoll not to be pleased with such offrings as had them not When the priests should offer sacrifices then they abstaine from the company of their wiues and ceased not all night to doo nothing but crie out and pray to the diuell running into the fieldes and to the places where the Guacas stande whereof there were so many that euerie man hadde one before his dore and the day before they should speake with the diuell they fasted some binding a thing before their eies and some thrust them cleane out and it hath often bene seene that some of them haue done it of meere deuotion The kinges and noble menne enterprise not any thing before they haue consulted with the Priestes and the Priests with the Idoles in their sacrifices they vse not onely beastes but menne and children but they eate not mans flesh as the Caniballes do When the Spaniardes spoyled their Temples they founde therein many pottes full of the dried bones and flesh of dead children that had bin offered to their Idolles they offer likewise birdes and other beastes and with the bloud of their offerings they annoint the mouthes of their Idolles and the dores of their churches There was likewise among the golde that lay by their idolles certaine staues and myters for Bishops such as our Bishops vse when they are in their robes or as the Painters vse to set foorth Saint Nicholas with his Crosse and Myter and being asked what those things meant they knew not what to answere neyther from whence they came Besides those great temples of the Sunne and Guacas there were in all places of the countrey of Peru many other Churches and Cloysters for yong maides wherein some had one hundred some two hundred and some more al obseruing chastitie or at the least vowing to keepe it and to honour the Sunne like the Vastal virgins in Rome or our Nuns Those they called Mamacomas and were bound to stay in the cloyster during their liues and neuer to depart from thence dooing nothing but spinne weaue and sowe very fine cloth of cotten and wooll apparell and furnitures for their Idolles or as others affirme the clothes by them made were burnt with the bones of white sheepe the ashes whereof as a signe and token of godly honour they threw into the ayre against the Sunne Those maides were verye narrowely looked vnto by certaine Priestes and other men appoynted for the purpose wherof some were gelded because they should not seeke to defile them which if the maides once committed they were eyther put to death or buried quicke but if the maide with childe would take her othe that it was begotten by the Sunne then the childe was free from death and euerye yeere in the moneth of August when they had gathered in their corne or maiz the Perâ—uians that dwelt in the hilles made a great feast they set vp in the middle of their Market place two great hie trees like our Maie-poles and in the top of them they placed certaine Images made like men compassed about with flowers and so in roundes yet in good order comming thither they strike vp drummes throwing and showting one after the other with stones and arrowes at those Images making great noyse with whooping and hallowing and euery man hauing shott and thrown The Priests brought an other Image which was set belowe on the neather part of the trees whereunto they offered either a man or a sheepe annoynting the Image with the bloud thereof and after they perceiued the tokens in the heart or intrailes they certified it vnto the people and the tokens being found the feast was ended eyther with ioy or sadnes most part in drinking wherunto they are much addicted and so daunced turning and passing vnder each others armes each man hauing either a bill clubbe or some other weapon in his hand such as are desirous to know more of their ceremonies and false worshippings of Idoles let them reade the histories of the Spanish Indies The countrey of Peru was first ruled by Iudges which are Kings or Rulers that come from the great lake called Titicara or as some write Titicaca lying in Charcas being foure score miles in compasse which runneth westward through a great riuer which in some places is halfe a mile broad and then runneth into an other small lake fortie miles distant and it is to be wondered at how the abundaunce of water that runneth out of the great lake is comprehended in so small a place where it is not once perceiued to increase The lake beeing so small and the water so great but it is reported that in that lake there is no botome or ground and that the water runneth vnder the ground thorow the earth into another sea or riuer as it is saide of the riuer Alpheus that it runneth from Peioponces or Moica to Cicilia vnder the ground and from this lake or thereabouts the kings of Peru had their originall the petegree of which kings is by Iacob Fernando a Spaniard declared in this manner Frst Mango Capa who according to the Indians report was not borne of a woman but sprang out of a stone which vntill this day is yet shewne by them about the towne of Cusco hee by his wife Mama Guaco had issue one sonne called Sicheroca that ruled after his father and was the second Ingen or king you must vnderstand that the inheritance of the kingdome continueth in the issue sons successiuely and not vnto the children of the sonnes before all the brothers haue raigned one after another but first the eldest sonne is King then after his death his second brother succeedeth in the kingdome and not the eldest brothers sonnes and the second brother dying there being no more brethren the crowne falleth vnto the eldest brothers sonnes without alteration or change this Sicheroca was a valiant souldier like his father and broght many of his neighbours to subiection and by Mama Cura he had issue a sonne called Locuco Pangue the third king who studied rather to holde those landes he had vnder his subiection then to win or increase more vnto them and being aged he married a wife Mama Anauerque by whom he had a sonne called Maita Capa that augmented his kingdome and thervnto ioyned the prouince of Cusco and by his wife Mama Iacchi Dela he had issue a sonne called Capa Cyupangu of whom there is nothing worthy memory onely that he left a sonne by his wife Mama Cagna called Inga
Ruca who likwise did no speciall thing during his life but onely by his wife Mama Mâ—cay he had diuers sonnes and one among the rest called Iaguar Guacinga Iupangue of whome there is a strange history recited which is y t he being a child of y e age of thrée monthes was taken by certaine Caciquen that are likewise Lordes or kinges that thought to kil him and while they coÌ„sulted amongst themselues coÌ„cerning his death it chanced that as the childe cried certaine drops of blood issued out of his eyes whereby they were abashed estéeming it for a miracle they left the child and departed which being taken vp by a stranger was caried to the king and after that became great and proued a braue souldier so that he ouercam many of his neighbours and brought them in subiection vnder him he had to wife Mama Chipuia and by her had his eldest sonne named Viâ—a Cocham that succéeded him in his kingdome and much increased his dominions after him raigned Pachacoti his sonne borne of Mama Yunta Cayan this Prince was much valanter then al his predecessors whereby he ouercame many people and by him the foundation of the castle of Cusco was first begun and dying he left for heire and successor of his kingdome â—opa Inga Iupangue his sonne borne of Mama Anaberque that followed his fathers steppes and ouercame many people and brought them in subiection and finished the castle of Cusco begun by his father The prouinces by him won were Câ—iâ—e and Quito and he caused the kinges hie-waye so much wondered at of all the worlde to be made from Cusco through the prouince of Charcas vnto Chile in the which way from halfe mile to halfe mile he had placed postes by them called Chasquis which were Indians that went faster then any of our horses to the great ease and contentment of trauailers for by that means they might shorten their way and in three dayes trauaile 120 Lâ—uken that is 240 miles by reason of the swiftnes of the men that bare them and stoode for postes after the Aâ—trican manner in the kingdome of Congo as I haue already declared for that after the ariual of the Spaniardes there were neither horses asses nor mules within the country whereon men should ride or trauaile withal This king dying left issue aboue 150. sonnes among the which one of them named Guaynacapa begotten vpon Mama Oclo his wife succeeded him in his kingdom not any thing inferior for valour wisedom and councell both in peace and war much augmenting and increasing the limites of his countrie obseruing great order and equitie in all thinges both concerning the gouernment of the countrie and the people appointing better orders and manie olde and ancient lawes that were vnfit and not conuenient he caused to be abrogated and newe deuised in their place hee maried a wife called Coyam Pilico vaco by whom hauing no children he maried diuers other wiues so that the number of his children was much greater then his fathers who notwithstanding had 150 sonnes Among his children the eldest was called Guascar Inga his mother being called Raua Oclo and as I said before this king Guainacapa much increased in his kingdome and ouercame many people among the which hee helde so good gouernment and order as it séemed in manner vnpossible specially among such rude simple people that were wholy without learning wherein appeered a most manifest example of great subiection and loue in his subiects towards their naturall Lordes and herevpon to his great honour they made the two notable and costly hie-waies so much esteemed in al couÌ„tries and may well be accounted for one of the seauen wonders of the world for when Guainacapa was gon from Cusco with his armie to make warre against the prouince of Quito distant from thence at the least 500 miles he was forced to passe ouer high hills whereby both he and his people indured great trouble and miserie because 〈◊〉 war was full of hard and rough stones before his returne againe being victorious his subiects in token of great ioy as also for his further â—ase and comoditie because hee and his souldiers had indeed so hard and laboursome a â—ournâ—e cut downe and digged vp all the 〈◊〉 waies and stonie cliffes making the waye euen and plaine so that in some places there were vallyes of twentie or thirtie mens height that were filled vp and made euen with the hilles which way they made in that maner for y e length of fiue hundred miles so plaine and euen that any cart or wagon might trauell theron which way after the Spaniards ariual in the contrie was in diuers places spoiled and destroied to let the Indians from traueling that way and thinking this not sufficient when the saide Guainacapa went to visit his country of Quito and tooke his waie through the plain country they likewise made him another way to fill all the vallies and â—rish places therein and to make them euen which way they made about fortie foote broad on both sides with high walles and in the sandy waies they set great â—roughes with ropes tied vnto theÌ„ because men should not lose themselues in the waâ—e which stretched likewise 500 miles the walles as yet in some places are to be seene but by meanes of their warres the Banks for the most part are taken away and burnt and besides all this he him selfe caused many temples of the sunne and other Idoles and diuers Taâ—â—boâ— which are houses of munition and of pleasure for the benefit and commodity of his successors in time of warre to be made and builded as wel on the hils as in the plain countrie both on the riuer sides as in euery way the riuers whereof are at this day in many places to be seene whereby may be coniectured the greatnes and riches of those kings and the great care they had for the defence and safetie of their countries for that heereby when they trauailed through the countrie not only they and all their companie might lodge in those houses but the houses were still furnished and prouided by the people inhabiting about them not only with victuals sufficient for a whole armie but also with apparel and al kinde of weapons that were vsed in the warrs therewith presently to apparell their souldiers and to make them ready for the warres as bowes arrowes pikes halberds clubbes bils c. for 20000. or 30000 men presently to bee raised wherof there was no want and those houses were some 8 or 10 and some twentie miles at the furthest one from the other neuer further distaÌ„t then a days iourney As touching the ornaments of the kings of Peru which they in steed of crownes and princely septers vsed to weare therby to shew their power and maiestie they ware certaine tassels of red woole bound about their heads hanging downe vppon their shoulders almost couering their eies whereat there hung other threeds which they vsed when they would haue any thing
done or executed giuing that thrid vnto one of the Lordes that attended on them and by that commandement gouerned the prouinces and by that token they commaunded al whatsoeuer they would desire which by their subiects was with so great diligeÌ„ce and dutiful obedience fulfilled that the like was neuer knowen in any place throughout the world and if hee chanced to command that a whole prouince shuld be clean destroyed and vtterly left desolate both of men and all liuing creatures whatsoeuer both yong old if he sent but one of his seruants to execute the same although he sent no other power or aide of men nor other commission then one of the theerds of his Quispell it was sufficient and they willingly yeelded themselues to all dangers of death or destruction whatsoeuer These kings were borne in chariots or seats made of beaten golde borne on the shoulders of 1000. Lordes and councelours at times thereunto appointed wherof if any of them vnaduisedly stumbled staggered he was presently put to death and no man spake vnto the king at any time but they brought him certaine presents and if they went to speake with him ten times in a daie so often must they preseÌ„t him with new gifts it was likewise accounted for a great fault so looke y e king in the face Being in the wars and hauing ouercome any countrie or prouince they obserued the ancient custom of Rome which was to take the people with them that they might not rise vp or rebell against them yet with great diffrence from the Romaines for that hauing won â—ame land or prouince they tooke many or â—â—we out of it according to the number of people that were therein if these whom they had conquered inhabited in a hot countrie they were placed in another warme country if theirs were cold they likewise went into a cold countrie where they had the lands deuided among theÌ„ that each man might liue vpon it And it the naturall countâ—â—men of any prouince or place wâ— to â—â—bel against their prince the kings Liâ—tenants and CoÌ„maunders vsed the 〈◊〉 as â—hat is the strange people to keep them in subiection and to the contrarie if the Mitimaes seemed once to stirre or rise vp they kept them in subiection by the naturall inhabitants and by this policie they maintained their countrie in great peace and quietnesse Besides this they vsed another meanes not to bee hated of their subiects for that they neuer tooke the rule or authoritie of any people that were subdued by them from the Caciquen or Lords that were nobly borne if any of them disliked thereof they punished him yet gaue his office either to his children or to his brethren commaunding them to bee obedient when they went to hunt and take their pleasures which they call Chico they assembled many men together according to the scituation of the countrey some times foure or 5000. men whom they placed in a ring together that many times compassed at the least two or three miles and so singing a certain song they followed each other foote by foote vntil they were so neare togither that they might reach hands and yet nearer till they could imbrace each other the nerer they went together the closer they made the ring by which meanes al the beasts by them inclosed they killed as they thought good with so great a noyse and crie as seemed incredible not much vnlike the maner of the Duch Princes in their general huntings specially of the Wolues onely that they haue not so many men nor sing not yet make a great noyse The beasts that they take are wild Sheepe Rheen Foxes Lions blacke Beares Cattes many Hogges and other beasts foules as Turtle doues Quailes Spetchten Parrots Hawkes c. The tributes and talages that the kings receiued of their subiects were things of their owne increase out of the countreyes that were vnfruitfull they brought him Hoopwik of Crocadiles by them called Caymans and many other wormes This Guaynacapa renewed the temple of the sunne in the Citie of Cusco couering the wals and ruffes with plates of gold and siluer and as I said before the prouince and countrey of Quito was woon by him which countrey pleased him so well that for a time hee continued therein meane time leauing his eldest son Guascar Iuga Mango and other of his children in Cusco to gouerne the countrey and in Quito hee married another Wife daughter to the Lord of the same prouince and by hir he had Atabalipam a son whom he greatly loued and when he trauailed to Cusco hee left him and others in Quito yet before he dyed he went once againe to Quito partly because the country liked him so well and partly to sée his sonne Atabalipam and there before he dyed hee ordained that the countrey and towne of Quito shuld remaine to his sonne Atabalipam and his heires for euer as beeing taken from his forefathers which his sonne Guascar after his fathers death would not permitte and for the same cause raised warres against his brother which in the ende was the ouerthrow and subiection of Peru whereof as in the life of Gualcaâ— that after his fathers death ruled all the countrey vnto Quito it appeareth Guascar signifieth a cord or cable for that at the time of his birth the king caused a cable of gold to be made as great as two hundred Indians could carry hee vsed likewise a plate of golde whereon hee sate worth at the least 25000. duckets which after fell into the hands of Francisco Pizarro first gouernour of Peru and all his vessel was of golde whereby it appeareth that golde was likewise much esteemed by them The Kings in Cusco had many goldesmiths shoppes therein to make and worke al kinde of vessels Iewels and images of men beastes foules and hearbes of golde al in good proportion and although theyr Goldsmithes vsed not any iron tooles yet they make most excellent workmanshippe although somewhat groser and plainer then ours The manner of working was in this sort first they tooke the siluer or golde that they would melt and put it in rounde or long melting vessels made of cloath pasted about with earth and beaten colours which being drie they set it in the fire with as much golde and siluer therein as they would melt or as it would hold and so with fiue or sixe reedes blowe so long about it vntill the mettall melted and became redde hot and the skimme being taken off it being taken out of the melting vessell euerie man had his part which they sitting vppon the earth with blacke Keâ—ciâ—ick stones made in form like hammers they forged framed theyr images of Gods vessels and Iewels of gold chaines and formes of all kinde of beastes birdes and hearbes with all manner of things But to returne vnto our former matter the Sonnes of Guaynacaâ—a called Guascar and Atabalipa were the cause of the destruction ruine and ouerthrowe of the countrey of Peru by reason
of the wars by them made one against the other for the gouernment of the country which was so cruell that they once met fought for the space of thrée whole dayes together and neuer ceased where many people were slaine â— and Atabalipa taken in the battel and kept prisoner in the prouince of Tomebamba and there very straightly kept in one of the Kings Castles yet by subtiltie and intreatie made to certaine women he had a copper instâ—â—ment brought vnto him wherewith hee brake the walles of the Castle of Tomebamba and gote out of prison at the same time that his brothers souldiers and captaines were making good cheere drinking their Cicha whereunto they are much addicted and dauncing for ioy of the victorie and being at libertie he fled vnto Qâ—â—to telling his people that he was by his father conuerted into a snake and so crept out of prison at a little hole his father promising him victorie so that his men would once againe returne with him to battaylet whereby his people were so well incouraged that they went with him agayne into the fielde where Fortune fauouring him and being victorious hee tooke his brother Guascar prisoner to whome not long before he hadde beene prisoner and therewith obtained all the Countrey making himselfe chiefe ruler thereof keeping his brother prisoner within Cusco About the same time Franciscus Pizarrus arriued in Peru being Oyuaer of those two mightie kings and by reason of theyr dissension made him maister of so great and rich countries of gold Hee that desireth a larger description hereof may reade the Spannish Histories that write of the description of the new worlde Pizarius being in the Countrey made warre against Atabalipam and in th end ouercame him and for a time kept him prisoner and during his imprisonment hee agréed with Pizario for a certaine ransome and when it was ready hée caused his brother Guascar to be sent for out of Cusco and by the way before he came at him he caused him to be slaine fearing and not without a cause that if Guascar once came before the Spaniard and should declare his misfortune he would without all doubt offer a greater ransome as he had done then hée should pay and by that meanes he shoulde remaine in prison and his brother at libertie hauing hadde al the treasure of his predecessours as also his fathers But Aâ—tabalipa hauing brought his ransom which amounted vnto 3088235. gilderus was not long after by crueltie of the Spaniards without any cause and also against theyr othe and promise most shamefully by certaine Moores at the commaundement of Pizarius openly strangled in the Market place and as some write his body was after burned to ashes This was the 〈◊〉 able end of the mightie K. Atabalipa a man of a meane stature wise and high minded wholly giuen to rule Twenty dayes before his death there appeared a blazing starre which when he perceiued he prophecied that in shorte time after a grâ—at Prince of that country should die not thinking it to be himselfe Guascar and Atabalipa being both dead the gouernment fâ—l vnto Mango Inga the third brother who dying left his kingdome to his son Xaires Topa Inga that maried a wife caled Câ—ya daughter of a noble man called Cuxi Vâ—rcay Guascaris and he before he entred into the gouernement chaunged his name to Mango capa Pachuti Iupan withall making himselfe subiect vnto Philip King of Spaine which hapned 1557. on the sixt of Ianuary being Twelfe day Thus much touching the kings of Peru. A description of the places or townes lying among the hils THrée miles from Cusco lieth the valley Iucay a very pleasant valley lying betwéene two hilles very fresh and wholesome aire as being therin neither ouer hot nor colde and two miles beyond it lieth Tambo another valley wherein are seene great ruines of the kings munition houses And trauelling further you come to Condesuyo a prouince where in times past there dwelt certaine warlike people their townes standing betwéene high hils where there were many wilde and tame beasts Their houses were of stone couered with strawe therein also were many houses and pallaces of noble men They haue all one maner of liuing with the rest the Peruuians offering lambes and other beastes in their churches wherein at certaine times the diuell shewed himselfe the riuers are rich of golde and there are made certayne couerlets of fine wooll cunningly wrought in diuers colours This way before called Andes is very long for it runneth cleane through Peru to the straites of Magellanas wherein there lieth many prouinces and townes and diuers high trees some couered with snowe others with flames of burning brimstone whereby it is very hard to be trauelled specially because therein for the most part it commonly raineth Trauelling many miles further you come to the countrey called Collao wherein is the lake called Tiâ—icaca where there is an Island and therein a Temple of the Sunne wherein they sowed their maiz and kepe their treasure Round about this lake are many villages and therein much good fish is taken Somewhat further you come vnto the town of Plata which is a hundred and fiftie miles from Cusco in the prouince of Chaâ—cas in a colder aire then any other place in all the hilles there are but fewe inhabitants but such as are verie rich and most because of the mynes of Porco and Potosi for Potoâ—i is not aboue eighteene miles from the towne of Plata discouered by the company of Captaine Caruaial for that as some of the Indians with one Ian de Villa Roel a townsman of Plata trauelled thorow the countrey they found a high hil lying in a flat and euen vallie wherein perceiuing certaine tokens of siluer they melted a peece of the Minerall and found it so rich that one quintal made fourscore marks siluer the like whereof was neuer heard of This newes being come to Plata presently the cheefe gouernours of the towne went thither where they diuided vnto euerie man as much as he could doo or labour in whereby such resort came thither that in short time the place was inhabited by more then 7000. men the Indians working and making contract with the Spaniards their maisters how much siluer they wold weekly deliuer This mine is of a wonderfull strange nature because it wil not be molten by blowing with the bellowes neyther in fornaces like other mynes but only in smal furnaces by them caled Guairas which they sette vppon the highest parte of the hill placing the mouthes southwarde from whence the winde dooth continually blowe throwing into the mine fire coales and sheepes dongue whereby the winde made the fire to burne so hot and cleare as that not any bellowes or other instruments coulde doo more and the Peruuians working in this maner by so easie means had so great gain that some of them got weekly besids theyr maisters parte fortie thousande Pezos but by resort it became likewise to be scarse
for that they left other mines as Pero and the riuer of Carabaâ—a wherein they founde golde to come thither because there they made more profite In those hilles and al the land thorow there are many vaines of all colours wherof men may make faire colours the siluer found in this myne and which belongeth to the king for his parte is carried by lande to Arequipa and from thence to Lyma Panama Nombre de Dios and Spaine A further description of the sea coast from Arequipa to Chile and from thence to the straights of Magellana CHulli a Hauen of Arequipa lieth vnder seuenteene degrees and a halfe and one mile and a halfe from thence the Riuer of Tambopalla and seuen miles and a halfe further there reacheth a poynt into the sea not ful a mile beyond or further out then the other lande vpon the which poynt there are three cliffes about this poynte not ful a mile from it there is a goodly hauen called Illo in our Carde Rio de Vlâ—e and there runneth a riuer into the sea that hath good water and is also called Illo lying vnder eighteene degrees and â…“ from thence the coast lyeth southeast and southeast and by east and fiue miles a halfe further there is a poynt which the Sea men call Moro del Diauolo that is a rounde house or houel of diuels This coast is al wild and desert and with great Baâ—zen not full foure miles further from this poynt there is another riuer not verie great but good water From this riuer Southeast and Southeast and by east sayling seuen miles and a halfe there reacheth another round houel which is verie high and maketh certaine downes beyond this poynt is an Island and therabouts lieth the hauen of Arica which lieth vnder 19. degrees and 1 â— from whence the coast reacheth Southwest not ful seauen miles further there runneth into the sea a riuer called Pizagua and in the same course sayling along the coast you come to the hauen Taracapa which is 19. miles ¼ harde by Taracapa lyeth a Island little more then a mile in compasse and is distant from theÌ„ about one mile and a halfe and there maketh a strand or bay of Sand by the hauen vnder 21. degrees from Taracapa you saile along the coast south by west about foure miles and then you come to the poynte of Decacanna and 12. miles beyond this point you come to the hauen Moxillioni which lyeth vnder 22. degrees and a halfe from this hauen sailing vpwardes south southwest about 67 miles and a halfe the coast lyeth in a manner straight and therein are some poyntes creekes and sandie baies at the ende whereof there is a great creeke where there is a good hauen called Copayo lying vnder 27 degrees aboue the which lieth a smal Islande about halfe a mile from the firme land from thence beginneth the country of Chile inhabited with people being past this hauen of Copaypao a little froÌ„ thence there lieth a point which makeh another creeke wheron standeth two cliffes at the end therof is a riuer of good water called Eâ— Glasco this point lieth vnder 28. degrees â— following the coast southwest on about eight miles and a half there is another poynte which maketh a great hauen for ships but therein is neither fresh water nor wood and hard by this hauen lieth the hauen of Coquinbo betweene this and the poynt passing by seuen Islands there is a hauen vnder 29. and a half seuen miles and a halfe further following the same course there is another poynt about the which there is a great creeke or bay called Antogayo in the Carde Bahio de Tage about foure mile further lieth the Riuer Limara in the Card Lemare from this riuer you keepe the same course to another creeke or bay about 7. miles distant which hath a cliffe but no fresh water lying vnder 31. degrees and is called Choapa in our card Cupa further in the same course about 15. miles there is a verie good hauen called de Qâ—iâ—nicâ—o in our Card Cutero at Quintero it lyeth vnder 32. degrees seuen miles and a halfe further is the hauen Val Paraize and from the town of S. Iacomo by vs called Chile after the name of the country Touching this country of Chile it is very great stretching along the sea coast reaching aboue Chaicas and Peru a cold countrey which is by reason of the scituation thereof as lying by the Pole Antartico wherefore it is called Chile that is the cold countrie partly because of the great cold which men indure trauailing ouer the Andes vnto this countrey and partly because of the coldnes of the countrey it selfe although it is much like Spaine touching the temperatenesse of the aire This countrey was first discouered by Petro de Valdiuia in the yeare of our Lorde 1539. and is all inhabited in some place it is hillie and in other places plaine fieldes poynted and running very crooked by reason of the inflection and crooking of the sea Touching the rest of the scituation as I sayde before it is verie temperate hauing winter and summer as it is in Spain yet at contrary times for their summer is winter in Spaine and the Spaniards winter theyr summer The south starre that should answere and be right distant to our starre being there on land cannot be seene but onely a small white cloude betweene day and night making a smal circuite or compasse about certaine places of the Pole Antarctike There likewise you see foure starres in forme like a crosse with three other stars following them which make seauen stars like ours without any difference that may be perceiued onely that the foure which in the south make the form of a crosse stand closer together then those of our Pole Antarctico Touching their day and night they are in Chile according to the scituatioÌ„ short and long as with vs yet contrarie to ours for that our shortest dayes are theyr longest daies Their apparell and meates are altogether like those of Peru both men and women are of good complection and behauiour vpon the coast of this countrey are many riuers which by day do runne with water and by night they are without water because the snow by day melteth by reason of the heate of the sunne and so runneth downe from the hils which by night by reason of the cold aire congealeth and so runneth not In Chile and Chaicas they haue many sheepe that are like camels but that they haue not a hill vppon their backes like the Cammel The Spaniards vse them to ride vppon as being able to beare a man foure or fiue miles a day but being wearie they lie downe and will not rise whatsoeuer they doe vnto them be they neuer so much beaten and whosoeuer rideth vppon them the sheepe being wearie shee will cast vp the head towardes him that sitteth vpon her and blowe a filthie stinke into his face thereby to bee eased
same course from India to Porto Piqueno or the small Hauen of Bengalen set downe by an other Pilot large and better described with the whole situation and course thereof SAyling from the coast of India to the hauen called Porto Piqueno in the kingdom of Bengalen outward about the Ilande of Zeylon you shall take your course along the coast of India till you come to sée Briniaon lying by the Cape de Comorin which is the furthest point of the land of India from thence taking your way crosse ouer for from thence forward it is a good countrie and make the shortest crosse you can thereby to goe sure and not to fall inwards or betwéene the Iland of Zeylon and when you sée Barreias which are the Dounes of Briniaon aforesaid then you shal sayle Southward running so at the least fiftéene or twentie myles and from thence forward you shall shorten your way as you thinke best to get vnder fiue degrées and being there you shall sayle Eastwarde as much as you thinke conuenient that you may be assured to passe the point of Gualle which is the furthest point of the Iland of Zeylon on the Southwest side lying vnder sixe degrees when you thinke you are at the point de Gualle to be assured thereof make towards the Iland to know it before you come to the drougths betwéene Tanadare which is fyue myles from Punta de Gualla and the first drouth where commonlie all the shippes know the land such I say as wee sayle to Bengalen or to any of the Hauens thereof as Porto Piqueno or Porto Grande that is the small or the great Hauen where the Portingalles doe traffique and hauing sight of the land of the sayd countrie goe as close vnto it as you will but not passing aboue twelue fadome déepe towards the land because there ly certaine cliffes along the shore whereof we know not certainely the danger besides the sandes betwéene the which and the land you may passe through as hereafter shal be shewed and sayling thus as I haue sayd along the shore you must vnderstand that the land of Tanadare is for the space of fyue myles to the Drougthes on the sea syde altogether lowe land and when you are further to landward in you begin to see certaine hilles that is thrée great hilles right against it and then you shall presently sée the first drougth betwéene the which and the lād you may well passe for that most of the ships that goe and come by the Iland run through that way in the middle way you shall finde betwéene it and the land 11. and 12. fadome déepe of faire in some places stony ground and you néed not feare any thing but onelie that you see before your eyes This first drougth or sand lieth full vnder 6 degrées and ½ and right against it vpon the land you see a houell standing alone and no more in all that country to be séene 6 miles further from that first great drougth there lieth an other small drougth which is distant Northeast Southwest and somewhat northeast and by East and southwest and by West this small drought lieth vnder 6 degrées and ¼ about 2 miles from the land and if you desire to runne betwéene it and the land you may well doe it for it is ◠or 6 fadome déepe at low water with sandie ground which I know by those that haue passed that way aboue 30. tymes as well going as comming backe again but if your ship be great then it is better to sayle about further into the sea Those drougths or sandes béeing past then runne along by the land and neuer put from it for it is your best course to goe close by it and passing by the Iland of the hilles and the high land you shall see a high sharpe Hill among others from whence there runneth a point that lieth out towardes the Southwest This hill is called O Capello de Frade that is the Fryers coule and lieth full vnder 8 degrées I set not downe the course you must commonlie vse to take along the Coast to the said Capello de Frade because you come vpon no direct line this fryers coule maketh a point of lād frō y e whence there runneth a Riffe about halfe a mile into the sea whereon in some places you may see the water breake from this point to Trinquanamale are 17. miles and you run by the coast north and south which is all low land with a bankie ground and from thence you shall see no land but the land that lieth inward fiue miles Before you come to Trinquanamale you finde a small riuer Trinquanamale is a great hauen beeing in the entrey more then 3. miles in bredth all low land but very déepe round about he that will anker therein may lie vnder certaine Ilands and inward it maketh a riuer that runneth to Seyta vaqua the other to it is all low land to know Trinquanamale a farre off at the mouth thereof on the north side lieth a yellow Sandie Downe and hath vpon one of the hookes or pointes two long hilles rising vp and reaching inwardes to the coūtrie and no other high land neither behinde them nor before thē in all that coast comming by Trinquanamale and hauing knowne it you must then presently crosse ouer for there it is best to follow your course and from thence you must runne North and North and by east alwaies reckning the declining or winding of the compasse and if it be in the monsons of the winds in the month of August then you shall sayle full north because as then the streame runneth very strōg into the sea and this course you shall hold till you come vnder 17. degrees which is the heigth of the point called a Punta de Guado variin lying on the coast of Choramandel which is the beginning of the kingdome of Orixa and being vnder 17. degrees from thence you shall put to the coast of the Firme land to make a good voiage alwaies taking care not to run aboue 19. degrées ½ without séeing land because that vnder 19. degrées there lieth a riuer called Puacota frō the mouth whereof 3. miles into the sea there lieth a rocke or stonie cliffe of the length of a ship which may easily be seene for it lieth aboue the water you may passe betwéene it and the land without danger of any thing but only that which you sée before your eyes all this coast from the point of Guadovariin is altogether great thicke land and hilles which may bee séene far off from the riuer of Puacota to another riuer called Paluor or Palura are 12. miles and you runne by the coast Northeast and Southwest aboue this riuer of Palura there lieth a verie high hill called a Seira de Palura that is the hill of Palura which is the highest hill in all that coast This riuer lieth full vnder 19. degrees and ½ from this riuer to the point called a Derradeira
13. fadom at the end this channel by y e North Ilande of the Ilandes of Nicobar lyeth an Iland where you may passe throgh w t y t greatest shippe that is the South end of this Ilande lyeth vnder 6. degrées and ¼ and the channell aforesaid vnder 7. degrées if you go through the middle of the channell lying vnder 6. degrées you shal at the entry to the Ilands see 4. Ilands whereof thrée lie halfe a mile from the Iland two of them are great and high the other small the fourth lyeth distant from the Ilande about thrée miles and is a great round Iland flatte on the top and Northward you shall see another Iland lying vnder 8. deg the entry of this Iland hath a thicke high backe flat at the end and being in the middle of the channel you shall sée another Iland lying hard by that vnder 8. deg a flat land distant from the other about two miles from the Ilandes of Nicobar to the Northerly Ilands are about 7. miles and there you néed not feare any thing at the end of this channell the Ilande of Nicobar hath a round houell at the foote whereof lyeth an Iland I counsel you not to passe by the south side of the Ilande Nicobar thereby to kéepe your selfe out of the daunger of those of Acheiin in the Ilande of Sumatra which are continually thereaboutes and are deadly enemies to the Portingalles but rather doo your best to passe the way I spake of before although you should saile vnder 8. and ¼ or 8. degrees and ◠for you may passe without danger for they are all channelles or thorow fares being past the Ilandes of Nicobar as I said before you shall take your course towards the Iland Pulo Cuto you runne betweene Pulo Cuto and Nicobar East and West and somewhat East and by South and West and by North the course is nyne miles and lyeth vnder 6. degrees and 2 ◠to know Pulo Cuto comming out of the Sea towardes it vpon the East side thereof you shall see a high round land on the shore very low they are thrée Ilands together hauing on the South side on the furthest point of them 3. or 4. cliffes or rocks that lie vncouered on the North side an other mouth or opening running between the great Ilande the Ilande of the sea in this Ilande on the Southeast side there is a very good place to take in fresh water lying by a long point of lande you may likewise take your course frō the Ilands of Nicobar to the Ilande Pulo Pera which is a small round Iland without trees lying vnder 5. deg and ⅔ the course being about 100. miles you run East Southeast and West Northwest from Pulo Pera to the Iland Pulo Pinaon are 15. miles and are one from the other East and west somewhat East and by South West and by North. This Iland Pulo Pinaon lyeth 5. miles from the firme lande full vnder fiue degrées and ¼ the marke thereof is that it is high in the middle hauing on the North point a round houell and an Island lying in the middle way from the same Islande and comming along by the lande it hath a great creeke with a sandie strand at the end wherof lyeth an Iland where there is a place of fresh water on the South point it is lowe land making an other Iland Pulo Pinaon lyeth with Pulo Sambilaon North south there you must looke well to your selfe for frō this Ilande Pulo Pinaon there runneth a banke reaching to a point or booke of high land which runneth into the sea at the least 2 miles vpon it you shal find 5. fadome déepe somewhat more but towards the land lesse when the point aforesaid lyeth frō you east east by north then you shal see Sambilaon the course from Pulo Pinaon to Pulo Sambilaon is 22. miles and lyeth almost vnder 4. deg East West from Pulo Sambilaō 4. or 5. miles to seaward lyeth the Iland called A Ilha das Iarres which is a smal round Iland ful of trees and on the Southwest side it hath fresh water but verie little but in Pulo Sambilaon you haue very good fresh water in all the 4. Ilands thereof the greatest wherof nearest the land lyeth in the middle in the which on the North side there stādeth a houel on both sides whereof are sandie strandes wherein are fresh water likewise the other 3. Ilandes that are in the middle haue euery one vpon the east Northeast side sandie strands in the middle whereof where there is an opening you shall finde very good fresh water at the foote of a great trée by all these Ilands as well on the sea as the lande side as also through the channel running betweene them you may freely passe without feare for it is deepe enough you may anker in sight of the land at 20. 25. fadome deep If you desire to passe through the great channell of Pulo Sambilaon then you must run south south and by East to y e Islands called As Ilhas d'Aru which lie vpon the coast of y e Iland Sumatra they are 3 smal flat Ilands full of bushes and woodes and when you are within a mile of these Ilands you shall sayle southeast southeast by east east southeast till you be at 10. fadome déep towards Pulo Parcelor which is a high hill lying vppon y e coast of Malacca shewing far off to be an Iland it standeth in a flat land whereby the land is not seene vntill you be full vpon it frō Pulo Parcelor to y e point called Cabo Rachado that is the clouen point lying ful vnder 2. degr ½ you saile to Malacca East southeast West Northwest along y e coast forwarde it is altogether a countrie full of points and houels but high and being in the middle way betweene Cabo Rachado and Malacca you shall presently discouer the Ilands that lie about halfe a mile from Malacca close by the land The 17. Chapter To saile from Pulo Sambilaō or through the great channel to Malacca SAiling from Pulo Sambilaon to the Ilandes As Ilhas de Aru lying on the coast of the Island Sumatra you shal hold your course south for the space of 13. miles whereby you shal come vpon y e banke so that it is all one to saile from Pulo Sambilaon running southward as from the Iland das Iarras that is the Iland of pots southeast southeast by south for you come out al at one place whē the Ilands de Aru lie west west and by North from you then cast out your leade and you shal finde sandy ground frō thence you shal hold your course southeast stil casting out your lead finding 10. fadome kéeping the same course til you be at 13. fadom muddie ground you shal runne southeast southeast and by east but finding 16. 17. fadome sandie ground then winde towards
be deeper you must cast anker for if you neglect it you should presentlie fall on ground because the streames and waters doe runne verie strong to sea ward from Tanadare to Belliguao are about 6. myles this place of Belliguao is a verie great créek and from the south syde thereof there appeareth certaine great houels of redde earth that lie within the Créeke and can not bee seene till you be full before the Creeke and on the North syde it hath two small Ilandes close to the land from the which Ilandes there commeth a small sand but it lyeth on the south syde towardes the land From Belleguao to Gualla are fyue myles and the way betweene them is altogether on the sea syde ful of Palme trees and betweene them lykewise lieth an Ilande hard by the land all of stonie cliffes and when you make towardes Gualla you shall perceaue a high land full of woods and a playne desert and from the North syde of the bay it hath a great wood of Palme trees and if you haue occasion to anker in the bay you may well enter at fiftéene and fourtéene fadome deepe but such as desire to keepe on their course neede not put in there From Tanadare to this Hauen of Gualla which are twelue myles you runne from the one to the other Northwest and Southeast and somewhat Northwest by West and Southeast and by east and all the way along this Coast to Gualla is not to be sayled but onlie where you may see ground with your Lead From Gualla to the point called Belitote is fyue or sixe miles which point hath a thicke wood of Palme trees and right ouer against it about half a mile there is a great Cliffe and betwéen them both lyeth many stonie cliffes along the shore by the point of Gualla are two sandes whereon the water breaketh the one is before you come at the point which runneth into the sea about ¼ of a myle and the other is right ouer against the bay on the North syde running a small myle into the sea and of this you must take great care you may well passe by it in the night at twentie fadome deepe so that you need not feare vppon this same the sea breaketh verie long speciallie when it is high water From thence you shall take your course vnto Columbo as the Coast reacheth and from the Iland of Verberijn forward the ground is full of Bankes and shallowes and béeing hard by Columbo about three or foure myles towardes Negumbo you may anker at eight or nyne fadome but by Columbo you cannot doe it but if you haue great occasion then you may anker at eightéen fadome towardes the land There you finde stonie ground and the same you finde at the poynt where you haue twentie fyue fadome deepe inwardes to the sea and that in most places therefore you must bee carefull in throwing out your Anker first prouing with a lead the grounde of this Countrie is in some places small and in other places great sand which is the surest and in some places it hath redde sand and lykewise places of white and blacke sand which are tokens of the ground along the Coast vppon all the which ground you may anker The right markes and tokens of Columbo which is the place where the Portingalles holde their fort are these y t is when you are within the Hauen then the Pico of Adam so called which is a high hill higher then any other in al the countrie about it shal be in the East and setting your course to the Hauen of this fortresse then you shall loose the sight of all the hilles and Houels and begin to sayle by thinne flat land which is a marke and a verie good token of the Hauen the winds that you there shall finde for the most part of that time or Monson are North Northeast Northeast and sometime East Northeast and also East the Viracoins which are the winds that blow out of the Sea are many times North and Northwest I write this that men should not wonder to find them so in that place likewise you finde there West Northwest and West Southwest windes according to the coniunctions of the times when men are in that coast the winds that are called Viracoins which commonly blow out of the west throughout all India at such time as men vse to sayle vpon the Sea which is in Summer from noone to twelue of the clocke at night and come out of the Sea towards the land and therefore by the Portingales they are called Viracoins that is wind out of the Sea and from midnight to noone the winds blow out of the East which come ouer the land into the Sea as it is at large declared in my Indian Viage and is onely heere set downe because it should not séeme strange to any man to reade of these winds and their manner of blowing in these countries when you will put to Sea by night with the Terreinhos or land winds if they be not Northeast then you shall not set sayle before midnight if they be not full to Sea ward then put not to farre off from the shore because it would not bee good for you to put to farre into the Sea for that you could not well get the land againe because the Viracoins or sea winds that come out of the North and Northwest doe often stay late blow but slowly From Negumbo you shall crosse ouer to Cape de Comorijn to the East side of the Cape towards the land called das Areas Gordas that is of the fat or thicke Dounes which is 12. miles from Cabo de Comorijn on the side of Choramandel for it is good to put on there because of y e streame which runneth verie stiffe outward with a hard wind by these Areas Gordas as also some part of the way to the Cape you finde ground and many times sée the land because it is long at 40. fadome and lesse and if you come inward from the Cape being by night and find ground then you may fréely passe ouer this ground from 12. to 18. fadome déepe for as you come right against the Cape then the ground is ful of white Sand and you shal not find aboue 20. fadome to Seaward from Areas Gordas to the Cape for from Areas Gordas inwards the ground is ful of banks and small blacke Sand and you must runne a mile a mile and a halfe and two miles from the shore vpon the ground and depthes afore saide And when you passe by Cabo de Comorijn to Coulaon you shall holde your course along the coast about a mile from the shore that you may Anker and not going néerer to the sand then 12. fadome but it is good to run from 15. to 18. fadome alwayes taking héede of the stones of Trauancor which lie betwéene the Cape and Coulaon and being in the night time the surest marke to know if you be before Coulaon is to
not runne betwéen them for that without them and close by you finde good ground I haue layne there at anker with a calme about a mile from the Iland which lieth néerest the land there the streames run strong with the tyde Northeast and Southwest From this Iland Pulo CoÌ„dor to y e IlaÌ„d Pulo Secir the course is Northeast and Southwest northeast and by east and Southwest by West 45 miles This Iland is low and long land reaching North and south and on the North poynt it hath a stonie Iland lying halfe a myle from the land you may passe betwéene it and the Iland on the East syde it hath a Sandie Baye where once a Iunco that is to say an Indian or Chinish great ship was laid on the shore to bee new dressed belonging to a Rouer of Patane a countrey lying vpon the coast on the East side of Malacca towardes the kingdome of Syon I haue passed within halfe a mile to seaward by this sandie bay it is all good ground this Iland is distant from the coast of Camboia or Champa nine miles if you put to seaward from Pulo Condor without seeing it vnder 8. degrees you shall find 25. and 26. fadom deep with black muddy ground much of the skin or Sasbeene driuing vpon the water and being 12. miles past it at the height of eight degrées and ½ then you shall see certaine sea Snakes swimming in the water at 28. and thirtie fadome déepe and ten miles further much of the Herbe called Sargosso vnder the water at the same depth which depth you shall find to be 9. degrées â— to this place you shall holde your course Northeast for wee could run no higher because the West wind bloweth very stiffe but from thence runne southeast towardes Pulo Cain thinking to get the coast of Champa when you come within two miles of the Ilandes lying nine miles Southward from Pulo Secir you shal find muddie thick water comming by this Iland you shall find no grounde those two Ilandes aforesaid were by the Chinars called Tomsitom three miles distant from each other you runne along East Southeast and West Northwest the East Ilande is high and round on the sea side being calme in the vpper part therof it hath the fashioÌ„ of a Cap such as y e Mandorijus which are the Lords of China doe weare halfe a mile from it lyeth a Cliffe like an Ilande and hath on the West side reddish cliffes and on the north side an other Iland round about all these Ilandes and cliffes there is no grounde I set this down for that I haue sailed all this countrie and noted the way as also all whatsoeuer I haue declared in this discourse we took this course aforesaid for want of mastes for wee durst not beare our seales because of the stiffe West windes and if any man chaunce to fall in the like neede and troubles let him not hope to finde the coast on the borde side from those Ilands you shall holde your course northerly to discouer Pulo Secir and from thence to the coast of Champa for you must know that the streames from Pulo Condor and from the coast of Champa to Pulo Secir and those Ilandes runne Eastward by which meanes you runne presently to the coast as hereafter I will shew and as you passe by these Ilandes of Pulo Secir Northwestwarde thâ—n the streame runneth to the coast of Champa which wil driue you ouerthwart from the aforesaid Ilandes of Pulo Secir there are no sands nor shallows as many men suppose the worst you find is that there is no ground these Ilands lye 18 miles distant from the coast from Pulo Condor you shall presently run to the coast of Champa and if you passe by it on the south side then hold your course halfe a strike North northeast till you be in sight of the coast and halfe way in this course you shall find eight and twentie fadome deepe and if you passe by it on the North side you must runne Northeast and Northeast and by North and not higher to loofewarde to shun the drougthes whereon Mathias de Brito was cast away and if in the night time you passe by any land then cast out your lead and finding fifteene fadome water then put no neerer to the land but presently runne East Northeast as the coast lyeth for the sands in those countries lieth at 13. fadome along the coast 4. mile from it The coast of Champa along the sea side is low land and great sandy strandes you run along by them East north east and West Southwest to a point lying vnder 10. degrees and â— and before you come within two or three miles thereof the sandie strand and high way endeth for this point is a verie high land reaching Southwarde in so that it maketh a Cape from thence forward it is altogether verie high land to Varella with great hils within this point towards the West Southwest lyeth a creeke and two miles on this side before you come at it There lyeth close by the land a smal long and low Iland all of harde stony cliffes and rockes which a farre off shew like a towne from this Iland to Pulo Secir there runneth a banke of 10. and 12. fadome deepe vpon the aforesaid coast of sandie strands 15. miles before you come to the point aforesaid there is a riuer called Sidraon where you may enter with shippes of 6â—â— Barhes on this riuer lyeth the fairest and best towne in all the kingdome of Champa it hath for a marke a long houell w t 2. tops I haue passed within the shotte of a great peece neere to the stony Iland aforesaid and found 8. fadome deep altogether euen stonie ground with much of the hearbe Sargaslo whereby I could hardly make the lead to sinke downe and along by the aforesaid high point or hooke there is 20. fadome déepe When you are by the coast of Champa then you shal runne East Northeast within two or thrée miles at the furthest it is altogether faire and good anker ground to the point or hooke aforesaid you shal leaue the Island of stones on the land side not passing betweene it and the land from this point to another point are 12. miles you runne Northeast and from this second point yet 12 miles further there is another point this course is runne halfe a strike to the North Northeast betweene this second and thirde point there lyeth two creekes the first wherof is the hauen where you lade blacke woode which is called Deâ—raon from this thirde point to the Varella the coast runneth North and seuen miles before you come to y e Varella there is a creeke where there lyeth a town and two miles further there is an Iland of stonie cliffes close to the land which a farre off sheweth like a man that fisheth or angleth whereby the Portingalles call it Opescador or the fisher and if you desire to runne to
the Varella being past the Iland you shall presently be neere the land where you haue a great strande with faire grounde This Varella is a high hill reaching into the sea and aboue on the toppe it hath a verie high stonie rock like a tower or piller which may be seen far off therfore it is by the Portingalles called Varella that is a Cape Backe or marke at the foote of this hill on the South side it hath a verie great creeke reaching northward in all of muddy ground 15. fadome deepe you cannot sée it far off because the one lande runneth through the other but as you passe by the strand aforesaid and beginne to come neere the Varella then the creeke beginneth to open which hath a verie faire entrie and within hath two running streames of verie good fresh water hee that commeth thither with a ship by my aduise shall not put in there because hee shall haue much labour and trouble to bring the ship out again for there the wind is scant you may wel anker without at y e entry or mouth thereof as I haue done or you may seeke for the other places where fresh water is to bee had that stand on the other side of the hill towards the North at the foote thereof where the high lande that reacheth into the sea endeth where you begin to find a verie great strand to get this water you must goe verie neare to the point of this hill and as you run along towardes it when you compasse it about you shall see a small sandie bay with the aforesaid great strand and place of watering where you may anker when you will for it hath good anker grounde but it hath a great inconuenience and mischiefe which is that you lie compassed about by the country people that are great enemies to the Portingalles and sea Rouers therefore you must keep good watch with great care when you fetch fresh water as well within as without because the country people vse to ouer runne and spoile men on the sodaine this Varella lyeth vnder 13. degrées this land of Varella is a hooke and from thence to Pulo Cutuo the course is North and north and by West for the space of 48. miles from thence the land beginneth to be a great deale lower then that you haue past hauing in many places sandie strandes where men may anker ten miles from Varella forward a mile from the land there lyeth a long flat Iland called Pulo Cambir and betweene this Iland and the land are 12. fadome deepe sandie ground in the middle of the Iland on the lande side there is a smal sandie bay that hath fresh water where if need be you may anker for it is good ground and in the middle of the channel betweene the Iland and the land it is altogether faire being a small mile in length from this Island about twelue miles Northward the land maketh a point and from thence to the Island there is a great creeke and inward to the Northwest where the high land endeth which from this point inwarde runneth to the West it is an open or broken low lande where you find a riuer of thrée fadome deepe within the hauen hauing sandie ground with a great mouth or entrie and within it hath a Wel of 13. fadome deepe this riuer runneth further into the land 4. or 5. miles inward from the entrie or mouth there lyeth a great village where you may haue great store of victualles and other necessaries in the mouth of this riuer on the east side there standeth a high houell and on the West side a low sandie strande you must enter right forth in the middle and although it is verie wide yet being within you must make your self sure w c ankers cables specially from the west side for y t if it were earlie in the yeare you shall there finde stiffe West winds which woulde driue you on the other side of the Riuer in this Riuer is much fish also in the land there is much wild flesh with Swine Tigers Rhinoceros and such like beastes the countrey people were of good nature but we haue giuen them cause of suspition by our bad dealing with them fiue miles further forward from this Riuer along the coast there are two Ilands with certaine cliffes about halfe a mile from the land and you may passe betweene them and the lande twelue miles from these Ilandes there lyeth other Ilandes by the lande where there are some places of rounde sande with a sandie strande and there is a small Riuer where you haue much Catte that is Ryce vnstamped in the huskes as it growgroweth and is twelue miles from Pulo Caton wherewith many haue deceiued thēselues that runne crosse ouer when they saw it and tanne on ground Pulo Caton is a long Island with two high hilles at the ende thereof and in the middle low so that farre of it séemeth to be two Islandes it hath a flatte and euen ground of bushes stretching northwest and southeast on the southeast side it hath a Riffe where the water breaketh forth running the shot of a great péece further into the Sea on the land side it hath fresh water and lieth distant from the coast 2. miles and ◠2 the channell betwéene both hath thirtie and thirtie fiue fadome déepe with good ground right ouer against this Island lieth a riuer with a great mouth or entrey being within the Hauen 5. or 6. fadome déepe it is verie well inhabited and built with houses in this Hauen Gomes Barretto entered with his ship this Island lieth vnder 15. degrées and ⅔ and North Northwest a mile and a halfe from it there lieth another small low Island and you may passe betwéene them both North Northwest 14. miles along the coast lieth the Iland of Champello full vnder 16. degrées and ⅔ this Iland Champello is great and high hauing vpon it certaine toppes or heades sticking out it lieth north northwest and south southeast it hath two high hilles with a valley in the middle that in the southeast being much higher then the other it hath likewise many trées on the Northwest side it hath a very high Island with two small Ilandes lying close at the foot thereof on the West side it hath much and verie good fresh water and is distant from the Coast about two miles it is a very low land along the sea strand and West Northwest from thence is the Riuer of Coaynon lying two fadome déepe in the Hauen it is sandie ground where much traffique is vsed but the people are not much to bee trusted from this Iland of Champello Northwest for two or three miles it is full of trées two miles further the Coast maketh a great thicke point full of trees and thrée miles beyond this point lieth a great créeke which in the entrey hath an Iland for a defence or closure and is all cleare ground where you haue much victuals
there is fresh water with a sandie bay and when you make towardes this Iland comming to it you shall finde thereaboutes 14. fadome deepe with hard ground and if you find muddie grounde then you are hard by the land from Pulo Wy to the firme lande of Camboia are 7. miles this coast of Camboia is low land full of trées and along by it it is banky and muddy grounde it lyeth Northwest and southeast to a point which lyeth with Pulo Wy East Northeast and West Southwest stretching likewise the same course of the aforesaide point to the hauen of Camboia which is twelue miles distant this hauen is called Dos Malyos that is of the Malaquiters or those of Malacca lying right ouer against Pulo Condor which lyeth with this hauen or Riuer Northwest and Southeast and northwest by North and southeast and by South from Pulo Wy Northwestwarde there lyeth a great Riuer being thrée fadome déepe within the hauen on the side sandie grounde and in the middle muddie ground the Chinars that saile froÌ„ Sion to China passe by y e north side of Pulo Wy and when they are right ouer against it then they run Eastward to knowe the hooke aforesaid running the same course to Pulo Condor which they see vppon the North side when you are right against this point or hooke then you shall find ten fadome deepe muddie grounde and somewhat further 13. fadome sandie ground but you must not run nearer then this 13. fadom towards the land but rather kéep at 14. fadome for it is surer take heed of 2. Ilands that lie 6. miles from Pulo Condor which will bee on the South side and right before you you shal haue the North point of the Ilande Pulo Condor lying vnder 8. degrées and â…” and you runne with Pulo Wy East West and somewhat east and by south and west and by North and if you sée Pulo Wy on the south side and so it should be on your North side then you shall runne within a mile or halfe a mile thereof alwaies taking héede of the aforesaid Riffe of the Ilandes â—â—king your course Eastwarde to Pulo Condor with good regard of the Ilandes the Ilande to the which you shall come on the south point passing by the South side of Pulo Wy within 3. miles thereof you shall finde 16. fadome deep and keeping your course to Pulo Condor at the depth aforesaide you shall passe within halfe a mile to the south side of the Ilandes being 6. miles from Pulo Condor but rather take the depth for more securitie of scarce seuentéen fadome whereby you shal come on the South side of Pulo Condor within 3. or 4. miles thereof at the furthest and when you are in sight of the Ilands then you must put to Pulo Condor as you will leauing the Ilands on the North side if you passe on the south side of Pulo Condor to go to the firme land to the cost of Champa theÌ„ runne North Northeast and Northeast and by north which will bring you to the sea coast and to shunne the sands whereon Mathias de Brito fell which lie 4. miles from the land if you runne along the shore at 13 fadome then you come vppon those sandes but when you are past them all the rest of the course from Champa forwardes is farye and good ground and being in this Countrey you shall take your course as I haue shewed you in the description and nauigation from Malacca to China the sands aforesaid lie vpon the coast of Champa runne with Pulo Condor North and South and North and by East and south and by West and almost halfe a strike more The 22. Chapter Of the course from the Island Pulo Condor to the hauen of Sian FRom Pulo Condor to Pulo Wy there are about full 20. miles lying from each other East and West and somewhat East and by North and West and by south and to go to Pulo Wy hold your course right west not reckening any abatement for the yéelding of the Compasse and being founde what more theÌ„ halfe way you shal finde a banke of muddie ground of 8. or 9. fadome deepe and being northward in the sterne of the shippe you shal see the trees vpon the coast of Camboia which is a verie low lande this banke aforesaid being past it will not bee long before you shall see Pulo Wy right ouer against you and as soone as you sée it you shal make towards it on the north side you must vnderstand y t this land of Camboia maketh a point froÌ„ whence the banke aforesaid runneth of from this point to y e hauen of Sian you run along the coast north northwest by y t which lyeth many Ilands stretching along by it till you bee vnder 12 and 12. degrees and ½ In this countrie ly the most and greatest Ilandes one by the other and there make a hooke for the land hath a créeke called A Ensâ—â—da de Lian which runneth a good way inwardes and lyeth vnder 12 degrees and ½ the north point of the land of the mouth of this creeke lyeth vnder 12 degrees ¾ and the land of this point aforesaide which lyeth inwardes reacheth east northeast and hath many trees w t a sandy strand froÌ„ this point to sea ward there lyeth 2. high round Ilands without any trees you cannot passe beetweene the first Iland and the land for the channell or passage lyeth betweene the first and the second or the better to bee vnderstood betweene them both there is a small channell but very deep of 60. fadom water and there runneth a strong streame vnder the hight of the point aforesaid of this creeke little more or lesse about half a mile from the land on the inner side there lyeth a very long cliffe stretching as the land doth which at low water may bee seene you run from this point to the hauen of Sian along by the land north and south the Islandes aforesaide are within 10. miles of the hauen as you passe along they are not ouer great neyther haue they any trees nor fresh water and all along you find good ground till you be within halfe a mile and nearer you shall not goe neither runne in betweene them and the land but let them lie on the east side comming to Pulo Wâ— vntill the tenth of February there you find much east wind whereby the west coast lyeth like an emptie wall therefore you shal keepe on the east side of the aforesaid Ilands that ly along by the coast being sure not to put in betweene them keeping this course north northwest along the shore as I saide before and comming to the furthest pointe of the said Iland which is full vnder 12. deg without seeing any more Ilandes then bee assured that you are within the creeke of Lyon and being there you shall presentlie set your course Northwest Northwest and by North to get out of the creeke least the streame should driue you
North South and somewhat North and by West South and by East this Iland Pulo Cambir is long and flat and on the sea side it hath some red spots or veines the bushes thereof being euen and alike right ouer against the points thereof Northward vppon the Firme land there lyeth a ryuer which is the ryuer of Pulo Cambir if you come thether in the Monson of South winds you may haue therein fresh water for it is verie good You shal likewise vnderstand that being eight miles to Seaward from the Iland Sanchoan you wil take your course from thence South Southwest and then you shall likewise sée the Ilands of Ieronimo Pretto but it must bee w t a Compasse y t is fix I aduertise you once more that when you are in sight of Pulo Cambir about thrée or foure miles from it there lyeth certaine Ilands and halfe a mile to Seaward from the South point there lyeth certaine stonie Cliffes aboue the water that show like Bucks hornes you may fréely passe betwéene all the Ilands and that Iland for it is faire and good ground From thence to the Varella you runne along the coast North and South somewhat North and by West and South and by East it is twelue miles distant this Varella is a verie high tower standing vppon a point of land that commeth out from the land and reacheth into the Sea by this Varella there is a Hauen which you cannot sée as you come outward towardes it because the one land runneth through the other also vppon this point sticking out on the south side there is a place of verie good fresh water in the sandie strand and on the North side of the same point is an other place of fresh water vpon an other sandie Strand the land there hath some Cliffes and smal Ilands and when you come thether to fetch water it must be with a good tide for there you haue no Anker ground but verie close to the shore the best way is to put into the Bay for it is a good Hauen I haue béene in it and it hath good Harber for North and South winds with 14.15 and 16. fadome déepe sandie ground and if you desire to goe any néerer to the land you shall finde eight and seuen fadome déepe good ground this hauen of Varella lyeth vnder 13. degrées in this way from Varella to Pulo Sesir there are some Ilands lying about 9. or 10. miles from Varella from the point of Varella to these Ilands the coast runneth North and south and from these Ilands to Pulo Sesir you begin to runne along by the land North Northeast and South Southwest this Iland Pulo Sesir taking the name of the land because it lyeth on the coast for there is an other of the same name lying to Seaward is a stonie Iland without bushes hauing in the middle a pointed hill like a Varella it is a flat Iland of yellow colour like the Sea water to know Pulo Sesir being a mile or two from it vpon the Firme land you shall sée an opening this countrie is good to passe along by it for the space of two miles where you shal haue ground at seuen fadome great sand but put not off into the Sea from Pulo Sesir for it is an euill way because you haue but 4 fadome déepe with stonie ground Pulo Sesir lieth from the land vnder 10. and 13 degrees and the course from Varella to Pulo Sesir is about 50 miles from Pulo Sesir to Pulo Condor you shall hold your course South south west and southwest by south at 18. and 20. fadome deepe whereby you shall see the Iland Pulo Condor but I aduise you when you come ouer this crosse way from Pulo Sesir to Pulo Condor to holde your course from the sandy point Southsouthwest at 18. or 20. fadome deepe and when you find 15. fadome thē you are right by the coast of Cambaia and shall not sée Pulo Condor but on the land side but for your better way you shall still hold at 18 and 20. fadome and by this course you shall goe full vpon Pulo Condor which is a great Iland hauing many Ilands roūd about it and in euery place much anker ground there likewise you haue fresh water on the west side it lieth vnder 8 degrees ⅔ from Pulo Sesir to Pulo Condor are 50. miles and from Pulo Condor to Pulo Tymon you shal hold your course southsouthwest to 30. and 35 fadome muddy ground in this course and depth you shal sée an Iland being right ouer against the 7. points of the coast it sheweth like 3. hilles which stand in the space of two openings which are in the middle of the land and on the Northwest side it hath a cliffe Iland From thence to Pulo Tymon you shall take your course south and south by west at 28. and 30. fadome being from the one to the other 115. miles and you shall alwaies runne as I said before to the Iland of the 7. points called Pulo Tingaron southsouthwest because of the the streames that runne to the Iland of Bornon leaue not that course at any hand til you see it for it is 20. miles distant from Pulo Tymon this is a good course and I aduertise you againe that when you are in the way from Pulo Condor to Pulo Tymon in the middle betweene them both you shall find 25. fadome deepe in the middle way to Pulo Tymon you shall haue 35. fadome Pulo Tymon lieth vnder two degr and ½ on the North side it is a great Iland hauing other Ilands lying by it on the North syde it hath fresh water in a sandy strand where the ships that come from Sunda to goe for China take in water being in sight of Pulo Tymon you shall passe on the out side therof till you passe by the south poynt along through the channell that runneth betwéen this point and an other Iland which Iland shall bee to sea ward from you and as soone as you are in the channell on the southwest syde you shall see an other high Iland called Pulo Tinge to the which you shall goe within a mile and a half or two miles thereof and being there you shall take your course southward to Pedra Branca or the white Cliffe at 18. or 20. fadome deepe alwaies with the lead in hand if in this course you come to lesse groūd thē put to sea ward till you be at 18 fadome about 4 miles distant from the coast to auoyd the riffe that commeth from the point or hook of Iantana where the Ilands lie which you shal presently sée hauing good regard that you passe not by Pedra Branca but when you sée you shall make towardes it which you must keepe on the lee side for y t being with a flood the streames runne very strongly to the Iland of Binton wherby you shuld not passe by Pedra Branca for there I was forced to cast out 2. ankers and
you shal still sayl with your lead in hand and when you find 15. or 16. fadom thē you are at the end of the riffe and it may be that as thē you can not sée Pedra Branca and comming to 18. fadome then put no further to the sea and running in that sort till you sée Pedra Branca running as then to the poynt of the land that you shall sée on the land of Iantana which is the land on the North side which you shall passe along by till you come to see redde Houels lying at the Hauen of Ior and before you come to the hauen of Ior you shall hold off from it not putting into the hauen for there lyeth a Banke but you must passe the redde Houels and runne towardes the land which is a sandie strand and as you passe along to the mouth or entrie of the straight of Singapura you must be carefull that as soone as you are within Pedra Branca you runne to the land of Iantana without turning to the other side for there it is verie bad ground and the wind would hinder you to get ouer and if you desire to run on the inside of the Iland Pulo Tymon you may wel doe it The 25. Chapter The course from Malacca to Sunda lying in the Iland of Iaua Maior with the situation of the countrie SAyling from the great Iland lying 3. myles southeast from Malacca to the Riuer called Rio Fermosa your course lieth Northwest Southeast and Northwest and by west and southeast and by east which is 13. miles all this way if you will you may anker and it is not aboue 30. fadome déepe good muddy ground This Rio Fermoso lyeth on the Coast of Malacca within the entry on the Southeast side hath high land and on the Northwest side low land it is in the Hauen sixe or seuen fadome deepe when you enter into it you shall put to the Southeast syde keeping from the Northwest for ther you shall find shallowes From this Rio Fermoso to the Iland Pulo Picon which lyeth in the same Coast a myle from the land aforesayd you runne Northwest and Southeast and Northwest and by north and Southwest and by south betwéene this Iland and the firme land it is shalow groūd and the course is 6 miles from Pulo Picon to Pulo Carymon which is a great and high land with trees with some Ilands round about it you runne North and south and north and by west and South and by east and are distant 5. miles from the Iland Carymon there is about 3. miles to the coast of Samatra you must make towardes this Iland and from thence run along by it on the west syde for it is good way On the south point of this Iland Carymon lyeth certain Ilandes from these Ilandes two myles forward lieth an other smal long Iland called Pulo Alonalon there the channell is at the narrowest From this Iland beginneth the straight called Estrecho de Sabon that is y e straight or narrow passage of Sabon and being as farre as that Iland you shall hold about half a mile from it from Alonalon to the great Iland of Sabon are about 2 miles in the middle of this channel there lieth other smal Ilands that shall all lie on the East side from you hauing good regard not to fall vpon them whē you run through this channel you must be aduertised that in the middle thereof there lieth a hidden Cliffe vnder the water whereon a ship did once strike with her Ruther Comming by the Iland Alanolon on the Southwest thereof that is on the syde of Sumatra you shal see two small Ilands with an other somewhat lesse full of trées bee all rampard with certaine cliffes lying by them and whē those Ilandes are southwest south west by west frō you thē you shal hold your course South where you shall find nyne fadome water alwaies keeping off from the Coast of Sabon which is the east syde for it is shallow but run in the middle of the channel for it is good ground half a mile off from the Iland Sabon lieth a small Iland called Pulo Pandha this Iland in the middle hath a stonie cliffe and when you are so farre that Pulo Pandha lyeth Eastsoutheast from you thē hold your course southward and you shal find 9. fadome deepe running half a myle distant from the Iland of Sabon the Iland and cliffe aforesaid being past you shall find hard ground holding your course South vntill the Iland Pulo Pendha lieth northnorth east from you where you shall presently find muddy ground and from thence forward you may anker if you will and when the aforesayd Cliffe lyeth from you as aforesayd then on the West syde you shall see two Ilandes or Cliffes whereof the first hath some trees and the other which lyeth nearest to the mouth of Campar in the Iland of Sumatra hath no trées they close one to the other from thence to Sumatra are many stone Cliffes when you come to passe by these Ilandes that shall lie from you on the side of Sumatra you shall runne through the middle of the channell betwéene the Ilandes and the coast of Sabon southward as I saide before holding your course along the coast of Sabon about halfe a mile from it where you shall alwayes finde eyght fadome muddy ground vntill you come to a small Iland lying hard by the coast of Sabon hauing many Cliffes round about it and as you passe by it you shall keepe outwarde from it leauing it on the side of Sabon there likewise you haue muddie ground and the shot of a great péece further off the depthes will presently begin to lessen to seuen and sixe fadome and ½ from thence you shall runne to a point of the Island Sabon lying right ouer against one of the mouthes of Campar those mouthes or holes ly on the coast of Sumatra right in the face of this point about two bowes shot from the land there lyeth two Cliffes which at full sea cannot be séene they are called Batotinge betwéene them and the land are sixe or seuen fadome deepe and betwéene them both nyne fadome you may passe with a shippe betweene them and to seawarde from them towards Sumatra you finde hard by 12. and 13. fadome déepe to make towards these cliffes and also to passe by them you shall take your course as soone as you sée the aforesaide Islands that by the Island of Sabon being past as you do passing along by Sabon with your lead in your hand at seuen sixe ½ ◠fadom deep and thether the depths will lessen being all muddie ground which you shall haue vntill you come right against the highest houell of those that stande vppon the point of Sabon and with a point of the lande of Sumatra being one of the sides of the mouthes of Campar called As Bocas de Campar from whence the one land lyeth with the other East and West in this country are
ground and you need feare nothing but that you sée before you This Iland of Pulo Panion lieth close to the land of Binton and if you fortune to be so neare the land that you may not passe by it on the sea side then you must runne to the northwest point where there lieth a rouÌ„d Iland which you shall leaue on the side of the Iland not running betwéene it and the Iland but round about it close to the land for it is faire running so inward along by the Ilands as I said before on the southeast point of this Iland Panion there lieth many Ilands and Cliffes and two miles Southeastward from it lieth a round Iland full of trées you shall passe betwéene these two Ilands towards the Iland of Linga which is a faire cleare way and sea and if you chance to be by this aforesaid mouth or opening then you shall runne on your course outward about the Iland for it is good way from this round Iland or two miles southward lieth a stonie Riffe about the length of the shot of a great péece and hath but one Rocke that is vncouered yet you may sée the water breake vpon them which you must shun From this Iland to the end of the Ilandes of the land of Linga lying close on the East side of the same Iland you shall holde your course South and South and by East and runne Southward outward alwaies along the Ilandes which shall lie Westward from you and when you haue sayled twelue miles you shall sée right before you on the Southwest side a small round Iland lying to Seaward somewhat distant from the rest which is almost of forme like the Iland das Iarras lying by Malacca and foure miles before you come at it you shall sée two other smal round Ilands lying along by the land and seperated from the rest but not far and when you are as farre as the first round Iland béeing cleare weather then you shall sée the high land of the Island of Linga lying West Southwestward from you aboue or beyond the Ilandes whereby you passe which are all low houels and vallies and in this sort you shall runne along by the Ilands comming about thrée miles beyond the round Island you shall sée a small Island somewhat distant from the land which at the first sheweth like two Cliffes and there the land hath a point from thence running inwards making a créeke called a Enseada de Linga and when you are as farre as this small Island then West Northwestward you shall sée the high land of Linga which sheweth like two high rockes or hils seperated from each other and reach North and South that in the North hauing two toppes like a Hares eares and Westward you shall sée another Land which maketh a high crooked ridge somewhat stéepe downeward In all this way to the aforesaid round Iland you shall finde seauentéene and eightéene fadome déep hard and faire ground to the point or end of these Islands and by it you shall haue twentie eight fadome and comming by this point where you discouer the land lying West Southwest from you to goe to Pulo Pon which is an Island distant from Linga 8. miles on the North side hauing two small Ilandes and when you are on the Northeast side it séemeth to be round with a sharpe hill in the middle and from the Southeast side it sheweth two Hilles with a Vallie in the middle as in effect it is then you must runne South Southwest and being thrée or foure miles forward you shal sée the Iland of Pulo Pon lie before you in it you haue fresh water and round about it is fayre ground when you see it you shall make towards it on the West side and halfe a mile from it you shall finde 15. fadome deep and being by it runne South and south and by East with the which course you shall sée the hill of Manopijn lying vppon the point of the Islande Banca where the straight of Palimbon beginneth and the seuen Ilands called Pulo Tayo shall lie southeastwarde from you which are distant from Pulo Pon 7 miles and if in this way you find your depthes to be aboue ten fadom then you are on the East side and hauing ten fadome then you are 6. or seuen miles from Banca and finding 8. fadome you shall not be long before you sée the land of Sumatra and as soone as you sée Manopijn then runne within two miles thereof before you enter into the straight or channell in the same manner holding your course to the mouthes or créekes of Palimbon towards the coast of Sumatra shunning a great créek lying Northwest froÌ„ y e mouthes of PalimboÌ„ vpon y e same coast of Sumatra which hath a verie great hauen and entrie whereby many shippes haue béene deceyued that entred therein it hath no shallowes and presently as you passe along the coast you shall sée the lande thereof stretching south southwest from thence forwarde you holde your course to Sunda as in the voyage from Malacca to Sunda and Iaua is alreadie set down therfore it is not necessarie to rehearse it againe The 28. Chapter The course along the coast of Sumatra fâ—oÌ„ the outside beginning at the fâ—rthest point lying vnder fiue degrees on the North side of the Equinoctiall to the straight of Sunda and so to the Islande Iaua Maior with the situation of the coasts BEing by the furthest point or ende of the Island of Sumatra on the out side then you must runne south along the coast it is a very high and pleasant country to behold with many great créekes and Bayes along by the coast From this first further point called Achein 12. miles forward to another point that reacheth into the sea the coast runneth South and from thence to the sands called Os Baixos de Tristan de Tayde that is the sandes of Trystan de Tayde you must runne along the coast Southeast and southeast and by south the course is fiftie miles by these Ilandes of Tristan de Tayde there are many sandes and shallows that lie round about them on the west Northwest and North sides with many Ilandes and Cliffes on the same sides these Ilandes aforesaid are somewhat like the Ilandes of Pulo Sambilon lying on the coast of Malacca to seawarde from these Ilands of Tristan de Tayde there lyeth 2. Ilandes called Ilhas d'Ouro that is the gold Ilandes whereof the nearest lyeth at the least 10 or 12. myles distant the other 12. or 13. miles further into the sea they lie vnder two degrées and ½ on the North side of the Equinoctiall line from thence you runne to the straight of Sunda hauing many Ilandes all along as you passe as first thrée Ilands lying vnder a degrée and a halfe on the southside of the Equinoctiall East and West from these Ilands lyeth a point vppon the coast of Sumatra called Cabo das Correntes that is the point of the streame because
there the streame runneth very strong towardes the Southwest wherefore there is no other remedy then onely to runne close by the shore if you desire to goe to the straight of Sunda you must be verie careful for there are so many Ilandes along by the coast that they are not to be numbred from the Iland of Tristan de Tayde to the Ilandes of Manancabo are about 100. miles and your course is Northwest and southeast somewhat Northwest and by North and southeast and by south you must run between the Ilandes As Ilhas d'Ouro and the lande by which course you shall come to the poynt O Cabo das Correntes which is verie high running into the sea further then all the rest of the land but you must not go too neere to the point for there are certaine sandes and cliffes sticking out from it this point lyeth vnder one degrée and â…” on the South side of the Equinoctiall I set down no other marke to know the countrie of Sumatra because the streames draue to seaward without all these Ilands so I could not take a better course then to put to the Iland called Ilha d'Ouro de Manancabo that is the golde Iland of Manancabo and I fel on it vpon the sea side running for the space of 4. or 5. daies along by it it is a verie high and faire Iland to behold so that you may easily iudge well perceyue that it hath Gold it is altogether of a smooth stéepe grounde along by the sea side it is about 10. or 12. miles in length you run by it North south and somewhat north and bâ— West and south and by East it hath on the sea side 5. or 6. Ilandes about a myle and a halfe distant from the land vnder thrée degrees which is the height that I found but they are distant from the firme lande of Sumatra 8. or 9. myles the Riuer of Manancabo lying on the land of Sumatra right ouer against this countrie I think it to be a verie great riuer for from thence there runneth a great streame and much wood and other trash driueth from it at the least 10. or 12. miles into the sea The best marke we found vpon this coast of Sumatra was that we neuer left the sight of land but ran along by it for by that course you come to the Iland Ilha de Ouro scarce to 3. and 3. degrées and ½ I write this because you shall not trust to the running of the streame that draweth Southwestward as I said before from the Iland Ilha de Ouro you run to the straight of Sâ—nda southeast and Southeast and by south and being past Ilha de Ouro there lyeth two Ilandes which reach North and south one from the other in the same course with the Island of Gold about 5. or 6. miles nowe to runne to the mouth or entry of the straight of Sunda you must not leaue the coast of the firme land hauing good respect to the Ilandes and cliffes whereof there are very many lying by it that you can hardly know where to find y e mouth of the straight but onely by the knowledge of the Islande which is very high lying right ouer against a point of the Iland of Sumatra on the north side this firme land of Sumatra endeth there where with the Iland of Iaua Maior it maketh the straight it hath on the Northwest side of this straight two or thrée Ilands lying about a mile from the land and vpon the Ilandes that lie néerest to the lande there was once a shippe taken with French men the great shotte being kept by the kinges of the Islande of Banda and Calâ—pa and aâ— mile southwarde from the lande lyeth the Iland that hath a high sharpe pointed hill as I saide before and on the North side of this high sharp hil or Iland are 4. Ilands whereof one is verie high reaching Northeast and southwest they lie somewhat further from it that is by the aforesaid Ilands close by the point on the Northeast side betweene al these Ilands the land there is a great créeke of manâ— hidden cliffes lying vnder the water whereof some are vncouered and thinke not to enter into this créeke vnlesse it be with a Fuste or a very small ship for it is better to runne towardes the Iland lying on the south side thereof along by the point which you neede not feare for it hath nothing that can hurt you and then you shall presently sée lying before you on the Northeast side a poynt of lande which sheweth to haue 2. or 3. Ilands at the end thereof along by this point lyeth the mouth or entrie of the straight of Sunda where you must passe through this point reacheth North and south hauing in the North a high houell the south side being the ende of the same land close by the mouth of the straight for a better marke Northeastward from you you sée a long Iland and on the southeast part a high land which land lyeth aboue Bantam a hauen in the Ilande of Iaua where the Portingalles lade Pepper which groweth is gathered in that Ilande and behind the aforesaide high lande lyeth the towne of Bantam and before you come to the said land that lyeth aboue Bantam you shall in the East Northeast perceiue two or thrée Ilands and if you desire to go to Bantam you may passe betweene these Ilands but I once againe aduise you of the Iland lying in the mouth or channell or straight of Sunda aforesaide which is for a marke of the said straight being very high and deepe withall and hath this token that when you are past or about the first point or hooke you may then anker at 20. and 25. fadome deepe as you haue occasion vnlesse it be close to the land where there lyeth many white stones and rockes and further to seawarde it is altogether muddie grounde at 20. and 25. fadome but it is best for you to anker as neere the lande as you may for your best securitie for there are many stiffe blastes that come out of the land this high Island or poynted hill lyeth vnder fiue degrees and ½ for there I haue often taken the height of the sunne as I lay at anker and the mouth or entry of the straight of Sunda lyeth vnder y e same height to sea warde you haue these Ilandes as you passe to the mouth or entry of the straight the first Ilandes lying West to seaward from the aforesaid pointed high hill or Iland and West Southwest or seuen miles from thence there is a rowe of Ilandes with certaine Cliffes lying about them and Southward other sixe or seuen miles there lyeth other high and great Ilands and also Southwestward from thence there are other Ilandes betweene all these Ilandes there are many channelles which are so narrow that men can hardly get out of them the best channell to runne through I founde by the aforesaide high pointed
aforesaid point lyeth a riuer called Rio do Sal that is the riuer of Salt from whence the salt is carried to Canton it is a great hauen and entrie being past this riuer of Salt foure miles forward there is an other riuer lying by an other point or hooke which riuer by the Chinaes is called Chaochen and by the Portingales Porâ—o de Pecas that is the hauen of Peces for there are made the good peeces of Chinish silkes and other costlie wares This riuer is verie great and hath manye places and villages to land ware that are inhabited lying along by the water it lyeth with the southwest point of this Iland Lamon east southwest and west northwest the land of Lamon lyeth vnder 23 degrees and ¼ it is great and verie high couered with bushes trees it reacheth as the coast doth about a mile from the firme land as you come from Macau sayling along on the west southwest side it sheweth like 2 IlaÌ„ds although it is but one it hath on the southwest or the land side some stony cliffes close by it which at low water are vncouered and at high water the sea breaketh vpon theÌ„ but all the rest of the channell betweene the Iland and the firme land is faire and deepe inough yet you may not passe through for it is full of bushes and other stuffe that driueth although I haue past through it by coÌ„pulsion but with great paine therefore I counsell no man to passe through it vnlesse it be with a Soma that is a Chinish Caruell wherewith they sayle along the coast for the traffick on this aforesaid southwest point of the Iland to seaward there lyeth certaine small flat Ilandes and other rockes betweene the which and the Iland you may not passe and on the northeast point on the land side a verie great creeke where there is a verie good harbor and low road for all windes where likewise our shippes may enter if occasion serueth it is three fadom and ½ deep ground muddy and to enter in you goe nere on the southwest side for I haue beene in it From this southwest point of the Iland aforesaid a mile and a halfe inward to sea there is a riffe that sheweth aboue the water being of some black stones that reach all on a rowe Eastward about three myles and on the syde thereof three flat long Cliffes also in a row whereof that outward is the greatest you may by no meanes passe ouer nor betwéene this riffe and cliffes but betweene the riffe and the Iland there is a verie good channel for I haue past through it it is 20 fadome deepe smal thinne flat sandy ground and you haue nothing there to care for then onlie to keepe by the Iland and the aforesaid Riffe it is good for those that come from Iapon to passe through it for if you passe outward by the sea to auoyde the Riffe it happeneth oft tymes that there you finde the winde sharpe and therefore can hardlie reache the Coast whereby if it chance you must indure great payne before you can get it From this Iland Lamon 6. or 7. myles Eastnortheast lyeth the Hauen of Chabaquon which is an arme of the sea that runneth northeast very déepé to laÌ„dward at the entrie thereof on the southeast side there lyeth a thicke and great poynt of land which from thence ryseth very high and on the Northwest syde it is a low land of sandie strandes From the aforesaid point of land in the same course about the length of the shot of a great peece lyeth a Ryffe of sand wherevpon the water breaketh if you desire to enter into this hauen you must put to the Southeast syde running along by the poynt of the entrie where it is two fadome and ½ deepe half a mile aboue the aforesayd poynt of land on the Southeast part of the land there lyeth a small Créeke or bay of muddie ground which is a good harber in foule wether and for more security you may run so close to the land that you may runne into the mud so leap on shore on the northwest side which is by an Iland where there lieth a town or village where you finde much prouision of victuails other thinges This course is done with Iuncos Somas which are Chinish ships boates this hauen lieth vnder 23. deg ½ behind this créek on the sea side lieth another créek by y t which forward about the leÌ„gth of the shot of a great péece lieth 4 or 5 IlaÌ„ds betwéen the which the laÌ„d you may passe this créeke of the Iland is a barber for the Monson of Malacca that is for the windes that blow when you saile from Malacca to China within it is very good and faire ground the land lying betwéene these two aforesaid créekes is a high and greene cuntrey without bushes or trées the aforesaid islands are round and high stretching along all in a rowe FroÌ„ this Hauen of Chambaqueo to Chinchon the coast runneth Northeast and Northeast and by East and is in distance 22. miles it is all high land and close by the land it is sixtéene fadome déepe and there runneth many hard and great streames From Chabaqueo six or seuen miles forward lyeth Enseada Pretta that is the Blacke créeke by the country people called Lauho aboue the which there lyeth a high land with very black shining bushes and in the mouth of the entry it hath two Islands within it is very good and faire ground béeing a harbour or defence against certaine windes wherein Ruij Lobo with his ship another Iunco or Chinish ship did winter Two miles to seaward from it lye two Islands of white stonie cliffes close togither betwéene the which the Firme land it is all faire good ground From this Enseada Pretta or Blaâ—ke creeke seuen myles forward there lyeth two high and small Islands some what longer than round without either bushes or trees close by each other reaching Northwest southeast betwéen both hauing thrée or foure stone cliffes These Ilands and cliffes lie distant from the Firme land about halfe a mile right ouer against them lyeth a small Créeke from a verie lowe hooke or point of land along by the sea and on the Island that lyeth nearest to the lande on the Southwest side lyeth a Sand baye which is a good Hauen or Rode of seuen or eight fadome déepe where the Cliffes lying to Sea-ward on you make a defence you may goe close to the lande of the Sand bay for I haue laine in it because I put into it with a storme as I came from Iapon the Iaponers haue many times wintered therein with their shippes The entry thereof lyeth on the Northeast side close along by the point of the Iland that lyeth towardes the land and when you enter in you shall holde towards the Island not to misse the Hauen and you may alwayes goe out and in as
the small Islands the Island This Island is called Lanquyn From this Island Lanquyn fiue miles North and North and by East there are many Ilandes lying togither both great and small with some Trées but thinne and lowe reaching along the coast about ten myles forward the first lie close by each other to Seaward vpon a row The channels betwéene these ilands are thrée fadome deepe some lesse muddie ground if you haue occasion to séeke for succour in that place with the windes of the monson of China you may anker in the mouthes of those Channels where you may lie safe but in those Monsons or coniunctions of times there is no foule weather in the course of the generall windes you shall not passe from this first rowe of Islands lying to Seaward to the land for it is all bankie ground full of Sandie places for the déepest place is but two fadome On the Northeast side inward from these Islands there are two other Islands lying along by the Lande which reach Northeast and Southwest whereof the Southwest Island is greater and higher then that to Landward The Channell betweene them is déepe and faire muddie ground The ground of the issue on the Northeast side of this Channell is all Corall and Kesell stone hauing many Ilands and stonie cliffes Here the streams runne strongest with the Monsons of the winde A mile or more Eastward from these two Islands there is a good and faire sea and ground it is verie dangerous to passe with great ships betwéene these Ilands for you can not passe On the Lande right against these Ilands there is a Hauen called Hunchon and the Islandes are called Lyon From this first Island of Lyon to the point of Sumbor are about thirtéene miles and you runne as aforesaid Northeast and Southwest These islands reach within three miles of the point of Sumbor but in the middle way they are lesse and more distant from each other and before you come néere the point of Sumbor by sixe miles there is an Island of Reddish earth with two hilles like two men and in the middle there is a valley which reacheth Northwest and Southeast On the Southeast side it hath a good Hauen for the windes of the Monson of China This Iland is a good marke for them that come from Iapon The point of Sumbor reacheth a great way into the sea it is a thicke land with a high rising backe it hath on the end of the Southwest point close by a long and high Island and from the Northeast point of this Island lyeth an Island or Cliffe making betwéene this Island and the aforesaid point a verie narrow channell where the countrey shippes do passe through inwardes from the Southwest side and from the Island the land maketh a great Créeke which in compasse is about foure great miles two miles from the point Southwestward there lieth two or thrée small Islands As you come outward to these Islands there is déepe and faire ground but from thence to the point and all ouer the Créeke it is all shallowe so that at lowe water it is drie and you may sée the muddie ground vpon the plaine of the aforesaid point on the southwest side there is a great towne where they haue many great Barkes that are made with Orloopes and nayled wherof some are 200. Bhares great On the Northeast side of this point there is a Créeke running inward to the Land at this point of Sumbor the Land maketh an end or Hooke that lieth vnder 28. degrées and ¼ From this point foure miles to Seaward East Northeast there lieth two great Ilands without any trées or bushes whereof the first reacheth East West and from the East point of this Island the other beginneth which reacheth North and South the Channell betwéen them both may be a shot of a great péece broad déepe and faire This Island which reacheth East and West on the East end hath a point sticking out towardes the North in the which point there is a small Créeke of fiue or sixe fadome déepe faire ground where you may harbour in all weathers except it be with a Northwest wind The North Island on the West point hath two Islands lying on a rowe whereof the one is great the other small and some what long betwéene the which and the Island you may passe with small shippes and round about these Islands it is faire ground In this Island you haue verie good fresh water and they are called Timbasam From these Islands a mile and a halfe or two miles Northward there lieth two other small Islandes which reach East southeast West Northwest wherof the one is greater and longer than the other they lie close togither the channell betwéene them is faire déepe with harbor against North Northeast Southwest windes for I haue laine there at anker with a great storme From this point of Sumbor to Liampo you passe without the Islands North Northeast and South Southwest and the coast all high ground and from this point of Sumbor fiue or sixe miles along by the coast within the land there is a high stony Rocke which sheweth like a Monkies coule in the Island Seylon called O Capello de Frade beyond this Friers coule or stonie rocke other sixe myles forward lyeth the Hauen of Chaposy which is a Riuer of fresh water and inward it hath a great Towne lying vpon it where likewise there is a fléet of the country shippes continually kept for the security and safegard of the coast The knowledge and right tokens of this Hauen are that when you are hard by Chaposy the Sea hath some reddish leaues or Flagges driuing on the water and some péeces of réedes like Cassia Fistola or Spanish Réedes which come out of this Riuer Two miles East Southeast from this hauen to Seaward there lyeth two small and high Islands close by each other wholly without trées or bushes round about them it is twentie fadome déepe muddy ground and from the mouth of the Riuer halfe a mile from the land Southward lyeth a long Island reaching like the coast betweene this and the land it is faire muddy ground of thrée fadome déepe whereof the entry on the South side is the déepest and along by the land it is shallow From Chaposy eightéene myles forward lyeth the Island of Liampo where the Portingales vsed to Trafficke These Islands were called Sinogicam the Firme land Liampo which along by the sea side is a high land The Portingales ships doe not passe along by it but betwéene the Islands At the first you haue but few and small Islands but being past them then vpon the rowe of Islands lying furthest out into the sea you haue a very great Island with high Trées and Creekes along by the Sea coast and it is there all ouer faire and good ground and on the West side it hath a Créeke in the middle whereof there is a great and high Island betwéene
the which and the land you haue a Roade against the Monsons of the South and Southwest windes This entry is of fiue fadome déepe but it is too narrow for a Shippe to wind in it therfore you must bind it fast or cast out ankers both before and behind From this Island two miles West Northwest lyeth another great Island with very high Trées and from the South Southwest side of the same Island there is a good hauen for the Monson of the North and Northeast winds on the which side it hath very good aire and fresh water and the other Island aforesaid for the Monson of Southwest winds is vnwholsome The channell betweene them both is 35 fadome déepe but in the Road you haue such depths as you would desire From this north Island to the land are about thrée miles hauing some small Islands in the way On the firme land West Northwestward there lieth a smal Créeke called Camocon from thence you run to the Hauen lying on the coast fiue miles beyond the Island which is a riuer called Tinay at the entrie it hath foure fadome déepe without any sands or shallowes These two Islands aforesaid of Synogicam where the Portingals vsed to traffike lie vnder 29 degrees and 2 â— and these islands of Liampo doe reach full vnder one and thirtie degrées Northward and are not as the Islands of Canton hauing their Channell faire and cleare without feare of any thing but that you sée before your eies But betwéene these Islands in some places you haue stonie cliffes and riffes lying vnder the water From the Islands of Sinogicam forwards there also the tides runne verie strong about a third part of the Water at an Ebbe and a third part at a flood wherefore you must haue good regard to the crosse streames that come from the many channels and droughts which runne verie strong and with so great force that oftentimes they driue a man vpon the point and Hookes of the Island when hée would passe by it Wherefore hée that will sayle by these Islands must haue a Pilote that knoweth the Countrey To Seaward from these Islands it is all faire and good ground Putting out of the Island where you may Winter for the South winde that is from the Road of the Islands or Cliffes to Sea-ward you must alwaies runne close by it and when the Island beginneth to lye East-ward then it maketh a point sticking out and before you come to this Point there is a small long Island which hath a small Créeke in the middle being inward of a clouen stonie Rocke at the foot whereof it is 20 fadome déepe it is distant from the great Island about the shot of a great péece The smal Island shall lye on the North side and you shall alwaies keepe towards the great Island as much as you can for this creeke aforesaid draweth the water to it so that if you were close by it it would draw you in as it happened vnto mee whereby I had great labor and danger before I could get out From this Island halfe a myle Northward there beginneth another great and high Island which from thence reacheth Eastward making a Channell betweene both that runneth in the Sea which Channell from the Sea to this small Island is all fair and cléere but from thence to the point of the other North Island and from both these Islands Westward which is a great space of the Sea it is altogether riffes and Stony Cliffes vnder Water that reach vnto the Channell that runneth from the Island where you may Winter for the North windes along by the Islands that lye on the land side Therefore when you come from the South Island to Sea-ward you must goe close by it to the point aforesaid lying on the same Island From the Island where you may Winter for the North winds there runneth a channell North Northeastward betwéene the Islands so that it deuideth the Islands leauing some on the land side and some to Sea-ward which channell oftentimes openeth and sheweth it self From this Island aforesaid where you may Winter for the North windes fiue myles further forward in the same course there beginneth another great and high Island of fiue myles long lying in the same course of North Northeast and South Southwest This Island is very populous of euill natured people from the South point of this great Island the length of a Cannon shot Eastward there is a hidden cliffe or Rocke of stone lying vnder the water wherevpon a Portingales Shippe was cast away laden with Pepper and other Spices which is a good marchandise to be brought out of India and all those countries The Riffes and Stones aforesayde reach vnto this Stony Rocke therefore if you will sayle through this Channell or depth aforesaide you must runne on the West side close by the Island From the point of this great Island thrée miles Northeast there is yet another great and high Island and is one of the Islands that lye to Seaward in a row wherein there standeth a Chinish Temple or Church most curiously built wherefore by the Portingales it is called A Ilha de Varella that is the Island of the marke or token and before you come at it you leaue two or thrée smal Islands on the land side and the great Island of fiue miles long reacheth behind these Islands to land ward and to Sea ward from these Islands lyeth another great Island reaching from the stony rock to the island of Varella Betweene these two Islands there runneth a small Channell the whole Channell from these thrée miles to the entery or passage of Varella is thrée fadome deepe at full Sea and that of Varella as also the month of the chanell which runneth Eastward through it towards the Sea is all deep In the entery of the Channell of this Island at the foote of Varella it hath a Créeke with a Sandy baye which is a good Road. From the South point of this Island of Varella or Chinish Temple to Sea ward there lyeth thrée Islands all on a row close by each other reaching East and West which Islands also are named after the name of Varella whereby the Channell is knowne This Island of Varella or Chinish Temple lyeth full vnder thirtie degrées and is distant from the Islands Sâ—ongâ—â—â—m aforesaid eight miles From the Islands Sâ—ongicam eleuen or twelue myles it is altogether great and high Islands lying close by each other but from thence to full one and thirtie degrées they begin to bée lesse and somewhat more separated At the end of these Islands there lyeth two Islands together whereof the Channell that runneth betwéene them hath a verye good harbour it is called Lepion they lye close by a great Riuer which is much inhabited and frequented by Marchaunts and other people In this Hauen of Lepion the Iapons doe often Trafficke from the end of this Island along by the Sea coast the land is low and bankey ground for that
a mile from the land it is but a fadome and a halfe déepe being hard stones The people of y e country passe ouer it with nailed barkes with pitched or loopes two péeces sailes of réeds or mats an yron dreg with sharpe téeth This coast reacheth Northeast to foure and thirtie degrées where there lieth a great riuer that commeth from Nanquyn within the mouth or entry hath an Island that is inhabited by many people both horse and footemen This Island maketh the Riuer to haue two mouths or entries from thence forward the land reacheth North Northeast and by East and comming to that part which lieth Southeast there the land hath an end or point and by that meanes it maketh a great Créeke From this point forward the coast runneth North again after turning again Northwestward Into the which coast those of Iapon doe ordinarily come to Trafficke with the Countrey people called Cooray and there you haue Hauens and harbors hauing a kind of small open péeces of wouen worke which the Iapons fetch from thence whereof I am certainely informed as also touching the nauigation vnto that land by Pilots that haue sailed and searched cleane through it as followeth From this point of the Creeke of Nanquyn twenty miles Southeastward there lyeth certaine Islands at the end whereof on the East side there lyeth a very great and high Island much inhabited as well by horse as footemen These Islands by the Portingales are called As Ilhas de core but the great Island Core is called Chausien on the Northwest side it hath a small Créeke wherein there lyeth an Island which is the Hauen but it is not very déepe There the lord of the country hath his pallace and is continually resident Fiue and twenty miles Southeast from this Island lieth the Island of Goto one of the Islands of Iapon which lyeth from the point of the Créeke of Nanquyn East and by North to Seaward sixtie miles or somewhat more This instruction I had from a Nobleman of Portingale called Pero da cunha that hath séene and trauelled through all the Countrey hauing by him all aduise seruing for the purpose as being of great experience hauing arriued and stayed in the Countrey aforesaid by tempest and stormy weather against their wils minding to sayle to Iapon and from thence againe to the aforesaide Island of Goto the Islands lying from this Island towards the land betwéene them and close about them all ouer are many riffes and stones The instruction of the Créeke of Nanquyn I had from an expert Pilote borne in the lande of Algaine in Spaigne that lost his Shippe vpon the Sands that sticke out from the Riuer of Nanquyn hauing runne round about all this Créeke with a Barke and hée saide that being within when the Sunne rose it came from ouer the land and that from the riuer of Nanquyn there ranne some sands and droughts reaching southward to two and thirty degrées and to the middle way of the Goulfe of Iapon Here endeth the description of the furthest parts that the Portingales haue sailed along by the Coasts lands and Islands of the Kingdome of China being that part thereof which at this day is knowne and discouered The 31. Chapter The description of a voiage made by a Portingale Pilote from Liampo to Iapon in a Chinchea Soma that is a Chinchon ship with the description of the coast of Bungo Miaco Cacay the Island Toca all countries of Iapon ON Wednesday the thirty of Iune being the third day of the new moone in the morning we set sayle out of the northeast chanell of the Island Siongicam with a southeast wind and being without the Island we had the wind South Southeast and ran east and somewhat East and by North about euening we had a South Southwest wind running East East and by South and East southeast with very great billowes out of the south whereby we could hardly kéepe on our course sayling with our sayles but halfe vp and in the morning we ran halfe a strike east and by south and east southeast because the wind came some what ful to the South west with shoures of raine and great billowes that rose very high by which means the waters and streames in these countries run Northward we made our account to haue sailed in the course of East and East and by North 26 miles in one meale tide which was til thursday at noone being the first of Iuly We had alwaies great and mighty waues because it was a Spring tyde all the night hauing great lightnings out of the East and in all the points of the Compasse from North to South On thursday the first of Iuly from noone to night we had a southwest wind running East and East and by South and somwhat East Southeast with great showres of raine without any high wind and being two houres within night the skie closed round about and became close with a great raine wherwith the wind beganne to be calme turning Northward which the officers of the Soma perceiuing being men of China they began to be in great feare for the Chinais doe hold for certaine that in the Moone of the moneth of Iuly vntill it bee 12. dayes old all along the coast of China there will follow great stormes and as I thinke it is till S. Iames day till when they alwaies looke for stormes and foule weather for that I my selfe vpon the same day haue passed two great stormes And touching our North wind y e began still to encrease they perceiuing it put presently Westward againe towardes the Islands and had sayled from noone to that time about ten miles in such manner that as wee gessed we were 36. miles from the land of China and so wée held our course in that manner West and West and by North after that hauing a close skie with little wind whereby we made very litle way On Friday the North wind beganne to blowe higher wee running so till noone and in that Westerly course wée sayled about sixe miles From Friday at noone we sailed with this North wind all that euening and by night til Saterday in the morning then the wind came Northeast then East and so West till noone whereby wee made our account to haue sailed eightéene miles letting the shippe goe West and West and by North and in all that time wée had neither Sunne nor Starre to take the height On Saterday two or thrée houres after noone the wind fell South the weather beginning to cleare vp and so wée ranne one glasse and perceiuing the weather to settle we turned againe towards Iapon being as then in mine opinion about 12. myles from the coast of China and so we held our course that euening and all the next night East and East and by South with a small wind and calme Sea The next day being Sonday at noone we tooke the height of the Sunne at 30. degrées 1 ◠part lesse wée set out
about halfe a myle forward you beginne to haue lowe land with sandie strands and Trées all along the Sea coast By all this coast and the low land it is all bankey grounds wherfore you must keepe from it about halfe a myle In the middle way of this lowe land there lyeth two mouths or entries of Riuers that are very shallow whereby you may not enter into them by any meanes and at the end of this low land you haue a riuer of fresh water of twelue Spannes in the Hauen at a Spring tide and within the Riuer at lowe Water the Shippes lie drie being sandy ground Close by the Roade or entry of this Riuer lyeth a Village called Aquina Fama Halfe a myle within the Land vpon the Riuer lyeth the greatest and mightiest Towne in all the Kingdome of Bungo where the Kings in time past held their Courts where now all the Marchaunts of the Countries round about it who are very rich and aboundant in wealth are resident From this Riuer vpon the other side of the Creeke lyeth a very good Hauen with harbour against all windes it is a small Bay for the points or heights therof doe runne through each other wherefore they make a good defence against the South windes The entry of this hauen is faire you need but run in through the middle of the Channell where you haue foure and a halfe and fiue fadome deepe and there you haue great furtherance for you runne in before the winde with the South Monson and you put out againe before the winde with the North Monson to vnderstand it well you must know that all this Countrey as also all China Malacca India and all the orientall places doe sayle with the coniunction of the windes which for certaine months together blowe out of one place as now in the North then in the South and that at certaine times and dayes in the yeare without fayling which coniunction is called as in other places I haue said the Monson as Monson of the South winde that is when the wind bloweth out of the South and monson of the North Windes in like sort wherewith through all India they make their accounts to passe from the one place to the other And because in this description there is oftentimes mention made of some Hauens Creekes Riuers Bayes and Islands where you haue good harbor for the Monson of the North and South Windes when they blowe which is to bée vnderstoode that if they bée against you in the way you should hold you should know which hauen is good to stay in for that time or to winter in for in the East Countries you must Winter when the winde is against you so that you cannot holde on your voyage and of force you must stay for the wind and weather that is the Monson which serueth you and where you haue a good harbour to stay for the Monson that you must haue and then to follow on your voyage Wherefore I thought it necessary to set this downe that you might the better vnderstand the meaning of the Portingall and Indian Pilotes that first set downe noted and obserued these courses and Nauigations vsing here the same manner and description of the countrey not chaunging the word of Monson although that in some places before I haue saied some thing thereof But to the matter you must knowe that the aforesaid Hauen or Bay is called Fingy but it is not free from Rouers and theeues From the aforesaid Riuer to this Hauen there is about three myles crosse-waies In the Roade of the Riuer it is twenty fadome deepe close by the land but it is bad ground and there it is not good to stay for the windes for there you could not saue any thing From this point you may see the East land and at the end where this great Creeke endeth it is low land which is called Mâ—ryee and is all along faire and cleare The aforesaid Riuer and Towne lye vnder 33 degrees and â— From this point or end of Mâ—ryee two myles further there is another point of land which lyeth with this point North and South it is a low land with sandie strands at the end whereof lyeth certaine stones and Rockes from thence forward you runne Northward along the coast and a myle beyond it there is a Village called Tamboca and another myle further lyeth another place called Tambico lying both on the Sea side but they haue no Hauens with harbours also the people of the same places are not to bee trusted Beeing right against this point of Land you shall along the coast see a long Island which a farre off sheweth like two Islands lying distant from the land about two myles it is called Fimexima betwéen this Island and the land it is all shallows from the point of the Créeke of Bungo to this Island aforesaid All this coast along for the space of a great myle is bankey ground Riffes Stones and other filth All this way from the beginning of the Kingdome of Bungo to this Island you must runne on the East side along by the land of Tocaa From this Island of Fimexima aforesaid nine myles Northward there is a very high Lande which reacheth East and West that is the land of Amanguchen a great mighty and rich country for therein is one of the mines of siluer of the countrey of Iapon In this coast are good Hauens as also the Island of Meagima which in times past before the Portingales trauelled to Iapon had great Trafficke for there was the staple of all the countrey of Iapon for all kindes of wares and Marchandises Along by this land of Amaguchen and the country of the Island Fimexima aforesaid beginneth the straight or passage to Facunda of the which as also the other places thereabouts I will speake in another place together with the Nauigation and scituation thereof To sayle from the point of Moryee in the Créeke of Bungo to the Hauen of Caminaxique lying in the country of Amanguchen which is very sure and good for all winds and of great Trafficke you shall holde your course Northeast and Northeast and by East being about sixtéene myles This Lande which you goe vnto is very great and high and you runne all the aforesaid coast along to a Hooke or point of Lande East and West and East and by North and West and by South and from the Hauen of Caminaxique to the aforesayed Point about fortie Portingale myles whereof seuentéene and ½ make a degrée as all the myles in this description likewise doe in the which coast lyeth the Hauens hereafter following that is from Caminaxique to Toraque are about two myles and â— from Toraque to the Island Meagima are sixe myles and a halfe The Roade of this Island is betwéene it and the Firme Lande from Meagima to Camangary are a myle and a halfe from thence to the Island of Anooxyma are fiue myles From Anooxyma to Toumoo are also fiue miles
way to know the land which you shall alwaâ—â— find at Macau if you find them noâ— in â—â—dia For other necessaries concerning to shippe you shall finde of all things sufficient in China The gaines and profits of all sortes of wares of China are verie great except rawe silke whereby they haue verie little gaine for there they rather desire it readie spunne and although there should bee much solde there yet that were no reason or cause why they should carrie much thither because it should not hinder the voiage and trafficke of them of Iapon into the East Indies for there are many other kindes of wares great store to carrie thither wherein there is much more profit then in silke Of the common wares and merchandises that the Spaniards in the Islands of Lucones or Phillippinas doe buy and yet they buy them much dâ—â—er there then they should buy them in China in newe Spaine they gaine but sixe for one and in Peru ten for one whereof they are sure for that the Portingales that haue gone from hence thither in the ship that came hither haue gained so much by the wares they carried with them that the time that they stayed for their returne séemed to them a thousand yéeres and as they repoâ—t the Viceroy of Noua Spaigna and all the other gouernours and gentlemen of the countrie haue a great desire to vse the trade and doe much looke after it Many are of opinion that to saile that way to Peru it would be a longer voiage for that when you are at Acapulco you must take another way and hold another course of 700. miles long from Acapulco to the Hauen of Callande Lyma which is the Metropolitane Cittie of Peru lying vnder ten degrées on the South side of the Equinoctiall and you should make your voiage in the same yeere and further it is a countrey of great charges and expences whereby you should loose and spend all that you should gaine more in that countrey then in new Spaine because the countrey of newe Spaine is more aboundant in all kinde of necessaries victuals then Peru and therefore your charges is lesse The 52. Chapter The true and perfect description of a voiage performed and done by Franciscus de Gualle a Spanish Captaine and Pilot for the Viceroy of new Spaine from the Hauen of Acapulco in new Spaine to the Islands of Iuâ—ones or Phillippinas in the Hauen of Manilla and from thence to the Hauen of Macau in China and from Macau backe againe to Acapulco accomplished in the yeere of our Lorde 1584. THe tenth of March in the yéere of our Lord 1582. wée set saile out of the Hauen of Acapulco lying in the country of new Spaine directing our course to the Islands of Lucones or Philippinas West Southwest running in that manner for the space of 25. miles till wee came vnder 16. degrees that so wée might shun the calmes by sailing close by the shore From thence forward we held our course West for the space of 30. miles and being there we ranne West West and by South for the space of 1800. miles to the Island called Ilha d'Engano which is the furthest Island lying in the South partes of the Islands called de los Ladrones that is the Islands of Rouers or Islas de las Vellas vnder 13. degrées and ½ in latitude Septentrional and 164. degrées in longitude Oriental vpon the fixed Meridional line which lieth right with the Island of Tercera From thence wée held our course westward for the space of 280. miles till we came to the point called El capo de Espirito Santo that is the point of the Holy Ghost lying in the Island Tandaya the first IslaÌ„d of those that are called Philippinas Lucones or Manillas which is a cuntry with few hils with some mines of brimstone in the middle thereof From the point aforesaid we sailed West for the space of eighteene miles to the point or entrie of the channell which runneth in betwéene that Island and the Island of Lucon This point or entrie lieth scarse vnder 12. degrées All the coast that stretcheth from the entry of the chanell to the point El capo del Spirito Santo is not very faire Eight miles from the said point lyeth a Hauen of indifferent greatnes called Bahya de Louos that is the Baye of Wolues hauing a small Island in the mouth thereof and within the Channell about halfe a mile from the end of the said Island lyeth an Island or Cliffe when you passe by the point in the middle of the channell then you haue 25. fadome déepe with browne Sand there we found so great a streame running westward that it made the water cast a skum as if it had béene a sand whereby it put vs in feare but casting out our Lead we found 25. fadome déepe From the aforesaid entrie of the channell North and North and by East about ten miles lyeth the Island of Catanduanes about a mile distant from the land of Lucon on the furthest point Eastward and from the same entrie of the channell towards the West and Southwest lyeth the Island Capuli about sixe miles from thence stretching West Southwest and East Northeast beeing fiue miles long and foure miles broad and as wée past by it it lay Northward from vs vnder 12. degrées and ¼ and somewhat high lande Foure miles from the aforesaid Island of Capuli Northwestward lyeth the thrée Islands of the Hauen of Bollon in the Island of Lucones stretching North and South about foure miles distant from the firme land about halfe a mile whereof the furthest Southward lyeth vnder 13. degrées In this channell it is twentie fadome deepe with white Sand and a great streame running Southeast wee passed through the middle of the channell From this Channell wée held our course Southwest and Southwest and by West for the space of twentie miles vntill wee came to the West end of the Island of Tycao which reacheth East and West 13. miles This point or hooke lieth vnder 12. degrees and 3 â— In the middle betweene this Island and the Island Capuli there lyeth three Islands called the Faranias and we ranne in the same course on the North side of all the Islands at the depth of 22. fadome with white sand From the aforesaid West point of the Island Tycao to the point of Baryaâ— it is East and West to saile about the length of a mile or a mile and a halfe we put into that channell helding our course south and south and by west about three miles vntill we were out of the channell at sixteene fadome deepe with halfe white and reâ—â—sh sande in the Channell and at the month thereof whereof the middle lyeth vnder 12. degrees and â— and there the sâ—reames runne Northward The Island of Bayas stretcheth northwest and Southeast and is lowe land whereof the Northwest point is about three miâ—es from the coast of Lucon but you can not passe between
behinde them and sailed but foure in companie that of Nuno da Silua béeing one till they came to the Baye called Baya de las Islas that is the Baye of the Islands lying vnder nine and fortie degrées where it is said that Magellanes lay and wintered there with his Shippe when hée first discouered the Straight which now holdeth his name In this Bay being the twentie of Iune they entred and there ankered so close to the land that they might send to it with a Harquebush shot and there they saw the land to be inhabited with Indians that were apparelled with skinnes with their legges from the knées downwarde and their armes from the elbows downward couered all the rest of their bodies béeing naked with bowes and arrowes in their handes being subtill great and well formed people and strong and high of stature where sixe of the English men went on land to fetch fresh water and before they leapt on land foure of the Indians came vnto their boate to whome the English men gaue bread and wine and when the Indians had well eaten and drunke they departed thence and going somwhat farre from them one of the Indians cryed to them and saide Magallanes Esta heminha Terra that is Magallanes this is my countrey and because the English men followed them it séemed the Indians fledde-vpward into the lande and béeing somewhat farre off they turned backe againe and with their arrowes slewe two of the English Shippers one being an English man the other a Netherlander the rest came backe againe and saued themselues in the boate wherewith they presently put off from the shoare and there they stayed till the seuentéenth of August vpon the which day they set saile running along by the coast about a mile and a halfe from the lande for there it is all faire and good ground at twentie and fiue and twentie fadome déepe and were about foure or fiue dayes before they came to the mouth or entrie of the Straightes but because the winde was contrarie they stayed till the foure and twentie of August before they entred The entrie or mouth of the Straight is about a myle broad on both sides béeing bare and flat land on the North side they sawe Indians making great fires but on the South side they saw no people stirring The foure and twentie day aforesaide they beganne to enter into the straights with an East Northeast wind This Straight may be about an hundred and ten miles long and in breadth a mile about the entry of the Straight and halfe way into it it runneth right forth without any windings or turnings and from thence about eight or ten miles towardes the end it hath some boughes and windings among the which there is one so great a hooke or running in that it séemeth to runne into the other land and there it is lesse then a mile broad from one lande to the other and from thence forwarde it runneth straight out againe And although you finde some crookings yet they are nothing to speake of The issue of the Straight lieth westward and about eight or ten miles before you come to the end then the Straight beginneth to be broader and it is all high lande to the end thereof after you are eight miles within the Straight for the first eight myles after you enter is low flat land as I saide before and in the entrie of the Straight you finde the streame to runne from the South sea to the North sea and after they began to saile in with the East Northeast winde being entred they passed along without any let or hinderance either of wind or weather and because the high land on both sides lay couered with snow and that all the Straight is faire and cleare they held their course a Harquebush shot in length from off the North side hauing nine and ten fadome déepe with good ground as I said before where if neede require a man may anker the hilles on both sides béeing full of trées some of the hilles and trées reaching downe to the sea side in some places hauing plaine and euen land and there they saw not any great riueâ—s but some small riuers that issued out of the Riffes and Breaches of the lande and in the country where the great Bough or crooking is on the South side they saw certaine Indian Fishermen in their Canoas or Scutes being such as they sawe first on the North side but more people they saw not on the South side Beeing out of the Straight on the other side béeing vpon the sixt of September of the aforesaide yeere they held their course Northwest for the space of thrée dayes and the third day they had a northeast winde that by force draue them West Southwest which course they helde for the space of ten or twelue dayes with fewe sailes vp and because the winde began to be verie great they tooke in all their sailes and lay driuing till the last of September The foure and twentie day of the same moneth hauing lost the sight of their pinnace which was about an hundred tunne then againe they hoised saile because they came better holding their course Northeast for the space of seuen dayes and at the end of the said seuen dayes they had the sight of certaine Islands which they made towards for to anker but the weather would not permit them and béeing there the winde fell Northwest whereby they sailed West Southwest The next day they lost the sight of another of their companie which ship was about three hundred and sixtie tunnes for it was very foule weather so that in the end the Admirals shippe was left alone for the Ship of Nuno da Silua was left in the Baye where they wintered before they entred into the Straights and with this foule weather they ranne till they were vnder seuen fiftie degrees where they entred into a Hauen of an Island and ankered about the length of the shot of a great peece from the land at twentie fadome deepe where they staied thrée or foure dayes and the winde comming Southward they hoysed anker holding their course Northward for the space of two dayes and then they espied a small vnhabited Island where béeing arriued they stroke sayles and hoised out their boat and there they tooke many birds and Sea wolues The next day they set saile againe holding their course North Northeast and North to â—nother Island lying fiue or six myles from the firme lande on the North side of the Straight where they ankered about a quarter of a mile from the lande at twelue fadome water This Island is small and lowe lande and full of Indians the Island being altogither built and inhabited by them where they hoysed out their boate wherein the Admirall and twelue English men were entred going to fetch fresh water and to séeke for victuals and beeing landed vpon the Island the Indians in exchange of other things brought two Spanish shéepe and a little Mais
them passing forward with it on their course the Captaine sayling along the shore with his Pinnace and the Shippe keeping about a myle from him to Seaward to séeke for a shippe whereof they had intelligence and hauing in that manner sailed about fiue and forty myles they found the shippe that lay at anker in a hauen who about two houres before had beene aduertised of an English Pirate or Sea-rouer and had discharged eight hundred Bharres of siluer out of her and hidden it on the Land which siluer belonged to the King of Spaine of the which siluer the Englishmen had receiued some intelligence but they durst not goe on land because there were many Indians and Spaniards that stood to guard it and they found nothing in the ship but thrée Pipes of water the shippe they tooke with them and being about a mile in the Sea they hoised vp all her sailes let her driue doing the like with the Shippe that they had taken in Azijcka as also the other of Saint Iago which likewise they let driue following on their course with their owne ship and the Pinnace Being seuen or eight myles from the Hauen of Callan de Lyma they espied thrée Shippes and boording one of them they tooke thrée men out of her and so helde on their course towards Callan de Lyma where they entred being about two or thrée houres within night sayling in betwéene all the shippes that lay there being seuentéene in number and being among the ships they asked for the ship that had laden the siluer but wheÌ„ answere was made them that the siluer was laid on land they cut the cables of the ships and the masts of two of the greatest ships and so left them At the same time there arriued a Shippe from Panama laden with wares and Marchaundise of Spaigne that ankered close by the English Ship which was while the English Captaine sought in the other Shippes for the siluer As soone as the shippe of Panama had ankered there came a Boat from the shoare to search it but because it was in the night they let it alone till morning and comming to the English shippe they asked what shippe it was wherevpon one of the Spanish prisoners by the English Captaines commandement answered and said it was the shippe of Michiel Angelo that came from Chile which they of the boat hearing sent a man on boord who climbing vp light vpon one of the great Péeces wherewith hee was afraid and presently stept backe againe into the boate because the Shippes that lay there and that sayled in those Countries vsed to carry no great shotte and therewith they were abashed and made from it which the shippe of Panama hearing that was newely come in shee iudged it to bée a Rouer and therewith cutting her Cables shée put to Sea which the Englishmen perceiuing shipped certaine men in their Pinnace and followed her and being hard by her they baddde her strike which they of the shippe refused to doe and with a Harquebush shotte killed one of the Englishmen wherewith they turned againe into their shippe and presently set sayle following after the shippe which not long after they ouertooke which they of the Shippe perceiuing hoised out their Boate and leaping into it rowed to Land leauing the shippe with all the goods which the Englishmen presentlie tooke and with her sayled on their course The next day they sawe a boat with sayles making towards them whereby they presentlie mistrusted it to bee a Spye and not long after they perceaued two great shippes comming towards them which made the English thinke they came to fight with them wherevpon they let the Shippe of Panama driue therein leauing Iohn de Greicke With the two that they had taken the same day they entred into Callan de Lyma as I said before and presently hoised all their sailes and sailed forward not once setting eye againe vpon the aforesaid shippes for they made towards the shippe of Panama which the Englishmen let driue From thence they sayled againe along the coast following on their course and hauing sailed certaine dayes they met a Frigate that went towards Lyma laden with wares and Marchandises of the Countrey from whence the Englishmen tooke a Lampe and a Fountaine of siluer and asked the Pilote being a Spaniard if they met not with a Shippe that they vnderstoode should bee laden with siluer but the one Pilote said he met her not and the other said hee sawe her about thrée dayes before This Frigate came not to the shippe but to the Pinnace wherein the Captaine sayled for the Pinnace ranne close by the shoare and the shippe kept a myle and a halfe from the Lande wherewith they let the Frigate goe following on their course Two dayes after they came to the Hauen called Payta where they found a Shippe laden with Spanish wares which the Pinnace boorded and tooke it without any resistance for as soone as the Spaniards perceaued the Englishmen they presently made to Land with their Boat and two of them leapt into the Sea none staying in the shippe but the Maister Pilote and some Moores out of the which shippe the Englishmen tooke the Pilote and all the Bread Hens and a Hogge and so sayled forward with the Shippe but being about two Harquebush shotte to Seaward they let it goe againe not taking any thing out of it and asking after the shippe which they sought for they told them that about two daies before shee departed from that place wherewith they followed on their course and before night they met with a Shippe of Panama which they presently boorded but tooke nothing from her but onely a Moore and so left it holding on their course The next day being the first of February they met another Shippe that sayled to Panama laden with Fish and other victuals fortie Bharres of siluer and some golde but I knowe not howe much which they tooke and sent the passengers with two Friers that were in her in a boat to Land The next day they hanged a man of the Shippe because hee would not confesse two plates of golde that hée had taken which after they found about him which done they let the Shippe driue following on their course The first of March towards noone they espied the shippe laden with the siluer béeing about foure myles to Seaward from them and because the English Shippe was somewhat heauy before whereby it sayled not as they would haue it they tooke a company of Bottigas or Spanish Pots for Oyle and filling them with water hung them by ropes at the sterne of the Shippe to make her sayle the better and the shippe that sayled towards Panama made towards the English Shippe to knowe what she was thinking it to bee one of the shippes that vsed to saile along the coasts and to traâ—ficke in the country and being hard by her the English Captaine bad them strike but the other refusing to doe it with a great Peece
open At the end of the said hill on the South side there is a point of stonie Cliffes called A punto do Tubaron that is the point of the Hedge And on the South side of the Baye there are two or thrée high hilles being there you shall put right ouer to the Bay and so run Westward If you should be in the same course vnder twentie degrées then you shall sée many hilles among the which standeth a high sharpe point called Serra de Guarapari that is the hill of Guarapari it hath likewise another on the North side called A Serra de Pero Can that is the Hill of Peterwood these hils stand on the South side of Spirito Santo From these Hilles southwarde you shall see a hill standing alone called Guape when you sée it then you shall likewise sée thrée small Islandes lying togither on the south side whereof lyeth another small round flat Island and the land lying right against this roūd flat Island hath a great Baye where if néed be you may put in and anker if you desire to goe into it then you shall runne East and west with the hill and so runne in and then the round Island will bée on the North side This Island is called Ilha de Repouso that is the Island of rest it lyeth very close by the land and betwéene it and the land you may well anker From these thrée Islands aforesaid to the bay of Spirito Santo are 12. miles and holding your course Northward to Spirito Santo you shall sée another Island lying alone which you passe running to Seaward by it and being by it you shall presently sée the mouth or Hauen of Spirito Santo this bay or hauen lyeth vnder 20. degrées The 61. Chapter To saile from the Bay or Hauen of Spirito Santo to the Bay of S. Vincent SAyling from Spirito Santo to y e Bay S. Vincent you must runne along the coast about 7. or 8. miles from it to the point called Cabo Frio that is the cold point vntill you come to it in the way you haue a great bay called A Bayho de Saluador the Baye of our Sauiour which is distant from Cabo Frio 12. miles Before you come to Cabo Frio there are two Islands from the which you run to seaward yet if néed be or if you desire it you may passe betwéene them and the land Cabo Frio hath an Island right ouer against it which hath a point where you may anker if néede be on the West side where it is faire and cléere This Cabo Frio lieth vnder 23. degrées from thence to the riuer called Rio de Ianero that is the riuer of Ianuarie are 18. miles this riuer of Ianero hath thrée or foure Islandes in the mouth thereof If you will enter into this riuer you may well goe in taking your way betwéene two of the Islandes that lie in the mouth thereof on the South side of this riuer there is a Hill that sheweth like a man with a Friars Coule or Cape vpon his head When you are vnder the height of this riuer you shall to Landward see certaine high Hilles which shewe like Organs which is a good marke to knowe that you are by the riuer and when you begin to goe néere the lande you shall see a round high and bare Island on the South side the mouth of this riuer lieth vnder 23. degrées and ½ From this riuer to the Rode or open Hauen by the Portingales called Angra are fiftéene miles and there are two riuers in the way but being in that country put not to the land vnlesse you be compelled thereunto From the mouth of this riuer West Southwest and Southwest by West you shall sée a great Island called A Ilha de Sant Sebastian which on the Southwest side hath another small high Island called A Ilha dos Alcatrases that is the Islande of Seamewes before you come at it you must holde your course Westward to shunne certaine Sands that lie by it whereby you shall come to the mouth of the bay of Saint Vincent where you shall see an Island called Ilha da Muda that is the Island of the Dumbe woman and to put into the Bay of S. Vincent you shall leaue the Islandes on the East side The Bay of Saint Vincent lyeth vnder 24. degrées and if you be to leeward from it then you shall sée many Islands whereof some stretcheth outward which are the best markes for this Hauen and being there you are Northwest and Southeast with the mouth of the Bay The 62. Chapter How to saile from Cabo Frio or the cold point to the riuer of Rio de Plata or the riuer of siluer with all the course thereof FRom Cabo Frio to the riuer of Ianero or Ianuarie are eightéene miles and you saile East and West and lyeth vnder 23. degrées and hath these markes First inward to the land it hath certaine high Hilles called Organs but at this time most of them are falne down and on the West Southwest side towards the Sea side it hath the forme of the Mass of a shippe and in the mouth of the riuer lieth foure Islands whereof one is high and round which is a good marke as also the Sugar loafe being a houell that is called so lying in the Hauen although you can not sée it when you are at sea you may saile along this coast without daunger and you need feare nothing but that you sée before your eyes From thence to Saint Vincent the coast reacheth East Northeast and West Southwest and is in length two and fortie miles and all that way there is neither shallowes nor Sandes but there you finde good Hauens for all winds Twelue miles from the riuer lieth an Island called Ilha grande or the great Island which hath verie good Hauens as well on the Southwest as the East sides with very good fresh water and great fishing it is a high lande with many trees and inwarde to the lande it is verie high and sharpe pointed if you desire to put in there you néed not feare to do it for there is no danger From this great Island to the Island of S. Sebastian are eighteene miles and to the Island A Ilha dos Porcos that is the Island of Hogges are fourtéene miles the Isles of Hogges hath a very good Hauen but it is too farre inward Frō thence to the Island of Saint Sebastian are foure miles which is a great high Island full of trees it hath a verie good entrie as well on the one side as on the other it lyeth Northeast and Southwest From thence to the lande about halfe a mile distant lyeth the Rode Southwestwarde there lyeth another long Island called A Ilha dos Alcatrases or the Island of Sea-mewes Close by this Island there lyeth three Cliffes on the South side whereof lyeth an Island which is a verie good marke for the land is sometimes couered with miste and thicke weather whereby you can
20 or 30 miles wherewith you shall finde ground at 80 fadome being shels From thence you shal run west and west and by South till you be at 30 fadome and from 30 fadome west-ward to 30 fadome with the which course you should sayle along this Countrey And being a greater depth you shall run west and west and by south wherby you shall come again to the former depth By this course you shall passe through the Islāds of Ilha de Sconocida Ilha d'Arena that is the vnknowne Island and the sandy Island From the Iland la de Sconocida to the Islād d'Arena west west and by south you shall descry the Hils Las Sierras de San Martin which are two high Hils in the middle hauing a great opening or cliffe Sailing from these Hils you shall runne West by the which course you shal sée the stony rock which is a clouen hil you shall run Northwest and northwest by west wherewith you shall sée the Riuer of Medelyn which is a lowe land somewhat more to Loofeward lieth the Island called Ilha Blanca or the white Island as also y e Island Rio Riffias which a farre off sheweth like a ship vnder saile then presently you shal sée the Island of S. Iohn de Luz and from the riuer called Rio Varado to the Riuer of Vera Crus There is no high land but only one black shining hill lying aboue the aforesaid Hauen The 65. Chapter How to sayle from the Island La Desseada to the Island of Porto Riso through the channell called De Passagie SAyling from the Island La Desseada to the Island Puerto Riso y t is the rich Hauen Desiring to passe through y e channel of De Passagie that is the thorow faire you must vse all y e means you can to runne betwéene the Islands of Moncerrate Redonda or to Loofeward y t is betwéen y e Island of S. Christopher and the Islands d'Estacio and from thence you shal hold your course Northwest somewhat more to loofeward frō the Islands of Estacio which are 2. Islands one greater thē the other shewing almost like 2. loaues of bread when you are by them you shall find 10.12 and 25. fadome déepe at the depthes of 10. 12. fadome you haue white sandy ground and at 25. fadome black sand to sayle from this Banke to the Ilandes las Virgines that is the maydes you shal holde your course northwest for there the streams draw Southwestward to shunne S. Crus which stretcheth almost Northwest and Southeast and when you see las Virgines the first poynt is the greatest and therefore it is called la Virgin Gorga or the fatte mayde and presentlie after follow the rest which are long full of Houels they stretch East and West and runne one within the other hauing certaine Cliffes and Rockes hard by them running on the South syde in the middle way frō them you shall sée a great Cliffe two myles into the sea This Cliffe hath for a marke a grayish colour and besydes these there are manie other cliffes and to know whē you are in the passage running along by it to Porto Riso as aforesaid then you shal sée white cliffes that a farre off shew like a ship vnder sayle the whitenes of these cliffes procéedeth of birds filings when you sée them you must make towards them and desiring to run through the passage you shall hold your course betwéene these Ilands the Ilands las Virgines whē you are by them thē you must run northwest to a smal Iland which lieth two miles further forward called Ilha Verde that is the gréen Iland and being right against this Iland thē you are out of the passage or without the channel and being ther you shal presently sée the land of y e Iland Puerto Riso the first point wherof called la Punto de Loquillo lieth East west with the Iland Ilha Verde if you chance to be by the aforesaid cliffe and that the winde scanteth y t you can not passe to loofeward from it then you shall passe to léeward of it for it is also a good chānell of 18. 20. fadom deep with sand and shels vpon the ground about a mile to léeward from it to know whē you are out of the Channell with this course then this cliffe must lie Southeast from you and being at 30. fadome déep with white sandy ground you shall presently as I said passe by the Ilande of Ilha Verde running by the point of Loquillo along by the land of Puerto Riso Westnorthwest and if you desire to be in the hauen of Puerto Riso and that you cannot get thether then you shal lauere or ly driuing to léeward with the point of Loquillo Southeastward from you and from midnight forward you shall follow your course because the streames draw Southeastward the marks you haue there are these that is ouer the hauē of Puerto Riso standeth an hermitage vpon a high hil which is called Santa Barbara and sheweth like a white patch vpon a hill and passing along by it you shall see the Cloyster or Conuent of Dominican Fryers which is about a quarter of a myle from the hermitage and then you shall presently sée the hill that sheweth like a clouen Iland these are the right marks of this Hauen and to put into it you must goe néere the hill but not too néer to shunne a shallow place that lieth within the said hill after that you must loofe asmuch as you can vntil you comé wher you must anker which is right against the houses that stand on the East side of the hauen The 66. Chapter The groundes and depthes by the coast and countrie of New Spaigne BY the Ilāds called Alaclanes lying betwéen the Iland Cuba and the coast of New Spaigne right ouer against the poynt called Punta de S. Anton. the ground is shelly by the Iland called Ilha de Robos it is muddy slyme ground by the Riuer of S. Pedro S. Paulo from 40. fadom to the land it is shelly ground by the fields or playnes of Almeria called Los Islano◠de Almeria at 40. fadome it is sandy ground from thence outwards shelly ground by Vilila Rica or the rich stone at 16 fadome it is muddy ground East west with the cliffes sands de Tortugas of Torteaux it is white sand Northeast and southwest with the same Tortugas it is blacke sand and eastward frō it reddish sand by the riuer of Panuco from 40. fadom outwards it is white and red sand and towardes the land muddy ground by the riuer called Rio Hermoso or the faire riuer frō 30. fadome towardrs the land it is white sand ◠outward towards y e sea muddy groūd by the riuer called Rio de Palmase de Mōtanas that is the riuer of palm trees of hils frō 40. fadom towards y e land you haue sand but most white and outwards muddy groūd mixed with gray sand
The 67. Chapter The course right marke of the nauigatioÌ„ from the point called Cabo de Lopo Gonsalues to the riuer of Coâ—go in Angola southwards in the coasts of Guinea and Ethiopia with the situation of the countries SAyling from the point called Cabo de Lopo Gonsalues which lyeth full vnder 1. deg on the south side of the Equinoctial line in the Coast of Guinea or Ethiopia the coast froÌ„ thence forward stretcheth northwest southeast being a flat long land you haue the depthes of 10. and 9. fadome déepe water towards the land being all ground like sand of sand lopers all through the country except it be by the point Cabo de Catarina where you haue great sand some stones if you will make any hast being vpon this coast and voyage then euery night you must anker till you haue the Terreintios which are the winds blowing from off the land holding your course in that manner till you haue the Viracoins which are y e winds out of the sea therwith again to make towards the land vntil it be calme or that y e are at 10. fadom déep theÌ„ you must anker til the comming of the land winds which come dayly at their times as aforesaid if the streames run w t the wind theÌ„ you may wind from the one bough to the other holding to léeward as aforesaid the coniunction or time wheÌ„ the streames run with the winds is with a new Moone about 2. dayes before or after and 3. dayes before it is ful if you desire to run from one bough to the other y t must rule your selfe in such maÌ„ner that you be euery morning by the coast to get before the winds that as then blow off the land the marks of the long land are these it hath certain great thicke houels called As Sierras de santo Espirito that is the hils of the holy Ghost and somwhat further you haue 2 other houels which are very easy to be knowne in this country you haue muddy ground further forward you shal sée a high hill within the créek called Palmella for that it is like to Palmela the which lyeth betweene Lisbon and Setuval you shal likewise sée somewhat further in the créeke a land which stretcheth North south as you passe along by it close by the strand it hath a thicke flat houel which is called Cascars because it is like Cascais by Lisbon you must vnderstand that before you hoyse vp anker in that countrie you must let fal your sayles to see if the shippe may get out and if it cannot get out then lie still till you haue the Viracoins that blow out of the sea for in those countries the streames runne very stronglie out of the riuer of Congo into the sea wherby the shippe can hardlie get out when you are so far as the place called a Palmeirinâ—a that is the woods of Palme trees then let your best anker fall for the groundes in this crosse way is stiffe muddy ground whereby the ankers oftentimes will hardly holde fast but ship out againe And when you are in the riuer of Congo being at the depth of 30. or 40 fadome then you shall loofe the ground then you shall turne your howreglasse and when it is runne out then cast out your lead and you shall find 10 or 12 fadome water on the other side of the riuer of Congo and you shal sayle about the length of a stone cast from the land and the best course is close by the land for otherwise you could not get into the riuer by meanes of the great force of the streames wherby many men are much troubled as being the greatest stroÌ„gest streams that are found in any place and run aboue 12. miles into the sea Sayling from Congo to Angola in maner aforesaid and being 35. miles on your way you shal sée a high hill by the which ther lieth an IlaÌ„d called A Ilha de Loanda but if you be not very close by y e laÌ„d you shal not sée the Iland for it is very low flat if you chance to be by the land at 6. 7. deg then you shal be at the mouth of the riuer of Congo and 10. myles to seaward from it you shal sée many tokens signes thereof as great streames thicke réeds herbs with many cutle bones and wheÌ„ you are by the land at 7. 8. degr ½ then you shall sée a flat land with trées al ouer it and in this country in euery place at 18. 20. fadome you shal haue good ground from 2. to two miles and a halfe from the land on the sea side you haue white downes which shew like sandy strandes the ground by it is sandy with some stones that is from 7. to 8. deg and you must vnderstand that the land from 5 deg southwarde is altogether high all the ground being muddy and a mile from it it is 30. and 35 fadom deepe good ground being a cleare and faire coast with cause of feare of more then is séen before your dayes that is from 7 to 9 deg and the land from 8. degrees southward is verie high if you come out of the sea to the land vnder 7. degr and ½ then you shal sée 7. hils or Houels which stretch Northwest and southeast called As sete serras that is the 7. hils if you come to the land vnder 8. degr ¼ then you shall see a hie land lying eastwarde from you this point in shew hath the forme of cape S. Vincent in the coast of Spaine comming to the land not full vnder 9 degrées then north or northeast you shal sée the aforesaid point hauing vnder it some whit downs that strike somewhat out into the sea but you need not feare them for it is faire and cleare and therefore you may fréely go neere the land theÌ„ better to know it being vnder the hight aforesaid of scarce 9 deg then eastwarde to land you shal see a round hil called monte Pasqual when the point aforesaid is northeast from you then the other land shall stretch southwest which is the furthest land lying without the Iland of Loanda the land that lyeth southwarde from you is a greate thicke land at the foot thereof hauing some red and white downes with certaine small trees vppon it which show like figge trees of Algaruen in Spaine now to runne within y e land of Loâ—ndâ— you must hold your course right vpon the land that lyeth southward so you may go close coâ—t about half a mile froÌ„ it being there southwestward from the Iland you shal discouer the Iland which is very flat and of white sand whereby you can hardlie see it but when you are close by it that is the hauen of Angola This Iland of Loanda is like an Iland called A Ilha das Caruns lying by the cape called Cabo de santa Maria in the land of Algaruen vpon the coast
defence maintenance of the said Countries and places so that the rents and reuenewes of the Crowne of Portingale doe amount vnto the sum of 220000 Duckets at 5. shillings 6. pence the Ducket amounteth vnto in English monie to the summe of sixe hundreth and fiue thousand poundes The 5. Chapter Of the yearely charges disbursed by the Kinges of Portingale THe fées and payments due to the ministers Iustices of the lawes and ordinances of the countrie of Portingale for the executing of their offices doth amount vnto yearely the summe of 100000 duckets The rentes which the King bestoweth yearely as giftes and rewardes vnto such as haue done him seruice which being dead returneth vnto him againe doe yerely amount vnto the summe of 300000 duckets The Iuros which are bought for monie and fee farme or continuall rents to bee paide out of the kinges reuenewes customes and other demaynes yearely and are neuer released but remaine from heire to heire are yerely 150000 Duckets The charges of Maintayning the castles and fortes in Africa and Barbarie doe yerely amount vnto the summe of 300000. duckets The charges of maintaining fiue Gallies yearely 50â—00 Duckets The charges of the armie that doth yerely conuay the Indian ships thither fetcheth them back againe amount vnto 300000. Duckets The Moradien that is the wages which the king payeth to his seruants called Mocos da Camara Caualheâ— Fidalgos and other titles as an honour to such as hee will shew fauour vnto or els in reward of anie former seruices or in respect their Ancetors were true and faithfull seruitors to the king with those titles they are called seruantes of the kinges house which is a great honour they doe receiue a yearely stipend although not much towardes their charges of finding prouision for their horses although they can hardly saue a paire of shooes and yet neuer come on horses backe all their life time but it is onely a token of the Kinges fauour and good will wherein the Portingales doe more glorie and vaunt themselues then of any thing in the world yet is it not of much importance and verie little paie it amounteth yearely to 80000. Duckets The charge of the king of Portingales house is yearely the summe of 200000. Duc. which was wont to be farmed as at this day it is for the charge of houshold of Don Alberto Cardinall of Austria Gouernour of Portingale for the defence and maintenance of the Castles and Forts of Portingale the summe of 200000. Duckets So that the charges aforesaid doe amount vnto in all the summe of 1680000. duckets at fiue shillinges sixe pence the ducket is in English monie the summe of foure hundereth sixtie and two thousand pounds which being deducted out of the receates of Portingale aforesaid that amount vnto 605000. poundes English monie there resteth yearely for the king of Spaine Coffers one hundreth fortie and three thousand pounds English monie The 6. Chapter Of the Towne of Lisbone THe towne of Lisbone hath â—2 parish Churches and aboue eleuen thousaÌ„d houses wherin there are aboue â—0 thousand dwelling places accounting the Court and the place thereunto belonging it hath in people aboue 120000. whereof 10000. of them at the least are Slaues and Mores which estimation is made according to the church bookes which the Parsons Vicars and Curats are bound to doe once euerie yeare euerie one in his parish among these are not accounted such as follow the Court neyther Cloysters Cobents Hospitalles nor any other houses of religion for that in all they would amount vnto as much as the houses of the citie also of other Churches Cloysters and Chappels of the virgin Marie and other Saints which are no parishes there are so many that they can not be numbred The Towne hath aboue 350. streetes besides crosse waies and lanes that haue no thorow fare which are likewise a great number The 7. Chapter A short discourse of the pettigrees of kinges of Portingale vntill Phillip now King of Spaine and Portingale Sonne of Charles the fift Emperour of Rome THe first king of Portingale was named Don Alfonso Henriques sonne of Earle Henry who as the Chronicles rehearse was sonne of the Duke of Lorraine others thinke hee was sonne of the king of Hungarie but the truest Histories doe report him to be of Lorrane and that he came into the King of Spaines Court being desirous to imploy himselfe in the warres of the Christians against the Mores which as then held the most part of the countrie of Spaine and the whole land of Lusitania or Portingale warring continually on the King of Spaine and other Christians bordering on the same in the which warres hee behaued himselfe so well and did so valiantly that the King knew not how or in what sort to recompence him better then by giuing him his daughter in mariage with her for a dowrie gaue him the countrie of Portingale that was as much as he had conquered and brought vnder his subiection with all the rest if he could win it with the name and title of Earle of Portingale his sonne aforesaid called Don Alfonzo was borne in Anno 1094. who wan the most part of the countrie of Portingale from the Mores after his fathers death was called Prince of Portingale which name and title he enioyed for the space of 27. yeares which title in Spaine no man may beare but the Kings eldest son and heire vnto the Crowne and being of the age of 45. yeares was crowned king of Portingale by the fauour speciall priuiledge of the Pope of Rome as then being by that meanes Portingale became a kingdome This first King maried when he was 52. yeares of age and had one sonne and 3. daughters and besides them one bastard son and a bastard daughter he raigned 46. yeres and died in the towne of Coyinbra his body being buried in the Cloyster of Santa Crus erected by him as also the Cloysters of Alcobaca and Saint Vincent without Lisbone called Saint Vincent de Fora This King first wonne the Towne of Lisbone from the Mores by the aide help of the Flemmings and Low countrimen which came thether with a Fleet of Ships being by stormie weather forced to put into the riuer that were sayling to the holy land whether for the furtherance of Christian religion they as then trauelled which as I suppose was about the time that the Christians won the great City of Damyate in the couÌ„trie of Palestina where those of Harlame did most valiantly defend themselues and shewd great valour as the Sword Armes as yet extant doe well bare witnes which Fleet being come thether at such time as the said king besieged the said towne of Lisbone hee vnderstanding that onely cause of comming was to imploy their forces against the Infidels and vnbeleeuing Christians friendly desired them séeing it was Gods will they should ariue there at so conuenient a time to aide him against his enemies shewing them that they might
nor yet obay him The fléet being out it sayleth backewarde and forwards along the coast and sometimes into some hauens till the Month of Aprill and about the last of that Month they enter againe into the riuer of Goa where they winter and then the soldiers are frée and euery man goeth his way without any further pay of the king Then the Viceroy maketh a certificate for the Generall of the fléete wherein he testifieth that such a Captaine by his commaundement hath béene so many Monthes in the kings seruice at sea hauing done any matter of importance it is therein set down at large and how that hee out of his owne purse hath spent and laid out much money for the seruice of his Maiestie and according to this certificate the Captaine Generall maketh certificates for euery one of his vnder Captaines and soldiers in the same sort There are likewise some Gentlemen that in winter time keepe open houshold for all soldiers that will come thether to meate whereof also they haue certificates and for all things that they doe which certificates they kéepe till they be some ten twelue or twentie and with the Viceroyes licence go therewith to Portingall asking some recompence for their seruices according to their certificates withall they must bring a certificate from the Matricola General of that their residence in India and that there hath not any deuise or subtilty béene vsed about setting downe their titles The like must they haue from all other officers receiuers and accountants both for munition and armour wherewith they serued in warre for victuails also and such like whereof many times the captaines and soldiers doe make but badde accounts and many of them are aforehande with the king which is presently registred vnder the title of him that hath committed the fault from these Officers also they must haue certificates that there is no such thing committed by them with these certificates they sayle to Portingall where there is an office of remembrances to aske their rewardes by as their qualities and seruices are or shal be rewarded but if they haue any friend in the court to speake for them by greasing their hands to procure dispatch then doe they obtaine those offices for thrée yeares as Captaynes Factors Clearkes Iudges c. and all other offices and places in India but they must serue the place themselues in person Some of them by fauour get licences to passe them away to sell them or to giue them with their daughters in mariage and then the patent for such offices are registred in the Kings Chancery and sent into India where they must be confirmed by the Viceroy These offices are alwaies giuen in reuersion after him that hath it promised before them and then the Register is searched to sée how many are before him that asketh the said places when their time is out or that they chaunce to die before they come to it or be absent as many times it happeneth then he which is next in reuersion hath the place and is ready to receyue it And this in briefe is the manner of their gouernement and policie for martiall affaires their other gouernment for iustice and equitie is as they vse it in Portingall By the table hereafter following you may sée the description of the strait streete in Goa with the dayly méeting therein which they call Leylon liuely portrayed The 30. Chapter Of the Portingalles and Mesticos their houses curtesies mariages and other customes and manners in India Goensi se quanta foro viden area pandat Plana frequens tectis splendida dives opum Vt mercem hic properet gemmis auroque nitentem Ille abducta procul vendere mancipia Congesta huc videas Ga◠〈…〉 Insulae et Eoo max◠〈…〉 Fori Goensis tabernarum mercium et mercatorum illud frequentantium aperta explicatio per â—Linschoten 〈…〉 When they haue any weddinges and are married whosoeuer they be if they haue any wealth all the friendes and neighbours come together euery man on horsebacke and hee that hath not a horse wil borrow one and are euery man very costly apparelled at the least some 50. or 100. horses little more or lesse as the person is of qualitie and so they ride altogether in good order vnto the Church with their seruantes and euery man his hatte for the Sunne the parentes and friendes in the hinder part and in y e last row the bridegroome betwéene two of them whom they call gossops after them followeth the bryde betwéen two Commeres each in their Pallamkin which is most costly made and after them followe the slaues both men and women going in troupes as if they ranne to hunt and so comming to the Church and being married according to the order vsed in the Church of Rome they are in the same order brought home again and passing through the stréets the neighbours leaning vppon Indian Carpets looke out of the windowes and throwe Rose water vpon the Bryde Bridegroome and other sweet smelling waters with Roses and Sugar Comfets or corne In the mean time their slaues play vppon Shalmes and Trumpets most pleasant and melodious to heare and comming to the house where the Bride and the Bridegroome dwel with great reuerence and curtesie bowing downe their bodies they take their leaues of all the company which are all on horsebacke about the dore And so the Bride the Bridegroome and the Commeres go vp sit with great grauitie in a window and then beginne the horsemen that led them to Church in honor of the married couple one after the other to runne a course the gossops beginning first and the rest following twice or thrice one after the other with continuall playing on Shalmes which are very common in India for that he which is of any wealth hath them of his own within his house This being ended they all passe before the window where the Bride and Bridegroome sit with a great reuerence and so passe on all sauing the Gossoppes for they go vp to the Bride and Bridegroome and bid God giue them ioy then is there some Comfets and Marchpane brought forth to drinke a cuppe of water withall and after some curteous salutations and congratulations to the 〈…〉 couple they take their leaues 〈…〉 so there remaineth with the Bride â—idegroom but three or four of their nearest friendes and kinsemen for whome there is a dinner prepared with little meate yet very costly which they passe ouer very lightly and not many wordes which done they presently bring the Bride to bed without any other ceremonies or charges wherewith the mariage is done and ended Oftentimes it chaunceth that they go to bed at y e least two houres before Sunne setting not hauing the patience to stay so long as we do in these countries When a childe is to be christened it is likewise in the same sorte led to Church with horses last of all commeth the father alone after whom followeth
liuing women burne themselues with their dead husbands what estate the Embassador of Hidaleam holdeth in Goa how he is caried in the stréets also a true description of the Canariin with his wife the manner how the Indian heathenish children are brought vp also of the soldier of Ballagate which is called Lascariin with the heathenish whore called Balliadera who is a dancer because shee is commonly vsed therevnto in any feast or open playes are ready to be hired for a small péece of mony whereof many of theÌ„ dwell in Goa with the maner of the dwellings houses of the Decaniins Canariins Corumbiins how they row in the riuers with their scutes whereby I haue placed the maner of the boats vsed by those of the Malabares in Cochin so that I shall not néede to make a seuerall Chapter of them by themselues The 40. Chapter Of the Arabians and Abexiins dwelling in India THere are many Arabians Abexiins in India The Arabians obserue Mahomets law the Abexiins some are Mahometans some christians after their manner for they are of Prester Iohns land which stretcheth behind Mosambique in Aethiopia vnto the red sea and the riuer Nilus in Egypt and by their common traffique and conference with the Moores and Mahometans there are diuers of them infected with the same sect There are many of them in India that are slaues and captiues both meÌ„ and women which are brought thether out of Aethiopia sold like other Oriental Nations the Abexiins that are christians haue on their faces 4. burnt markes in manner of a Crosse one ouer their nose in the middle of the forehead betwéene both their eyes on each of their chéekes one betwéene their eies and their eares and one vnder their neather lip downe to the chin and this is their Baptisme when they are made Christians which they vse in stead of water These Abexiins and Arabians such as are frée doe serue in al India for saylers and sea faring meÌ„ with such marchants as saile from Goa to China Iapon Bengala Mallaca Ormus and all the Oriental coast for that there they haue no other saylers nor there are no other because the Portingalles although they serue for Saylers in the Portingalles shippes that come into India and haue neuer bene other in Portingale but Saylers yet are they ashamed to liue in that order and thinke it a great discredite vnto them together with a great diminishing of their authorities estimations which they account themselues to hold in India so that they giue themselues out for maisters of shippes and by their captaines are also called Pilots and chief Botesonnes but not lower for if they should descend but one step lower it would be a great blot and blemish vnto them all their liues after which they would not indure for anie thing in the world These Abexijns and Arabians serue for small money and being hyred are verie lowlie and subiect so that often times they are beaten and smitten not as slaues but like dogs which they beare very patientlie not once speaking a word they coÌ„monlie haue their wiues and children with them in the shippe wherein they are hyred which continually stay with them what voyage soeuer they make and dresse their owne meat which is Rice sodden in water with salt fish among it The cause why the women sayle in the ship is for that in Summer and not else their shippes goe to sea wheÌ„ they alwayes haue calme water and faire weather with good windes they haue commonlie but one Portingale or two for Captaine maister and Pilote and they haue a chief Boteson which is an Arabian which they cal Mocadon and he is ruler of the Arabians Aberijns that are saylers whome he hath vnder his subiection euen as if they were his slaues or subiects This Mocadon is he that conditioneth and maketh bargaine with the owners of the ship to haue so manie saylers and he receiueth the monethlie money for their wages and accounteth with the saylers particularlie but for gouernment of the ship he hath not to doe neither troubleth himselfe therewith The shippes when they sayle vse no caske for water because there is not any throughout all India nor any made there saue onely such as come out of Portingall and vsed in the Portingall shippes but in stéed of pypes they vse a great foure cornered woodden cesterne y t staÌ„deth by the main maste at the very foote therof vpon the keele of the shippe which is verie well pitched and made fast wherein they lade as much water as they thinke will serue them for their voyage The captaine maister or Pilote Marchants and passingers haue euerie man their meat by themselues and their water in great Indian pots called Martauans whereof in y e description of Pegu I haue alreadie spoken These people are so seruiceable and willing to doe any thing that if there chanceth but a hat or any other thing to be blowen ouer or fall into the water they will presently leape cloathes and all into the sea to fetch it again for they swimme like fishes when the ships lie within the hauen or riuer and that they will all goe on land then they goe into the boate and so row to shore which done one of them roweth backe againe with the boate which he tyeth fast to the ship and swimmeth to land and when they will goe abord again if any of the saylers be vnwilling to swimme to fetch the boate they are by the Mocadon or the maister with strokes compelled to doe it but they coÌ„monlie neuer stay till it cometh so â—arre but rather striue who shall be first in the water to shew their diligence and when they doe any thing abord as hayling ropes and other things they sing answere each other very sweetlie so y t it séemeth to be very good Musick Their exercise on land is all the day to drinke and to sit in tipling houses with their wiues and children and then they goe hand in hand through the stréets réeling here and there making a great noise with singing and gaping after their manner there womeÌ„ weare breeches like the Arabians and Mahometans The 41. Chapter Of the blacke people of Mosambique which are called Caffares and of their manners and customes THe black people or Caâ—fares of the land of Mosambique and all the coast of Ethiopia and within the laÌ„d to the Cape de bona SperaÌ„za go al naked although those of Mosambique that is the women do a little couer themselues which they do by meanes of the daylie conuersation they haue with the Portingales who for Gold siluer and Iuory bones and such like doe exchange Cotton lynnen brought out of India that within the land and to the cape they vse in those countries otherwise they couer themselues with the like apparell that Adam and Eua did weare in Paradice They are all as black as pitch with curled and singed hayre both on their heads and beards
miles Northward from vs. The 53. Chapter The course and voiage of the aforesaid Franciscus Gualle out of the Hauen or Roade of Manilla to the Hauen of Macau in China with all the courses and scituations of the places SAyling out of the Hauen of Cubite lying in the Bay of Manilla wée helde our course Westward for the space of eightéene myles to the point called El Cabo de Samballes and when wée were eight miles on our way wée left the two Islandes Maribillas on the South side and sailed about a mile from them the point of Samballes aforesaid lyeth vnder fourtéene degrées and â…” being low lande at the end of the same coast of Lucon on the West side FroÌ„ the hooke or point aforesaid we ran North and North and by West for the space of fiue and thirtie miles about a mile from the coast of Lucon to the point called Cabo de Bullinao all this coast and Cape is high and Hill ground which Cape lyeth vnder sixtéene degrées and â…” From this Cape de Bullinao wée helde our course North and North and by east for fiue and fortie miles to the point called El cabo de Boiador which is the furthest lande Northward from the Island Lucon lying vnder 19. degrées The Cape de Bullinao béeing past the land maketh a great Créeke or Bough and from this Créeke the coasts runneth North to the point of Boiador béeing a land full of Cliffes and Rockes that reach into the Sea and the land of the hooke or point is high and hilly ground From the point of Boiador we helde our course West Northwest an hundred and twentie miles vntill wée came to the Island called O Ilha Branco or the white Island which is a small Island lying in the beginning of the coast and Baye of the riuer of Canton vnder two and twentie degrees hauing foure and twentie fadome browne muddie ground From the same Island Ilha Branco wee helde the aforesaide course of West Northwest for the space of sixtéene miles to the Island of Macau lying in the mouth of the riuer of Canton and maketh the riuer two mouths or entries and is a small Island about three miles great The 54. Chapter The Nauigation or course of the aforesaid Francisco Gualle out of the Hauen of Macau to new Spaine with the scituation and stretchings of the same with other notable and memorable things concerning the same voiage WHen we had prepared our selues and taken our leaues of our friends in Macau we set saile vpon the foure and twentie of Iuly holding our course Southeast and Southeast and by East beeing in the wane of the Moone for when the moone increaseth it is hard holding the course betwéene the Islands because as then the water and streames runne verie strong to the Northwest wée sayled through many narrow Channels by night hauing the depth of eight and ten fadome with soft muddie ground vntill we were about the Island Ilha Branco yet we sawe it not but by the height we knew we were past it Being beyond it we ran East southeast an hundred and fiftie miles to get aboue the sands called Os Baixos dos Pescadores and the beginning of the Islands Lequeos on the East side which Islandes are called As Ilhas Fermosas that is the faire Islandes This I vnderstood by a Chinar called Santy of Chinchon and hée said that they lie vnder 21. degrées and ¾ there it is thirtie fadome déepe although we saw them not notwithstanding by the height and depth of the water we knewe we were past them Being past the faire Islands we held our course East and East and by North for two hundred and sixtie miles vntill we were past the length of the Islands Lequeos sayling about fiftie myles from them the said Chinar told me that those Islandes called Lequeos are very many and that they haue many and verie good Hauens and that the people and inhabitants thereof haue their faces and bodies painted like the Bysayas of the Islands of Lucon or Philippinas and are apparelled like the Bysayas and that there also are mines of gold He said likewise that they did often come with small shippes and Barkes ladeâ—â— with Buckes and Hartes bides and with gold in graines or verie small pieces to traffique with them of the coast of China which he assured me to be most true saying that he had béene nine times in the small Island bringing of the same wares with him to China which I beléeued to be true for that afterward I enquired thereof in Macau and vpon the coast of China and found that he said true The furthest or vttermost of these Islands both Northward and Eastward lie vnder 29. degrées Béeing past these Islands then you come to the Islandes of Iapon whereof the first lying West and South is the Island of Firando where the Portingales vse to trafficke they are in length altogether a hundred and thirty miles and the furthest Eastward lyeth vnder two and thirty degrées we ran still East and East and by North vntil we were past the said a hundred and thirty miles All this information I had of the aforesaid Chinar as also that there I should sée some mynes of Brimstone or fiery Hils being seuenty miles beyond them thirty miles further I should finde foure Islands lying together which I likewise found as hee had tolde mee For that being in Iapon hee said hee had there séene certaine men of a very small stature with great roules of Linnen cloth about their heads y t brought gold in small péeces and some white Cangas of Algodon which are péeces of Cotton Linnen so called by the Chinars as also salt fish the Spanish Atun or Haberdine which hee said came out of other Islandes Eastward from Iapon and by y e tokens and markes he shewed me I gessed whereabout those Islands should bee and found them not farre from whence hée said they lay hee said likewise that all the Islands of Iapon haue good hauens and Channels being a country full of Rice Corne Fish and Flesh and that they are an indifferent and reasonable people to Trafficke with and that there they haue much siluer Running thus East and East and by North about three hundred miles from Iapon we found a very hollow water with the streame running out of the North and Northwest with a ful and very broad sea without any hinderance or trouble in the way that we past and what winde soeuer blewe the Sea continued all in one sort with the same hollow water and streame vntill we had past y e seuen hundred miles about two hundred myles from the coast and land of newe Spaigne where wee began to lose the said hollow sea and stream whereby I most assuredly thinke and beleeue that there you shall find a Channell or straight passage betwéene the Firme land and new Spaigne and the Countries of Asia and Tartaria Likewise all this way from the aforesayed seuen hundred miles we found